Category Archives: Teachers’ Resources

KNAT prediction Series standard 8 exams with Marking Schemes KCPE Exams

KNAT CLASS 8 EXAMS 2021-2022 WITH MARKING SCHEMES.

ENGLISH FREE KNAT CLASS 8 EXAMS 2021-2022

KISWAHILI FREE KNAT CLASS 8 EXAMS 2021-2022

MATHS FREE KNAT CLASS 8 EXAMS 2021-2022

SCIENCE FREE KNAT CLASS 8 EXAMS 2021-2022

SOCIAL/ RE FREE KNAT CLASS 8 EXAMS 2021-2022

FREE KNAT CLASS 8 EXAMS 2021-2022 MARKING SCHEMES

ALSO DOWNLOAD;

CLASS 8 KCPE REVISION PAPERS; FREE QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS DOWNLOADS

Free KCPE past papers, class 8 exams and revision materials

Class 8 free notes and exams (KCPE)

Class 8 free latest schemes of work downloads

Schemes of work class 5, 6, 7, and 8 term 1 to 3

Targeter series class 8 exams 2021

Targeter series class 8 exams 2021-2022

Targeter series 2 class 8 exams 2021

Class 8 Targeter, Jesma free exams with marking schemes

Jesma exams 2021 class 8 pdf

Mentor Series Exams with Marking Schemes (Class 8 KCPE Revision Exams)

Meru University Course List, Fees, Requirements, How to Apply

Meru University Course List, Fees, Requirements, How to Apply

S/NO PROGRAMME AS AT DECEMBER 19, 2022
SCHOOL OF AGRICULTURE AND FOOD SCIENCE
1 BSc. Food Science and Nutrition
2 BSc. Food Science and Technology
3 BSc. Horticulture
4 BSc. Agribusiness Management
5 BSc. Agricultural Education and Extension
6 BSc. Agriculture
7 BSc. Animal Health and Production
8 BSc. Food Science and Management
9 BSc. Crop protection
10 BSc. Hospitality and Tourism
11 MSc. Food Science and Technology
12 MSc. Horticulture
13 Master of Science in Agriculture
14 PhD. Agricultural Science
15 PhD. Food Science
SCHOOL OF BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS
16 Bachelor of Commerce
17 Bachelor of Procurement and Logistics Management
18 Bachelor of Business Administration
19 Bachelor of Cooperative Management
20 BSc. Economics
21 Bachelor of Science in Finance
22 Bachelor of Science in Human Resource Management
23 BSc. Applied Accounting
24 BSc. Economics and Statistics
25 Master of Business Administration
26 MSc. Entrepreneurship
27 Master of Science in Finance
28 Master of Science in Supply Chain Management
29 Online Master of Business Administration
30 PhD. Business Management
SCHOOL OF COMPUTING AND INFORMATICS
31 Bachelor of Business Information Technology
32 BSc. Computer Science
33 BSc. Computer Technology
34 BSc. Information Technology
35 BSc. Computer Security and Forensics
36 BSc. Information Science
37 Bachelor of Science in Data Science
38 Bachelor of Communication and Journalism
39 MSc. Computer Science
40 Master of Science in Data Science
41 Master of Science in Information Technology
42 PhD. Computer Science
SCHOOL OF ENGINEERING AND ARCHITECTURE
43 BTech. Civil Engineering
44 BTech. Electrical and Electronic Engineering
45 BTech. Mechanical Engineering
46 BSc. Architectural Studies/Bachelor of Architecture
47 BSc. Sanitation and Waste Management
48 Master of Science in Sanitation
49 PhD Sanitation and Waste Management
SCHOOL OF EDUCATION
50 BEd. Arts
51 BEd. Science
52 Bachelor of Education Technology in Mechanical Engineering
53  Bachelor of Education Technology in Civil Engineering
54  Bachelor of Education Technology in Electrical and Electronics Engineering
55 Post Graduate Diploma in Education
56 MEd. Management and Leadership
57 MEd. Planning and Economics
58 PhD in Education
SCHOOL OF HEALTH SCIENCES
59 BSc. Public Health
60 BSc. Clinical Medicine and Community Health
61 BSc. Community Health and Development
62 BSc. Health Records and Information Management
63 BSc. Medical laboratory Sciences
64 BSc. Medical Microbiology
65 BSc. Human Nutrition and Dietetics
66 MSc. Medical Education
67 MSc. Public Health
68 MSc. Epidemiology
69 PhD. Epidemiology
70 PhD. Molecular Medicine
71 PhD in Public health
SCHOOL OF NURSING
72 BSc. Nursing
73 BSc. Health Systems Management
74 BSc. Midwifery
75 MSc. Nursing
SCHOOL OF PURE AND APPLIED SCIENCES
76  Bachelor of Science (Physics)
77 Bachelor of Science (Chemistry)
78 Bachelor of Science (Zoology)
79 Bachelor of Science (Botany)
80 BSc. Mathematics
81 Bachelor of Science (Mathematics and Physics)
82 Bachelor of Science in Biotechnology
83 BSc. Actuarial Science
84 BSc. Mathematics and Computer Science
85 BSc. Physical Science and Biological Science
86 BSc. Statistics
87 BSc. Environmental Science and Resource Management
88 Bachelor of Science in Biochemistry
89 Postgraduate Diploma in Applied Mathematics
90 Postgraduate Diploma in Applied Statistics
91 Postgraduate Diploma in Pure Mathematics
92 MSc. Applied Mathematics
93 MSc. Applied Statistics
94 MSc. Chemistry
95 MSc. Physics
96 MSc. Environmental Science and Natural Resource Management
97 MSc. Entomology
98 MSc. Molecular Biology
99 Master of Science in Pure Mathematics
100 PhD. Entomology
101 PhD. Mathematics
DIPLOMAS
1 Diploma in Electrical Engineering
2 Diploma in Mechatronic Technology
3 Diploma in Automotive Engineering

5

Diploma in Mechanical Production Technician
6 Diploma in Building Technician
7 Diploma in Construction Management
8 Diploma in Business Management
9 Diploma in Supply Chain Management
10 Diploma in Project Management
11 Diploma in Human Resource Management
12 Diploma in Marketing
13 Diploma in Social Work and Community Development
14 Diploma in Information Communication Technician
15 Diploma in Agriculture
16 Diploma in Agricultural Extension
17 Diploma in Horticultural Production
18 Diploma in Agripreneurship
19 Diploma in Information Science
20 Diploma in Information Communication Technology
21 Diploma in Catering and Accommodation
22 Diploma in Water and Sanitation Engineering
23 Diploma in Civil Engineering
24 Diploma in Nutrition and Dietetics
25 Diploma in Fashion Design and Clothing Technology
26 Diploma in Welding and Fabrication
27 Diploma in Mechanical Engineering (Plant Option)
28 Diploma in Mechanical Engineering (Construction Plant)
29 Diploma in Mechanical Engineering (Construction Plant)
30 Diploma in Analytical Chemistry
31 Diploma in Applied Biology
32 Diploma in Baking Technology
33 Diploma in Food and Beverage Sales Management
34 Diploma in Environmental Science and Technology
35 Diploma in Sales and Marketing

 

Agriculture Grade 6 CBC Free Schemes of Work

MTP AGRICULTURE ACTIVITIES.

GRADE SIX  SCHEMES OF WORK

School                                               Teacher’s Name                                         Term                                                          Year

3  
Wk Ls n Strand/Theme Sub strand Specific learning outcomes Key inquiry Questions Learning experiences Learning Resources Assessment methods Ref l
1 1 GARDENING PRACTICES Identifying legumes By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a.       identify the various variety of legumes

b.      watch a video clip of different legumes

c.       desire to carry out organic gardening of legumes

What is organic gardening?

2. How can we grow legumes using cultural practices?

In groups, learners brainstorm and share experiences on gardening practices for legumes.

Individual learners to share information accessed through online sharing, live presentation or printed information.

Organic manures, gardening tools and equipment, organic mulch materials, video clips on organic farming

practices, and assorted legume seeds.

MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 114-115

Project journal on growing of legume crops.

□ Graded oral assessment.

 
            MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.73-74

 
  2   Meaning of

organic

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a.       explain the meaning of organic gardening of legumes

b.      watch a video clip on organic gardening practices

c.       desire to carry out organic gardening of legumes

What is

organic

In pairs, learners share their understanding of the Organic manures,

gardening tools and

Project

journal on

 
  gardening gardening? meaning of organic equipment, organic growing of
    2. How can gardening of legumes mulch materials, video legume
    we grow (growing legume clips on organic crops.
    legumes crops without use of farming □ Graded
    using

cultural practices?

agrochemicals). practices, and assorted

legume seeds.

MTP AGRIC TG Grd.

oral assessment.
        6 Pg. 115-116  
        MTP AGRIC  
Learners Bk. Grd. 6
Pg.75

 

  3   Meaning of organic gardening By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a.       explain the meaning of organic gardening of legumes

b.      watch a video clip on organic gardening practices

c.       desire to carry out organic gardening of legumes

What is organic gardening?

2. How can we grow legumes using cultural practices?

 In pairs, learners share their understanding of the meaning of organic gardening of legumes (growing legume

crops without use of agrochemicals).

Organic manures, gardening tools and equipment, organic mulch materials, video clips on organic farming

practices, and assorted legume seeds.

MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 115-116

Project journal on growing of legume crops.

Graded oral assessment.

 
        MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.75

 
2 1   Exploring organic gardening practices By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a.       find information on organic gardening using digital resources,

b.      explain how legumes are grown using cultural practices

c.       develop curiosity in carrying out organic gardening of legumes

What is organic gardening?

2. How can we grow legumes using cultural practices?

In groups, learners brainstorm and share experiences on gardening practices for legumes.

Individual learners to share information accessed through online sharing, live presentation or printed information.

Organic manures, gardening tools and equipment, organic mulch materials, video clips on organic farming

practices, and assorted legume seeds.

MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 116-117

Project journal on growing of legume crops.

Graded oral assessment.

 
          MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.76

 
  2   Exploring

organic

By the end of the lesson, the

learner should be able to:

a.       find information on organic gardening using digital resources,

b.      explain how legumes are grown using cultural practices

c.       develop curiosity in carrying out organic gardening of legumes

What is

organic

 In groups, learners brainstorm and share Organic manures,

gardening tools and

Project

journal on

 
  gardening gardening? experiences on gardening equipment, organic growing of
  practices 2. How can practices for legumes. mulch materials, video legume
    we grow   clips on organic crops.
    legumes

using cultural practices?

Individual learners to share information accessed through online sharing, live presentation or printed information. farming

practices, and assorted legume seeds.

MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 116-117

Graded

oral assessment.

 

              MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.76

   
  3   Establishing a legume crop By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a.       establish a legume crop in an appropriate site using organic manure, take care of a growing legume crop using appropriate field practices,

b.      identify a suitable legume crop to be grown

c.       develop curiosity in carrying out organic gardening of legumes

What is organic gardening?

2. How can we grow legumes using cultural practices?

In groups, learners brainstorm and share experiences on gardening practices for legumes.

Individual learners to share information accessed through online sharing, live presentation or printed information.

Organic manures, gardening tools and equipment, organic mulch materials, video clips on organic farming

practices, and assorted legume seeds.

MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 118

Project journal on growing of legume crops.

Graded oral assessment.

 
        MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.77

 
3 1   Selecting

legume seeds for planting

By the end of the lesson, the

learner should be able to:

a.       identify a suitable legume crop to be grown

b.      Select suitable seeds for sowing

c.       develop curiosity in carrying out organic gardening of legumes

What is

organic gardening?

2. How can we grow legumes using cultural practices?

In groups, learners brainstorm and share experiences on gardening practices for legumes.

.

Individual learners to share information accessed through online sharing, live presentation or printed information.

Organic manures,

gardening tools and equipment, organic mulch materials, video clips on organic farming

practices, and assorted legume seeds.

MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 119

Project

journal on growing of legume crops.

Graded oral assessment.

 
          MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.77

 
  2   Preparing a

seedbed

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a.       identify a suitable site for the seedbed

b.      prepare a seedbed for sowing the seeds of legume crop

What is

organic

Learners watch video clips on how to prepare Organic manures,

gardening tools and

Project

journal on

 
    gardening? selected site and sow equipment, organic growing of
    2. How can legume seeds using mulch materials, video legume
    we grow organic manure. The clips on organic crops.
    legumes seedbed could be in farming  Graded
    using containers or appropriate practices, and assorted oral
    cultural

practices?

ground sites. Learners to legume seeds. assessment.

 

        c. develop curiosity in carrying out organic gardening of legumes   visit organic farms and institutions in the locality to learn more on

organic farming practices

 

In groups, learners prepare a suitable site and

plant legumes.

MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 119-120

 

MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.78-79

   
  3   Sowing

legume seeds

By the end of the lesson, the

learner should be able to:

a.       list different methods of sowing seeds on a seedbed

b.      sow legume crops seeds on the seedbed prepared

c.       develop curiosity in carrying out organic gardening of legumes

What is

organic gardening?

2. How can we grow legumes using cultural practices?

In groups, learners brainstorm and share experiences on gardening practices for legumes.

Individual learners to share information accessed through online sharing, live presentation or printed information.

Organic manures,

gardening tools and equipment, organic mulch materials, video clips on organic farming

practices, and assorted legume seeds.

MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 120-121

Project

journal on growing of legume crops.

Graded oral assessment.

 
        MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.79-81

 
4 1   Caring for growing legumes By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a.       use appropriate tools and equipment in growing legume crop,

b.      explain different ways of caring for growing legumes

c.       develop curiosity in carrying out organic gardening of legumes

What is organic gardening?

2. How can we grow legumes using cultural practices?

In groups, learners take care of the growing legume crops using cultural practices (mulching, watering, thinning, gapping, uprooting weeds, removing pests and diseases plants) with appropriate tools and Organic manures, gardening tools and equipment, organic mulch materials, video clips on organic farming

practices, and assorted legume seeds.

MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 123-124

Project journal on growing of legume crops.

Graded oral assessment.

 
          MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.81-83

 
  2   Determining

the right

By the end of the lesson, the

learner should be able to:

What is

organic

□ Learners to discuss appropriate stages of Organic manures,

gardening tools and

Project

journal on

 
  stage of   gardening? harvesting legume crop. In equipment, organic growing of
  harvesting   2. How can groups, learners harvest mulch materials, video legume

 

      legume crops a.       determine appropriate stage of harvesting legume crops,

b.      name stages of harvesting legume crops

c.       develop curiosity in carrying out organic gardening of legumes

we grow legumes using cultural practices? legume crop appropriately for consumption. clips on organic farming

practices, and assorted legume seeds.

MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 128-129

 

MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.86-88

crops.

Graded oral assessment.

 
  3   Harvesting legume crops By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a.       harvest legume crops appropriately to reduce wastage,

b.      name stages of harvesting legume crops

c.       develop curiosity in carrying out organic gardening of legumes

What is organic gardening?

2. How can we grow legumes using cultural practices?

□ Learners to discuss appropriate stages of harvesting legume crop. In groups, learners harvest legume crop appropriately for consumption. Organic manures, gardening tools and equipment, organic mulch materials, video clips on organic farming

practices, and assorted legume seeds.

MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 129-130

Project journal on growing of legume crops.

Graded oral assessment.

 
        MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.88-92

 
5 1   Harvesting

legume crops

By the end of the lesson, the

learner should be able to:

a.       harvest legume crops appropriately to reduce wastage,

b.      name stages of harvesting legume crops

c.       develop curiosity in carrying out organic gardening of legumes

What is

organic gardening?

2. How can we grow legumes using cultural practices?

□ Learners to discuss appropriate stages of harvesting legume crop. In groups, learners harvest legume crop appropriately for consumption. Organic manures,

gardening tools and equipment, organic mulch materials, video clips on organic farming

practices, and assorted legume seeds.

MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 129-130

Project

journal on growing of legume crops.

Graded oral assessment.

 
          MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.88-92

 

 

  2   Importance of organic gardening of legumes to our health By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a.       Demonstrate understanding of the importance of organically grown legume crops to human health.

b.      Name some diseases that can be prevent by eating legumes

c.       Appreciate the importance of legume crops

What is organic gardening?

2. How can we grow legumes using cultural practices?

□ In groups, learners brainstorm on importance of growing legume crops using cultural practices. Organic manures, gardening tools and equipment, organic mulch materials, video clips on organic farming

practices, and assorted legume seeds.

MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 131-135

Project journal on growing of legume crops.

□ Graded oral assessment.

 
        MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.92

 
  3   Benefits of organic gardening By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a.       store acquired information on organic gardening of legumes for reference,

b.      share accessed information on organic gardening with other learners,

c.       explain to the community the benefits of organic gardening

What is organic gardening?

2. How can we grow legumes using cultural practices?

□        In groups, learners brainstorm on importance of growing legume crops using cultural practices.

 

□        Learners to assist parents and guardians in the activities for growing legumes and maintaining tools

Organic manures, gardening tools and equipment, organic mulch materials, video clips on organic farming

practices, and assorted legume seeds.

MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 131-135

Project journal on growing of legume crops.

□ Graded oral assessment.

 
        MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.93-94

 
6 1 Innovative

Ornamental Gardening

Meaning of

ornamental gardening

By the end of the lesson, the

learner should be able to:

a.       explain the meaning of ornamental gardening in innovative gardening practices

b.      observe pictures of different ornamental gardening

c.       appreciate the importance of ornamental gardening

What is

Ornamental cropping?

2. Why do we practice ornamental cropping?

In groups, learners to share

their understanding of the meaning of ornamental gardening and its importance.

video clips on

ornamental gardening practices, pictures and

photos, illustrative designs on

ornamental

Project

journal on growing of legume crops.

□ Graded oral assessment.

 
            gardens, assorted  
            planting materials  

 

              MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 136-138

 

MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.100

   
  2   Observing ornamental cropping patterns By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a.       store acquired information on innovative ornamental gardening for reference,

b.      observe or watch a video clip on ornamental cropping patters

c.       appreciate the importance of ornamental gardening

What is Ornamental cropping?

2. Why do we practice ornamental cropping?

□ Learners watch or observe stimulus materials such as video clips, pictures, photograph, and illustrations on ornamental cropping designs showing various crops. video clips on

ornamental gardening practices, pictures and

photos, illustrative designs on ornamental gardens, assorted planting materials MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 139

Project journal on growing of legume crops.

□ Graded oral assessment.

 
        MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.101-102

 
  3   Observing ornamental cropping patterns By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a.       store acquired information on innovative ornamental gardening for reference,

b.      observe or watch a video clip on ornamental cropping patters

c.       appreciate the importance of ornamental gardening

What is Ornamental cropping?

2. Why do we practice ornamental cropping?

□ Learners watch or observe stimulus materials such as video clips, pictures, photograph, and illustrations on ornamental cropping designs showing various crops. video clips on

ornamental gardening practices, pictures and

photos, illustrative designs on ornamental gardens, assorted planting materials MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 139

Project journal on growing of legume crops.

□ Graded oral assessment.

 
        MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.101-102

 

 

7 1   Exploring innovative ornamental gardens By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a.       find information on innovative ornamental gardening using digital resources,

b.      discuss appropriate crops for ornamental gardening

c.       appreciate the importance of ornamental gardening

What is Ornamental cropping?

2. Why do we practice ornamental cropping?

□        In pairs, learners discuss appropriate crops for ornamental gardening.

□        In groups, learners use digital devices to access information on ornamental gardening and store acquired information appropriately for reference.

video clips on

ornamental gardening practices, pictures and

photos, illustrative designs on ornamental gardens, assorted planting materials MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 139

Project journal on growing of legume crops.

□ Graded oral assessment.

 
          MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.102-103

 
  2   Exploring

innovative ornamental gardens

By the end of the lesson, the

learner should be able to:

a.       find information on innovative ornamental gardening using digital resources,

b.      discuss appropriate crops for ornamental gardening

c.       appreciate the importance of ornamental gardening

What is

Ornamental cropping?

2. Why do we practice ornamental cropping?

□        In pairs, learners discuss appropriate crops for ornamental gardening.

□        In groups, learners use digital devices to access information on ornamental gardening and store acquired information appropriately for reference.

video clips on

ornamental gardening practices, pictures and

photos, illustrative designs on ornamental gardens, assorted planting materials MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 139

Project

journal on growing of legume crops.

□ Graded oral assessment.

 
        MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.102-103

 
  3   Designing

an

By the end of the lesson, the

learner should be able to:

a. design ornamental cropping pattern in the immediate environment, grow an ornamental plant

What is

Ornamental

□ Learners to design and draft drawings on video clips on

ornamental gardening practices, pictures and

Project

journal on

 
  innovative cropping? ornamental cropping growing of
  cropping 2. Why do we pattern or innovations they legume
  pattern practice would like to implement in crops.
      the school.  

 

        using soil medium in the school,

b.      identify different cropping patterns

c.       appreciate the importance of ornamental gardening

ornamental cropping?   photos, illustrative

designs on ornamental gardens, assorted planting materials MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 140-141

 

MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.103

□ Graded oral assessment.  
8 1   Establishing ornamental plants in soil media By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a.       grow an ornamental plant using soil medium in the school,

b.      differentiate between the soilless and soil media for ornamental gardening

c.       appreciate the importance of ornamental gardening

What is Ornamental cropping?

2. Why do we practice ornamental cropping?

□        Learners to grow ornamental plants of their choice using soil medium in the school.

 

□        Learners to collaborate with parents and guardians to introduce and practice ornamental gardening at home in both soil and soilless media.

video clips on

ornamental gardening practices, pictures and

photos, illustrative designs on ornamental gardens, assorted planting materials MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 141-142

 

MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.104-105

Project journal on growing of legume crops.

□ Graded oral assessment.

 
  2   Establishing

ornamental plants in soilless media

By the end of the lesson, the

learner should be able to:

a.       grow an ornamental plant using soilless medium in the school,

b.      differentiate between the soilless and soil media for ornamental gardening

c.       appreciate the importance of ornamental gardening

What is

Ornamental cropping?

2. Why do we practice ornamental cropping?

□        Learners to grow ornamental plants of their choice using soilless medium (planting in container with pebbles or coco peat or peat moss among other support medium

 

□        Learners to collaborate with parents and guardians

video clips on

ornamental gardening practices, pictures and

photos, illustrative designs on ornamental gardens, assorted planting materials

Project

journal on growing of legume crops.

□ Graded oral assessment.

 

 

            to introduce and practice ornamental gardening at home in both soil and soilless media. MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 143

 

MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.106

   
  3   Preparing a compost tea By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a.       identify ways of preparing compost

b.      prepare a compost tea

c.       appreciate the importance of ornamental gardening

What is Ornamental cropping?

2. Why do we practice ornamental cropping?

□ Individual learners to share information accessed through online sharing, live presentation and printed materials. Learners to engage their parents and guardians on accessing and sharing information on ornamental gardening using digital devices. learners to prepare compost tea video clips on

ornamental gardening practices, pictures and photos, illustrative designs on ornamental gardens, assorted planting materials MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 143

 

MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.107-109

Project journal on growing of legume crops.

□ Graded oral assessment.

 
9 1   Importance

of innovative ornamental cropping

By the end of the lesson, the

learner should be able to:

a.       Value the role of ornamental cropping as an innovative gardening practice.

b.      Identify different ornamental cropping types

c.       share accessed information on innovative ornamental gardening with other learners,

What is

Ornamental cropping?

2. Why do we practice ornamental cropping?

□ Individual learners to share information accessed through online sharing, live presentation and printed materials. Learners to engage their parents and guardians on accessing and sharing information on ornamental gardening using digital devices.

Learners to discuss the importance of ornamental cropping

video clips on

ornamental gardening practices, pictures and photos, illustrative designs on ornamental gardens, assorted planting materials MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 144-145

 

MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.109-111

Project

journal on growing of legume crops.

□ Graded oral assessment.

 

 

  2   Moisture bed gardening By the end of the Sub Strand the learner should be able to;

a.       explain the use of moisture beds for water conservation,

b.      Observe pictures or watch video clip of different moisture gardens

c.       Develop curiosity in making moisture gardens

What are Moisture beds?

2.  How can we use moisture beds to grow crops?

3.  Why do we prepare moisture beds?

Learners brainstorm and share their understanding of moisture bed and how it is used to grow crops.

□        Learners to watch video clips or other relevant stimulus material on preparation of a moisture bed.

□        In groups, learners prepare a moisture bed for growing a crop of their choice.

□        Learners to collaborate with parents and guardians to establish moisture beds for

Gardening tools and equipment, planting materials such as arrowroots, video clips on preparation of moisture beds, photographs on crops grown on moisture beds,

MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 147

 

MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.112

□        Oral assessment.

□        Graded observation on

learner project activities and participation levels

 
  3   How to prepare a sunken moisture bed By the end of the Sub

Strand the learner should be able to;

a.       prepare a sunken moisture bed for growing a selected crop,

b.      identify crops grown on moisture beds

c.       Develop curiosity in making moisture gardens

What are

Moisture beds?

2.  How can we use moisture beds to grow crops?

3.  Why do we prepare moisture beds?

Learners brainstorm and

share their understanding of moisture bed and how it is used to grow crops.

□        Learners to watch video clips or other relevant stimulus material on preparation of a moisture bed.

□        In groups, learners prepare a moisture bed for growing a crop of their choice.

□        Learners to collaborate with parents and guardians to establish moisture beds for

Gardening tools and

equipment, planting materials such as arrowroots, video clips on preparation of moisture beds, photographs on crops grown on moisture beds,

MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 148-149

 

MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.112-114

□        Oral assessment.

□        Graded observation on

learner project activities and participation levels

 
      Raised moisture beds By the end of the Sub

Strand the learner should be able to;

a. prepare a raised moisture bed for growing a selected crop,

What are

Moisture beds?

2. How can we use moisture beds to grow crops?

Learners brainstorm and

share their understanding of moisture bed and how it is used to grow crops.

□ Learners to watch video clips or other relevant

Gardening tools and

equipment, planting materials such as arrowroots, video clips on preparation of moisture beds,

□        Oral assessment.

□        Graded observation on

 

 

        b.      identify crops grown on moisture beds

c.       Develop curiosity in making moisture gardens

3. Why do we prepare moisture beds? stimulus material on preparation of a moisture bed.

In groups, learners prepare a moisture bed for growing a crop of their choice.

Learners to collaborate with parents and guardians to establish moisture beds for

photographs on crops grown on moisture beds,

MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 150-151

 

MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.115-119

learner project activities and participation levels  
      Preparing a

moisture bed

By the end of the Sub Strand the learner should be able to;

a.       prepare a moisture bed for growing a selected crop,

b.      identify ways of caring for different moisture beds

c.       Develop curiosity in making moisture gardens

What are Moisture beds?

2.  How can we use moisture beds to grow crops?

3.  Why do we prepare moisture beds?

Learners brainstorm and share their understanding of moisture bed and how it is used to grow crops.

Learners to watch video clips or other relevant stimulus material on preparation of a moisture bed.

In groups, learners prepare a moisture bed for growing a crop of their choice.

Learners to collaborate with parents and guardians to establish moisture beds for

Gardening tools and equipment, planting materials such as arrowroots, video clips on preparation of moisture beds, photographs on crops grown on moisture beds,

MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 150-155

 

MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.119-121

□        Oral assessment.

□        Graded observation on

learner project activities and participation levels

 
      Importance

of moisture bed cropping

By the end of the Sub Strand the learner should be able to;

a.       Appreciate importance of moisture beds in growing crops

b.      establish a crop on a moisture bed for water conservation,

c.       identify seeds suitable for different types of moisture beds

What are Moisture beds?

2.  How can we use moisture beds to grow crops?

3.  Why do we prepare moisture beds?

Learners brainstorm and share their understanding of moisture bed and how it is used to grow crops.

□        Learners to watch video clips or other relevant stimulus material on preparation of a moisture bed.

□        In groups, learners prepare a moisture bed for

Gardening tools and equipment, planting materials such as arrowroots, video clips on preparation of moisture beds, photographs on crops grown on moisture beds,

MTP AGRIC TG Grd. 6 Pg. 150-155

□        Oral assessment.

□        Graded observation on

learner project activities and participation levels

 
                 

 

            growing a crop of their choice.

□ Learners to collaborate with parents and guardians to establish moisture beds for

MTP AGRIC

Learners Bk. Grd. 6 Pg.122-124

   

 

CRE Form Four Best Notes {All Topics Covered}

UNIT 1:                      WORK.

 

  1. Why do you think a man should work?
  2. A man works because it is a command from God to all men.
  3. A man should work to improve his environment
  • A man works to sustain his family
  1. A man may work for the community at large.
  2. A man works to earn his own living – e.g food, clothing and shelter
  3. A man works to get money to pay expenses for good living for example one may buy a radio, T.V. car etc.
  • A man must work to achieve his own personal development.

 

  1. What are the accepted rights of employment?
  2. They have a right to take their profits abroad if they are foreign
  3. It is their right to be licenced by the government to operate a business
  • It is the right of the employers to get a fair day’s work from the
  1. It is the employer’s right to be protected from fair competition
  2. It is the right of the employer to join associations of their own choice.
  3. It is the employers right to enjoy their profits
  • It is the right of the employer not to be overtaxed.

 

  1. Why is it necessary for a Christian to work?
  2. Through work a Christian can serve his community
  3. It is necessary for a Christian to work because God blesses the hardworking Ref. Psalms 128:1
  • Christians who work can share their incomes with the less fortunate members of the community
  1. Christians work because work was instituted by God during creation. God commanded human beings to work – Genesis 1:28.
  2. To Christians work is a way of furthering the creation activity of God.
  3. In work a Christian provides for life requirements
  • Christians work because Paul said that those who do not work should not eat.
  • Through work Christians avoid idleness which leads to sin.
  1. Through work Christians avoid parasitic life. Paul worked as a tent maker to avoid depending on fellow Christians
  2. Christians work to protect or take care of God’s creation.
  3. Christians follow Jesus’ example who was a carpenter before he started his preaching ministry.

 

  1. How has modern Technology and economy changed the Traditional African attitude to work?
  2. Today there is change of roles. Duties which were done by men only are being done by men only are being done by women and also duties which were done by women only are also being done by men.
  3. Ones talents are not fully utilised because of job specialization.
  • In modern society some people do not want to work but they want to earn their living through begging, stealing and playing games like gambling.
  1. Today some people use machines to work for them as opposed to the idea that everyone was a worker in Traditional African societies.
  2. In traditional African communities, the work one did was determined by age, sex and inheritance but today the choice of the occupation one does is determined by the education he has received.
  3. In traditional African communities there was co-operation in work but in modern societies there is steep competition which may lead to rivalry.
  • Today people view work in terms of career which one gets into after formal education and training while in Traditional African communities work was part and parcel of entire life process. Work began at youthful stage upto age till one was too old to work.
  • Unemployment was unheard of in traditional African communities because everyone was employed but today it is a common problem.
  1. Today some people are doing unacceptable jobs like prostitution just to earn a living.
  2. Today job inheritance is rare but in traditional African communities many jobs were inherited from parents e.g blacksmith, craftsmanship etc.
  3. In modern society work is meant to benefit an individual whilst an in traditional African communities work benefited the entire community.

 

  1. Give reasons why Christians condemn idlers.
  2. David committed adultery because of idleness – 2 Samuel 5:15
  3. Idleness brings deep sleep and hunger – Proverbs 19: 15
  • Paul condemns it and advises the young widows to marry to avoid idleness
  1. Idleness hinders community development
  2. Idleness leads to failure to glorify God as work glorifies God
  3. Jesus condemned idleness in the parable of the talents
  • Work distinguishes man from animals but idleness lowers the dignity of man
  • Idleness causes anti social activities like stealing, rape, murder etc.
  1. Idleness is a health hazard
  2. Idleness leads to poverty
  3. Idleness di-humanises individuals thus retarding human development
  • Idleness retards the God given talents.

 

  1. What are the disadvantages of industrial strikes?
  2. It leads to loss of life where violence is used.
  3. It creates animosity between the management and the workers
  • It leads to loss of earnings for the employees
  1. It spoils relationship between employer and employees
  2. It may result to destruction of property.
  3. It can result to loss of employment to the employees
  • It can lead to imprisonment to the strike participants if they are found guilty.
  • It can lead to suffering to the families or dependants of the sacked workers or during the period when the workers are not working.
  1. May lead to workers loosing all their terminal benefits
  2. It is very difficult for the workers to get employed elsewhere especially when there is serious unemployment in the country.

 

  1. Explain the qualities of a good employee.
  2. A good employee is one who works without or if need be with minimal supervision.
  3. A good employee is faithful to the employer
  • A good employee has great respect to his work
  1. A good employee is very punctual in his work.
  2. A good employee if he has to quit his job he does so with proper understanding between himself and the employer.
  3. A good employee works diligently
  • A good employee is honest and trustworthy towards his employer.

 

  1. Outline problems that face self-employed people today.
  2. Lack of sufficient capital to start off their businesses
  3. They rarely get soft loans to boost their businesses.
  • They face problems of theft and fire outbreaks like the ones that destroyed Kikomba market and Garissa lodge.
  1. Lack of good markets for their products
  2. Most of them have no administration skills
  3. Steep competition from other similar but established businesses.
  • Many a times they are misadvised by their friends
  • Problems resulting from supporting big family.

 

  1. State ways in which the church can promote self-employment in modern society.
  2. Help Christians in getting presses for their businesses.
  3. Opening many more training institutes to train more masons, carpenters, electricians, dress and cloth makers.
  • Through organising communal self-help projects
  1. Giving guidance and counselling on the importance of work
  2. Providing in-service courses for the self-employed to boost their productivity
  3. Cultivating a sense of responsibility in work
  • Assisting them with the initial equipment’s like tool boxes, sewing machines etc.
  • Getting for them market to sell their end products.

 

  1. Discuss factors causing child labour in our society.
  2. Destitution or orphanage
  3. Teenage pregnancies
  • Calamities which are either natural or political which destabilizes community
  1. Juvenile delinquency – criminology among the youth
  2. Poverty
  3. Irresponsible parenthood – for example drunkenness or over strict or harsh.
  • Search for cheap labour
  • High cost of education leading to school drop-out
  1. Insecurity or fear incase of wife fearing the husband – the wife may run away with the children who may end up seeking for employment to sustain themselves.

 

  1. What should the government of Kenya do to stop child-labour?
  2. The government should punish those parents who allow child labour.
  3. The government should teach the Kenyan folk that children are entitled to education
  • Government should punish those who employ children.
  1. The government should let everybody know that children are the future leaders.
  2. Everybody should be made aware by the government that employing children is a great harm to the children psychologically
  3. It should be governments policy that every child is allowed to grow to maturity and be made to persue a career of their choice.

 

  1. What effects can result from place of work if the workers are incited by fellow workers or malicious people?
  2. It can cause conflicts/ bad blood between employer and employees
  3. It can cause stoppage of work which lead to stoppage of production important goods, or denial of essential services
  • It can cause workers to be unmanageable.
  1. It may force the business to close down if workers bring problems.
  2. Incitement can result to strike actions
  3. When strongly incited by malicious people workers may become destructive.

 

  1. Explain the duties and responsibilities of employees to employers.
  2. Employees should do their work diligently and efficiently.
  3. They should pray for the success of their company
  • They are obliged to show respect and loyalty to the employer
  1. They must do their work with all the honesty and integrity.
  2. They must co-operate with other workers in the company.
  3. They must take care of the employers property
  • They must work according to the terms in the contract.
  • Workers should show good will to the employer
  1. They should not take part in strikes which have unreasonable demands.

 

  1. Explain ways in which employer portrays human dignity of employees.
  2. He should not sexually harass female employees.
  3. He should be sensitive and reasonable when handling the needs of lays redundant.
  • He should not exploit his workers
  1. He should exercise justice and fairness especially when handling those retiring workers
  2. He should give his workers salary equivalent to the work done
  3. The employer should provide to workers a healthy and safe public holidays
  • The employer should motivate his workers through promotions
  • He should allow his workers to join unions of their choices like KUDHEIHA.

 

  1. Give reasons why Christians should not resort to strike action.
  2. Strike action leads to hatred, bitterness and frustration
  3. A Christian may not take part in any strike because it can cause loss of life which is against God’s commandment – thou shall not kill.
  • Strike action is a waste of time as well as scarce resources.
  1. A Christian may not take part in a strike action because it could lead to destruction of property.

 

  1. What role can the state in improving poor relationship between employer and employees?
  2. The state can advise the employer to involve the employees in share holding of the business.
  3. The state can give guidance and counselling to both parties to improve their relationship.
  • The state can allow trade unions in trying to improve relationship between employer and employees.
  1. The state can call the two parties to discuss their problems openly and come out with workable solutions which can improve their relationship.
  2. The state can allow collective bargaining in the at the Association of employers meets with the union of employees for collective discussions. This would improve the relationship between employers and employees quite a great deal.

 

  1. How can Christians show their faith in God by working?
  2. By working hard
  3. By glorifying in the money one works for
  • By valuing work more that he money one works for
  1. By not being late to attend to his work
  2. By showing extra commitment in work
  3. By praying God before work begins.

 

  1. Explain what would be the Christian teaching towards work:
  2. All Christians must work since Christ worked as a carpenter and a preacher
  3. All Christians must work because it is God ordained
  • It is only through work that Christians can conquer and subdue the earth
  1. Christians must work because the Bible condemns laziness
  2. It is only through work that a Christian can meet the needs of his family
  3. All Christians must work because God is still working i.e he did not stop working after creation.
  • Christians must work to be healthy in the bodies
  • Through work Christians socialize.

 

  1. Explain Jesus’ teaching on work
  2. Jesus said he was working because his heavenly father was also working
  3. Jesus worked manually as a carpenter before he began his preaching work
  • Jesus worked tirelessly as an itinerant preacher. He preached form place to place without any means of transport
  1. Jesus performed signs and wonders
  2. Jesus taught his disciples to follow him and he would make them fishers of men.
  3. When accused of mixing with great sinners like tax-collectors he defended himself by saying that a doctor goes for the sick, so he associated with sinners so as to convert them.
  4. What factors would a Christian consider while choosing a career.
  5. A Christian would consider a career that he likes most eg. Some people qualify to join University to do super degrees like medicine but they opt to join Bible institutes to do theology with an aim of becoming pastors
  6. A Christian should pray to God to get His direction
  • Availability of job chances would be a determining factors
  1. In choosing a career one would also consider his physical abilities. A blind man cannot choose to be a driver.
  2. In choosing a career one considers the services to the community. He should consider a career which would give more service to his community.
  3. Finally a Christian should seek pieces of advise form fellow Christians.

 

  1. Explain the secular attitudes towards work.

Secular attitudes to work are the non-edigious attitudes towards work:

  1. Today people work to meet their basic needs and other needs like buying radios, TVs, Cars and houses in urban areas.
  2. Today people work in big offices where there are many people each doing a specialised job.
  • Today we have competition in work as exemplified by the stiff competition among schools in KCPE and KCSE.
  1. Today many people hate manual work due to influence of Western Education
  2. Today the modern attitude towards work is individualistic as it is opposed to communal kind of work done in Traditional African community.
  3. Today work is determined by qualifications rather than age and sex. Today we have women working as pilots and men working as cooks in big hotels and schools.
  • Today there may be no job satisfaction because one works like a machine.

 

  1. State reasons why manual work is not liked by some people in Kenya today.
  2. Many people do not like manual work because it is tiresome
  3. Other people do not like manual work because it is lowly paid
  • Others dislike manual work because it makes one dirty
  1. Modern education is preparing people to white-colar jobs to the neglect of manual work.
  2. Others do not like manual work because it was a method used by colonial masters and also in schools to punish the disobedient people
  3. Manual work is seen by many people as work meant for those who are not educated.

 

  1. Explain in details why Africans worked:
  2. An African person worked to attain self-fulfillment. Any African enjoyed their work which was mostly manual
  3. Some Africans worked to perfect their talents and skills eg. Blacksmith.
  • An African worked to provide the basic needs of the family, namely food, shelter and clothing.
  1. An African worked because everybody was a worker, failing to work was failing in ones responsibilities.
  2. In work an African expected to tap Gods blessings.
  3. In many a time work in African society was done communally hence there was no excuse for not working.
  • In A.T.S. the lazy people were mocked and ridiculed.

 

  1. Explain Paul’s teaching on work:
  2. Paul taught Christians to work as he worked as a tentmaker. In this he taught them to work to avoid human parasiticism
  3. Paul taught through work a Christian glorifies God.
  • Paul taught the Thessalonians church that if one does not work he should not eat.
  1. Paul advised thieves not to steal but instead they should work.
  2. Paul advised Christians to work to get food to eat and to prevent poverty from coming to them.
  3. Paul advised that the able should work to help the helpless members of the community.
  • Paul taught Christians to work just like the early church which worked together.

 

  1. Under what conditions can we justify an industrial strike.
  2. Workers are justified to strike when they are sure that they will get whatever they are asking for.
  3. A strike is justifiable when the cause of the strike is a genuine cause. e.g when workers have not been paid for several months.
  • A strike is justifiable if the strikers follow all the procedures laid down in law.
  1. A strike is justifiable when all other mean of averting a strike have been tried and failed.
  2. A strike action is justifiable if the results of the strike have more good than the evil is causes.

 

  1. What are the duties of an employee?
  2. To work faithfully for the employer i.e he should not give poor quality work if he is capable of better.
  3. He has a duty of caring for his family from his earning
  • He must guard the property entrusted to him by the employer.
  1. Must work according to his job prescription.
  2. Should never use any force in solving problems at place of work.
  3. One must be loyal to his employer
  • He must work to promote the success of the enterprise.

 

  1. State the four principles found in the Hippocratic Oath taken by all doctors.
  2. Never to administer Buthanasia
  3. To keep secrets of all patients
  • Never to assist a woman in carrying out abortion
  1. Always put the interests of patients first.

 

  1. Explain what would happen to a firm if the employer ignores his duties.
  2. The firms production will be lowered because workers are not supervised hence they do not work properly.
  3. It is obvious the workers would result to go slow
  • Chances of thefts by workers would be very high
  1. Many workers would have no morale in their work
  2. If the customers notice this scanaric, they may run away
  3. The good relationship between employer and employee is eroded.

 

 

 

 

UNIT 2: LEISURE, DRUG AND DRUG ABUSE.

 

  1. On what grounds do Christians or those opposed to cigarette smoking refuse or condemn this practice.
  2. They argue that cigarette smoking is causing destructive fire which can destroy entire forests, industrial or even homes.
  3. They argue that smoking is the chief cause of chest and respiratory diseases
  • Smoking is an expensive leisure habit
  1. They argue that smoking has been found to cause miscarriage or birth of small and unhealthy babies.
  2. They argue that smoking obviously causes bad breath and discoloured teeth.
  3. They argue that in the field of medicine there has been a recent discovery that smoking causes poor blood circulation e.g high blood.

 

  1. In detail explain the effects of alcoholism on career:
  2. Alcoholism can easily lead one to embezzle public funds which are entrusted to him
  3. Alcoholism affects ones efficiency at work. Infact it reduces significantly
  • Alcoholism may make one to absent himself from work.
  1. A lot of money is spent on drinking at the expense of the basic necessities like food shelter, clothing etc.
  2. Alcoholism affects the health of a person – rendering one ineffective at work.
  3. Alcoholism may lead to break of ones family and this adversely effects one’s performance at work.
  • Drunkards may collide with fellow workers hence affecting ones career.
  • Alcoholics may have great risks in their career especially drivers cause accidents when they drive under the influence of alcohol.

 

  1. Why are High school boys and girls easily lured into drug abuse?
  2. Today we have great advertisement in all forms of media
  3. Great desire to discover what one feels when he/she is under the influence of a certain drug
  • Lack of counselling on the part of the parents, teachers and church ministers.
  1. Pressure from other boys or girls
  2. Frustrations as a result of blocked goals of life
  3. The drugs are readily available everywhere today.

 

  1. What do you think the church can do to minimise drug abuse in our society?
  2. The church should work out modalities geared to rehabilitating the drug addicts
  3. Those who have fallen victims to drug abuse should becounselled and also the would-be drug abusers.
  • The church should approach against drug-abuse
  1. The church should provide recreational facilities which would take away people from drugs.

 

  1. State five forms of modern leisure.
  2. Drinking
  3. Reading novels and magazines for leisure
  • Watching T.V.
  1. Joining others in parties
  2. Travelling and visiting friends
  3. Playing and games
  • Gambling
  • Playing football or other games activities
  1. Taking part in painting, knitting, weaving
  2. Writing and receiving letters to and from friends and relatives
  3. Listening to radios/ cassettes.

 

  1. In your understanding of the African Traditional communities, explain the leisure activities that were undertaken by them.
  2. They conducted traditional dances e.g “Kilumi”, “Kilui” dances among the Akamba, “Kamaru” and Mucungwa” dances among the Kikuyu.
  3. During harvest seasons they held games and sports like wrestling.
  • They held beer parties in ceremonies like initiation, naming and marriage or drinking even for leisure.
  1. Spent in listening to gifted and talented story tellers
  2. As they waited for food in the evening thy discussed family matters
  3. Singing songs to entertain other people.

 

  1. Compare and contrast the Traditional African and modern understanding of leisure.
  2. In traditional African communities leisure was done in fear of the ancestors as well as God while today such a concept is not present hence today’s leisure secular.
  3. In traditional African communities people never misused leisure unlike today when we have great misuse of leisure in drug taking.
  • In African understanding of leisure it was wholly communal while today’s leisure is dominated by individualism.
  1. In traditional African communities leisure activities were determined by age and sex while in today’s society there are no boundaries. One is free to engage in any leisure activity irrespective of age and sex.
  2. In traditional African communities no money was spent in leisure activities but today leisure activities but today leisure activities are very expensive.
  3. In African traditional communities major leisure activities took place during or after the period of harvesting while today’s leisure goes on throughout; there is no time limit e.g people drink throughout.
  • In traditional African communities older members of the community advised the youth during leisure time while today youth engage themselves in the leisure activities on their own.
  • In traditional African communities story telling dominated the evenings while today the evening are dominated by radios, T.V.s and cassettes.

 

  1. What are the factors that lead people to misuse leisure?
  2. Lack of guidance and counselling especially the youth
  3. Some misuse leisure due to boredom or idleness
  • Others misuse leisure because of peer group pressure
  1. Others misuse leisure due to influence from erotic pornographic literature and films.
  2. When some people have too much money (wealth) they may be tempted to misuse leisure especially in heavy drinking.
  3. Extreme poverty may make some not to afford some leisure items like the legal beer hence end up the legal beer hence and up taking illicit drinks like “kumikumi”, “Kuruta” and Kamata.
  • Others misuse leisure due to lack of variety of good leisure activities.
  • There are others who misuse leisure due to lack of appropriate education.

 

  1. Explain five leisure activities that are income generating:
  2. Playing soccer especially for professional players
  3. Acting in drama
  • Weaving
  1. Painting
  2. Singing – those who have live performances like Kanda Bongoman, Less Wanyika, Chania Boys band, Kimangu boys band – earn a lot of money per night.
  3. Painting – some people do it for leisure but it generates good money.

 

  1. Explain how leisure can be used in the Glory of God.
  2. Through praying individually or as a group
  3. Through evangelising
  • Through joining others in Christian seminars, conferences and retreats
  1. Through singing in choir
  2. Through writing Christian magazines.
  3. Through guidance and counselling to the youth or other groups that would need help.
  • Through doing manual work in the church e.g sweeping and clearing church compound.
  • Through donating funds to the church to propagate the gospel.
  1. Reading or studying the Bible.

 

  1. Give reasons why you think alcohol as a way of spending leisure is condemned.
  2. It can cause separation or even divorce
  3. Alcohol wastes family resources
  • Alcohol leads to poor health or death
  1. Alcohol brews quarrels within the family
  2. Alcohol is causing many accidents
  3. Alcohol leads to addiction
  • Alcohol leads to loss of means of income or employment
  • Alcohol may make one to commit crimes e.g homicide.

 

 

 

  1. Explain the leisure activities that are done by the youth today.
  2. The Christian youth would spend their leisure time in worshipping
  3. The youth would participate in drama
  • The youth would visit the sick
  1. The youth spend their leisure in playing football, netball etc
  2. The youth could spend their leisure time writing letters to friends
  3. Youth spend their leisure time in choir
  • They also spend their time in charitable jobs like cleaning markets and building houses for the old and poor.
  • The youth spent their leisure time travelling for site-seeing.

 

  1. Explain reasons why people drink.
  2. Some people drink to cover their frustrations
  3. Others drink as a way of burying problems at work, home and even at the society at large.
  • Others drink to keep company
  1. The youth would drink to show to others that they are grown ups.
  2. Others are drunkards due to heredity
  3. Others drink due to addiction.

 

  1. Discuss the importance of leisure to any worker.
  2. Leisure is very important to a worker to enable him attend celebrations
  3. It is time which one uses to replace lost energy
  • Workers need leisure period to attend church to pray
  1. Leisure is important for one to socialise with other people e.gmembers day.
  2. Leisure time is important because one would use it to visit friends.
  3. During leisure one gets time to engage in his hobbies e.g gambling, golf playing etc.
  • It is time one uses to do short courses which develops ones career e.g attending evening computer classes which is common today, reading for expanding / increasing knowledge.
  • This is time used to stay with family members.

 

 

UNIT 3:    WEALTH AND MONEY.

  1. Explain how wealth was acquired in traditional African communities.
  2. Through hard work. A man could clear forests and have a big farm which made him rich after good harvest.
  3. Payment of dowry. Parents with many girls obtained a lot of wealth when their daughters got married.
  • By cattle raiding. This was common between the Maasai and the Kamba people.
  1. By engaging in barter trade.
  2. By inheritance of family wealth
  3. Through use of ones talents e.g blacksmith
  • By marrying many wives who inturn gave birth to many children to provide cheap labour.
  • One could obtain wealth by receiving gifts for ones good conduct or in recognition of ones special talents.

 

  1. What do you think are the causes of poverty at individual levels.
  2. If one is very lazy i.e he cannot work to earn a living
  3. Lack of opportunities to get good education.
  • Exploitation of the poor by the rich
  1. Lack of employment
  2. If one cannot work due to poor health
  3. Poverty can be brought by misuse of ones health.

 

  1. Explain the traditional African attitudes towards wealth.
  2. Wealth enabled one man to marry many wives who would inturn give birth to many children to survive the man after he dies.
  3. Wealth was measured in terms of how many heads of cattle one had, how big were his pieces of land, how many wives and children one had.
  • Wealth brought respect to individuals
  1. In traditional African communities, wealth was seen as a sign of God’s blessings.
  2. In traditional African communities, wealth was viewed as a sign of hard work
  3. In traditional African communities the rich were given decent burials
  • In traditional African communities wealth was a guarantee to the offspring that they would not suffer because they inherit wealth from their rich parents.

 

  1. What changes were brought to African community after the introduction of money economy by the colonial masters?
  2. Introduction of money economy caused rural urban migration
  3. Money economy motivated Africans to look for wage employment.
  • It led to Africans to become businessmen and also created social classes.
  1. It helped to create a capitalistic economy structurally depending on foreign economics
  2. Money economy led to whites taking away from Africans their arable land hence reducing Africans to squatters and later made them their workers.
  3. Money economy dismantled the closely knit traditional social systems. This was done through migrations.

 

  1. Explain in detail how money economy has interfered with good Christian living.
  2. Desire to a mass a lot of wealth by Christians has affected many Christians commitment to God
  3. Bride price has been commercialized hence undermining equality in the home.
  • Immoral practices, bribery and corruption is seriously undermining Christian faith.
  1. Desire for money is forcing Christians to sell their land and live squatters’ lives.
  2. Money economic has led to emergency of class systems in Kenya.
  3. Money has driven Christians to wage labour which inturn has adversely affected the family bond.
  • Money economy is making people to move from rural to urban areas hence interfering with family unity.
  • Money economy has brought about the spirit of materialism and individualism even amongst Christians.
  1. Money donations has lowered the drive to hard work to earn a living.
  2. Christians are competing in acquiring more riches.

 

  1. In what ways can a Christian use his wealth properly?
    i)    By giving tithes and offerings
  2. By sponsoring the spread of the Gospel
  • By giving alms to the destitute members of the community
  1. By giving food to famine stricken areas
  2. Giving money to build hospitals and rehabilitation centres
  3. Providing for his family needs
  • Giving social amenities to the poor
  • By giving professional training
  1. By giving both formal education and technical training.

 

  1. Explain how a modern Christian can misuse wealth.
  2. A Christian can today misuse wealth through doing gambling in casinos
  3. A Christian can misuse his wealth if he sues it abusing drugs like alcohol, other expensive drugs like heroine and cocaine etc.
  • A Christian can misuse his wealth if he/ she uses it to show off
  1. One can misuse wealth in purchase of unnecessary expensive clothes or even cars.
  2. A Christian can misuse wealth if he uses it in bribery.
  3. Wealth can easily be misused if it is used with prostitutes
  • A Christian can misuse wealth if he uses it to exploit other people especially the poor
  • Other Christians can misuse wealth if they use it to buy high position in employment.

 

  1. Explain how a modern Christian can misuse wealth.
  2. A Christian can today misuse wealth through doing gambling in casinos
  3. A Christian can misuse his wealth if he uses it abusing drugs like alcohol, other expensive drugs like heroine and cocaine etc.
  • A Christian can misuse his wealth if he/ she uses it to show off.
  1. One can misuse wealth in purchase of unnecessary expensive clothes or even cars
  2. A Christian can misuse wealth if he uses it in bribery
  3. Wealth can easily be misused if it is used with prostitutes.
  • A Christian can misuse wealth if he uses it to exploit other

people especially the poor.

  • Other Christians can misuse wealth if they use it to buy high positions in employment.

 

  1. Explain ways in which a modern rich man may misuse his wealth.
  2. A rich man can misuse his money by spending it with prostitutes.
  3. A rich man can misuse his money through going to discos
  • A rich man can waste a lot of money through gambling
  1. A rich man can waste a lot of money buying expensive pornographic films and literature
  2. When he uses his money just to show off.
  3. It helps people do criminal acts like murdering those perceived to be his enemies
  • He may misuse his money through indulging in drug abuse.

 

  1. Explain how a Christian may use wealth to glorify God.
  2. A Christian can be tithing to his church
  3. A Christian can use his wealth in glory of God by supporting evangelism
  • A Christian use his money to the glory of God by donating towards building his church
  1. A Christian can use his money to buy church plot
  2. A Christian can buy relief food for the needy
  3. A Christian can be broadcasting services for his church to enable his church to preach through the radio and T.V.
  • A Christian can use his wealth donating towards homes for the destitute.
  • A Christian can use his wealth to buy bibles and distribute them to those who cannot afford to buy.

 

  1. Explain how a modern Christian can amass wealth.
  2. A Christian can acquire wealth through earning salary or wage.
  3. A Christian can get wealth through doing honest business
  • A Christian can get wealth through inheritance from parents because this is lawful
  1. A Christian can get wealth through receiving gifts
  2. One can get money and wealth through interest accrued from investments
  3. A Christian may amass wealth by borrowing a loan and using it properly to yield profits
  • A Christian can get wealth through working in their farms.

 

  1. What are the likely side effects to the very rich and the very poor in a modern community.
  2. The rich will definitely exploit the poor
  3. Wives and daughters of the very poor people may result to prostitution although some irresponsible rich men may also involve themselves in this vice.
  • Very poor people may give birth to very many children whom they cannot support who turn to be street children.
  1. The poor may result to stealing for survival
  2. The rich are tempted to grab the poor mans property
  3. Due to too much wealth the rich may turn to immorality
  • The poor mans plight is ignored by the rich.
  • The poor may live in abject poverty while the rich live in excessive luxuries.
  1. Because of extremity in terms of earthly possession, enemity may develop between the two groups.

 

  1. Explain how our government uses the foreign aid received from the donor countries.
  2. The government uses foreign aid in improving health care services.
  3. Aid is used in buying food for famine stricken areas
  • Aid is used in national disasters like in stopping the Hiv/ Aids scourge
  1. Aid is used by government to build institutions of learning like public universities
  2. Aid is used by government in initiating projects like construction of hydro-electric power stations, roads.
  3. Aid can also be used to finance workshops.

 

  1. Explain factors hindering the growth of Jua-kali sector in Kenya today.
  2. We have fearless competition among Jua-kali artisans
  3. The sector does not get soft loans
  • The sector lacks the required capital to sustain their enterprises.
  1. Most of the people involved in Jua-kali sector have no knowledge in business management.
  2. This sector lacks good markets for finished goods.
  3. Sometimes the entrepreneurs are unable to pay high taxes

 

 

UNIT 4:                LAW, ORDER & JUSTICE.

 

  1. How can Christians contribute towards maintenance of law and order in the society?
  2. By keeping the laws of God just as Jesus did.
  3. By obeying the laws of the land
  • By forgiving wrongdoers
  1. By fighting against social evils like prostitution, tribalism, drug abuse, abortion, murder, stealing with violence etc.
  2. Praying for peace and justice to prevail in the community.
  3. By respecting the lawful authority
  • By condemning unjust laws and violation of human rights in the society
  • By being peace makers themselves.

 

  1. List five forms of punishment meted to criminals and offenders by the Kenyan law courts.
  2. Death penalty (capital punishment)
  3. Imprisonment
  • Detention under the detention camp Act.
  1. Corporal punishment
  2. Fines
  3. Forfeiture
  • Compensation
  • Youths taken to approved schools for school going young
  1. Police supervision
  2. Banning
  3. Torture
  • Deportation
  • Conditional discharge.

 

  1. State five reasons why as Christians we should respect the laws of our country.
  2. Christians respect the laws of the land because they ensure that justice is done.
  3. Because the Bible commands us to do so.
  • A Christian must respect the laws of the land because they protect peoples property.
  1. Laws must be respected by all Christians because they protect peoples property.
  2. Respect the country’s laws as one way of showing love to our country
  3. Laws must be respected by Christians because they specify the duties to individuals
  • Laws of the land must be respected by Christians because they come from God.
  • Christians respect laws of the country because they keep peace in the land.

 

  1. List five social evils that are negatively affecting Kenya’s development.
  2. Robbery and violence is affecting business in Kenya
  3. Drug abuse especially drinking is causing a lot of deaths in road carnage
  • Tribalism, Nepotism
  1. Prostitution and adultery
  2. Murder
  3. Abortion
  • Greed leading to exploitation and cheating in business
  • Bribery and corruption.

 

  1. What is the importance of laws to a Christian in any country?
  2. Laws maintain peace and order.
  3. Laws protect the rights of individuals.
  • Laws protect lives of citizens
  1. Laws protect individuals property
  2. To define what is legal and what is illegal
  3. To punish
  • To limit human freedom
  • To regulate human behaviour.
  1. To ensure efficiency in work.

 

  1. Give reasons why one of the ten commandments is against murder.
  2. Only god can take away human life
  3. The commandment forbids murder to avoid the unwanted sorrows
  • The commandment “thou shall not kill” is present among the ten commandments because life is very precious.
  1. This commandment in question forbids killing because God created every man for a divine and a specific purpose.
  2. The commandment “Thou shall not kill” forbids murder because human life is sacred.

 

  1. What are the causes of crimes in modern world?
  2. Growing up among habitual criminals
  3. Great desire for power may drive one to commit crimes like organise for coup-detat.
  • Egoism
  1. Great desire to get more and more riches.
  2. Being envious of other peoples wealth
  3. Lack of normal upbringing e.g parking boys and “chokoras”
  • Breakdown of traditional norms
  • Insecurity
  1. Extreme poverty
  2. Heredity – If there is criminology in the family lineage there are great chances of one becoming a criminal.

 

  1. List five great evils that face mankind today.
  2. Diseases – Aids is the worst
  3. Poverty
  • Ignorance or illiteracy
  1. Wars and fighting
  2. Natural calamities like earthquakes, floods, famine etc
  3. Corruption or bribery.

 

  1. Why are many Christians opposed to capital punishment?
  2. They argue the capital punishment is irreversible; once a person dies, you cannot bring him back to life.
  3. It is against human rights
  • It take away a family and a community member.
  1. It against Gods law – “Thou shall not kill”
  2. Those who administer the punishment and even the criminal suffer degradation.
  3. It does not serve the purpose of reforming, warning the offender because the offender dies.
  • Gods plan in punishment is to cause repentance hence the criminal does not live to repent.
  • It lowers the human dignity of the criminal
  1. It is possible to kill an innocent person because judges are human beings.
  2. God alone is the giver of life and it is only Him alone who can take it away.
  3. Capital punishment destroys Gods image found in the criminal
  • Th judge may be biased or dishonest and pass a judgement which does not deserve capital punishment.

 

  1. Explain ways in which a Christian can show respect for life today.
  2. By giving guidance and counselling on the value of life
  3. By conserving to environment – planting trees, flowers and grass
  • Discouraging capital punishment
  1. By ensuring that there is no pollution of water, air and land
  2. Condemning abortion
  3. Discouraging child abuse
  • By helping the less fortunate members of the community
  • Sharing natural resources with those who are unfortunate.

 

  1. List down atleast five forms of punishment meted against law breakers
  2. Stoning to death
  3. Excommunication
  • Cursing
  1. Chopping off of some parts of the body.
  2. Banishment
  3. Throwing of offenders in flooded rivers to drawn
  • Torture by clan elders e.g. thorning, thrashing, burning of the victims though not to death, applying of liquids like sisal fluid which causes severe itching especially among the Akamba people.
  • Shooting to death of victims especially wizards, witches and murderers.
  1. Denial of basic rights, e.g a son who frossely offended his parents could be denied a share in their inheritance in some communities.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Explain how law and order was maintained in Traditional African societies.
  2. Law and order was maintained through keeping customary beliefs and regulations.
  3. Law and order was maintained through oathing. Africans feared breaking established oaths because they could result to death hence they followed the law.
  • Another way of maintaining law and order was through punishing law breakers. The forms of punishment administered to wrong doors included the following fines, canning, curses and excommunication.
  1. Africans made covenants to ensure that law and order was maintained.
  2. In traditional African communities clan elders, chiefs and priests supervised the community in a bid to maintain law and order.

 

  1. Why do you think crime is on the increase in modern time?
  2. Today many people are arrogant and they even do not want to respect the governing authorities.
  3. Today we have a lot of drug-abuse.
  • Today we have very many poor people and very few extremely rich people.
  1. Advancement in technology – criminals can easily communicate in mobile phones and also can move very fast due to fast means of transport.
  2. Increase in unemployment which is even affecting university graduates.
  3. Some people are committing crimes in self-defence.

 

  1. List five forms of idolatry in modern world.
  2. Desire for material things
  3. Love for money
  • Desire for power
  1. Desire for sex
  2. Great desire for pleasure

 

  1. How can Christians help ex-prisoners?
  2. Helping them to solve their problems
  3. Visiting them to show them that they belong to them
  • Preaching good news to them.
  1. Showing concern and love to them
  2. Praying for them to get Gods help
  3. Involving them in church activities
  • Welcoming them to churches, which will make them heal fast
  • Advising their families to accept and forgive them
  1. Providing them with food, shelter and clothing
  2. Providing job opportunities to them.
  3. Providing them with guidance and counselling to help them and to reform them.

 

  1. Explain the major reasons for punishment.
  2. To discourage or deter the criminals themselves or other would be criminalse.g public execution discourages many criminals from committing crimes. On 23/04/2001 China executed 113 criminals in sports stadium.
  3. To reform the offender. Here the criminal is taught law, how to respect it and other people.
  • Retribulation – this causing pain to the criminal equivalent the pain he caused to his victim.
  1. To guard people and their properties against criminals.

 

  1. What do you think would happen if a certain society is left without laws?
  2. There would be total hopelessness among many people in the community
  3. There would be serious drug abuse in the society
  • Sex-abuses like rape, homosexuality, incert and bestiality would be prevalent.
  1. There would be great misunderstanding between the youth and the old.
  2. There would be serious moral decay
  3. People would be confused on which culture to follow.

 

  1. Explain the characteristics of dictatorial leaders.
  2. They rule their countries with iron-hands
  3. Most dictators plunder the economies of their countries because they know any time they could be overthrown and go to live in exile.
  • Dictators show open nepotism and all forms of injustice without any fear.
  1. Dictators have no respect for religion – they end up murdering the church leaders who point out their problems.
  2. Because of the injustices they perpetuate the country develops a lot of insecurity
  3. In their rule they have no regard to the countriesconstitution ; instead they violate it greatly.

 

  1. What are the moral duties of the state to her citizens?
  2. The state has a duty of providing a good tax system. The state should not overtax her citizens.
  3. A state should protect the citizens from any external danger
  • The state has a duty of providing employment to her citizens
  1. The state has a duty of maintaining and overseeing justice
  2. The state has a duty of protecting rights for all the citizens
  3. The state must provide essential services like food during famines, hospitals, roads etc.

 

  1. How is justice maintained in Kenyan schools?
  2. There are rules and regulations to protect the rights of students and teachers
  3. There is established procedures of dealing with offenders for example punishment, suspension and expulsion.
  • Offenders are assisted through guidance and counselling
  1. Hard core students are taken to approved schools where they are given further discipline.

 

  1. Outline the dangers of electing an unjust ruler?
  2. An unjust ruler would rule in a dictatorial manner.
  3. An unjust ruler would ignore the country’s constitution – he would violet it grossly.
  • An unjust ruler would plunder the economy.
  1. It is obvious that an unjust ruler practice all manner of social injustices.
  2. An unjust ruler would bring a state of insecurity.
  3. An unjust ruler would abuse religion or may show bias to religion.

 

  1. What are the problems that Christians could encounter in trying to promote social justice in Kenya?
  2. The educated who have no regard for the uneducated whom they regard as ignorant
  3. Greed and selfishness resulting in grabbing, exploitation of the poor.
  • Opposition from the rich who are not willing to share their riches with poor.
  1. People not willing.
  2. Men not willing to share political power with women
  3. People of one race discriminating against those from other races as it was the case in South Africa during Apartheid regime.
  • When the old are not willing to share responsibilities with the youth.
  • Nepotism or clanism – that is possible favouring their own tribesmen or clansmen in share of resources, jobs and power.
  1. Greed and selfishness resulting from grabbing, exploitation of the poor and the rich and those in power.
  2. People from some denominations not willing to help people of other denominations.

 

  1. Explain how injustice can disrupt peace in any society.
  2. Injustice can lead to murders, robbery with violence or even assassinations.
  3. It can cause suffering e.g hunger, sicknesses and death.
  • It can lead to civil war.
  1. It cause rebellion like civil disobedience, coup detat, demonstrations, strikes, all manner of violence.
  2. To those who practice injustice, it can cause disrespect.
  3. It can led to hypocrisy and cheating.
  • It leads to international isolation like what was happening in South Africa during the period of Apartheid policy.

 

  1. How can Christians be good examples in doing injustice?
  2. By organising projects to help the destitute.
  3. By not being hypocritical
  • By avoiding to do any evil
  1. By leading humble lives
  2. By avoiding any quarrels amongst themselves
  3. By being responsible to others like Jesus.
  • By being ready to serve others.

 

  1. State six fundamental rights of a citizen according to UN’s universal declaration or Human rights.
  2. Right to marry and raise a family
  3. Right to life
  • Right to freedom of worship and expression
  1. Right to rightful arrest and fair trial
  2. Right to enjoy and use personal property freely
  3. Right to employment and a just wage.
  • Right to education
  • Right to own property
  1. Right to free association with others
  2. Right to freedom of speech and of information
  3. Right to personal freedom or liberty

 

  1. In what ways do Christians practice social justice?
  2. Christians practice social justice by caring for the environment
  3. By sharing their properties and resources to the less unfortunate members of the society.
  • By paying visits to the sick, prisoners and bereaved family members
  1. Praying for peace and justice in the society
  2. By calling for the justice rule of the law.
  3. By helping the poor and the needy.
  • Pointing out the social evils affecting the community
  • Christians should accomplish their domestic duties.

 

  1. Explain the Biblical teaching on order and justice.
  2. The Bible teaches that our God is a God of order as found in the creation account – in Psalm 17:8 God is just.
  3. Prophets Amos, Jeremiah, Issaih condemned the rich for exploiting the poor, fatherless and widows.
  • Jesus taught that people should first seek Gods kingdom and His justice.
  1. Jesus practised justice by associating with the despised member of the society like – Mathew and Saccheaus who were both tax-collectors
  2. According to prophet Isaiah, Gods justice involves helping the widows, the orphans and the poor.
  3. From (2 Samuel 12: – 1 – 15) we learn that all men are equal before God and should be treated with justice as God is against an injustice.
  • Christians are the watch dogs of the society to speak against an unjust laws or unjust practices.
  • Christians must exercise justice always by helping the hungry, thirsty, strangers, the sick and the prisoners.
  1. Jesus was opposed to Pharisees and Sadducees because they neglected justice mercy, and faith.

 

UNIT 5:    THE CHRISTIAN INVOLVEMENT IN

POLITICAL LIFE OF THE NATION.

 

  1. What are the qualities of good leaders according to old testament?
  • Deuteronomy
  1. He is respected by everybody
  2. He is mature and patient
  • He is not selfish
  1. He is humble
  2. He is not a lover of alcohol
  3. He is wise
  • One who has a God fearing family
  • He speaks for the helpless
  1. He has great skills in organising people.

 

  1. Briefly explain the purpose of law in Traditional African society
  2. In African Traditional communities law set out the roles of the members of society.
  3. In A.T.S. law guided people in all religious matters
  • In A.T.S. law created harmony in the entire community.
  1. In A.T.S. law guided people on what should be eaten and what should not be eaten e.g among the Akamba women did not eat the heads of goats because this was purely for the men who were the family leaders.
  2. In A.T.S. law guided people in the various rites that the members had to undergo.
  3. In A.T.S. law governed the terms of trade between the members of the community and other communities.
  • In A.T.S. law set out the specific punishment to be given to the wrong doers.
  • In A.T.S. the law set out accepted relations between rival communities.
  1. In A.T.S. laws were to guide people who belonged to various professions.

 

 

 

  1. What part can a Christian play in the national elections?
  2. A Christian can be honest in whatever role he is playing in election process
  3. Praying for fair, free, just and peaceful elections
  • Being very committed in whatever part he is given to play
  1. Accepting to work in any capacity in and out of polling stations.

 

  1. Outline the qualities of a good church leader according to New Testament.
  2. Must be above reproach
  3. A husband of one wife
  • Must be temperate
  1. Must have self-control
  2. Must be respectable
  3. Must be able to teach
  • Not a drunkard
  • Not violent but gentle
  1. Not quarrelsome
  2. Not a lover of money
  3. Must manage his family well
  • Must not be a recent convert
  • Must have a good reputation with outsiders
  • Must be hospitable
  1. Must not pursue dishonest gain.

 

  1. Explain how a Christian can acquire leadership qualities.
  2. A Christian can acquire leadership qualities by going through a theological training institute.
  3. Through experience acquired after long service
  • By learning Christian religious education in school
  1. Through attending seminars on leadership
  2. One can acquire those leadership skills through Gods inspiration
  3. By studying the Bible especially on areas dealing with Christian leadership
  • By emulating other leaders who are successful

 

  1. Explain the various forms of discrimination found in our modern society.
  2. Education discrimination – here the educated would discriminate the uneducated or the vice versa
  3. Tribal discrimination – Here members of a given tribe would employ or like to associate with members of their tribe at the expense of those who do not belong to their tribe.
  • Language discrimination – here people use their mother tongue in amidst of those who do not understand it. When they do this deliberately then it amounts to language discrimination.  This is becoming common in our public offices.
  1. Class and economic discrimination – here people prefer to associate with those of their social economic class. The rich would associate with the rich and despise the poor.
  2. Discrimination on basis of health – here the health might ignore association with those suffering from dreaded diseases like Aids, T.B from their places f work especially in the private sector. Or when those suffering from physical disabilities are denied employment on this basis.
  3. Discrimination based on age – here people discriminate against those of other age. This is common in churches especially when the old members are opposed to election of the youth to join church councils.
  • Discrimination based on sex – here people prefer to associate with those of their own sex. In the past there were certain jobs which were meant for men or women, but today this is dying out because today women are doing jobs like piloting, mechanical and electrical engineering which were meant for men.  Today men are working as cooks, chefs, which were jobs meant for women.  In one is denied a job on the basis of sex this amounts to discrimination.
  • Discrimination against the minority group. – Here majority group ignore the minority group especially when it comes to issues like allocating positions or property in the entire society.
  1. Religious discrimination – Here people associate with those of their denomination and discriminate others.

 

  1. As a Christian, what social and religious evils would you condemn in Kenya today?
  2. A Christian in Kenya can condemn oppression of the poor by the rich economically
  3. A Christian can condemn the want on destruction of the viral natural forests in Kenya.
  • A Christian may condemn the high level of bribery and corruption
  1. A Christian may condemn the misuse of public funds by those in leadership
  2. A Christian may condemn evil like murder, rape, violent, stealing etc
  3. A Christian may condemn prostitution which is highly practised in Kenya
  • A Christian may condemn injustices in law courts
  • A Christian may condemn car-jacking which is a common phenomena in our main cities.

 

  1. Explain problems that may result from good relationship between the state and church.
  2. The church may compromise and fail to condemn social evils committed by the state.
  3. The church may be forced to do corruption
  • Strong relationship between the church and state may make the church to forfeit her legitimate authority which comes from God.
  1. The church may be misused by the politicians to achieve evil political ends at the painful expense of the church
  2. The state may use Biblical teachings and change them to cover their political ideologies.
  3. Strong alliance between church and state may bring politics in church government.

 

  1. Explain how a Christian can ensure that justice is done Kenya today:
  2. A Christian can propagate justice in Kenya today through preaching against all forms of exploitation.
  3. A Christian can propagate justice by speaking against detention without trial.
  • A Christian can ensure justice by preaching against bribery in law courts and in traffic controls.
  1. He can preach justice by speaking against any forms of dictatorship in any form of leadership.
  2. He can preach against tribalism and racism.
  3. He can condemn strongly the grabbing of poor mans lands by the rich, the grabbing of public plots by the greedy and rich individuals.

 

  1. From the judgement passed on to Jesus by the Pontius Pilate, what can Christians learn?
  2. Jesus was the son of God
  3. Jesus was not guilty
  • Leaders should not abuse powers given to them.
  1. Christians should not give false witness
  2. One should not be influenced by others to speak lies
  3. One should be fair in passing judgements
  • One should seek to please God but not fellowmen.
  • Leaders should give guidance to those he is leading.

 

  1. Explain the steps church leaders would take in handling dishonest members.
  2. Help them in avoiding all circumstances which could lead them to dishonest
  3. Forgive the dishonest members
  • They can discipline them
  1. Leaders should set good examples to be followed by dishonest members
  2. Study the circumstances leading to dishonesty
  3. Leaders should pray to the affected members
  • Instead of ignoring them they should be given guidance and counseling
  • They should teach them to lead responsible lives

 

  1. What is the importance of professional ethics to a Christian?
  2. When a Christian observes professional ethics in his work many other people develop a liking to his profession.
  3. Professional ethics makes a Christian good example to other workmates
  • Professional ethics helps a Christian to improve skills
  1. Professional ethics dictates on how a Christian should relate with his colleagues.
  2. Professional ethics controls a Christian not a reveal professional secrets
  3. Professional ethics controls a Christian form breaking the rules that guides him e.g a male teacher is prohibited from sexual knowledge of his female student.

 

 

 

  1. How can Christian Youth serve God today?
  2. By contributing money in aid of church activities
  3. By singing in the choir by providing labour in the church e.g sweeping church, cultivating in church compound, watering flower beds etc.
  • By teaching in Sunday schools
  1. By taking pair in communal work.
  2. By worshipping God in the church through praying and reading the Bible
  3. A Christian youth who is educated can also teach the adults
  • By participating in societies like Y.C.S, U

 

  1. What do you think the Kenyan Church should do to curb abortion which is increasing at an alarming rate?
  2. The church should emphatically teach that life is a gift from God hence it should not be terminated easily.
  3. The church should outrightly condemn it as sinful and unnecessary
  • The church should teach parents to love their pregnant daughters.
  1. The church should provide homes to the unmarried mothers
  2. The church should fearlessly teach sex education to all especially abortion
  3. The church should encourage the youth to share ideas on sex and about abortion.
  • The church should build homes for unwanted children.
  • The church has a duty to guide and counsel pregnant girls.

 

  1. How can the church promote peace in modern society?
  2. The church should participate in choosing just leaders
  3. The church should make peace between various groups of people
  • Th church should participate in social activities both at family level and at national level.
  1. The church should be mindful of other peoples welfare
  2. The church should aid in bringing people in different backgrounds together.
  3. The church has a role of strengthening national consciousness.
  • The church has a duty of fighting poverty, ignorance, oppression and sickness
  • The church should fight against prejudice.
  1. The church should serve her role as a servant where she is required to do so.

 

  1. In detail explain ways in which the modern church can participate in political issues of Kenya as a country.
  2. The church should help in negotiations to end statement like in the ongoing constitutional review
  3. The church should always mediate between the citizen and the leaders of the country.
  • The church should participate in the election process.
  1. The church should always act as the conscience of the state.
  2. The church should participate in offering civil education to the voters although the state is opposed to it today.
  3. The church has a prime duty of praying to the state
  • The church should fearlessly condemn the evils in the state.
  • The church should word hand in hand with political leaders in the socio-economic development projects like building schools, hospitals and church.

 

  1. Explain problems that are hindering effective church

influence in the social life of the community.

  1. Lack of money to spread the gospel
  2. There are wrangles within the churches
  • Today we have emergency of devil worship, several cults and communism in our society.
  1. Some church leaders involving themselves in immorality which gives the church a big blow.
  2. Strong negative influence from science
  3. Lack of appropriate training of church leaders
  • Some church members practicing self-righteousness.
  • Lack of accountability and transparency in church funds
  1. When social classes and practised in the church

 

 

 

  1. Explain what steps should churches take to retain the youth in

their churches.

  1. The Church should encourage the youth to have church weddings and support those who cannot afford such ceremonies.
  2. The church should learn to accommodate modern styles of dressing during church worship.
  • For the church to attract the youth, they should start English service to cater for their interests.
  1. The church should start organising guidance and counselling to make them aware of their role in the church
  2. The church should involve the church in various church activities much liked by the youth
  3. The church should organise youth rallies and crusades which are very much liked by the youth.
  • The church should have some of them in leadership roles i.e in church council
  • The church should allow them to form youth groups
  1. The church should allow them to sing in the church using modern tunes and styles
  2. The church should provide recreational facilities to the youth because they have a lot of energy for the same
  3. The church should provide employment opportunities to them and also strongly recommend for employment elsewhere.

 

UNIT 6:          ISSUES RELATED TO MODERN SCIENCE

AND TECHNOLOGY

 

  1. Explain how Christians are using science and technology to spread the Gospel today.
  2. Archeological discoveries are confirming the truth of the Gospel.
  3. Medicines have helped Christians to do the healing ministry which is part of spreading the gospel.
  • Scientific researches have been adopted by the church because they help the church in changing to modern methods and approaches.
  1. Tools like radios, T.V.s, Video cassettes and cinemas are used to preach the good news.
  2. Christians today are using public address systems when preaching in crusades and in big churches
  3. The knowledge of architecture has enabled the church to build big churches like the church of Dr. David Logicho in South Korea which as a sitting capacity of 350,000 people. This is the largest church in the world.
  • Different modes of transport like air, water, rail and road have enabled evangelists and other ministers to preach in many parts of the world.
  • Christians today are spreading the Gospel through the print media e.gtypewriter’s, computers and printing machines.
  1. Churches use telephones, fax machines and postal services to spread the gospel.
  2. Modern advancement in agriculture and commerce has improved peoples income which in inturn used in spreading the gospel.

 

  1. Give five reasons why some Christians are opposed to the use of artificial contraceptives.
  2. It lowers the dignity of the persons involved
  3. Artificial contraceptives have a lot of risks on the lives of people involved.
  • It is an immoral act.
  1. It is only God who has the sole duty of creating giving human life, hence artificial contraceptives is wrong.
  2. It is opposed because it is unnatural way of having a child.

 

  1. What would you advice a patient to do while on medications?
  2. One should be advised to hide drugs from children
  3. One should take full dose as per the physician’s instructions.
  • One should never use expired drugs because they can cause instant death
  1. One should store medicines in cool dry places
  2. One should never share drugs with other patients
  3. It is advisable that one should not treat himself unless he/ she is a medical practitioner.

 

  1. Give reasons why a few Christians are opposed to family planning programmes.
  2. They argue that it is a way of promoting prostitution
  3. They argue that most of the family planning methods have serious effects.
  • Others say that they opt to use the natural method because it has no medical complications.
  1. Others argue that using of family planning methods is a clear indication that they do not trust God to give them the children they would need.
  2. Other Christians argue that they are following God’s command “multiply and fill the earth” – Genesis chapter 1:.

 

  1. Explain how a Christian should treat people suffering from AIDS.
  2. A Christian should advice AIDs patients to take drugs according to physicians instructions.
  3. Christians should show them love because they are children of God
  • Christians should preach to them and convert them before they die because it is a terminal disease.
  1. Christians should not disassociate themselves from AIDs patients but rather they should keep company with them.
  2. Christians should feed and cloth those suffering from AIDs.

 

  1. Why do you think majority of men do not accept vasectomy in Kenya?
  2. Many argue that once one undergoes vasectomy it is irreversible.
  3. Others argue that it causes misunderstanding in the family
  • Some fear to be looked down upon by other fellow men even women
  1. Others argue that it interferes with the perfect creation of God.
  2. Others say it has several side effects.
  3. Others refuse it simply because they do not know anything about it.

 

  1. What are some of the problems that may result from the advertisement of condoms?
  2. It will encourage the youth to commit fornication and the married adultery.
  3. The S.T.D. may increase because condoms cannot give full quarantee that one cannot conduct the S.T.D. when using them.
  • There will be unwanted pregnancies because some condoms are known to be defective.
  1. The youth would want to experiment on them because they are very adventurous.
  2. There will be a lot of moral decay in the society.

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. In detail describe the religious significance of the environment in traditional African communities.
  2. All believed that it was their religious duty to make care of the environment.
  3. Each community believed that their homeland was a gift from God.
  • To the African people the following environmental phenomenas revealed that nature of God: – stars, moon, sun, eclipse, rain, clouds, thunder and lightening.
  1. In many societies major oaths were taken by one taking the soil as a symbol of environment.
  2. Some communities had heavenly bodies which were considered sacred.
  3. Many African communities had their shrines where they worshipped in certain environmental places e.g trees, rivers, mountains, hills, rocks and forests.
  • Rites of passages were connected to the environment e.g circumcision blood flowed to the soil to bind the initiates to the ancestors, birth day.
  • The environment showed the relationship between God and people at given times e.g drought, floods, epidemics.

 

  1. Explain how science and technology has improved the quality of human life.
  2. Due to many discoveries in medicine many diseases are now brought under control.
  3. Due to advancement in transport and communication the quality of human life has greatly been influenced. Today one can be flown to Europe within hours for treatment incase he/ she cannot be treated in Kenya.
  • Due to advancement in science and Technology improvement in fuel production which inturn improves the quality of human life.
  1. Science and technology has led to production of good quality textiles which inturn are improving the quality of human life.
  2. Advancement in science and technology has led great production of food hence improvement in human life
  3. Today we have good supply due to improvement in science ad technology.
  • Due to advancement in science and technology we have good houses which improve the quality of human life a great deal
  • Electricity and electrical appliances have greatly improved the quality of human life.

 

  1. List five technological activities which are threatening mans life.
  2. Pesticides and fertilizers which have negative effects to man.
  3. Remains from nuclear weapons have long lasting effects e.g Bombs dropped at Nagasaki and Heroshima in the second world war are still a threat to human life even today.
  • Carbon monoxide emitted from industries is ruining the ozone layer which inturn allows dangerous ultra-violet rays from the sun.
  1. Toxic gas from industries are causing chest diseases.
  2. Cutting down trees from timber and paper causes deforestation which inturn results to desertification.

 

  1. Explain the benefits of modern science and Technology to mankind.
  2. Modern Science has come up with modern medicines which improves human life.
  3. Modern Science has greatly improved mans environment
  • Modern science has boasted food production.
  1. Modern science and Technology has brought unity of mankind as mankind can communicate from all earners of the world.
  2. Science and technology has greatly improved communication.
  3. Science and technology has brought unity of mankind as mankind can communicate from all corners of the world.
  • Through use of science and technology man can easily control the universe.

 

  1. How can Christians help to protect the environment?
  2. Supporting environmental programmes with finances.
  3. Teaching other people on how to preserve it for example soil conservation, tree planting, cleaning the environment, good farming methods and afforestation.
  • In taking part during environmental days.
  1. Teaching others the importance of the environment e.g for beauty, prosperity and for healthy.
  2. Christians should condemn in the strongest terms possible the senseless destruction and exploitation of the environment.
  3. Be ready to work in protecting the environment e.g in building gabions, planting trees, cleaning the city, cleaning river beds.
  • Planting flower and tree nurseries from where other people could get seedlings to plant.
  • Desert from all activities that destroy environment like poaching, cultivating on steep slopes, falling trees, encroaching on catchment areas.
  1. Giving ideas on conservation to others.
  2. Taking good care of their homes, shambas.

 

  1. From the creation account, – explain the relationship that should exist between human beings and the environment.
  2. Man had dominion over the environment
  3. Man and environment depend on each other.
  • Man and environment were both created by God hence should appreciate the environment as Gods creation.
  1. Man has a duty to take care of the environment
  2. The environment was created to be used by man.

 

  1. Outline the importance of trees to mankind.
  2. Trees act as wind breakers in plantations and settled areas.
  3. Trees provide fuel for cooking
  • Trees provide building materials
  1. From trees we get paper e.gWebuye factory
  2. From trees we got food e.g. some wild fruits are used as food.
  3. Trees provide medicine.
  • Trees prevent soil erosion.
  • Trees especially in forested areas provide water catchement.

 

  1. Define the term Euthanasia: Give reasons for and against euthanasia.
  2. The term Euthanasia is a Greek word meaning “Mercy killing” or painless death.
  3. Reasons for Euthanasia:
  4. Those who advocate for it say that they have compassion for one who is undergoing unbearable pain.
  5. They argue that life is survival for the fittest
  • They argue that one has a right to choose death without suffering
  1. Since medical expenses may be high, euthanasia may be a way of relieving the economic burden.
  2. Others argue that there is no point of keeping a person who will obviously die.

 

Arguments against Euthanasia:

  1. Euthanasia equals murder
  2. Euthanasia is a pure materialistic concept of life
  • Others say that those who accept Euthanasia are simply committing suicide.
  1. Doctors who administer Euthanasia may never be trusted by their patients.
  2. Others argue that euthanasia is against Bible which condemns murder
  3. Negative and positive euthanasia is likewise murder when done without the consent of the suffering person.
  • Euthanasia renders human life meaningless.
  • Those who administer or allow euthanasia prove that they have no love and care for the drying.
  1. Medical ethics forbids euthanasia.
  2. Euthanasia is an open rejection and rebellion against God.

 

  1. List atleast five forms of artificial contraceptives.
  2. Condoms
  3. Diaphragms
  • Hormonal pills
  1. Injections e.g Depo-Provera
  2. Foaming pills and jollies
  3. Intra uterine devise (IUD) also “loop”
  • Tubal-ligation.

 

 

UNIT 8:          ISSUES RELATED TO SEX,

MARRIAGE AND FAMILY.

 

  1. What are the causes of sexual abuse in modern society?
  2. Lack of guidance and counselling of the youth.
  3. Poverty
  • Influence of drugs
  1. Today there is less emphasis on sex education
  2. Influence from pornographic literature and films.
  3. Light or lack of punishment to sex offenders
  • Great influence from Western culture
  • Total breakdown of traditional taboos governing sex.

 

  1. Briefly explain what the traditional African initiates were taught about sex during initiation.
  2. They were taught the time or period in which they could abstain from sexual relationships.
  3. They were instructed on how to conduct themselves in from of members of the opposite sex.
  • They were taught about the intimacy of female to male relationships
  1. They were given a detailed instruction by courageous tutors on their own procreative systems
  2. They were taught that sex was sacred and important
  3. They were taught that the right place of sex was only in marriage
  • They were fully tutored on all the taboos connected with sex.

 

  1. Why do you think Christians are against fornication.
  2. Fornication is a source of contracting Standards.
  3. Fornication is condemned in the Bible i.e fornicators are among those who will not inherit the kingdom of God.
  • Christians condemn fornication because it does not achieve one purpose of sex which is fulfillment.
  1. A girl who involves herself in fornication in never trusted in marriage in future marriage because she has broken her virginity.
  2. It may result to unwanted pregnancies.

 

  1. What ways were used by the Africans to prevent the abuse of sex?
  2. Polygamy was allowed in many African communities to reduce or even control the abuse of sex.
  3. Sex offenders were severely punished or fined.
  • The young were given serious guidance and counselling on matters pertaining to sex.
  1. Boys and girls could only mix in the presence of responsible adults.
  2. Sex was strictly for the married people.
  3. Rigid sexual taboos were practiced in all African communities.
  • Young and mature girls were strictly monitored by the parentse.g a young child could accompany a mature girl to the river, to the bush or even to the villagers and relatives homes to ensure that she could not talk to boys on the way.

 

  1. What are the effects of irresponsible sex?
  2. It can led to social evils like rape, drug abuse
  3. It can result to early pregnancies and forced marriages
  • It can lead to the spread of sexually transmitted diseases like AIDs, Syphilis, Gonorrhea etc.
  1. It causes single parenthood.
  2. It brings health problems especially to young girls when they give birth.
  3. It can cause divorce.
  • It causes or leads to prostitution or even homosexuality in extreme cases.
  • It leads to birth of illegitimate children
  1. It causes crime among young children e.g the parking boys
  2. It causes abortion to avoid the unwanted children.

 

  1. Give atleast five examples of deviant sexual behaviour found in our modern society.
  2. Rape
  3. Abortion
  • Prostitution
  1. Homosexuality
  2. Bestiality
  3. Lesbianism

 

  1. What are the causes of prostitution?
  2. Prostitution has been made by some people an economic activity to earn living from or generate some income.
  3. Some men and women turn to prostitution because their sexual demands are not met in their marriage relationship.
  • Especially among the youth, peer group influence and pressures may lead to entering and practising prostitution.
  1. Phonographic literature and films dealing with loose sexual information lure people to indulge sexual immoralities.
  2. As a result of separation or divorce, the affected may need company for sexual relation or money which may result to practising prostitution.
  3. Some women may leave their rural homes to look for jobs and if they fail, are forced to result to prostitution.
  • Extreme poverty.

 

  1. What are the evils of prostitution?
  2. It undermines the mutual and companionship aspect of sex
  3. Through prostitution, deadly sexually transmitted diseases are passed on.
  • It is a source of moral and spiritual decay
  1. Where prostitution is rampant, crime rate is quite high
  2. Some times it leads to unwanted pregnancies
  3. It encourages sexual crimes such as abortion
  • Prostitution may make young girls loose their dignity in society or their dignified ways of earning a decent living.
  • Where couples engage in the practice, they loose confidence to one another and the family may end up breaking.
  1. Misuse of money
  2. Children brought up where prostitution is rampant are likely to develop diligent behaviours.
  3. It undermines the purpose of sex in marriage / sex become a pure physical satisfaction.

 

  1. Explain both the similarities and differences between the traditional and Christian understanding of marriage.

Similarities:

  1. In both marriage is seen as covenant relationship
  2. In both marriage is seen as a social affair as many people are invited to attend the marriage feasts.
  • In both marriage is aimed at providing mutual love
  1. Both believe that marriage is sacred and that it is the divine will of God.
  2. In both marriage enables man and woman to have new responsibilities.
  3. Marriage promotes the social status the new couple in both tradition and Christian societies.
  • In both marriage brings about new ties of relationships. In both the young couple gets new friends and relatives e.g brothers, sisters-in-law.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Differences:

  1. Traditional African marriage allows polygamy while Christian marriage is strictly monogamous.
  2. Christian marriage unites a man and a woman while traditional African marriage unites two families – the family of the man to the family of the woman.
  • Christian marriage ends with the death of one partner while Traditional African marriage continues even long after the death of one partner in that a woman can continue bearing children to the deceased husband.
  1. In traditional African marriage one does not die but lives through the birth of this children who continue his name after his death while Christianity gets immortal life through salvation by the blood of Jesus Christ.
  2. In Christianity it is not a must for everyone to marry for some have celibacy for religious reasons, while in traditional African societies it was a duty / a must for everyone to marry and raise a family.
  3. Marriage without children in traditional African society was not complete while in Christianity the marriage is complete and acceptable without children.
  • A wife can have children for her husband incase the husband been important but this is unacceptable in Christianity for it is sin of sexual immorality.
  • In traditional African marriages, a woman was married to the whole family or even clan but in Christianity a woman belongs to one man who has all rights over her.

 

  1. Explain the types of marriages found in Kenya today.
  2. Christian marriage:

This is conducted in church following Christian teaching.  It is    conducted by Pastor, Rev., Priest or even a Bishop.  There are many family members and Christians who act as witnesses.

  1. Islamic marriage:

This is conducted according to Islamic teaching.  A Kadhi conducts it.  There are very many witnesses who include Islamic faithful, friends and relatives from both families.

  • Traditional African marriage:

These are marriages conducted following traditional Africans customs.  These marriages are also called customary marriages.  These are the majority in Kenya.  These marriages differ from one community to another.

  1. Civil marriages:

These are conducted at the District commissioner’s office.  There are very few witnesses.  They follow the laws of Kenya and incase of divorce the same office authorises though it is done at law courts.

 

  1. What are some of the reasons given by Christians for celibacy?
  2. Some claim that they want to follow the example of Jesus who had no wife.
  3. Others follow Jesus teaching that they leave everything including wives for the sake of the kingdom.
  • Others especially women want to follow the example of barren women like Elizabeth who late became the mother of John the Baptist.
  1. Others say they only want to be married to Christ as they cannot be fully committed if they got earthly marriage.
  2. Others say they want to remain virgin like the ten virgins of the Bible hence some become Nuns and sisters.

 

  1. Explain the secular reasons for remaining single today.
  2. Some people prefer co-habiting to real committed life.
  3. Others claim they have missed a “Mr right” or “Miss right”.
  • Girls who have illegitimate children have difficulties in getting husbands.
  1. Other girls spend a lot of their life in education only to find that they have become too old to attract a man for marriage.
  2. Some girls choose to lead a single parenthood rather than to marry.
  3. Others say they would rather not marry than fail in their careers – for example a lady working with armed forces in Kenya would choose to remain rather than leaving her career to get married.
  • Men fearing the highly educated women like professors
  • Others who are selfish would not like to share their earnings with any one else hence they decide not to marry.
  1. Some men may remain single because of physical defects – Eunuchs.

 

 

 

  1. What was the importance of children in traditional African communities?
  2. Children were to inherit the parents’ property after their death. Inheritance was strictly for boys.
  3. In traditional African society children were perceived as blessings from God.
  • Children were very important in traditional African societies because they continue family and clan through procreation. That is, they kept the fire of life burning.
  1. Children completed a marriage for a marriage without children was not complete and binding.
  2. In traditional African societies one got respect in the society according to the number of children one had. The more the children the more the respect one received from his community.
  3. Children in traditional African societies provide labour force. Many children meant higher labour force and this could make one rich.  Also one who had many girls he get a lot of dowry when the girls were married.

 

  1. Discuss the African view that in traditional African communities a woman is married to the whole clan.
  2. It was accepted traditionally that can elders or age mates of the husband could discipline the woman if she misbehaved.
  3. If a husband dies a brother or a kinsman takes over the wife
  • Clan elders resolved quarrels between husband and wife incase any arose.
  1. Before the young couple could make a decision they consulted their clan members.
  2. Clan members shared marriage expenses by contributing food, goats for dowry even working on the wedding day. This brought in the idea that the wife belonged to them.
  3. After marriage most of the members of the clan could visit the married woman and she was expected to show hospitality at all times.
  • Clan members collected the bride and brought her to her new home on the marriage day hence the wife belonged to them.
  • Everyone took any part in the ceremonial and the rituals connected with marriage therefore everyone felt the wife belonged to each one of them especially them. She could be refereed to as “our wife”.
  1. In some communities the kinsmen played a great role in choosing the bride.
  2. Since the woman belonged to the whole clan she was supposed to participate in all clan functions.
  3. A kinsman was called upon to raise up children if a man was impotent.
  • In some communities like the Maasai, intimate friends could share wives.
  • A wife was supposed to know all the clan members immediately she was married.
  • Once a woman got married she was supposed to perform all household chores for the whole clan without complaining.

 

  1. What difficulties can be encountered in maintaining this practice of a woman being married to a whole clan in modern societies?
  2. Employment and mobility have kept women away from their clansmen and has made them outward looking.
  3. Some people pay more loyalty to their churches than the clans hence the idea of a wife being a clan wife does not arise.
  • Some couples marry without involving their clan members.
  1. There has been breakdown of clan solidarity and kinship ties.
  2. The cost of living today makes it difficult for those involved to entertain the clansmen easily.
  3. Women liberation movements cannot accept this practice at all.
  • Today society is tolerant to single parenthood therefore this practise is quite unacceptable in traditional African society.
  • Mixed marriages across tribal and racial lines make it difficult to uphold this traditional African practice or value on marriage.
  1. Conditions of habitation in urban areas cannot allow this practice.
  2. Society has changed attitude towards women for example today women may own property or even inherit property form their parents.
  3. Migrations both rural to urban and rural to rural migrations have separated members of the clan from other members.
  • Christian teaching on marriage emphasize the responsibility to the nuclear family rather than the extended family.
  • Western education has exposed learners to Western ideas and values that conflict with this practice in African marriages.

 

 

  1. What are the causes of conflict in marriage in Kenya today?
  2. Lack of children – many a times men blame their wives and strife starts in the family.
  3. Selfishness on the part of husband or wife.
  • Negligence of ones responsibilities. Here a man neglects his fatherly duties or the wife neglects her motherly duties as the homemaker.
  1. Unfaithfulness on the part of husband or wife especially on matters related to sex.
  2. Influence of traditional African practices for example if a man wants to marry a second wife and his first wife resists, or a man spends a lot of money on the extended family especially when the wife does not accept this practice friction begins in marriage.
  3. When the husband or wife takes so much drug taking especially alcohol.
  • Use of misuse of family money. Here either the husband or wife uses family money without information of the other and especially when it is used for the intended purpose.
  • Influence from Western education or religion or modernity or even women’s liberation movement liberation movement which makes not to accept the wives traditional role in marriage.
  1. In cases where the wife is more senior position than the man, if the wife transfers the same seniority at home conflicts sets in that home.
  2. Extended family may cause conflicts in marriage if there is interference especially when in-laws start coming in between the married couple.
  3. Wife beating especially in Kenya today when such a practice is becoming a thing of the past.

 

  1. How can a Christian couple ensure a successful marriage?
  2. The two should share their happiness and sorrows.
  3. They should treat each other as equals as they are equal before the eyes of God
  • They should give conjugal rights to each other
  1. The two should practice understanding, tolerance and forgiveness.
  2. They should consult each other in important decisions affecting their family.

 

 

  1. Why do you think the church disapproves of divorce?.
  2. Marriage after divorce is regarded to be equivalent to adultery.
  3. It is Biblically wrong and Christ disapproves of it.
  • Divorce cancels the permanence of marriage that was intended for man at the beginning.
  1. Divorce is not an option for two believers. Otherwise marriage loses meaning.
  2. Reconciliation / love should be the guiding principles in married life.
  3. The partner at fault should accept his/ her mistakes to avoid divorce.
  • Marriage is a symbol of Christ and the church so divorce devalues the meaning or the symbol of unity and love.
  • Divorce brings insecurity to the children.
  1. Divorce disrupts family life.
  2. Marriage is sacred and therefore should never be dissolved.

 

  1. In details outline the consequences of divorce in contemporary society.
  2. It causes economic strain on one partner who is left with the children.
  3. It results to single parenthood.
  • It causes great enemy to the two partners
  1. It causes deep suffering to the children
  2. It may lead to prostitution to the two partners
  3. Children would lack security because they are brought up by one parent especially the mother.
  • It causes juvenile delinquency.
  • It leads to failure in achieving family goals.
  1. It leads to adultery
  2. In extreme cases it may lead to one committing suicide.
  3. Divorce causes deep frustrations to both partners affected.
  • It leads to children to grow without total parental love.

 

  1. Explain the traditional African understanding of the family.
  2. An African family is composed of the living, the dead ancestors and the yet to be born members.
  3. In traditional African community many nuclear families which were related through blood, marriage or adoption formed an extended family. This was the most common feature of African families since the idea of a nuclear family is foreign to the Africans.
  • In traditional African a family without children was incomplete and unnecessary. The chief purpose of marrying was procreation to have a family and continue it.
  1. Polygamous marriages were common features of many traditional African families. The more the number of wives and children one had the more he was respected in the given society.
  2. An extended families were a common feature because it had many members who shared responsibilities like, education of children, raising of dowry, helping bereaved families, supporting widows, supporting week members of the family in times of famine and misfortunes and doing communal work like cultivation, construction of houses etc.

 

  1. How can the modern society prevent prostitution?
  2. The governmental organisations and churches can join hands together and give them skills which make them start income generating activities as an alternative to prostitution.
  3. Other members of the society should treat them with love but not call them “Malaya” (prostitutes) because this would demoralise them the more.
  • The government should enlighten the community through mass media about the dangers of prostitution because some practice it due to ignorance of the side effects of the practice. This would also deter the would be prostitutes.
  1. The prostitutes should be talked to by qualified guidance and counselling personal and this can help a great deal. The same services should be extended to the would be abusers of sex.
  2. People who engage in prostitution should be encouraged to go to church where they can be taught sound morality.

 

  1. Explain the Christian understanding of the family.
  2. To Christians a family begins with marriage between a man and woman who agree to live together for life.
  3. The chief purpose of having a Christian family is mutual love and companionship as opposed to traditional African which is procreation.
  • A Christian family is an example of the relationship between Christ and the church that is why Paul directed that husbands love their wives as Christ loved the church – Ephesians chapter 5:25.
  1. In Christian understanding, a childless family is still a complete family
  2. A Christian family is purely monogamous.

 

  1. Briefly explain the various kinds of families in Kenya today.
  2. Single Parent Family.

This family is made up of one parent either man or woman and children.  This family may result from death of one marriage partner, or separation in marriage or children born by a girl and she fails to get a marriage partner or when a man has a child with a girl and the man is forced to carry the child as with the customary practice of the Luhya and some coast communities.

Here a woman is married to at least two husbands.  This is commonly practised in India.  It is very rare in Kenya.

  • Polygamous family.

Here a man marries more than one wife and he raises children.  This type of family was common in African culture though it is slowly dying out because of economic strain.

  1. Nuclear family.

This is composed of a man, wife and children.  This is the type of family which is mostly recommended by Christians today.  It is the most common due to Christianity, western education and also due to economic pressure.

  1. Extended family.

This is composed of many nuclear families.  Here an old man may have twelve sons who marry to have each a nuclear family. When all these many nuclea families use one family name of the old man, then it is an extended family.

 

  1. Why do young people seek church weddings?
  2. Christian marriage is permanent
  3. The church gives guidance and counselling to the couple.
  • Church wedding enables couple celebrate marriage with friends, relatives etc.
  1. Church wedding enables one to declare publicly that he/she is married
  2. Marriage is ordained by God hence the great desire to seek it.
  3. It helps the couple to be strong in faith as their best couple helps the young couple in matters of faith.
  • The young Christians seek church weddings so as to get a certificate.
  • The youth would seek church weddings because they know their marriages will last long for they fear to break vows they made in church infront of a great congregation.
  1. The young seek church marriages so as to get God’s blessings.
  2. Church marriages helps to couple to work their salvation as one as they will be helping each other in their Christian walk to heaven.
  3. Because marriage is sacred.
  • It makes couple become members of Christian community
  • To avoid non-Christian marriage.
  • It enables the couple to declare in public that they are married.

 

  1. Why did traditional African communities prefer to have extended families to nuclear families?
  2. Extended family had many relatives than a nuclear family hence many people would join together in consoling members who lost a member.
  3. It was easier for an extended family to pay dowry than a nuclear family.
  • In terms of work force an extended family has many members hence they could do a lot of work as compared to a nuclear family.
  1. It was easier for an extended family to help the orphaned children than in a nuclear family.
  2. In times of hardship like famine the richer members of the extended family would easily help the poor members of the family while this is not possible in a nuclear family.
  3. An extended family is stronger in defence than a nuclear family.

 

  1. Why do you think it was mandatory for everyone to marry in traditional African communities?
  2. It was a way of proving ones fertility
  3. Unmarried people were never respected in traditional African societies no matter how old one was.
  • It was only through marriage that one would be remembered after being named by their children.
  1. Marriage in traditional African communities joined two families together therefore one would marry to have many relatives and friends.
  2. One married to continue the fire of life burning through procreation as the idea of adoption of children is alien to Africans.

 

  1. Define the term abortion. What are some of the reasons advanced for and against abortion?

Definition  –  Abortion is the willful removal of the foetus from the mother’s body while it cannot lead independent life.

Reasons for abortion:

  1. Some people argue that abortion would be justified in pregnancy were as a result of rape.
  2. Others argue that abortion may be justified if done to save the life of the mother, the child or both.
  • Others say that abortion can be justified on economic grounds i.e if the child to be born is going to be a great economic burden.
  1. Others argue that abortion can be justified when the child to be born is likely to be physically deformed.
  2. Others argue that abortion can be justified if a schoolgirl becomes pregnant and wishes to pursue her studies.
  3. Others argue that abortion can be justified if a couple have ‘accidental pregancy’ and they feel they do not need the child or even unmarried people who get pregnancy out of uncommitted love.

 

  1. Reasons against abortion.
  2. Many Christians especially the Catholics argue that abortion equals murder irrespective of the age of the foetus.
  3. They argue that all effort should be made to save the life of the mother and the child but not just to result to abortion.
  • On the view that the child to be born is likely to be physically deformed – they argue that it is not possible to prove this with certainty. They say this is a serous issue that should have no guesswork.
  1. On the argument pertaining to economic burden – they argue that such children could be taken to children’s homes for the orphans and destitute.
  2. On pregnant schoolgirls they argue that the same should give birth first and are allowed to continue with her studies.
  3. If abortion is made freely, many will abuse sex.

 

  1. Discuss in detail factors that are enhancing prostitution today.
  2. The youth will mostly get involved in prostitution due to peer group pressure.
  3. Others are indulging in prostitution due to lack of partners as a result of divorce.
  • Others are getting into prostitution due to unfulfilled sexual desires from their spouses.
  1. Children born and brought up by prostitutes would turn to be prostitutes when they grow up.
  2. Today we have many sugar mammies and sugar daddies who are seriously promoting prostitution.
  3. These days we have very many video and cinema halls, which are showing pornographic videos and films that are leading many to indulge in prostitution.
  • The movement from rural areas to urban areas is in a great deal promoting prostitution.
  • Extreme poverty drives many young and old men to prostitution especially if they have no other source of livelihood.
  1. Great desire for sex promotes prostitution even among the married people.

 

  1. Explain the problems associated with childlessness in marriage today.
  2. In extreme cases it may lead to divorce.
  3. Also extreme cases may lead to suicide especially the woman if the husband adversely accuses her of barrenness.
  • Childless couple always feel incomplete
  1. A man in childless family may engage in heavy drinking to cover frustrations.
  2. Childless couples may result to unfaithfulness to prove their fertility
  3. Childless couple may easily be tempted to steal children.
  • It is easy for childless couples to hate children or those who have children.
  • Many childless couples have constant war amongst themselves because they keep blaming each other.

 

 

 

  1. Explain methods used by Africans in choosing life partners.
  2. In many communities parents of the boy chose the girl to be married to their son.
  3. The boyskingsmen could also choose a suitable girl for their boy.
  • A mature boy was also allowed to choose marriage partner then sought the consent of his parents who gave an approval.
  1. In some other communities mature boys and girls meet and when they fall in love, each consulted their parents who in turn went ahead with payment of dowry.
  2. A marriage partner could be chosen by the boys age mates but sought the parents consent. This method was used in a few communities.
  3. In other communities, for example the Kamba, father of a girl could give his girl to be married by a son whose father is a big friend. In this case the consent of the boy and girls was sought.

 

  1. Discuss the factors that make some people abstain from marriage.
  2. Early pregnancies of girls make them not find willing men to marry them hence opt to lead single parenthood.
  3. Many fear to fail in marriage in particular if they know of their friends who have failed in marriage.
  • Some are barren (women) or impotent (men) hence see no reason of committing themselves into marriage.
  1. Others are celibate i.e they choose not to marry so as to serve God as priests, nuns, monks etc.
  2. Others decide not to marry if they have heavy family burdens to carry.
  3. Others sacrifice their marriages on the altar of their loved careers e.g women who join the military forces may stick into their career at the expense of marriage.

 

  1. Explain what Paul taught the Corinthians about marriage.
  2. Paul taught the Corinthians not to marry non-Christians – the believers should not be yoked together with non-believers.
  3. He taught them to choose celibacy like him if they wanted to serve God better.
  • Paul taught those who separated or divorced not to seek marriage again so long as their spouses were living otherwise that be equal to adultery.
  1. He taught the Corinthian church that those who lost their spouses could re-marry to avoid temptations to sexual immorality.
  2. Paul taught the Corinthian church that marriage was permanent hence there was no room for divorce.
  3. He advised the Corinthians that those who are married should not deny each other their conjugal rights.
  • Paul advised the married Corinthians not to separate for long to avoid the sin of immorality.

 

  1. Explain the problems a Kenyan youth would encounter today.
  2. The spirit of materialism as everybody today wants to acquire more and more can catch up a youth.
  3. A youth today is faced with problems of pre-marital sex.
  • A youth may be caught up in tribal conflicts.
  1. Today the youth are faced with acute problem of unemployment.
  2. Today’s youth is experiencing problems of broken families. Today divorce is on the increase resulting to single parenthood.
  3. Today’s youth does not know which culture to follow, modern (western) or traditional culture.
  • Temptations to engage in drug abuse are a today’s problem to the youth.

 

  1. Explain methods through which Christians can resolve misunderstanding between parents and their children.
  2. By Christians being role models to be followed
  3. Through prayers christens can bring proper understanding
  • Christians can provide guidance and counselling to both children and their parents
  1. Christians can solve misunderstandings by being frank in their judgement
  2. By committing children to Gods will.
  3. By seeking help from church ministers.

 

  1. What are the characteristics of an ideal Christian family?
  2. An ideal Christian family is monogamous
  3. An ideal Christian family exercises great degree of tolerance among the members.
  • Lover governs in an ideal Christian family.
  1. In an ideal Christian family parents guide their children in spiritual issues.
  2. An ideal Christian family is one that is started by God.
  3. In an ideal Christian family members help each other.
  • An ideal Christian family is live-long
  • Children have great respect towards parents in an ideal Christian family.
  1. In an ideal Christian family members pray together daily
  2. Forgiveness dominates an ideal Christian family.
  3. Incase children misbehave in a Christian family they are given discipline in great love.

 

  1. What do you think children should be told about God at an early age?
  2. To give them a sense of belonging to the Christian community
  3. To instill in them an awareness of God.
  • To follow the example of Christ.
  1. To be conversant with the true teaching of their church
  2. To learn how to trust, obey and give themselves to God.
  3. To learn how to communicate to God through prayer.
  • To acquit themselves with the religious practices of their church
  • To enable them become members of the church.

 

  1. Explain briefly the side effects of rape in Kenya.
  2. Today most of the rapists are being imprisoned with canning
  3. Rape may result to unwanted pregnancies.
  • Ladies who are raped do not forget the experiences throughout their lives.
  1. The raped ladies may loss dignity in their societies.
  2. Rape results to contracting of STD and AIDS which is most prevalent those days.
  3. Rape in extreme case may make the victim to commit suicide. The lady may commit suicide due to the social stigma or the man may commit suicide while fearing the punishment that follows after he is arrested.

 

  1. Why do you think there are some many cases of divorce today?
  2. One cause of divorce today is domestic violence – men beating their wives or wives beating their husbands.
  3. Increased extra marital sex.
  • Lack of communication between the married people.
  1. Childlessness caused by impotence of men or infertility or bareness of women.
  2. Religious differences among the married members
  3. Cultural differences caused by people who are married from difference cultures e.g a Luhya marrying a Boran.
  • Sexually transmitted diseases e.g Aids.
  • Great gap in education level between the husband and wife.
  1. Differences caused by people’s careers. Some people value their careers more than their marriages.

 

  1. What was the important of polygamy in Traditional African Societies?
  2. In Traditional African communities polygamy was a sign of prestige.
  3. Polygamy increased chances of each woman getting married
  • Polygamy ensured that incase one wife was barren the others could bear children.
  1. Many wives gave birth to many children which inturn ensured large labour force.
  2. Polygamy reduced cases of sexual immorality.

 

  1. What steps can the church and state take to control irresponsible sex?
  2. Government and church should train guidance and counseling personnel to vigorously counsel students in schools and even adults.
  3. The government should have severe punishment to the sex abusers e.g President Moi on 30/06/2001 suggested that whoever transmits Aids trough rape should be hanged.
  • Conduct family life and sex education to the youth as well as the mature people.
  1. Set strict laws controlling sex behaviours.
  2. The government may refuse licences to areas encouraging immorality
  3. The churches should teach sound doctrine on matters pertaining to sex abuse.

 

  1. Why do you think Christian families have difficulties living peacefully together?
  2. Permissiveness and peer group pressure
  3. Unfaithfulness on the part of married partners.
  • Drug abuse by parents and mature children
  1. Bareness for the wife, impotence for the husband or S.T.D.s
  2. Lack of tolerance on the married partners.
  3. Religious differences can bring lack of harmony in the family.
  • Lack of dialogue between the marriage partners and even between parents and children.
  • Greed for wealth can cause differences in the family.
  1. Refusal of conjugal rights by any part of the marriage partner.
  2. Misuse of family resources e.g selling family properties secretly.
  3. Cultural differences especially where the husband and wife do not come form same ethnic community.
  • Generation gap between parents and children
  • Child abuse, which is on the increase when, parents (some) are beating, raping, playing sex with their children.
  • When family members are separated for long
  1. Criminology among children.

 

  1. State five conditions under which Traditional African communities granted divorce.
  2. If the woman had broken her virginity before marriage
  3. If one has inherited diseases
  • Failure to honour and respect in-laws
  1. Failure to pay dowry.
  2. If one partner became a thief
  3. If one partner became cruel to the other
  • If couple was related by blood.

 

  1. How has money economy changed the Traditional of African concept of Bride wealth?
  2. Today bridewealth is longer shared by the extended family of the bride but only given to the brides father.
  3. Money given as dowry de-humanises the bride rather than make her feel accepted in the community.
  • It is no longer seen as a token of appreciation but as a “price”.
  1. The girl is seen as an investment by her father which can be purchased as a commodity by her husband.
  2. It is no longer fixed, but it can be bargained.
  3. It is now paid in cash money and not in form of animals and other gifts.
  • Nowadays there is greed and exploitation by the brides father.
  • Instead of dowry being a cementing factor between the two families and also the couple it has become a cause of disharmony and friction.
  1. These days dowry is fixed according to the status, education and position of the girl.

 

  1. Give reasons why you think Christians make vows in marriages.
  2. To make marriage permanent
  3. To have a companion
  • To obey God’s command
  1. To show how they love each other
  2. To procreate for continuity
  3. To provide good atmosphere for blessing
  • To show to the public their intentions
  • To declare total commitment to each other.

 

  1. Explain how alcoholism has affected marriage in Kenya today.
  2. Alcoholism may lead to loss of job due to failure to carry out ones duties consequently leading to financial constraints in the home.
  3. Alcoholism brews quarrels and fights between couples
  • Alcoholism endangers ones family in that it may cause fatal accidents.
  1. Alcoholism leads to misuse of family finances at the expense of basic family needs.
  2. Alcoholism may lead to malnutrition of children due to lack of balanced diet.
  3. Alcoholism may make the husband to be absent from home hence abdicating family responsibilities.
  • Alcoholism may cause death of both parents reducing children to poor orphans.
  • The spread of STD / AIDS is prevalent among alcoholics.
  1. Alcoholism lowers the social status of the family especially when the wife is an alcoholic in our African setting.
  2. Alcoholism is a major cause of immorality hence unfaithfulness.
  3. Alcoholism is causing terminal sicknesses like kidney failure liver disease etc.
  • Alcoholism may cause birth of deformed children especially for expectant mothers who suffer from foetal alcoholic syndrome.

 

 

  1. What were the duties of children towards parents in Traditional African societies.
  2. Children helped their parents on daily work.
  3. Children were supposed to obey or respect their parents
  • They were supposed to remember their parents after their parents death
  1. Children had a duty of looking after and inheriting their parents property
  2. Children were supposed to give their parents decent burials
  3. Children had a duty of caring for their parents during parents old age.
  • Children must name their offsprings after their parents.

 

  1. Why was marriage in traditional African communities seen as a covenant?
  2. Breaking of marriage had serious consequences
  3. Ancestors were involved to protect and bless marriages
  • It bound two families together
  1. There are witnesses
  2. Vows are made promising to be loyal to each other.
  3. There is a ceremony to express the relationship
  • Conditions are set e.g payment of dowry.

 

  1. What are the causes of unfaithfulness among the married today in Kenya?
  2. Peer group pressure
  3. Lengthy separation between the couple.
  • Lack of sexual satisfaction by one partner
  1. Lack of dialogue in marriage.
  2. Lack of self control
  3. Addiction to alcohol may easily lure one into extramarital sex any partner can fall victim to this.
  • Threats from bosses at places of work mostly on married women one can yield to such pressures to safeguard ones job.
  • Poverty can push a married woman to engage in adultery for economic gains.
  1. Unfaithfulness in marriage can result from lack of interest in the marriage partner.
  2. Need for revenge – a married woman can easily fall victim to unfaithfulness if she discovers that her husband does it.

 

  1. What was the significance of marriage in African Traditional communities?
  2. Marriage was importance because it promoted ones status in community
  3. Through marriage one gives birth to children who continue his family lineage after death.
  • Marriage is importance because it enables one to get legitimate children.
  1. Through marriage one proves that he is a good leader especially if he manages his family well
  2. It is only through marriage that one can raise a family.

 

  1. What are the initiates taught about sex?
  2. The secrets and mystery of man and woman relationship
  3. How to approach and behave towards members of the opposite sex.
  • There own procreation systems
  1. When the refrain from sexual relationships
  2. The place and importance of sex in marriage
  3. They were taught sex was sacred.

 

  1. In details outline how Kenyan churches help to strengthen marriage bonds:
  2. During weddings, churches ensure that the bride and bridegroom exchange vows which they are expected to keep till death separates them.
  3. Churches hold prayers for families
  • Churches write books and materials on family life.
  1. Churches organise guidance and counselling to those preparing to marry.
  2. Churches provides pastoral care to families both young and old
  3. Churches organise couples’ seminars and workshops
  • Churches provide teachings on how to have successful Christian marriages.
  • Church members provide both moral and material support to families in times of hardships like sickness and even when they are bereaved.
  1. Churches intervene when there are misunderstandings between husband and wife.
  2. Churches prepare family life programmes which enlightens the parents and children on their duties in a family.
  3. Christian churches do not encourage divorce hence this stand makes couples to stay together.
  • Some churches discipline errant members in matters pertaining to marriage.
  • Churches encourage members to hold family prayers at home which inturn unite the family.

 

  1. Why do you think polygamy cannot work in modern Kenya?
  2. Polygamy breeds quarrels and fights in families
  3. Polygamy reduces women to inferior positions in marriage relationships
  • Polygamy results to bitterness between co-wives and their children.
  1. Polygamy brings problems of dirding inheritance after the man dies that is why we have court tussles ranging burial places to who should get what in ones estates.
  2. Some women may give love portions to the man while trying to posses him and they may lead to his death.
  3. Polygamy can easily lead to sexual promiscuity
  • Polygamy can easily cause poverty where a man has very many wives and children to support.
  • Polygamy can drive a man to mental confusion in particular when the man is torn between the wives.
  1. Polygamy can cause great rivalry which can result to murder or suicide.
  2. Polygamy results to favourism to one wife or certain children at the expense of the others.

 

  1. What are the obvious results of uncontrolled sex among the youth?
  2. It may lead to the youth dropping from school.
  3. Unwanted pregnancies
  • There are high chances of contracting sexually transmitted diseases.
  1. Frequent quarrels with the parents especially when they are trying to correct the youth.
  2. It may lead to single parenthood
  3. Some girls may be forced to abort
  • It may cause a psychological stigma to the affected girls especially if they do not marry and are leading miserable life.

 

  1. Outline the main causes of sexual immorality among the youth in today’s world.
  2. Peer group pressure forces the youth to indulge in sexual immorality.
  3. Lack of relevant education to the youth
  • Drugs abuse among the youth especially the abuse of alcohol.
  1. Pornographic films and literature
  2. Parents have neglected their roles as role models and counsellors to their own children.
  3. Influence from T.Vs, Videos etc.
  • Lack of privacy as found in urban areas where a couple shares a single room with mature youth.
  • There is a lot of permissiveness in our modern society.
  1. Unemployment that is the order of the day even among university graduates so leading many to indulge in sexual immorality.
  2. Today we have condoms in all public places. This is encouraging the youth to involve themselves in sex abuse without fear of contracting S.T.Ds and even becoming pregnant.
  3. The youth lack people who can set good examples for them to follow.
  • Frustration is leading many youth into sexual abuse.

 

  1. What steps did Traditional African societies take to ensure there were few pregnancies before marriage?
  2. Opposite sexes respected each other.
  3. Sound sex education was given to the youth.
  • There was severe punishment to the girls who became pregnant before marriage.
  1. Boys and girls were not allowed to mix in the absence of responsible elders.
  2. Virginity was highly valued in many traditional African societies
  3. Mothers monitored their daughters’ conduct to safeguard against any sex abuse.
  • Young men who misbehaved were heavily fined or given bad nicknames.
  • The youth were explicitly explained the dangers of irresponsible sex.
  1. There were rigid taboos on sex relationships, which were observed.
  2. List down way in which a Christian can show responsibility in the community.
  3. A Christian can evangelise to the non-Christians.
  4. A Christian visit and pray for the sick
  • A Christian can lead an exemplary life that can be coveted by everyone.
  1. A Christian can care for the needy
  2. A Christian can share in the problems of others.

 

  1. Critically examine factors that may undermine marriage in our modern Kenya:
  2. When in-laws become key decision makers in any marriage
  3. The current economic problems facing Kenya
  • Alcoholism is the major undermines to Kenyan marriage
  1. Negative peer group pressure i.e one is advised wrongly on issues pertaining to marriage.
  2. Rampant S.T.Ds especially AIDS
  3. Conflict emanating from inter-cultural marriages
  • Differences as a result of different faith e.g catholic married to S.D.A.
  • The great pressure exerted by the women’s liberation movement is a sending negative signals in some marriages.
  1. Increased incidents of extra-marital sex among the married
  2. Deviant children are undermining marriage because parents blame each other when children become ill-behaved. In many cases the man blames the wife and conflict sets in.

 

  1. Explain how a Christian marriage qualifies to be a modern covenant.
  2. In marriage there is a sign of a ring and a marriage certificate.
  3. There are conditions – both take marriage vows promising to stay together till they die.
  • We have a church wedding ceremony
  1. In Christian marriage we have joining together of a man and a wife which are the two parties involved.
  2. In a Christian marriage there are so many witnesses including parents, relatives, best couples and friends.
  3. There are consequences.

 

 

 

  1. What are the problems that are resulting from inter-cultural marriages:
  2. There are problems of inheritance because different cultures have different beliefs on inheritance.
  3. There will be problems in the way they view the role of women/ men in marriage and this opposed view can bring conflict in marriage.
  • Different cultures have different norms, which are likely to bring conflicts in inter-cultural marriages.
  1. Different cultures have different taboos, which may also bring conflict in marriages.
  2. The feelings by one partner that his/her partner’s cultures are primitive salvage or uncivilised.

 

  1. Explain the significance of dowry in African Traditional Society.
  2. Dowry in A.T.S. was a goal for marriage
  3. Dowry showed appreciation by the boys family to the girls family
  • It was a sign of the girls presence in her home.
  1. It served as a compensation to the loss of the girl
  2. It was a constant reminder that the girl was not cheap.

 

  1. Give reasons why many people today are for monogamous marriage.
  2. If is not easy to contract sexually transmitted disease especially when the partners are faithful.
  3. It is easy to plan a monogamous marriage
  • A couple have a small family to bring up
  1. Such a marriage has fewer problems
  2. It is an ideal marriage especially when the parents are good models to their children.

 

  1. Explain how the modern church can rehabilitate prostitutes.
  2. The church can rehabilitate prostitutes by showing them love.
  3. The church should try to give prostitutes an alternative means of earning a living e/g providing them with employment.
  • The church should visit the prostitutes regularly
  1. The church should give these prostitutes food and assist them to meet their basic needs
  2. The church members should encourage them to go to church where they can hear sound Christian doctrine.
  3. The church should give them some technical skills, which would help them to be self-employed.

 

  1. Explain how marriage in traditional African communities contributed to the social relationship in the communities.
  2. Marriage controlled behaviour of individuals within the relationship
  3. Any marital differences were solved by the family of the community
  • Marriage brought together the two families involved
  1. Marriage encouraged assisting each other in that one felt obliged to educate his sisters and brother in-law
  2. Marriage encouraged sharing of meals and ceremonies. During marriage feasts, all people were involved and they enjoyed themselves.
  3. Children who were born out of marriage formed a link between the families and ancestors.

 

  1. Explain the African concept on human sexuality.
  2. In Traditional African societies it was highly valued and preserved till marriage
  3. Africans believed and taught that sex was sacred and secretive
  • The full meaning of sexuality was fully realised in marriage
  1. Sex offenders were severely punished.
  2. It was only through sex that life was transmitted.
  3. It was a taboo to expose sex organs
  • In traditional African communities it was prohibited to talk about sex in public.
  • In African traditional communities agemates were allowed to talk about sex in detail because they underwent same circumcision knife.

 

  1. List down the new privileges enjoyed by a newly circumcised youth in traditional African communities.
  2. One stood a chance of being chosen as a community leader.
  3. An initiate was allowed to marry.
  • Graduating from initiation enabled one to be respected by the community. Many African communities have no respect for the uncircumcised e.g the Kikuyu community call one “kihii”
  1. After initiation one could own property.
  2. After initiation one was allowed to pour out libation and offer sacrifices.
  3. After initiation one could become an elder
  • Initiation enabled one to change his/ her status. One became a husband/ wife, father/ mother.

 

  1. Explain the similarities found between Old Testament and African and African traditional marriages.
  2. In both dowry was a must to be paid
  3. Procreation was key factor in marriage, as a result Abraham had to take his maid for the purpose of having a child.
  • In both woman we handled as a property – Ref. Judges 19:24-27.
  1. In both there was wife inheritance
  2. In both polygamy was practised
  3. In both marriage could be arranged – a good example in old Testament is when Abraham arranged marriage for his son Isaac to marry Rebecca.
  • In both they overcame barrenness by marrying a second wife.
  • In both companionship was to be for mutual relationship.
  1. In both when sufficient reasons were given, divorce was granted.
  2. In both marriage brought good relationship between the two families involved, that is why Solomon married daughters of neighbouring kings to ensure peace.
  3. Wife was subordinate to the husband. Sarah called her husband Abraham “my lord” just as the Nigerian women called their husbands.

 

  1. Outline the importance of courtship in traditional African marriage.
  2. Courtship enabled those involved to get pieces of advice from others who were concerned.
  3. Courtship enabled the involved to negotiate dowry
  • Courtship was important because it enabled one to learn the character of the other person (partner).
  1. Courtship period enabled in-laws, relatives and friends to familiarise themselves with each other.
  2. Courtship period enabled closer understanding between both families
  3. Courtship was important because it allowed the involved to learn the background of each other (partner).

 

  1. Explain reasons why sex before marriage was rare in traditional African communities.
  2. Africans reduced sex before marriage by allowing early marriages
  3. There was severe punishment for sex offenders
  • The youth followed rigid social norms and taboos
  1. Boys and girls mixed rarely and when they did, a mature and responsible elder supervised them.
  2. Sex education for the boys and girls was given during initiation and even continued by the grandparents
  3. Parents and clan members made marriage arrangements for their mature youths.
  • In traditional African communities virginity was highly valued and rewarded.

 

  1. In your own view, how can the church help single parents?
  2. The church can help single parents by encouraging them to get married
  3. The church provides pastoral care, guidance and counselling to single parents.
  • The church should welcome them and even persuade them to join church seminars on family life.
  1. The church should involve them in all church functions to cultivate a sense of belonging to them.
  2. The church should provide single parents with job opportunities.
  3. The church should involve them in all church functions to cultivate a sense of belong to them.
  • The church should visit them as way of showing love to them which they desperately need.

 

  1. What do you think can make a modern preacher not to be popular to the society?
  2. When the preacher practices immorality
  3. When one speaks against murder.
  • When a preacher gives inaccurate preaching.
  1. When one condemns corruption and bribery
  2. When one is against the worshipping of wealth and power.
  3. When one condemns the oppression of the poor by the rich.
  • When a preacher misuses the pulpit e.g he engages in politics on the pulpit.
  • When one condemns false preachers.
  1. When the preacher turns to be corrupt.
  2. When he condemns popular leisure activities
  3. When one does not set oneself as a good model
  • When one is not gender sensitive.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CHEMICAL FAMILIES FORM 2 CHEMISTRY NOTES FREE DOWNLOAD

CHEMICAL FAMILIES;

PATTERNS IN PROPERTIES

Objectives

By the end of this topic, the learner should be able to:

(a)   Identify and write electron arrangement of alkali metals, alkaline earth metals, halogens and noble gases.

(b)   State and explain the trends in physical properties of elements in group I, II, VII and VIII.

(c)   State and explain the trends in reactivity of elements in group I, II, VII and VIII.

(d)   Explain the similarities in chemical formulae of compounds of the elements in a group.

(e)   Explain the unreactive nature of group VIII elements.

(f)    Identify and write electron arrangement of period 3 elements.

(g)   State and explain the trends in physical and chemical properties of the elements in period 3.

CHEMICAL FAMILIES;

PATTERNS IN PROPERTIES

Elements in the same group are said to belong to the same chemical family.

Trends in physical and chemical properties provide useful information in predicting the physical and chemical behaviour of the elements within a family.

 

1. The Alkali Metals

The elements in group I of the periodic table are called Alkali metals.

These include, lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium, caesium and francium. The electron arrangements of the first three alkali metals are as follows:

Lithium (L) : 2.1

Sodium (Na) : 2.8.1

Potassium (k) : 2.8.8.1

Each alkali metal atom has one electron in the outermost energy level. Down the group there is an increase in the number of occupied energy levels.

Task: Draw the atomic structure of the first 3 Alkali Metals.

 

Gradation in Size of the Atom and Ion

It is not possible to measure the sizes of atoms and ions of elements in the laboratory due to their small size. The table below gives a summary of the atomic and ionic radii of the Alkali

Metals.

Atomic radiusis the distance between the centre of the nucleus of an atom and the outermost energy level occupied by an electron or electrons.

Discussion Questions

  1. State and explain the trends in the atomic and ionic radiidown the group

The atomic radii and ionic radii of the alkali metals increase down the group. This is because each alkali metal has one more occupied energy level than the preceding member in the group.

Lithium has two energy levels. Sodium has three while potassium has four. The outermost electron in a sodium atom is therefore further from the nucleus than the outermost electron in a lithium atom. This explains the increase in the atomic and ionic radii down the group.

  1. How does the ionic radius and atomic radius of an element compare?

The ionic radius of an alkali metal is less than its atomic radius.

An alkali metal forms an ion by losing the single electron from the outermost energy level. The resulting ion (cation) has one occupied energy level less than the corresponding atom.

When an atom loses an electron to form a positively charged ion, the remaining electrons experience greater nuclear attraction. The remaining energy levels move closer to the nucleus resulting in a reduction in the radius.

 

Physical Properties of Alkali metals

The table below shows some physical properties of alkali metals.

Ionization energyis the minimum energy required to remove an electron from the outermost energy level of an atom in the gaseous state.

 

 

Discussion Questions

State and explain the trends in the following properties down the group?

  • Appearance

The alkali metals have a shiny metallic lustre when freshly cut. However, the surface quickly tarnishes. The surface tarnishes because of reacting with air.

  • Ease of cutting

The alkali metals are soft and easy to cut.

The softness and ease to cut increases down the group due to the decrease in the strength of the forces holding the atoms together as you move down the group.

  • Melting and boiling points.

The alkali metals have relatively low melting and boiling points.

The melting and boiling points decrease down the group due to the weakening of the forces holding the atoms together.

The strength of the forces holding atoms together depends on the size of the atoms. The larger the atoms, the weaker the force. Thus as the atomic radius increases the forces of attraction between the atoms weaken, hence the decrease in the melting and boiling points down the group.

  • Electrical conductivity.

Alkali metals are good conductors of heat and electricity. Conductivity in metals is due to the presence of delocalisedelectrons in the structure of the metal. Since they all have one electron in their outermost energy level, their conductivity is similar.

In metals, the electrons in the outermost energy level move randomly throughout the metallic structure. Since the electrons do not remain in one fixed position, they are said to be delocalised.

(v)   1st ionization energy

Down the group from lithium to potassium, the 1st ionization energy decreases. This means that less energy is needed to remove the electron from the outermost energy level of a potassium atom than a sodium atom and a lithium atom. This is because the effective force of attraction on the outermost electron by the positive nucleus decreases with increasing atomic size and distance from the nucleus.

 

Chemical Properties of Alkali Metals

Alkali metals react by losing the one electron from their outermost energy level to attain a stable electron configuration. Their reactivity increases down the group.

Reaction with air and water

  • Lithium, sodium and potassium react vigorously with both air and water. Potassium is the most reactive and lithium, the least reactive.
  • When sodium is exposed, it reacts with moisture in the air to form sodium hydroxide. The sodium hydroxide further reacts with carbon (IV) oxide in the air to form sodium carbonate.

2Na(s) + 2H2O(l)  2NaOH(aq) + H2(g)

2NaOH(aq) + CO2 (g)  Na2CO3 · H2O(s)

  • Sodium burns in air with a yellow flame to form a yellowish white solid which is mainly sodium oxide.

Sodium + Oxygen  Sodium Oxide

4Na(s) + O2(g) 2Na2O(s)

  • When sodium burns in air enriched with oxygen it forms mainly sodium peroxide.

Sodium + Oxygen  Sodium peroxide

2Na(s) + O2(g)  Na2O2(s)

  • Potassium burns in air with a lilac flame to form a white solid which is potassium oxide.

Potassium + oxygen  Potassium oxide

4K(s) + O2(g)  2K2O(s)

 

 

 

The observations made when alkali metals react with water are summarised in the table below.

Metal Observation when metal reacts with water Rate of reaction
Lithium Lithium floats in water. A colourless gas is produced.
The gas does not ignite spontaneously. The resulting solution turns red litmus paper blue.
Vigorous
Sodium Sodium metal darts on the water surface as it melts into a silvery ball. A hissing sound is produced. A colourless gas is produced which may ignite spontaneously. The solution formed is alkaline. More vigorous
Potassium The metal darts about on the surface of the water and melts into a silvery ball. A colourless gas is produced which spontaneously bursts into a flame. Potassium vapour burns with a lilac flame. The resulting solution is alkaline. Explosive
  • Alkali metals react with water to form alkaline solutions and hydrogen gas.

Metal + Water  Metal hydroxide + Hydrogen

Lithium + Water  Lithium hydroxide + hydrogen gas

2Li(s) + 2H2O(l)  2LiOH(aq) + H2(g)

Sodium + Water  Sodium hydroxide + Hydrogen gas

2Na(s) + 2H2O(l)  2NaOH(aq) + H2(g)

Potassium + water  Potassium hydroxide + Hydrogen gas

2K(s) + 2H2O(l)  2KOH(aq) + H2(g)

 

  • Potassium is the most reactive alkali metal. This is because the electron in the outermost energy level is loosely held by the nucleus and is easily removed during a reaction.
  • The ease of losing valence electrons increases down the group as the atomic radius increases, hence the increase in reactivity from lithium to potassium.

Reaction with chlorine

Alkali metals react with chlorine gas to form the corresponding metal chlorides. The reactivity of alkali metals with chlorine increases down the group. This is because of the increase in atomic radius which leads to increasing ease to lose the electron in the outermost energy level.

Task: Cut a small piece of sodium and place it in a deflagrating spoon. Warm it and quickly lower it into a gas jar containing chlorine. Record your observations.

Discussion Questions

  1. What is observed when a hot piece of sodium metal is lowered into a gas jar containing chlorine?

When hot sodium metal is lowered into chlorine gas, the metal bursts into flame, white fumes of sodium chloride are formed.

  1. What is formed when sodium metal reacts with chlorine?

Sodium metal + chlorine gas  Sodium chloride

2Na(s) + Cl2(g)  2NaCl(s)

  1. Predict how lithium and potassium would react with chlorine.

Lithium reacts less vigorously with chlorine while potassium reacts much more violently with chlorine than sodium.

Lithium + chlorine gas  Lithium chloride

2Li(s) + Cl2(g)  2LiCl(s)

Potassium + chlorine gas  Potassium chloride

2K(s) + Cl2(g)  2KCl (s)

Similarity of Ions and formulae of some compounds of Alkali metals.

Formulae of hydroxides, oxides and Chlorides of Alkali metals

Discussion Question

Explain the similarity in the chemical formulae of the compounds formed between alkali metal ions and hydroxides, oxides and chloride ions.

Each alkali metal ion combines with a single hydroxide ion to form the respective hydroxide namely; Lithium hydroxide (LiOH), sodium hydroxide (NaOH) and potassium hydroxide (KOH). This is because the valency of Group I elements is one. The same applies in the formation of lithium chloride (LiCl), sodium chloride (NaCl) and potassium chloride (KCl)

Two alkali metal ions combine with one oxide ion to form the corresponding oxide namely; Lithium oxide (L2O), sodium oxide (Na2O) and potassium oxide (K2O).

This is because the valency of oxygen is two. Therefore one oxygen ion requires two alkali metal ions to combine with to form the corresponding oxide.

Due to their high reactivity, alkali metals are not found as free elements. They are normally found in the combined state in the earths’ crust.

 

Uses of Alkali metals and their compounds

  1. Sodium is used in the manufacture of Sodium cyanide for use in the extraction of gold.
  2. Lithium is used in the manufacture of special high strength glasses and ceramics
  3. Lithium compounds are used in the manufacture of dry cells for use in mobile phones, laptops, stop watches and zero emission electric vehicles.
  4. A molten mixture of sodium and potassium is used as a coolant in nuclear reactors.
  5. Sodium vapour is used to produce the yellow glow in streetlights.
  6. Molten sodium is used as a reducing agent in the extraction of titanium from titanium (IV) chloride.

TiCl4(g) + 4Na(l)  Ti(s) + 4NaCl(l)

  1. Sodium chloride is used as a food additive.
  2. A mixture of Sodium hydroxide (caustic soda) and carbon disulphide is used in the manufacture of artificial silk called rayon.

 

 

2. Alkaline Earth Metals

The elements in group II of the periodic table are called alkaline earth metals.

They consist of beryllium, magnesium, calcium, strontium, barium and radium. The electron arrangement of the first three alkaline earth metals is as follows:

Beryllium (Be) ; 2.2

Magnesium (Mg); 2.8.2

Calcium (Ca) ; 2.8.8.2

An atom of an alkaline earth metal has two electrons in the outermost energy level.

Task: Draw the atomic structure of the first 3 Alkaline Earth Metals

 

Gradation in Size of Atom and Ion

The table below summaries the atomic and ionic sizes of the Alkaline Earth Metals.

Discussion Question

State and explain the trends in atomic and ionic sizes down the group

Among the alkaline earth metals, theatomic radius increases down the group as more energy levels are occupied.

Beryllium has the smallest atomic radius among the alkaline earth metals because it has the least number of occupied energy levels.

Group II elements form ions by losing the two electrons in the outermost energy level in order to attain a stable electron arrangement. The loss of two electrons in the outermost energy level accounts for the smaller ionic radius compared to the atomic radius of the corresponding atom.

Ion Electron arrangement
Be2+ 2
Mg2+ 2.8
Ca2+ 2.8.8

Beryllium ion with only one occupied energy level is therefore the smallest ion.

 

Physical Properties of the Alkaline Earth Metals

The table below summarises the Physical Properties of Alkaline Earth Metals

Discussion Questions

  1. What is the appearance of a polished surface of an alkaline earth metal?
  • When an alkaline earth metal is polished, it acquires a metallic lustre.
  • Alkaline earth metals lose their metallic lustre when exposed to air because of oxidation.
  • The purpose of polishing the surface of the alkaline earth metals before using them in experiments is to remove the thin oxide layer that usually forms on their surface. Both magnesium and calcium have a metallic lustre.
  1. What is observed when:

(a)   One cuts an alkaline earth metal?

  • Magnesium is hard to cut with a knife. However it is ductile and malleable. Calcium is brittle hence it cannot be cut with a knife.

A ductile material is one which can be drawn into a wire. Materials which can be hammered into sheets are said to be malleable. A brittle substance is one which is hard and likely to break.

  1. Magnesium and calcium are separately used to complete an electric circuit?

Both magnesium and calcium are good conductors of heat and electricity due to the presence of delocalised electrons.

  1. How do the physical properties of alkaline earth metals compare with those of alkali metals?
  2. State and explain the trend in:
  • Melting and boiling points

The melting and boiling points of beryllium are very high compared to other alkaline earth metals. This is because the beryllium atom is very small and the forces of attraction between the atoms are very strong.

Down the group the melting point and boiling points decrease. This is because in metals atoms are held together by forces of attraction between positive nuclei and delocalised electrons. As the atomic radius increase this attraction decreases because of the increasing distance from the positive nucleus to the delocalised electrons. This explains why the melting point and boiling point decreases down the group.

  • Ionization energy down the group.

The first and second ionization energies decreases down the group. This is because the effective force of attraction on the outermost electron by the positive nucleus decreases with increasing atomic size and distance from the nucleus.

The first ionization energy for magnesium is the minimum amount of energy required to remove one electron from the outer most energy level.

Mg(g)  Mg+(g) + e (1st I.E. = 736 kJmol–1)

The second ionisation energy of magnesium is the minimum amount of energy required to remove a second electron from a magnesium ion with a single positive charge.

Mg2+(g)  Mg2+(g) + e (2nd I.E. = 1450 kJmol)

  1. Explain why the second ionization energy is always higher than the first ionization energy.

Once an electron has been lost from an atom, the overall positive charge holds the remaining electrons more firmly. This then means that removing a second electron form the ion requires more energy than the first electron.

Chemical Properties of Alkaline Earth Metals

 

Reaction with air and water

 

Discussion Questions

  1. What is observed when magnesium and calcium are heated in air?

Magnesium burns in air with a blinding brilliant white flame forming a white solid. The white solid is a mixture of magnesium oxide and magnesium nitride.

Magnesium + Oxygen  Magnesium oxide

2Mg(s) + O2(g) 2MgO(s)

Magnesium + nitrogen  Magnesium nitride

3Mg(s) + N2(g)  Mg3N2(s)

Calcium on the other hand burns with a faint orange-red flame forming a white solid, which is a mixture of calcium oxide and calcium nitride.

Calcium + Oxygen  Calcium oxide

2Ca(s) + O2(g)  2CaO(s)

Calcium + Nitrogen  Calcium nitride

3Ca(s) + N2(g)  Ca3N2(s)

The trend in reactivity of the alkaline earth metals when burning in air is not clear due to the oxide coating on calcium.

  1. What is observed when magnesium and calcium are placed in water and solution tested with litmus paper?

Magnesium reacts slowly with cold water to form magnesium hydroxide and hydrogen gas bubbles of which stick on the surface of the metal. Magnesium hydroxide dissolves slightly in water to form an alkaline solution.

Magnesium + Water  Magnesium hydroxide + Hydrogen gas

Mg(s) + 2H2O(I)  Mg(OH)2(aq) + H2(g)

A steady stream of hydrogen gas is evolved when calcium reacts with cold water. A white suspension appears in the beaker due to the formation of calcium hydroxide which is sparingly soluble in water. The calcium hydroxide solution formed is alkaline.

Calcium + Water  Calcium hydroxide + Hydrogen gas

Ca(s) + 2H2O (s) Ca(OH)2(aq) + H2(g)

  1. Which of the two metals is more reactive?

The atomic radii increase from beryllium to calcium. Therefore, the two outer electrons in a calcium atom are more loosely held by the positive nucleus than the outer electrons in magnesium. This means that less energy is required to remove the outer electrons in calcium than in magnesium. Calcium is therefore more reactive than magnesium.

The order of reactivity of the alkaline earth metals increases down the group.

Reaction with steam

Magnesium reacts slowly with cold water. However, it reacts faster with steam.

To react magnesium with steam, Put some wet sand at the bottom of a test tube. Insert a clean piece of magnesium ribbon (5 cm) into the middle of the test-tube ensure that the coil touches the sides of the tube. Set up the apparatus as shown in below.

 

Heat the sand gently first, then heat the magnesium ribbon strongly until it glows, then continue to heat the wet sand to generate steam. Record your observations. Test any gas produced using a burning splint. Before the heating is discontinued, the delivery tube should be removed from the water.

 

 

Discussion Questions

  1. State and explain what is observed in the reaction tube.

Magnesium burns in steam with a white flame. A white solid is formed and a colourless gas is produced. A pop sound is produced when a burning splint is introduced into a test-tube containing the gas. Therefore the colourless gas is hydrogen.

Magnesium + Steam  Magnesium oxide + Hydrogen

Mg(s) + H2O(g)  MgO(s) + H2(g)

  1. Why is the wet sand heated initially?

The sand is heated initially to drive out the air that would otherwise react with magnesium by generating some steam.

  1. Why should the delivery tube be removed before heating is discontinued?

The delivery tube is removed from the water before heating is stopped at the end of the experiment to prevent sucking back as the apparatus cools.

  1. Explain the observation made when a burning splint is lowered into a test tube of the gas collected.

A pop sound is produced when a burning splint is introduced into a test-tube containing the gas. Therefore the colourless gas is hydrogen.

Reaction with chlorine

Discussion Questions

  1. State and explain what is observed when chlorine gas reacts with:
  • A burning piece of magnesium

When a burning piece of magnesium is lowered into a gas jar containing chlorine, the metal continues to burn with a brilliant white flame to form a white powder. The white ash formed is magnesium chloride.

Magnesium + Chlorine  Magnesium chloride

Mg(s) + Cl2(s)  MgCl2(s)

  • A hot piece of calcium

Calcium may not react steadily with chlorine. This is because a coating of calcium oxide is formed first when the metal is heated. However, under suitable conditions calcium may react with chlorine to form calcium chloride.

Calcium + Chlorine gas  Calcium chloride

Ca(s) + Cl2(g)  CaCl2(s)

 

 

 

 

 

Reaction with dilute acids

Discussion Questions

  1. State and explain what is observed when magnesium ribbon reacts with dilute hydrochloric and sulphuric acids.

There is effervescence when a piece of magnesium is placed in hydrochloric acid. The gas produced during the reaction produces a ‘pop’ sound when a burning splint is introduced to the mouth of the test tube. This shows that the gas produced is hydrogen.

Magnesium + Hydrochloric acid  Magnesium chloride + Hydrogen gas

Mg(s) + 2HCl(aq)  MgCl2(aq)+ H2(g)

Magnesium + Sulphuric acid  Magnesium sulphate + hydrogen gas

Mg(s) + H2SO4(aq)  MgSO4(aq) + H2(g)

  1. State and explain what is observed when calcium reacts with dilute hydrochloric and sulphuric acids.

Calcium reacts with dilute hyrdrochloric acid to produce hydrogen gas and calcium chloride.

Calcium + Hydrochloric acid  calcium chloride + hydrogen gas

Ca(s) + 2HCl(aq)  CaCl2(aq) + H2(g)

When sulphuric (VI) acid is used, the reaction quickly stops. This is due to to the formation of insoluble calcium sulphate which forms a coating on the surface of calcium metal preventing further reaction.

Calcium + Sulphuric acid  Calcium sulphate + Hydrogen gas

Ca(s) + H2SO4 (aq)  CaSO4(s) + H2(g)

 

Similarity of ions and formulae of some compounds of alkaline earth metals

All alkaline earth metals have a valency of two (2). Hence the chemical formulae of their compounds are similar.

Formation of hydroxides, oxides and chlorides of alkaline earth metals.

Both magnesium and calcium ions have a valency of 2. The hydroxide ion and chloride ion have a valency of 1. Therefore two hydroxide ions combine with one magnesium ion to form magnesium hydroxide, Mg(OH)2. Similarly, two chloride ions will combine with one magnesium ion to form magnesium chloride, MgCl2.

On the other hand, the oxide ion has valency of 2. therefore, one calcium ion combines with one oxide ion to form calcium oxide, CaO.

 

 

(e) Uses of some Alkaline Earth Metals and their Compounds

  1. Magnesium is used in the manufacture of magnesium hydroxide which is used as anti-acid medicine. This is because magnesium hydroxide is a non-toxic base.
  2. A low-density alloy of magnesium and aluminium is used in aeroplane construction.
  3. Hydrated calcium sulphate (Plaster of Paris) is used in hospitals to set fractured bones.
  4. Cement is made by heating a mixture of calcium carbonate (limestone), clay and sand.
  5. Calcium carbonate is used in the extraction of iron.
  6. Calcium oxide (quicklime) is added to acid soils to raise pH for agriculture purposes.
  7. Calcium nitrate is used as a nitrogenous fertilizer.
  8. Magnesium oxide is used in the lining of furnances.
  9. Barium sulphate is used in diagnosis of ulcers.
  10. Barium nitrate is used to produce the green flame in fireworks.
  11. Calcium carbonate is mixed with oil to make putty.

 

 

 

3. Halogens

The word halogen is derived from the Greek word ‘halo’ meaning salt and ‘gen’ meaning producer. Halogen thus means salt producer. Halogens are non-metals in Group VII of the periodic table. Fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine are the first four members of the halogen group. The electron arrangement of fluorine and chlorine is as follows:

Fluorine 2.7

Chlorine 2.8.7

Task: Draw the atomic structure of the first 2 Halogens

Gradation in Size of Atoms and Ion in halogens

The table below gives the atomic and ionic sizes of the Halogens.

Discussion Questions

  1. Explain the trends in the atomic and ionic radii of Halogens down the group:

The atomic and ionic radii of the halogens increase down the group. This is because of the increase in the number of occupied energy levels.

  1. How do the atomic radii of the halogens compare with their ionic radii?

The atomic radius of a halogen atom is less than the radius of its ion.

For example, the atomic radius of a chlorine atom is less than the ionic radius of a chloride ion. This is because the chlorine atom has 17 protons in the nucleus attracting 17 electrons in the energy levels. The chloride ion has 17 protons in the nucleus attracting 18 electrons. The effect of the positive nucleus is thus lower. The reduction in the nuclear attraction is due to repulsive effect between the existing electrons and the incoming electron.

 

 

 

Physical Properties of Halogens

Chlorine can be prepared by the action of concentrated hydrochloric acid on potassium manganate (VII) (KMnO4) or Manganese (IV) oxide (MnO2). Heat is required when manganese (IV) oxide is used.

Set up for preparing chlorine gas

The table below gives a summary of the physical properties of halogens.

Discussion Questions

  1. What is the physical state of chlorine, bromine and iodine at room temperature?

Fluorine and chlorine are gases at room temperature. Bromine is a volatile liquid while iodine is a solid.

  1. What is the colour of chlorine, bromine and iodine?

Fluorine is pale yellow while chlorine is green-yellow. Bromine is a brown liquid while iodine is a shiny dark grey solid.

  1. What is observed when chlorine and bromine are shaken withWater and Tetra chloromethane

When a boiling tube containing chlorine gas or bromine vapour is inverted in water or tetrachloromethane, the level of the solution rises in the boiling tube.

The level of the solution rises more in tetrachloromethane than in water. The rise in water level is higher in the case of chlorine compared to bromine. This shows that chlorine is more soluble in water than bromine. Solubility of halogens in water therefore decreases down the group. All halogens are soluble in tetrachloromethane.

 

 

  1. Explain what is observed when iodine is heated.

Iodine sublimes when heated to form a purple vapour. This is because the particles are held by weak forces which require little energy to break.

  1. Does iodine conduct electricity? Explain.

Halogens are non conductors of heat and electricity. This is because there are no delocalised electrons in their structures.

  1. Explain the trends in the melting and boiling points of halogens down the group.

The melting and boiling points of halogens increase down the group.

Halogens exists as diatomic molecules. The forces of attraction between molecules (intermolecular forces) increase with the increase in the size of the molecules. Hence, the forces of attraction between molecules among the four halogens are strongest in iodine and weakest in fluorine.

 

Chemical Properties of Halogens

It is not easy for non metals to lose electrons because the amount of energy required (ionisation energy) is very large. Therefore non metals do not easily form positively charged ions. Non metals therefore react by gaining electrons to form negatively charged ions.

Ion formation

Halogens have seven electrons in their outermost energy level. They react by gaining one electron to attain a stable electron configuration and form negatively charged ions. During ion formation, energy is released. The energy change for this process of electron gain is called electron affinity.

F + e– F– (Elctron affinity = –322 kJmol–1)

Cl + e– Cl– (Electron affinity = –349 kJmol–1)

Br + e– Br– (Electron affinity = –325 kJmol–1)

I + e– I– (Electron affinity = –295 kJmol–1)

Generally, the electron affinity decreases as the size of the atoms increases hence reactivity decreases down the group.

Reaction with metals

The reaction between iron and a halogen results in the formation of a salt.

The procedure below can be used to react halogens with metals. Pass a stream of dry chlorine gas over heated iron wool as shown below. Record your observations.

For bromine and iodine, heat the iron wool in a test-tube in which bromine and iodine vapour is generated and passed over the wool as shown below. The test-tube should be held with a test-tube holder. Alternatively, using a defragrating spoon, place hot iron wool into a gas jar of chlorine.

Discussion Questions

  1. What is observed when the hot iron wool reacts with the halogens?

Chlorine reacts most vigorously with hot iron forming dark-brown crystals of iron (III) chloride. Hot iron glows in bromine vapour to form dark-red crystals of iron (III) bromide. Iodine vapour reacts slowly with hot iron to form grayish black crystals of iron (II) iodide. Iodine is not reactive enough to form a salt with iron.

The equations below represent the reactions which occur.

Iron + Chlorine  Iron (III) chloride

2Fe (s) + 3 Cl2(g)  2FeCl3(s)

Iron + Bromine  Iron (III) bromide

2Fe(s) + 3Br2(g)  2FeBr3(s)

Iron + Iodine  Iron (II) iodine

Fe(s) + I2(g)  Fel2(s).

  1. State and explain the role of the concentrated sodium hydroxide.

Concentrated sodium hydroxide is used to react with excess chlorine to avoid emitting poisonous chlorine gas into the air.

  1. Write chemical equations for the reactions between chlorine, bromine and iodine with

Halogens react with heated zinc to form zinc salts.

Zinc + Chlorine  Zinc chloride

Zn(s) + Cl2(g)  ZnCl2(s)

Zinc + Bromine  Zinc bromide

Zn (s) + Br (g)  ZnBr2(s)

Zinc + Iodine  Zinc iodide

Zn(s) + I2(g)  ZnI2(s)

Other salts formed in the same method are MgCl2, AlCl3 and NaCl.

  1. What is the order of reactivity of halogens? Explain

The reaction between chlorine and metals is more vigorous than that of bromine. The order of reactivity of the halogens with metals decreases down the group.

The ability of an atom to gain an electron in its outermost energy level decreases as the size of the atoms increase, hence the decrease in reactivity of halogens down the group.

Reaction with water

To study the reaction between halogens and water, bubble chlorine through water in a conical flask for a few minutes using an experimental set-up as shown below.

Observe the colour of the resulting solution. Test the solution with litmus paper.

Discussion Questions

  1. What is observed when chlorine is passed through water for some time?

Chlorine dissolves in water to form chlorine water which is a mixture of hydrochloric acid and chloric (I) acid.

Chlorine + water  Hydrochloric acid + Chloric (I) acid

Cl2(g) + H2O(g) HCl(aq) + HClO (aq)

  1. What changes are observed on the litmus papers? Explain

When the chlorine water is tested with litmus paper, the blue one turns red, showing that the solution is acidic. Then the litmus papers are bleached (decolourised) immediately.

The bleaching action is a property of Chloric (I) acid. Chloric (I)  acid is unstable and decomposes to form hydrochloric acid and an atom of oxygen. The oxygen atom then combines with the natural dye in the litmus papers to form a colourless compound.

Chlorine does not bleach dry litmus paper because chloric (I) acid cannot be formed in the absence of water. The bleaching action is only possible in the presence of water.

Chlorine water is yellow due to the presence of chloric (I) acid.

In sunlight, the chlorine water is decolourised due to the decomposition of chloric (I) acid to oxygen gas and hydrochloric acid by the sunlight.

This reaction does not take place in the dark.

Some uses of Halogens and their Compounds

  1. Fluorine is a raw material in the preparation of a synthetic fibre known as polytetraflouroethene.
  2. Some compounds of fluorine are added to water and some tooth pastes in small quantities to reduce tooth decay.
  3. Fluorine is used to manufacture hydrogen fluoride used to engrave words or pictures on glass.
  4. Chlorine is used to make bleaches used in paper pulp and textile industries.
  5. Chlorine is added to water to kill micro-organisms in water treatment works.
  6. Chlorine is used in the manufacture of a plastic known as polyvinylchloride (PVC).
  7. Chlorine is used in the large-scale manufacture of hydrochloric acid.
  8. Bromine is used in the manufacture of silver bromide which is used to make the light sensitive photographic paper and films.
  9. A solution of iodine in alcohol (tincture of iodine) is used as a disinfectant.

 

 

4. Noble gases

The elements in group (VIII) of the periodic table are called noble gases. Noble gases are found as free atoms in nature and form about 1% of air. They include helium, neon, argon, krypton, xenon and radon. Argon is the most abundant and forms about 0.9% of air by volume.

Noble gases were initially called inert gases because they were thought to be unreactive.

Task: Draw the atomic structure of the first 3 noble gases

Electron Arrangements of the first three Noble Gases

Helium with only two electrons has one occupied energy level which is full. Hence it has a duplet. The rest have eight electrons in their outermost occupied energy level. Thus they have the octet.

Under normal conditions noble gases neither gain nor lose electrons. They are therefore stable and non reactive.

Physical Properties of Noble gases

Group VIII elements are colourless monoatomic gases.

Discussion Questions

1.What happens to each of the following properties down the group?

  • Atomic radius.

Atomic radii increase down the group due to the increase in the number of energy levels. The increase in atomic radii down the group explains why the first ionization energy of the gases decreases down the group.

  • Melting point and boiling point.

Noble gases have low melting and boiling points. This is because of the weak inter atomic forces of attraction between the atoms. However, as the atomic size increases down the group there is increase in strength of inter atomic forces of attraction between atoms. Hence the rise in melting and boiling points down the group.

  • Ionization energies.

Helium has a duplet electron arrangement while the others have an octet in their outermost energy level. Therefore they all have a stable electron arrangement. This explains the high ionization energies for all the elements.

 

2.Xenon takes part in some reactions. Explain.

Xenon has a large atomic radius. In xenon an electron in the outermost energy level is relatively far from the positive nucleus. It therefore has a low ionization energy compared to the other noble gases. For this reason, xenon takes part in some reactions.

 

Uses of Noble Gases

The inert nature of the noble gases enables them to have a wide range of uses.

  1. Argon is used in light bulbs to provide an inert environment to prevent oxidation.
  2. Argon is used as an insulator in arch-welding.
  3. Neon gas is used in street and advertisement lights.
  4. Helium mixed with oxygen is used in deep sea diving and mountaineering. The mixture is also used in hospitals for patients with respiratory problems and those undergoing certain forms of surgery.
  5. Helium can be used instead of hydrogen in balloons for meteorological research.
  6. Helium is used in thermometers for the measurement of very low temperatures.
  7. Liquid helium is used to keep certain metal alloys at temperatures low enough for them to become super conductors.

5. Properties and Trends across A period

Elements in the same period have the same number of occupied energy levels. As you move across the period, the number of electrons in the outermost energy level increases by one. While the elements in the same group exhibit similar properties, those across a period show a gradual change in properties. This can be illustrated by considering elements in Period 3 from left to right.

 

(a) Trends in Physical Properties of Elements in Period 3

 

The table below gives a summary of the physical properties of Elements in Period 3.

(i)   Trends in Electrical conductivity

Discussion Questions

  1. List the elements in period 3 that conduct electricity.

Sodium, magnesium and aluminium are good conductors of electricity.

2.Explain the trends in the electrical conductivity of the elements in period 3.

Sodium, magnesium and aluminium have delocalised electrons in their structures. These delocalised electrons are responsible for the conduction of electricity. Conductivity increases with increase in the number of delocalised electrons. Therefore, aluminium with three delocalised electrons from each atom in the structure has the highest electrical conductivity.

Phosphorus, sulphur, chlorine and argon are all made up of molecules and therefore are non-conductors of electricity.

Silicon is unique among the elements because it is a semi-conductor. Its electrical conductivity increases with increase in temperature.

 

(ii) Other physical properties

Discussion Questions

  1. Explain the trends in atomic radii across the period

The atomic radii of the elements gradually decrease across the period from left to right. This is explained by the increase in the nuclear charge across the period due to an increase in the number of protons. Although there is an additional number of electrons, they enter the same energy level. This means that the shielding effect remains the same as the nuclear charge increases. The forces of attraction between the nuclei of these elements and the electrons in the outermost energy levels progressively increase across the period. As a result, the electrons in the outermost energy level are pulled closer to the nucleus, thereby decreasing the size of the atoms across the period from sodium to chlorine.

  1. Explain the trends in melting points and boiling points across the period.

Sodium, magnesium and aluminium have giant metallic structures. Therefore, they have strong metallic bonds. These bonds require a lot of energy to break hence high melting and boiling points. Silicon has giant atomic structure hence high melting and boiling points. The rest of the non-metals have molecular structures held together by weak Van der Waals forces which require little energy to break hence low melting and boiling points.

  1. Why is the melting point of aluminium higher than that of sodium?

Aluminium contributes three electrons to the metallic lattice whereas sodium contributes only one. Also, due to the small size of the aluminium atom, the packing of the atoms is close. Therefore, the metallic bonds in aluminium are stronger than in sodium and magnesium, hence the higher melting and boiling points of aluminium.

  1. Silicon, a non-metal, has a much higher melting point than all the other elements in the period. Explain.

Silicon has a giant atomic structure in which all the atoms are held together by strong covalent bonds. These need a lot of heat energy to break, hence the high melting and boiling points of silicon. In contrast, phosphorus and chlorine are molecular. The atoms in the molecules are held together by strong covalent bonds while the molecules themselves are held together by van der Waals forces which require little energy to break. Melting involves breaking the van der Waals forces.

  1. Why are boiling points of chlorine and argon very low?

Chlorine and argon exist as gases at room temperature. They have low melting and boiling points due to the presence of weak van der Waals forces. Chlorine is diatomic while argon is monoatomic.

(b) Trends in Chemical Properties of the Elements in Period 3

 

Summary of reaction of period 3 elements with air, water and dilute acids.

Reaction with oxygen

Discussion Questions

  1. Describehow elements in Period 3 react with oxygen. Explain the nature of the resulting solutions whenthe products are dissolved in water.
  • Sodium reacts vigorously with oxygen to form a white solid, sodium oxide.

Sodium + Oxygen  Sodium oxide

4Na(s) + O2 (g)  2Na2O (s)

The sodium oxide produced in the reaction readily dissolves in water to form an alkaline solution

Sodium oxide + Water  Sodium hydroxide

Na2O(s) + H2O(l)  2NaOH(aq)

  • Magnesium burns with a bright white light to give a white solid, magnesium oxide.

Magnesium + Oxygen  Magnesium oxide

2Mg (s) + O2(g)  2MgO(s)

The magnesium oxide produced in the reaction is slightly soluble in water. The solution formed is alkaline.

Magnesium oxide + water  Magnesium hydroxide

MgO(s) + H2O(l)  Mg(OH)2(aq)

  • Aluminium foil is usually coated with a layer of aluminium oxide, Al2O3. This prevents the reaction with oxygen. When polished,aluminum reacts slowly with oxygen to form the white solid, aluminium oxide.

Aluminium + Oxygen  Aluminium oxide

4Al(s) + 3O2(g)  2Al2 O3(s)

The aluminium oxide is insoluble in water.

  • Silicon powder can only burn in oxygen at high temperatures (about 450°C) to form solid silicon (IV) oxide.

Silicon + Oxygen  Silicon (IV) oxide

Si(s) + O2(g)  SiO2(s)

Silicon (IV) oxide is insoluble in water.

  • Phosphorus readily burns in oxygen with a bright orange flame to form a white solid, phosphorus (V) oxide.

Phosphorus + Oxygen  Phosphorus (V) oxide

P4(s) + 5O2(g)  2P2O5(s)

Phosphorus (V) oxide readily dissolves in water to form an acidic solution.

Phosphorus (V) oxide + Water  Phosphorus (V) acid

P2O5(s) + 3H2O(l)  2H3PO4(aq)

  • Sulphur burns in oxygen with a blue fame to form a gas sulphur (IV) oxide.

Sulphur + Oxygen  Sulphur (IV) oxide

S(s) + O2(g)  SO2(g)

The sulphur (IV) oxide gas readily dissolves in water to give an acidic solution of sulphuric (IV) acid, H2SO3, which is easily oxidized to sulphuric (VI) acid H2SO4.

Sulphur (IV) oxide + Water  Sulphuric (IV) acid

SO2(g) + H2O(l)  H2SO3(aq)

Sulphuric (IV) acid + Oxygen Sulphuric(VI) acid

2H2SO3(aq) + O2(g)  2H2SO4(aq)

  • Chlorine burns in oxygen under certain conditions to form acidic oxides while argon is not reactive.

 

  1. State the trend in how elements in period 3 react with oxygen

The following trends in the elements of period 3 can be identified.

  • All the elements across period 3, with the exception of argon, burn in oxygen to form oxides.
  • The reactivity of the metals with oxygen decreases from left to right across the period. Sodium is the most reactive of the three metals in the period and aluminium the least. The order of reactivity with oxygen is therefore Na > Mg > Al. This is because of the increase in nuclear charge from sodium to aluminium, which makes it easier to remove an electron from a sodium atom than from an aluminium atom.
  • Metallic elements burn in oxygen to form basic oxides.Soluble metallic oxides dissolve in water to form alkaline solutions.
  • The reactivity of the non-metallic elements with oxygen increases from left to right across the third period. This is because the ease of gaining electrons increases from left to right. Phosphorus is the least reactive and chlorine the most reactive. The order of reactivity with oxygen, starting with the most reactive is therefore: Cl > S > P. Non-metals react by gaining electrons.
  • The non-metallic elements burn in oxygen to form acidic oxides which dissolve in water to form acidic solutions.

Reaction with Water

 

Discussion Questions

  1. Describe how each of the elements in period 3 react with water.
  • Sodium reacts violently with cold water to form sodium hydroxide and hydrogen gas.

Sodium + Water  Sodium hydroxide + Hydrogen

2Na(s) + H2O(l)  2NaOH(aq) + H2(g)

  • Magnesium reacts very slowly with cold water to form magnesium hydroxide and hydrogen gas.

Magnesium + water  Magnesium hydroxide + Hydrogen

Mg(s) + 2H2O(l)  Mg(OH)2(aq) + H2(g)

  • Aluminium does not normally react with cold water or steam due to the presence of a coating of aluminium oxide, which prevents any reaction. However, at temperatures above 700 °C steam can react with aluminium. Due to its apparent inability to react with water, aluminium was prefered for making cooking vessels such as pansandsufurias.
  1. Explain why the reactivity varies across the period.
  • In general, the reactivity of the metals with water decreases from sodium to aluminium, Na > Mg > Al. sodium is more reactive because it loses its valence electron more readily than magnesium and aluminium.
  • Non-metals do not displace hydrogen from water. Therefore, silicon, phosphorus and sulphur do not react with either cold water or steam.
  • Chlorine is an exception since it dissolves in water to form chlorine water, which is a mixture of hydrochloric acid and chloric (I) acid.

Chlorine + water  Hydrochloric acid + Hypochlorous acid

Cl2(g) + H2O(l) HCl(aq) + HOCl(aq)

 

Reaction with Acids

 

Discussion Questions

Explain the trend in reactivity of the period 3 elements with dilute acids.

  • Magnesium reacts with both dilute hydrochloric acid and dilute sulphuric (VI) acid to form a salt and hydrogen gas.

Magnesium + hydrochloric acid  Magnesium chloride + Hydrogen gas

Mg(s) + 2HCl(aq)  MgCl2(aq) + H2(g)

Magnesium + Sulphuric (VI) acid  Magnesium sulphate + Hydrogen gas.

Mg(s) + H2SO4(aq)  MgSO4(aq) + H2(g)

  • Aluminium does not readily react with dilute acid due to the presence of an aluminium oxide coating. However, on removing the oxide coating, the metal reacts.

Aluminium + Hydrochloric acid  Aluminium chloride + Hydrogen gas

2Al(s) + 6HCl(aq)  2AlCl3(aq) + 3H2(g)

2Al(s) + 3H2SO4(aq)  Al2(SO)4 (aq) + 3H2(g).

  • The reaction between sodium and acids is explosive and should NEVER be tried. The order of reactivity with acid is Na > Mg > Al.
  • Silicon, phosphorus, sulphur and chlorine do not react with dilute acids.

 

  1. 2006 Q19 P1
    • Starting from solid magnesium oxide, describe how a solid sample of magnesium hydroxide can be prepared.       (2 marks)
    • Give one use of magnesium hydroxide. (1 mark)

 

  1. 2006 Q 3a,b P2
  • Distinguish between isotopes and allotropes.
  • The chart below is part of the periodic table. Study it and answer the questions that follow. (The letters are not the actual symbols of the elements).
  • Select the element in period three which has the shortest atomic radius. Give a reason for you answer.          (2 marks)
  • Element F has the electronic structure, 2.8.18.4. On the chart above; indicate the position of element F. (1 mark)
  • State one use of the elements of which E is a member. (1 mark)

 

  1. 2007 Q3a P1

Both chlorine and iodine are halogens. What are halogens?                                              (1 mark)

 

  1. 2007 Q 8 P1

Explain why there is general increase in the first ionization energies of the elements in period 3 of the periodic table from left to right.                                                                (2 marks)

 

  1. 2007 Q 25b

Give a reason why helium is increasingly being preferred to hydrogen in weather balloons.                                                                                                                                       (1 mark)

 

  1. 2008 Q 18 P1

The grid below is part of the periodic table. Use it to answer the questions that follow, (the letters are not the actual symbols of the elements).

  • Indicate on the grid the position of an element represented by letter V whose atomic number is 14.       (1 mark)
  • Select a letter which represents a monoatomic gas. (1 mark)

 

  1. 2009 Q 1 P1

The ionization energies for three elements A, B and C are shown in the table below.

Element A B C
Ionisation energy (kJ /mole) 519 418 494
  • What is meant by ionization energy? (1 mark)
  • Which element is the strongest reducing agent? Give a reason (2 marks)
  1. 2009 Q 21 P1,2011 Q 5 P1

Give the name of the product formed when magnesium reacts with phosphorus.  (1 mark)

 

  1. 2011 Q5 P1

The diagram below represents part of the periodic table. Use it to answer the questions that follow.

       
M         Q      
T V W          
                 
                 
  • Write the electron arrangement for the stable ion formed by W (1 mark)
  • Write an equation for the reaction between V and Q (1 mark)
  • How do the ionization energies of the elements M and T compare? (1 mark)

 

  1. 2011 Q 22 P1

The table below gives some properties of three elements in group (VII) of the periodic table. Study it and answer the questions that follow.

Element Atomic No. Melting Point (°C) Boiling Point (°C)
Chlorine 17 -101 -34.7
Bromine 35 -7 58.8
Iodine 53 114 184
  • Which element is in liquid form at room temperature? Give a reason. (1 mark)
  • Explain why the boiling point of iodine is much higher than that of chlorine. (2 marks)

 

 

  1. 2011 Q 31 P1

What name is given to elements which appear in group (II) of the periodic table? (1 mark)

 

  1. 2012 Q14 P1

Distinguish between ionisation energy and electron affinity of an element.                       (2 marks)

 

  1. 2012 Q2 P2

The grid below is part of the periodic table. Use it to answer the questions that follow. (the letters are not the actual symbols of the elements).

  • Which is the most reactive non-metallic element shown in the table? Explain. (2 marks)

 

  • (i) Write the formula of the compound formed when element A reacts with element B                                                                                                                                                 (1 mark)

(ii) Name the bond type in the compound formed in b (i) above                                     (1 mark)

 

  • (i) What is the name given to the group of elements where, C, G and H belong?

(ii) Write an equation for the reaction that occurs when C in gaseous form is passed through a solution containing ions of element H                                                                       (1 mark)

 

  • The melting points of elements F and G are 14100C and -101 respectively. In terms of structure and bonding, explain why there is a large difference in the melting points of F and G.                         (2 marks)
  • D forms two oxides. Write the formula of each of the two oxides. (1 mark)

 

  • J is an element that belongs to the 3rd period of the periodic table and a member of the alkaline earth elements. Show the position of j in the grid             (1 mark)

 

 

 

  1. 2012 Q4 P1

The table below shows properties of some elements A, B, C and D which belong to the same period of the periodic table. The letters are not the actual symbols of the elements.

Element A B C D
MP (°C) 1410 98 -101 660
Atomic radii (nm) 0.117 0.186 0.099 0.143
Electrical conductivity Poor Good Non-conductor Good
  • Arrange the elements in the order they would appear in the period. Give a reason   (2 marks)
  • Select the metallic element which is the better conductor of electricity. Give a Reason.               (1 mark)

 

 

  1. 2012 Q27 P1
  • The electronic arrangement of the ion of element Q is 2.8.8. If the Formula of the ion is Q3-, state the group and period to which Q belongs,

Group:                                                                                                              (½ mark)

Period:                                                                                                              (½mark)

  • Helium, neon and argon belong to group 8 of the periodic table. Give:

(i)         The general name of these elements;                                                     (1 mark)

(ii)        One use of these elements                                                                                 (1 mark)

 

 

  1. 2013 Q20 P1

The plots below were obtained when the atomic radii of some elements in groups I and II were plotted against atomic numbers.

Explain:

  • The trend shown by Li, Na and K. (1 mark)
  • Why the atomic radii of elements Be, Mg, and Ca are lower than those of Li, Na and K.               (2 marks)

 

 

 

  1. 2013 Q1 P2
  • The grid below represents part of the periodic table. Study it and answer the questions that follow. The letters do not represent the actual symbols of the elements.
    • Select a letter which represents an element that losses electrons most readily. Give a reason for your answer.      (2 marks)
    • Explain why the atomic radius of P is found to be smaller than that of N.                                                                                                                       (2 marks)
    • Element M reacts with water at room temperature to produce 0.2 dm3 of gas. Determine the mass of M which was reacted with water. (molar gas volume at r.t.p is 24 dm3, relative atomic mass of M = 7).      (3 marks)

 

  • Use the information in the table below to answer the questions that follow. (The letters are not the actual symbols of the elements).

Identify a letter which represents an element in the table that could be calcium, carbon or sulphur. Give a reason in each case.

  • Calcium____________ (½ mark)

Reason____________                                                                              (½ mark)

  • Carbon ____________ (½ mark)

Reason_____________                                                                (½ mark)

  • Sulphur ____________ (½ mark)

Reason_____________                                                                (½ mark)

 

  1. 2014 Q2 P1
  • The grid below represents part of the periodic table. Study it and answer the questions that follow. The letters are not the actual symbols of the elements
  • Select the most reactive metal. Explain (2 marks)
  • Select an element that can form an ion with a charge of 3 (1 mark)
  • Select an alkaline earth metal (1 mark)
  • Which group 1 element has the highest first ionization energy? Explain (2 marks)
  • Element A combines with chlorine to form a chloride of A. State the most likely pH value of a solution of a chloride of A. Explain   (2 marks)

 

  • (i) Explain why molten calcium chloride and magnesium chloride conduct electricity while carbon tetrachloride and silicon tetrachloride do not.   (2 marks)

(ii)Under the same conditions, gaseous neon was found to diffuse faster than gaseous fluorine. Explain this observation. (F=19.0; Ne=20.0)                                           (2 marks)

  1. 2015 Q23 P1

The table below is part of the periodic table. The letters are not the actual symbols of the elements. Study it and answer the questions that follows.

  • Select an element which is stored in paraffin in the laboratory. (1 mark)

 

  • How do the ionic radii of E and I compare? Explain (2 marks)

 

 

  1. 2015 Q3c-d P2
  • The diagram below shows part of a periodic table. The letters do not represent the actual symbols of elements. Use the diagram to answer the questions that follow.
  • Explain why the oxidizing power of W is more than that of X. (1 mark)
  • How do the melting points of R and T compare? Explain. (2 marks)

 

  • Sketch an element that could be used
    1. In weather balloons (1 mark)
  • For making a cooking pot (1 mark)

 

  • (i) Classify the substances water, iodine, diamond and candle wax into elements and compounds (2 marks)
Elements Compounds
   

 

 

 

 

  • Give one use of diamond. (1 mark)

 

  1. 2015 Q20 P1

A crystal of iodine, heated gently in a test tube gave off a purple vapour.

  • Write the formula of the substance responsible for the purple vapour. (1 mark)

 

  • What type of bond is broken when the iodine crystal is heated gently? (1 mark)

 

 

  • State one use of iodine. (1 mark)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. 2016 Q1 P2

Use the information in the table below to answer the questions that follow. The letters do not represent the actual symbols of the elements.

Element Atomic Number Melting Point (°C)
R 11  97.8
S 12  650.0
T 15 44.0
U 17  -102
V  18 -189
w 19 64.0
  • Give reasons why the melting point of:

(i) S is higher than that of R;                                                                            (1 mark)

(ii) V is lower than that of U.                                                                            (2 marks)

 

  • How does the reactivity of W with Chlorine compare with that of R with chlorine? Explain.                   (2 marks)
  • Write an equation for the reaction between T and excess oxygen.

(1 mark)

  • When 1.15g of R were reacted with water, 600cm3 of gas was produced. Determine the relative atomic mass of R. (Molar gas volume = 24 000 cm3). (3 marks)

 

  • Give one use of element V. (1 mark)

 

 

  1. 2017 Q1 P1

Table 1 shows the atomic numbers and the first ionisation energies of three elements. The letters are not actual symbols of the elements. Use it to answer the questions that follow.

  • Explain the trend in first ionisation energy from A to C. (2 mark)
  • Write the electronic configuration for the ion of C. (1 mark)

 

 

  1. 2018 P1 Q

Describe an experiment to show that group one elements react with cold water to form alkaline solutions.                                                                              (3 marks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. 2018 Q2 P2

Figure 2 is a section of the periodic table. Study it and answer the questions that follow. The letters do not represent the actual symbols of elements

  • (i) Select elements which belong to the same chemical family. (1 mark)

(ii) Write the formulae of ions for elements in the same period.                                 (1 mark)

 

  • The first ionisation energies of two elements K and M at random are 577 kJ/mol and 494 kJ/mol. (1 mark)
  • Write equations for the 1ˢᵗ ionisation energies for elements K and M and indicate their energies.                  (1 mark)
  • Explain the answer in b(i). (1 mark)
  • Write the formula of the compound formed when L and I                                                                                                                       (1 mark)
  • Give one use of element (1 mark)
  • (i) State another group that G can be placed in Figure 1. Explain. (2 marks)

(ii) How do the reactivity of elements J and K compare? Explain.                (2 marks)

 

  • (i) Elements L and M form chlorides. Complete the following table by writing the formulae of each chloride and state the nature of the solutions.       (2 marks)
Element Formula of chloride Nature of chloride solution
L    
M    

 

(ii) The chloride of element M vaporises easily while its oxide has a high melting point. Explain.                                                                                                                                           (2 marks)

 

 

  1. 2019 P1 Q21

Study the information in Table 3 and use it to answer the questions that follow.

Elements Na Mg Al Si P S Cl
Atomic Numbers 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Atomic radii(nm) 0.157 0.136 0.125 0.117 0.110 0.104 0.099
  • Explain the trend in atomic radii from sodium to chlorine. (1 mark)

 

  • Explain how the chloride of aluminium differs from those of other metals in the period.                 (2 marks)

FORM 2 TERM OPENER EXAM IN PDF

Name:………………………………………….………………….Class:…………Adm No:…….

BIOLOGY

FORM 2 TERM 1 OPENER EXAM

TIME: 1HR 30MINS

INSTRUCTIONS.

Answer all the questions in the spaces provided.

 

  1. State the function of the following organelles. (2mks)
  2. Lysosomes

 

 

  1. Ribosomes

 

 

  1. A student observed a row of 16 epidermal cells in a microscopic field that was 8mm in diameter. Calculate the average length of one cell in micrometres. Show your working.                                                                                                                                     (3mks)

 

 

 

 

  1. A student drew a 6cm diagram of a plant flower if the actual length of the flower was 12cm. calculate the magnification of the drawing made by the student. Show your working.                                                                                                                                     (3mks)

 

 

 

 

  1. State three factors that affect the rate of diffusion. (3mks)

 

 

 

 

  1. An experiment was set-up in a laboratory as shown below.

 

  1. What will happen to visking tubing in M and N after two hours. (2mks)

 

 

  1. Explain the observations made in M. (2mks)

 

 

  • What does visking tubing represent in a living organism?                         (1mk)

 

 

 

  1. Distinguish between autotrophism and heterotrophism modes of nutrition. (2mks)

 

 

 

 

  1. State three properties of monosaccharides. (3mks)

 

 

 

 

 

  1. The equation below shows formation of a disaccharide.

Glucose + Glucose  process p      Q + water

  1. Name process P. (1mk)

 

  1. Product Q. (1mk)

 

  • Other than product Q named above name other two examples of disaccharides.                                                                                                                         (2mks)

 

 

  1. List four factors which affect enzyme controlled reaction. (4mks)

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Name two nutrients that are absorbed without being digested by the enzymes in humans.                                                                                                                                     (2mks)

 

 

  1. List three types of salivary glands. (3mks)

 

 

 

  1. Give two roles of saliva in the process of digestion. (2mks)
  2. Differentiate between homodonts and heterodonts. (2mks)

 

 

 

 

  1. The diagram below represents the lower jaw of a mammal.

 

 

  1. Name the mode of nutrition of the animal whose jaw is shown above. (1mk)

 

  1. Mode of feeding. (1mk)

 

  1. Give a reason for your answer in (b) above. (1mk)

 

  1. Diet of the animal. (1mk)

 

  1. Name the toothless gap labeled K. (1mk)

 

  1. Name the substance that is responsible for hardening of teeth. (1mk)

 

 

  1. State the roles of the structures found within a tooth:
  2. Blood vessels. (1mk)

 

  1. (1mk)

 

 

  1. List two major types of dental diseases. (2mks)

 

 

  1. Give two roles played by bile salts in the process of digestion. (2mks)

 

 

 

 

  1. Explain five ways in which the illume is adapted to its functions. (5mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. The following is a dental formula of a certain mammal.

I0/3 C0/1 Pm3/3 m3/3

  1. Calculate the total number of teeth of the mammal. (2mks)

 

 

  1. Give the likely mode of feeding. (1mk)

 

 

  • Give a reason for your answer in (ii) above. (1mk)

 

 

  1. Name the disease in humans caused by deficiency the following: (5mks)
  2. Vitamin A

 

  1. Vitamin D

 

  • Vitamin C

 

  1. Iodine

 

  1. Iron

 

  1. State one function of water in the diet. (1mk)

 

 

 

 

  1. State five factors that determine energy requirements in human beings. (5mks)

Name:………………………………………….………………….Class:…………Adm No:…….

 

BIOLOGY

MARKING SCHEME FORM 2 TERM 1 OPENER EXAM-AUGUST

TIME:

 

INSTRUCTIONS.

Answer all the questions in the spaces provided.

 

  1. State the function of the following organelles. (2mks)
  2. Lysosomes

Contain lytic enzymes that destroy worn out cells.

  1. Ribosomes

They are sites for protein synthesis

  1. A student observed a row of 16 epidermal cells in a microscopic field that was 8mm in diameter. Calculate the average length of one cell in micrometres. Show your working.                                                                                                             (3mks)

Size of one cell = diameter of field of view

                            Number of cells in field of view.

8mm x 1000um

    1mm

= 8000um

    16cells

=500um

  1. A student drew a 6cm diagram of a plant flower if the actual length of the flower was 12cm. calculate the magnification of the drawing made by the student. Show your working.                                                                                                             (3mks)

Magnification of a handlens = Drawing length

                                                  Actual length of the object

6cm  = x0.5

12cm

 

  1. State three factors that affect the rate of diffusion. (3mks)

Diffusion gradient

Thickness of tissues

Size of molecules

Temperature

Type of medium

Surface area to volume ratio

  1. An experiment was set-up in a laboratory as shown below.
  2. What will happen to visking tubing in M and N after two hours. (2mks)

M – will swell / increase in size

N – Will shrink / decrease

 

  1. Explain the observations made in M. (2mks)

Sodium chloride solution is a hypertonic solution while distilled water is a hypotonic solution therefore distilled water molecules will move from the beaker to the visking tubing by osmosis making it to swell.

  • What does visking tubing represent in a living organism? (1mk)

Cell membrane/ plasma membrane/plasmalema.

  1. Distinguish between autotrophism and heterotrophism modes of nutrition. (2mks)

Autotrophism is a mode of nutrition in which some plants manufacture their own complex food substances from simpler substances such as carbon (IV) oxide and water while heterotrophism is a mode of nutrition that involves taking complex ready made food materials from plants and other animals.

  1. State three properties of monosaccharides. (3mks)

They are soluble in water

They form sweet tasting solution

They are reducing sugars

They are crystalisable.

  1. The equation below shows formation of a disaccharide.

Glucose + Glucose  process p      Q + water

  1. Name process P. (1mk)

Condensation

  1. Product Q. (1mk)

Maltose

  • Other than product Q named above name other two examples of disaccharides.                                                                                                             (2mks)

Sucrose

Lactose

  1. List four factors which affect enzyme controlled reaction. (4mks)

Temperature

pH

Specificity

Enzyme co-factors and co-enzyme

Enzyme inhibitors

Substrate concentration and enzyme concentration.

 

  1. Name two nutrients that are absorbed without being digested by the enzymes in humans.                                                                                                                         (2mks)

Water

Vitamins

Mineral ions/salts

  1. List three types of salivary glands. (3mks)

Sublingual

Sub-mandibular

Parotial sub-maxillary

  1. Give two roles of saliva in the process of digestion. (2mks)

Lubricates food

Moistens food

Softens food

Dissolves food

Contains salivary amylase hence digests starch to maltose

Provides an alkaline medium for action of salivary amylase.

  1. Differentiate between homodonts and heterodonts. (2mks)

Homodonts: are animals which have the same types, size and shape of teeth while heterodonts are animals with different types, size and shapes of teeth.

 

  1. The diagram below represents the lower jaw of a mammal.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Name the mode of nutrition of the animal whose jaw is shown above. (1mk)

Heterotrophism

  1. Mode of feeding. (1mk)

Herbivorous

  1. Give a reason for your answer in (b) above. (1mk)

Presence of a diastema

  1. Diet of the animal. (1mk)

Vegetation/ grass/green leaves.

  1. Name the toothless gap labeled K. (1mk)

Diastema

  1. Name the substance that is responsible for hardening of teeth. (1mk)

Calcium phosphate

  1. State the roles of the structures found within a tooth:
  2. Blood vessels. (1mk)

They supply nutrients to living tissues in the dentine.

Remove waste products from the dentine

  1. (1mk)

They detect heat, cold and pain in the tooth

  1. List two major types of dental diseases. (2mks)

Dental carriers

Periodontal disease

  1. Give two roles played by bile salts in the process of digestion. (2mks)

They aid in the breakdown of fats into tiny fat droplets to increase their surface area for digestion (emulsification)

They provide an alkaline medium which the enzymes work best.

They neutralize the acidic chime from the stomach.

  1. Explain five ways in which the illume is adapted to its functions. (5mks)

Long and narrow to increase surface area for digestion and bring digested food into close contact with walls of the ileum for easier absorption.

Highly coiled to slow down movement of food thus allowing more time for digestion and absorption to take place.

Large number of villi and micro-vill to increase surface area.

Presence of thinner layer of cells to reduce diffusion distance of digested food.

Presence of dense network of capillaries in the villi into which amino acids, sugar and vitamins are absorbed.

Presence of lacteals in the villi for the absorption of fatty acids and glycerol.

  1. The following is a dental formula of a certain mammal.

I0/3 C0/1 Pm3/3 m3/3

  1. Calculate the total number of teeth of the mammal. (2mks)

0 + 0 + 3 + 3 x 2 = 12

3 + 1 + 3 + 3 x 2 = 20

                               32 teeth

  1. Give the likely mode of feeding. (1mk)

Herbivorous

  • Give a reason for your answer in (ii) above. (1mk)

It lacks incisors and canines in the upper jaw to create a horny pad.

  1. Name the disease in humans caused by deficiency the following: (5mks)
  2. Vitamin A

Night blindness

  1. Vitamin D

Rickets

  • Vitamin C

Scurvy

  1. Iodine

Goiter

  1. Iron

Anemia

  1. State one function of water in the diet. (1mk)

it is a solvent of soluble food substances cooling of the body.

Provided the medium for transport of dissolved food substances.

Facilitates hydrolysis of food substances.

  1. State five factors that determine energy requirements in human beings. (5mks)

Basal metabolic rate

Occupation/everyday activity

Age

Body size

Sex

COMPUTER STUDIES SCHEMES FOR ALL FORMS IN PDF

COMPUTER FORM 1 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 1

WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB-TOPIC LEARNING OBJECTIVES TEACHING/LEARNING

ACTIVITIES

TEACHING/LEARNING

RESOURCES

REFERENCES REMARKS
 

1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

   

DEFINITION OF A COMPUTER

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define computer

·         Distinguish between data and information

·         Explain unique characteristics of computer as a data processing tool

 

Learner to:

·         Through questions and answer define computer

·         Through brainstorming distinguish between data and information

·         Through group discussion, discuss characteristics of a computer  as data processing tools

 

·         A calculator

·         A personal Computer

·         Charts

·         Sample data

 

·         Lomghorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 1-2

·         Computer studies Dr. Onunga and Renu Shah Page 1-2

 
   

2-3

   

PHYSICAL PARTS OF A COMPUTER

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         State and explain various physical parts of a computer

 

·         Through question and answer list parts of a Computer

·         Through brainstorming, explain various parts of a computer

 

·         A working personal computer

 

·         Gateway secondary Revision S.Mburu G. Chemwa pg 1

·         Foundations of Computer studies by Pepela pg 3

 
 

2

 

1

   

CLASSIFICATION OF COMPUTERS

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Classify computer according to physical size

 

Learner to

·         In group of two identify and discuss pictures from books, magazines

 

·         Charts or photographs from books, magazines or newspapers

 

 

·         Gateway secondary Revision S.Mburu G. Chemwa pg 7-8

 

 
   

2-3

 

 

 

   

CLASSIFICATION OF COMPUTERS

 

·         Classify computer according to functionality and according to purpose

 

 

 

·         Discussion

·         Q/A

 

·         Charts or photographs from books, magazines or newspapers

 

·         Onunga and Renu Shah Page6

 

 

 

 

 
 

3

 

1

   

DEVELOPMENT OF COMPUTERS

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain how computers have developed

 

·         Through brainstorming identify and discuss non-electronic tools

 

·         Charts or photographs from books, magazines or newspapers

 

·         Lomghorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 10

 

 
   

2-3

   

ELECTRONIC COMPUTERS

 

·         List five generations computers

 

·         In group of three, discuss five generation computers

 

·         Charts or photographs from books, magazines or newspapers

 

·         Lomghorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 12-13

·         Foundations of Computer studies by Pepela pg 22

 
 

4

 

1

   

AREAS WHERE COMPUTER ARE USED

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Identify areas where computers are used

·         Describe the listed areas where computers are used

 

Learner to

·         Through brainstorming identify and discuss areas where computers are used

 

·         Flash Cards

 

·         Lomghorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 14-15

 
   

2-3

   

·         THE COMPUTER LABORATORY

·         MEASURES THAT PROTECT COMPUTER

 

·         Define computer laboratory

·         Describe the safety precautions and practices that protect computer

 

·         Through question and answer define computer laboratory

·         In group of three, discuss safety precautions and practices that protect computer

 

·         UPS,Surge protector

·         charts

 

·         Foundations of Computer studies by Pepela pg 47

 
 

5

 

1

   

MEASURES THAT PROTECT USER

 

·         Describe the safety precautions and practices that protect user

 

·         In group of three, discuss safety precautions practices that protect user

 

·         Antiglare standard furniture

   
   

2-3

   

PRACTICAL HANDS-ON SKILLS

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Start up a computer

·         Restart a computer

·         Shutting down computer

 

·         Through demonstration by the teacher, learner to observe and imitate on how to start up a computer, restart a computer and shut down computer

 

·         Computer

 

·         Gateway Secondary Revision, S.Mburu G.Chemwa pg 21-23

 
 

6

 

1

   

KEYBOARD AND MOUSE SKILLS

KEYBOARD SKILLS

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define keyboard

·         Identify parts of the Keyboard

 

Learner to

·         Through brainstorming define keyboard and identify parts of the Keyboard

 

·         Computer keyboard

·         Mobile keyboard

 

·         Gateway Secondary Revision, S.Mburu G.Chemwa pg 22

 
   

2-3

   

KEYBOARD SKILLS

 

·         Discuss parts of the keyboard

·         Type using keyboard

 

·         In group of three, discuss parts of the keyboard and type using keyboard

 

·         charts

 

·         Foundations of Computer studies by Pepela pg 25

 
 

7

 

1

   

TYPING TUTOR

 

·         Identify typing tutors

·         Use typing tutors

 

·         Through question and answer identify typing tutors and use typing tutors

 

·         Typing tutor software computer

   
   

2-3

   

MOUSE SKILLS

 

·         Define computer mouse

·         Identify parts of the mouse

 

·         Through brainstorming define computer mouse and identify parts of the mouse

 

·         Computer mouse

 

·         Lomghorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 23

 
 

8

 

1

   

MOUSE SKILLS

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·         Describe parts of mouse

·         Use mouse techniques

 

·         In group of three, discuss parts of the mouse

 

·         Computer mouse

 

·         Foundations of Computer studies by Pepela pg 23-25

 
   

2-3

   

MOUSE SKILLS

 

·         Drag and drop items

·         Open file and folders through double clicking, right clicking

 

·         Through demonstration by the teacher, learner to observe and imitate on how to drag and drop items

 

·         Computer mouse

 

·         Foundations of Computer studies by Pepela pg 23-25

 
COMPUTER SYSTEM
 

9

 

1

  COMPUTER SYSTEMS

INPUT DEVICES

(KEYING DEVICES

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Describe computer system

·         Define input devices

 

Learner to

·         Through brainstorming describe computer system

·         define input devices

 

·         Computer system

·         PDA’s

 

·         Longhorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 30-31

 
   

2-3

   

INPUT DEVICES (KEYING DEVICES)

 

·         List keying devices

·         Describe keying devices

 

·         Through questions and answer, list keying devices, describe keying devices

 

·         Computer Keyboard

·         PDA’s Keypad

 

·         Foundations of Computer studies by Pepela pg 68

 
 

10

 

1

   

POINTING DEVICES

 

·         Define pointing devices

·         List pointing devices

·         Describe the listed pointing devices

 

·         Through question and answer define scanning device

·         In group of three, describe the listed pointing devices

 

·         Mouse

·         Joystick

·         Light pen

 

·         Gateway Secondary Revision, S.Mburu G.Chemwa pg 30-34

 
   

2-3

   

SCANNING DEVICES

 

·         Define scanning devices

·         List scanning devices

·         Describe scanning devices

 

·         Through question and answer define scanning device

·         In group of three, describe the listed scanning device

 

 

·         Pictures from books and Magazines

 

·         Foundations of Computer studies by Pepela pg 70

 
 

11

 

END TERM 1 EXAM

 

12

 

REVISION

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

COMPUTER FORM 1 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 2

COMPUTER SYSTEMS (cont)
WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS
 

1

 

1

   

COMPUTER SYSTEMS

DIGITIZERS

SPEECH RECOGNITION DEVICES

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define digitizer

·         List other input technologies

·         Describe the listed input technologies

 

Learner to:

·         Through question and answer define digitizer

·         Through brainstorming to list other input technologies

·         Through group discussion, discuss the listed input technologies

 

·         Pictures from books and newspapers

·         PDA’s

 

·         Lomghorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 37-38

·         Foundations of Computer studies by Pepela pg 76

 
   

2-3

   

CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define term CPU

·         List functional elements of CPU

 

·         Through questions and answer define the term CPU

·         Through brainstorming, list and illustrate the functional elements of CPU

 

·         A working personal computer

 

·         Gateway Secondary Revision, S.Mburu G.Chemwa pg 40

·         Foundations of Computer studies by Pepela pg 77

 
 

2

 

1

   

CONTROL UNIT AND ARITHMETIC LOGIC UNIT

 

·         Describe the control Unit and Arithmetic Logic Unit

 

·         Through brainstorming, describe the Control Unit and Arithmetic Logic Unit

 

·         Charts

 

·         Longhorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 41-42

 
   

2-3

   

MAIN MEMORY

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Classify computer memories

·         List examples of primary memory and secondary memory

·         State characteristics of RAM and ROM

 

Learner to:

·         Through question and answer classify computer memories

·         Trough brainstorming list examples of primary memory and secondary memory

·         Through questions and answer state characteristics of RAM and ROM

 

·         Pictures from books

·         RAM module

 

·         Gateway Secondary Revision, S.Mburu G.Chemwa pg 41-43

 

 
 

3

 

1

   

SPECIAL PURPOSE MEMORIES

 

·         Define special purpose memory

·         List special purpose memories

·         Describe Cache memory and Buffers

 

·         Through question and answer define special purpose memory and list special purpose memories

·         Through brainstorming describe Cache memory and Buffers

 

·         Input/output devices

·         microprocessor

 

·         Foundations of Computer studies by Pepela pg 77

 
   

2-3

   

SPECIAL PURPOSE MEMORIES

 

·         Define registers

·         List types of registers

·         Describe the listed types of registers

 

·         Through question and answer define registers and list types of registers

·         In group of five, discuss the listed types of registers

 

·         Chart

 

·         Longhorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 44-45

 

 
 

4

 

1

   

MEMORY CAPACITY

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define byte

·         Express memory quantities

·         Calculate memory quantities

 

Learner to:

·         Through questions and answer define byte

·         Through teachers demonstration, express memory quantities and calculate memory quantities

 

·         RAM module

·         Flash cards

 

·         Foundations of Computer studies by Pepela pg 79-80

 
   

2-3

   

OVERALL FUNCTIONAL ORGANIZATION OF THE CPU

 

·         Define computer bus

·         List types of computer buses

·         Describe the listed computer buses

·         Give an illustration of the overall functional organization of the CPU

 

·         Through brainstorming, define computer bus

·         In group of five, discuss the listed types of computer buses

·         Through group discussion, illustrate the overall functional organization of the CPU

 

·         Schematic diagram from the book

 

·         Gateway Secondary Revision, S.Mburu G.Chemwa pg 48

 

 
 

5

 

1

   

TYPES OF PROCESSORS

 

·         Classify processors

·         Discuss the listed processor classifications

 

·         Through question and answer Classify processors

·         Through group discussion, discuss the listed processor classification

 

·         Photograph

 

·         Gateway Secondary Revision, S.Mburu G.Chemwa pg 48

 

 
   

2-3

   

TRENDS IN PROCESSORS TECHNOLOGY AND SPEED

 

·         List processors

Type

Manufactures

Year and speed

 

·         Through question and answer, list processors Type, manufactures, year and speed

 

·         Photograph

 

 

·         Longhorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 44-47

 
 

6

 

1

   

OUTPUT DEVICES

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define output device

·         Classify output devices

·         List softcopy output devices

·         Describe monitor as a soft copy output device

 

Learner to:

(a)     Through question and answer define output device and classify output devices

(b)     Through group discussion, discuss the listed softcopy output devices

 

·         CRT,LCD, TFT monitors

·         Speakers

·         LED

 

·         Gateway Secondary Revision, S.Mburu G.Chemwa pg 51-60

·         Foundations of Computer studies by Pepela pg 80

 

 
   

2-3

   

MONITOR DISPLAY TERMINOLOGIES AND VIDEO GRAPHIC ADAPTERS

 

·         Define the terminologies used in monitor

·         List and describe the video graphic adapters

 

·         Through question and answer define terminologies

·         Through group discussion, describe the listed video graphic adapters

 

·         Photograph from books

 

·         Longhorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 49-52

 
 

7

 

1

   

HARDCOPY OUTPUT DEVICES

 

·         Describe hard copy output devices

 

·         Through group discussion, describe hard copy output devices

 

·         Printers

·         Pictures from magazines

·         Newspapers

 

·         Foundations of Computer studies by Pepela pg 81

 

 
   

2-3

   

HARD COPY OUTPUT DEVICES

 

·         List factors to consider when purchasing a printer

 

·         Through question and answer list factors to consider when purchasing a printer

 

 

·         Printers

·         Pictures from magazines

·         Newspapers

 

·         Longhorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 53

 
 

8

 

1

   

SECONDARY STORAGE DEVICES AND MEDIA

 

·         List secondary storage media

·         Describe removable storage device

 

·         Through question and answer list secondary storage media

·         Through group discussion, describe removable storage device

 

·         Flash disc

·         Floppy

·         Diskettes

·         Memory sticks

·         Compact disk

·         Hard disk

 

·         Gateway Secondary Revision, S.Mburu G.Chemwa pg 61-69

 

 
   

2-3

   

SECONDARY STORAGE DEVICES AND MEDIA

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Discuss fixed storage device

 

·         Through brainstorming, discuss fixed storage device

 

·         Flash disc

·         Floppy

·         Diskettes

·         Memory sticks

·         Compact disk

·         Hard disk

 

·         Foundations of Computer studies by Pepela pg 101

 

 
 

9

 

1

   

POWER SUPPLY AND PERIPHERAL DEVICE INTERFACING

 

·         Distinguish between power and interface cables

·         Describe power cables

 

·         Through question and answer, distinguish between and interface cables

 

·         Computer power cables

·         Interface cables

 

·         Longhorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 65-67

 
   

2-3

   

POWER SUPPLY AND PERIPHERAL DEVICE INTERFACING

 

·         Describe interfacing cables

 

·         Through discussion, describe interfacing cables

 

·         Computer power cables

·         Interface cables

 

·         Longhorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 65-67

 
 

10

 

1

   

BASIC COMPUTER SET-UP AND CABLING

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain basic computer setup and cabling

 

·         Through teachers demonstration, explain basic computer setup and cabling

 

 

·         Computer power cables

·         Interface cables

 

·         Foundations of Computer studies by Pepela pg 101

 

 
   

2-3

   

“”

 

·         Mount hard drives and optical drives

 

·         Through teachers demonstration, mount hard drives and optical drives

 

·         Computer

 

·         Foundations of Computer studies by Pepela pg 101

 

 
 

11

 

1

   

COMPUTER SOFTWARE

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Distinguish between system software and application software

 

·         Through question and answer, distinguish between system software and application software

 

·         Computer software’s

 

·         Longhorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 73-76

 
   

2-3

   

COMPUTER SOFTWARE

 

·         Classify software according to purpose

 

·         Through brainstorming, classify software according to purpose

 

·         Computer software’s

 

·         Foundations of Computer studies by Pepela pg 143-144

 
 

12

 

1

   

COMPUTER SOFTWARE

 

·         Classify software according to acquisition

 

Through brainstorming, classify software according to acquisition

 

·         Computer software’s

 

·         Foundations of Computer studies by Pepela pg 143-144

 
   

2-3

   

COMPUTER SOFTWARE

 

 

 

·         Classify software according to end user- License

·         Evaluate criteria for selecting computer system

 

·         Through brainstorming, classify software according to user- License

·         Through question and answer, Evaluate criteria for selecting computer system

 

 

·         Computer software’s

 

·         Foundations of Computer studies by Pepela pg 143-144

 

 
 

13

 

END TERM EXAM AND REVISION

 
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

COMPUTER FORM 1 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 3

OPERATING SYSTEM (OS)
WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS
 

1

 

1

   

DEFINITION OF AN OPERATING SYSTEM

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Illustrate an operating system as a supervisor of hardware and application software

 

Learner to

·         Identify operating system used by the computer

 

·         Charts

·         computer

 

·         Longhorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 82

·         Foundations of Computer studies by Pepela pg 155

 

 
   

2-3

     

·         Identify parts of operating system

 

·         Through brainstorming describe parts of the operating system

 

·         Charts

·         computer

 

·         Longhorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 82

·         Foundations of Computer studies by Pepela pg 155

 
 

2

 

1

   

FUNCTION OF AN OPERATING SYSTEM

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         List devices under the operating system

 

·         Through questions and answers, list devices under control of operating system

 

·         Flash Cards

 

·         Longhorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 83-85

 

 
   

2-3

   

DEVICES UNDER THE OPERATING SYSTEM CONTROL

 

·         State functions of an operating system in resource management

 

·         Through brainstorming, state functions of operating system

 

·         Computer

·         Operating system

·         software

 

·         Gateway Secondary Revision, S.Mburu G.Chemwa pg 87

 
 

3

 

 

1

   

TYPES OF OPERATING SYSTEM

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         List types of operating system

 

Learner to

(a)     List and describe types of operating system

 

·         PC’s loaded with different operating systems, pupils book part 3,4

 

·         Longhorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 83-85

 

 

 
   

2-3

   

 

 

Describe:

·         Single program and multitasking operating system

 

(a)     Draw a summary diagram of various operating system types

 

·         PC’s loaded with different operating systems, pupils book part 3,4

 

·         Foundations of Computer studies by Pepela pg 170

 

 
 

4

 

1

   

 

 

·         Multi- user and single user operating system

 

·         Draw a summary diagram of various operating system types

 

·         Chart

 

·         Foundations of Computer studies by Pepela pg 170

 
   

2-3

     

·         Command line, menu driven and graphical user interface operating system

 

·         Draw a summary diagram of various operating system types

 

·         Chart

 

·         Gateway Secondary Revision, S.Mburu G.Chemwa pg 90-91

 
 

5

 

1

   

HOW OPERATING SYSTEM ORGANIZE INFORMATION

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         State and explain factors that dictate file organization

 

·         Identify features on windows desktop

 

·         PC loaded with any version of windows

 

·         Longhorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 89-94

 

 
   

2-3

     

·         Describe files, folders and drives

·         Start Microsoft windows

 

·         Identify features on windows desktop

 

·         PC loaded with any version of windows

 

·         Longhorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 89-94

 
 

6

 

1

   

MANAGING FILE AND FOLDERS

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Distinguish between folder and directory

·         Draw directory (folder) tree

 

Learner to

·         Create folder in both Graphical user interface and MS-DOS

 

·         Flash cards

 

·         Longhorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 95-97

 

 

 
   

2-3

   

MANAGING FILE AND FOLDERS

 

·         Create ne files and folders

·         Identify parts of an application window

   

·         Flash cards

 

·         Longhorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 95-97

 
 

7

 

1

   

 

 

·         Save changes to a file

·         Rename files or folders

·         Copy, move, sort files and folders

 

Learner to

·         Save changes to a file, rename files and folders

 

·         Personal computer loaded with any version of windows

 

·         Longhorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 95-97

 
   

2-3

     

·         Manipulate files and folders using

Short cut menu, drag and drop

Selecting multiple files and folders

Searching for files and folders

 

·         In group of two, manipulate files and folders using

Shortcut menu, drag and drop

Selecting multiple files and folders

Searching for files and folders

 

·         Personal computer loaded with any version of windows

 

·         Longhorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 90

 
 

8

 

1

   

DISK MANAGEMENT USING WINDOWS

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Format disk

·         Back-up data

 

Learner to:

In group of three

·         Format disk

·         Back-up data

 

·         Personal computer loaded with any version of windows

 

·         Longhorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 106-113

 
   

2-3

     

·         scan problems related to disk

·         defragment a disk

 

In group of three

·         use scan disk to detect disk errors

·         defragment a disk

 

·         floppy diskette

·         flash disk

 

·         Longhorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 106-113

 
 

9

 

1

     

·         Compress files within a disk

·         Scan a disk for virus

 

In a group of three

·         Compress a disk

 

 

·         floppy diskette

·         flash disk

 

·         Longhorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 106-113

 
   

2-3

     

·         Create/restore back-up data

·         Create startup disk

·         Partition a disk

 

In group of three

·         Partition a disk

 

·         Un partition

·         Hard disk

 

·         Longhorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 106-113

 
 

10

 

1

   

INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURING AN OPERATING SYSTEM

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Know installation requirements

 

Learner to

·         List installation requirement

·         Describe the listed installation requirements

 

·         Personal computer without an operating system

 

·         Longhorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 114-117

 
   

2-3

     

·         Install operating system

·         With the help of the teacher install operating system  

·         Installation and start up disk

·         Manufactures documentations

 

·         Foundations of Computer studies by Pepela pg 170

 

 
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

COMPUTER FORM 2 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 1

APPLICATION PACKAGES (WORD PROCESSORS)
WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS
1   Reporting from home and settling for first term work
 

2

 

1

   

DEFINITION OF WORD PROCESSOR

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term word processor

·         Explain the purpose of a word processor

 

·         Q/A discussion

 

·         Newspapers

·         Letters

·         Cards

·         books

 

·         Longhorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 1-3

 
   

2-3

   

USING A WORD PROCESSING PACKAGE

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Start a Microsoft word

·         Explain the Microsoft screen layout

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Handouts

·         Books

·         Working personal computer

 

·         Longhorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 5-10

 
 

3

 

1

   

RUNNING THE PROGRAMME

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Save and retrieve

·         Close and exit

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Books

·         Handouts

·         Working computer

 

 

·         Longhorn Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 13-17

 
   

2-3

   

EDITING AND FORMATTING A DOCUMENT

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Select a document

·         Move, copy and delete

·         Insert and type over

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Handouts

·         Books

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 16-19

 
 

4

 

1

   

FIND AND REPLACE

 

By the end of the lesson, the leaner should be able to

·         Define the term find and replace

·         Find and replace a documents

·         Use thesaurus

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Letters

·         Card working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 16-24

 
   

2-3

   

TEXT FORMATTING

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Bold, italicize, underline, change fonts

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Letters

·         Cards

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 22-23

 
 

5

 

1

   

PARAGRAPH FORMATTING

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Drop cap, sub and superscript

·         Align and indent text

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Handouts

·         Cards

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 22-23

 
   

2-3

   

PARAGRAPH FORMATTING

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Space and section break

·         Bullet and number

·         Insert columns/page headers and footers

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Books

·         Newspapers

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 22-23

 
 

6

 

1

   

SET-UP

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Set up margins

·         Set paper size and orientation

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Handouts

·         Working computer

 

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 33-35

 
   

2-3

   

SET-UP

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term table

·         Crate tables

·         Insert rows and columns

·         Merge/split rows

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Handouts

·         Working computer

·         books

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 37-39

 
 

7

 

1

   

TABLE CONVERSION/ ARITHMETIC CALCULATIONS

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         convert text to a table and vice verse

·         import tables/perform calculations

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Handouts

·         Working computer

·         Chalk board

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 40-41

 
   

2-3

   

MAIL MERGE

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term mail merge

·         Create: main document and data source

·         Merge fields

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Letters

·         Card

·         Working computer

·         Chalk board

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 44-46

 
 

8

 

1

   

GRAPHICS

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term graphic

·         Insert/edit graphics

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Clip art

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 44-49

 
   

2-3

   

PRINTING

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term printing

·         Set up the printer and print

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Letters

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 44

 
 

9

 

1

   

SPREAD SHEETS (SPREADSHEETS)

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term spreadsheets

·         Explain the application areas of spreadsheet

 

·         Q/A Discussion

 

·         Call register

·         Accounts book

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 52-53

 
   

2-3

   

CREATING A WORKSHEET

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term worksheet

·         Create a worksheet

·         Save/retrieve a worksheet

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Handouts

·         Class register

·         Accounts book

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 57-65

 
 

10

 

1

   

CELL DATA TYPES

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term cell data type

·         Explain the different data types

 

·         Q/A discussion

 

·         Books

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 66

 
   

2-3

   

CELL REFERENCING

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term cell referencing

·         Explain the different cell referencing

·         Apply cell referencing on a computer

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Books

·         Handouts

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 66-69

 
 

11

 

1

   

FUNCTIONS AND FORMULAE

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Differentiate between functions and formulae

·         Apply functions and formulae on a document

 

·         Q/A demonstration Practical

 

·         Working computer

·         Books

 

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 70-73

 
   

2-3

   

WORKSHEET FORMATTING

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Format a worksheet: text, numbers, rows, columns and global

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Books

·         Handouts

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 74-79

 
 

12

 

1

   

DATA MANAGEMENT

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain the terms, Sort, filter, total forms

·         Apply the above features

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Books

·         Working computer

 

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 73-75

 
   

2-3

   

CHARTS/GRAPHICS

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Definite the terms chart

·         Explain the different charts

·         Insert charts

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Books

·         Handouts

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 77-79

 
  END TERM EXAMS/SCHOOLS CLOSE
 

 

 

 

 

 

COMPUTER FORM 2 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 2

DATABASES
WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS
1   Reporting from home and settling for the second term work
 

2

 

1

   

DATABASE

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the database

·         Explain the concept of D/base

 

·         Q/A discussion

 

·         Class list

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 93-94

 
   

2-3

   

DATABASE MODELS

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term d/base model

·         Explain the difference d/base models

·         Discuss the features of a database

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Handouts

·         Books

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 96-98

 
 

3

 

1

   

DATA ORGANIZATION

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Organize data in a database

·         Start Ms Access

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Handouts

·         Books

·         Working computer

 

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 97-100

 
   

2-3

   

MS ACCESS SCREEN LAYOUT

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain the access screen layout

·         Create a database

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Letters

·         Cards

·         Books

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 100-104

 
 

4

 

1

   

EDITING A D/BASE

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Edict a data base

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Letters

·         Cart

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 108-109

 
   

2-3

   

QUERIES

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term query

·         Crate a query

 

·         Q/A Demonstration Practical

 

·         Letters

·         Card

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 116-117

 
 

5

 

1

   

UPDATING A QUERY

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Update a query

·         View a query

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Handouts

·         Books

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 120-122

 
   

2-3

   

FORM DESIGN

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain the form layout

·         Create a form

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Books

·         Newspaper

·         Working  computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 110-113

 
 

6

 

1

   

FORMATTING FIELDS

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Display records in a form

·         Format fields

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Handouts

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 113

 

 
   

2-3

   

REPORTS LAYOUT

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define a report

·         Create a report

·         Modify a report

 

Q/A Demonstration Practical

 

·         Handouts

·         Books

·         Working Computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 125-129

 

 
 

7

 

1

   

REPORTS LAYOUT

 

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Sort and group data in a report

·         Design labels

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Forms

·         Report

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 40-41

 

 
   

2-3

   

PRINTING

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term printing

·         Print: form and a report

 

·         Q/A Demonstration Practical

 

·         Forms

·         Report

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 112

 
DESKTOP PUBLISHING
 

8

 

1

   

DESKTOP PUBLISHING

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define DTP S/W

·         State then purpose of DTPS/W

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Clip art

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 132-134

 

 
   

2-3

   

DESIGNING A PUBLICATION

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain the DTP S/W

·         Discuss the types of DTP publications

 

·         Q/A Observation Practical

 

·         Letters

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 133-134

 

 
 

9

 

1

   

DESIGNING A PUBLICATION

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Run the DTP program

·         Explain the DTP screen layout

 

·         Q/A discussion

 

·         Cards, certificates, text, calendars, text books

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 134-136

 
   

2-3

   

DESIGNING A PUBLICATION

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Set up a publication

·         Manipulate text and graphics

 

Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Cards, certificates, text calendars, textbooks

·         Working Computer

 

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 139-143

 
 

10

 

1

   

TEXT

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Design page layout

·         Use a ruler to measure

 

·         Q/A discussion

 

·         Calendars, textbooks

 

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 158

 
   

2-3

   

GRAPHICS

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term graphics

·         Change full stroke

·         Reshape objects

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Books

·         Handouts

·         Working Computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 150

 
 

11

 

1

   

GRAPHICS

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Copy an object

·         Import and wrap text

 

·         Q/A Demonstration Practical

 

·         Books

·         Handouts

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 161-162

 
   

2&3

   

GRAPHICS

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Group objects

·         Lock objects

 

·         Q/A Demonstration Practical

 

·         Books

·         Handouts

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 164-168

 
 

12/13

 

1

   

ROTATE/CROP

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain the terms, sort, filter, total, forms

·         Apply the above features

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Books

·         Working computer

 

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 164

 
  THE SCHOOL CLOSES/END OF TERM EXAMS
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

COMPUTER FORM 1 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 1

 

INTERNET AND E-MAIL

WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS
1 Reporting from home and settling for the first term work
 

2

 

1

   

INTERNET AND E-MAIL

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term internet

·         Explain the development of internet

 

·         Q/A discussion

·         Demonstration

·         observation

 

·         internet

·         Text book

·         Working Computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 168-169

 

 
   

2-3

   

IMPORTANCE OF THE INTERNET

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain the importance of the internet

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Handouts

·         Books

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 266-275

 

 
 

3

 

1

   

INTERNET CONNECTIVITY

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the internet connectivity

·         Explain elements of IC

 

·         Q/A Demonstration Practical

 

·         Handouts

·         Books

·         Modem S/W

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 273-276

 

 
   

2-3

   

INTERNET SERVICES

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain the internet services

 

·         Q/A Demonstration Practical

 

·         Letters

·         Cards

·         Books

·         computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 273-276

 
   

1

   

ACCESSING INTERNET

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Log in/Sign in

·         Surf/browse

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Web pages

·         Books

·         Working computer

 

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 279

 
 

4

 

2-3

   

HYPER LINKS AND SEARCH ENGINES

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term search engine

·         Use search engines

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Letters

·         Card

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 177-179

 

 
 

5

 

1

   

ELECTRONIC MAIL

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain the term e-mail

·         Discuss the use of email s/w

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Handouts

·         Books

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 178-180

 

 
   

2-3

   

E-MAIL

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         State the e-mail facilities

·         Compose mails

·         Check mails

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Books

·         Web pages

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 30-37

 
 

6

 

1

   

E-MAIL

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Manipulate an e-mail

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Handouts

·         Books

·         Web pages

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 180

 
   

2-3

   

SET-UP

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Fax e-mail

·         Attach files

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Websites

·         Web pages

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 181-182

 
 

7

 

1

   

TEL MESSAGING

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain the term tel messaging

·         Develop contact mgt

 

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Handouts

·         Web pages

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 181-182

 

 
   

2-3

   

EMERGING ISSUES

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain the emerging issues

·         Search for the emerging issues in the net

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Websites

·         Web pages

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 182-183

 

 
 

8

 

1

   

GRAPHICS

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term graphic

·         Insert/edit graphics

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Web sites

·         Web pages

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 44-49

 
   

2-3

   

G. DATA SECURITY AND CONTROLS

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term data security

·         Identify security threats on ICT

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Books

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 185-186

 
 

9

 

1

   

CONTROL MEASURES

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Discuss the control measures on ICT

 

·         Q/A discussion

 

·         Internet

·         Books

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 186-188

 
   

2-3

   

COMPUTER CRIMES

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term computer crimes

·         Explain the computer crimes

 

·         Q/A Demonstration Practical

 

·         Books

·         Internet

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 188-190

 
 

10

 

1

   

ICT PROTECTION

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Discuss ICT protection measures

 

Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Books

·         Internet

·         Handouts

·         Working computer

 

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 190-193

 
   

2-3

   

LAWS OF ICT

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the terms ethics

·         Explain the ethical issues

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Books

·         Internet

·         Handouts

·         Books

·         Working computer

 

·         Computer studies by S.John Onunga page 327-328

 
 

11

 

1

   

ICT LEGISLATION

 

By the end of the lesson,  the learner should be able to

·         Discuss ICT laws

 

·         Q/A discussion

   

·         Computer studies by S.John Onunga page 328-331

 
   

2-3

   

WORKSHEET FORMATTING

 

By the end of the lesson, the earner should be able to

·         Format a w/sheet: text, numbers, rows, columns and global

 

·         Q/A Demonstration practical

 

·         Books

·         Handouts

·         Working computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Secondary. S.Mburu, G. Chemwa page 190-193

 

 
   

SCHOOLS CLOSES END OF YEAR

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

COMPUTER FORM 3 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 1

WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS
1 1 Data Representation in a computer DEFINITION & INTRODUCTION

 

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define data

·         Define information

·         Classify computers according to functionality with illustration

·         Questions and answers

·         Discussions in groups

·         brainstorming

·         computer keyboard

·         electronic circuits

·         Charts

·         Photographs

·         Pictures from books

·         Longhorn Computer studies Bk 3 page 1-3

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 1

 
   

2

 

 

 

DATA REPRESENTATION

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Represent data in digital computers

(i)      On electronic circuits

(ii)     On magnetic media

(iii)   Optical media

 

·         Discussions in groups

·         Exercises by the teacher

 

 

·         Charts

·         Floppy diskettes

·         Compact disk

·         Electronic circuit

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Bk 3 page 23

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 1

 
   

3-4

 

Data Representation

 

DATA REPRESENTATION

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Give reasons why binary system is used in computers

·         Define bits, bytes, nibble and word

 

·         Discussions

·         Question and answer

 

·         charts

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Bk 3 page 24

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 1

 

 
 

2

 

1

 

Data Representation

 

NUMBER SYSTEMS

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define decimal number

·         Represent data in decimal number system

·         Represent data in actual number system

 

·         Group discussions

·         Exercises given and marked by the teacher

 

·         Charts

·         Simple calculations

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Bk 3 page 25

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 6

 
   

2

   

NUMBER SYSTEM

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Represent data in actual number system

·         Represent data in Hexadecimal number system

 

·         Group discussions

·         Questions and answering

·         exercises

 

·         charts

·         simple calculations

·         Computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Bk 3 page 26

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 7-8

 
   

3/4

QUIZ AND PROBLEM SOLVING

Teacher administers small assignment and revises for better retention

     
 

3

 

1

 

Data representation

 

FURTHER CONVERSION OF NUMBER SYSTEMS

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Convert binary number to decimal number system

·         Convert decimal numbers to binary numbers

 

·         Questions and answers

·         Discussions in groups

 

·         Charts

·         Simple calculations

·         Questions papers

 

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Bk 3 page 26

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 8

 
   

2

 

 

 

By the end of the lesson,, the learner should be able to

·         Convert binary fraction to decimal number system

·         Convert a decimal fraction to binary

 

·         Discussions

·         Questions and answers

 

·         Charts

·         Simple calculations

·         Questions papers

 

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Bk 3 page 26

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page

 
   

3-4

PROBLEM SOLVING AND QUIZ

Teacher administers questions and answer session for better retention

   
 

4

 

1

 

DATA REPRESENTATION

 

Converting octal numbers to decimal and binary numbers

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Convert octal numbers to decimal numbers

·         Convert octal numbers to binary numbers

 

·         Discussion

·         Question and answer

 

·         Chart

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Bk 3 page 26

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 12

 
   

2

 

DATA REPRESENTATIONS

 

Converting hexadecimal numbers to binary number

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Convert hexadecimal to decimal numbers

·         Convert hexadecimal numbers to binary numbers

 

·         Discussions

·         Question and answer

 

·         Charts

·         Simple calculations

·         Computers

·         Scientific calculators

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Bk 3 page 26

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 13-15

 
3-4 QUIZ AND PROBLEM SOLVING

 Can be inform of a question/answer session for retention

 

5

 

1

 

DATA REPRESENTATIONS

 

Symbolic Representation using coding schemes

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain the binary coded decimal code as a representation Scheme (BCD)

·         Explain the extended Binary coded decimal interchange code (EBCDIC)

 

·         Discussions

·         Question and answer

 

·         Charts

·         Scientific Calculators

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Bk 3 page 26

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 22-27

 
   

2

 

DATA REPRESENTATION

 

Symbolic Representation using coding schemes

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain the American standard code for information interchange code (ASCII) as a representation scheme

 

·         Discussion in groups

 

·         Charts

·         Scientific and simple calculator

·         computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Bk 3 page 26

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 22-27

 
  3-4 QUIZ FOR TETENTION

Administer a small exam

 

6

 

1

   

BINARY ARITHMETIC OPERATIONS

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Represent signed binary numbers using prefixing an extra sign bit to a binary number and ones complement

 

·         Teacher demonstrates

·         Group discussions

·         Questions and answering

 

·         Simple calculators

·         PDA’s

·         charts

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Bk 3 page 27

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 27

 
   

2

   

BINARY ARITHMETIC OPERATIONS

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Represent signed binary numbers using two’s complement

 

·         Teachers demonstrates

·         Question and answer

·         Group discussions

 

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Bk 3 page 27

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 27

 
   

3-4

   

BINARY ADDITION

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Perform seven possible binary additions

·         Outline the procedure for binary additions

 

·         Demonstration by the teacher

·         Teacher gives and marks questions

·         Group discussions

 

·         Charts

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Bk 3 page 27

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 27

 
 

7

 

1

   

BINARY ARITHMETIC OPERATIONS

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Perform direct subtraction

·         Perform subtraction using ones complement

 

·         Discussions

·         Demonstration by teacher

·         Question and answer

 

·         Charts

·         calculator

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Bk 3 page 26

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 28

 
   

2

   

BINARY ARITHMETIC OPERATIONS

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Perform subtraction using twos complement

 

·         Discussions

·         Demonstration by teacher

·         Question and answer

 

·         Charts

·         calculator

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Bk 3 page 26

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 28

 
  3-4 QUIZ AND PROBLEM SOLVING

Teacher evaluates by giving questions to ascertain whether objectives are achieved

   
 

8

 

1

 

Data Processing

 

DEFINITION AND INTRODUCTION

 

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define data information and data processing

·         Describe the data processing cycle

·         Give methods of data collection

 

·         Group discussions

·         Question and answering

·         brainstorming

 

·         charts

·         computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Bk 3 page 32

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 32-35

 
   

2

 

Data Processing

 

DATA PROCESSING CYCLE

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         List stages for data processing

·         Describe the listed data processing cycle stage

 

·         Group discussions

·         Question and answering

·         Brainstorming

 

·         charts

·         computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Bk 3 page 32

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 32-35

 
   

3-4

 

Data Processing

 

DATA PROCESSING CYCLE

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Give the errors that influence the accuracy of data and information output

·         Explain the errors in data processing

 

·         Discussion in groups

·         Question and answer

·         Assignments marked by the teacher

 

·         Flash cards

·         Charts

·         computer

 

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Bk 3 page 35

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 33

 
 

9

 

1

 

Data processing

 

DATA INTEGRITY

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define data integrity

·         Give the measurements of data integrity

·         Accuracy

·         Timelines

·         Relevance

·         Describe the listed data integrity measurements

 

·         Discussion in groups

·         Illustrations by the teacher

·         Question and answer

 

·         Flash cards

·         Simple information system

 

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 41

 
   

2

 

Data processing

 

DATA PROCESSING METHODS

 

By the end of this lesson, the learner should be able to

·         State the ways of minimizing threat to data integrity

·         List and describe the methods of data processing

 

 

·         Discussion in groups

·         Illustrations by the teacher

·         Question and answer

 

·         Flash cards

·         Simple information system

 

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 41

 
   

3-4

 

Data processing

 

COMPUTER FILES

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define a computer file

·         Give the types of computer files

·         State the advantages of computerized filing

 

·         Discussion in groups

·         Illustrations by the teacher

·         Question and answer

 

·         Charts

 

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 49

 
 

10

 

1

 

Data processing

 

ELEMENTS OF COMPUTER FILE

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         List the elements of a computer file

·         Describe the listed elements of a computer file

 

·         Discussion in groups

·         Question and answer

·         demonstration

 

·         database

·         chart with relation database

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Bk 3 page 40

 

 
   

2

 

Data processing

 

CLASSIFICATION OF COMPUTER FILES

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Classify computer files

·         Differentiate between logical and physical computer files

 

·         Illustration by the teacher

 

·         Floppy diskette

·         Compact disc

·         Computer video tape

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies Bk 3 page 41

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 50

 
   

3-4

 

Data processing

 

COMPUTER PROCESSING FILES

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Give the types of processing files

·         Describe the listed types of processing files

·         Master files

·         Transaction file

·         Reference files

·         Backup files

·         Sort files

 

·         Discussions

·         Illustration by the teacher

·         Question and answer

 

·         Charts

·         Flash cards

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 41

 

 
 

11

 

1

 

Data processing

 

FILE ORGANIZATION METHODS

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define file organization

·         List the methods of organizing files on a storage media

·         Describe the listed methods of file organization

 

·         Question and answer

·         Brainstorming

·         Discussions in groups

 

·         Floppy diskettes

·         Compact disk

·         Video tapes

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 42

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 55

 
   

2

 

Data processing

 

ELECTRONIC DATA PROCESSING

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Give the data processing modes

·         Describe

(i)      Online processing

(ii)     Real-time processing

(iii)   Distributed processing

 

·         Discussions in groups

·         Question and answer

·         Illustration by the teacher

 

·         Charts

·         Flash cards

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 43-45

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 61

 
   

3-4

 

Data processing

 

ELECTRONIC DATA PROCESSING MODES

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Describe

(i)      Time- sharing

(ii)     Batch processing

(iii)   Multi processing

(iv)   Multi-tasking

(v)     Interactive processing

 

·         Discussions in groups

·         Question and answer

·         Illustration by the teacher

 

·         Charts

·         Flash cards

 

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 612-69

 
   

12-13

 

END OF TERM EXAMS AND CLOSING OF SCHOOL

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

COMPUTER FORM 3 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 2

WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS
 

1

 

1

 

ELEMENTARY PROGRAMMING PRINCIPLES

 

DEFINITION OF PROGRAMMING

 

By the end of this lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define programming

·         List the terms used in programming

·         Describe the listed terms

·         Differentiate between source program and object program

 

·         Question and answer

·         Discussion in groups

·         Illustration by the teacher

 

·         Charts

·         Books

·         Journals

·         Software

·         computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 47

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 72

 

 
   

2

 

ELEMENTARY PROGRAMMING PRINCIPLES

 

LEVELS OF PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Classify the programming languages

·         Describe the low level programming language

 

·         Demonstration

·         Q/A

 

·         Flash cards

·         Charts

·         books

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 49-51

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 73

 
   

3-4

 

ELEMENTARY PROGRAMMING PRINCIPLES

 

LEVELS OF PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Describe the high level language

·         State the advantages and disadvantages of low-level and high level languages

 

·         Q/A

·         Discussion

 

·         Flash cards

·         Charts

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 59

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 74-75

 
 

2

 

1

 

ELEMENTARY PROGRAMMING PRINCIPLES

 

PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         List the stages in program development

·         Describe

(i)         program recognition

(ii)        program definition

 

·         Question and answer

·         Discussion in groups

 

·         Flash cards

·         charts

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 60-66

 

 
   

2

 

ELEMENTARY PROGRAMMING PRINCIPLES

 

PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Describe

(i)         Program design

(ii)        Program coding

 

·         Demonstration

·         Illustrations by teacher

 

·         Computer software

 

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 83

 

 
   

3-4

 

ELEMENTARY PROGRAMMING PRINCIPLES

 

 

PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Describe

(i)         program testing

(ii)        Program implementation and maintenance

 

·         Discussions in groups

·         Illustrations by the teacher

·         Question and answer

 

·         Flash cards

·         charts

 

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 85

 

 
 

3

 

1

 

ELEMENTARY PROGRAMMING PRINCIPLES

 

 

PROGRAM DOCUMENTATION

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term program documentation

·         State the forms of documentation

·         Describe the target groups for documentation

 

·         Discussions in groups

·         Illustrations by the teacher

·         Question and answer

 

·         Chalkboard

·         charts

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 67

 

 
   

2

 

ELEMENTARY PROGRAMMING PRINCIPLES

 

 

DEVELOPMENT OF ALGORITHMS

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define algorithm

·         List tools used in algorithm

·         Distinguish between pseudo code and flow charts

 

·         Discussion in groups

·         Question and answer

·         Illustration by the teacher

 

·         Chalkboard

·         Charts

·         Flash cards

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 68

 

 
   

3-4

 

ELEMENTARY PROGRAMMING PRINCIPLES

 

DESIGNING MORE COMPLEX ALGORITHMS  

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Give comparison between a pseudo code and a flow chart

·         Design complex algorithms

 

·         Question and answer

·         Demonstration by the teacher

·         Group discussions

 

·         Charts

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 68

 

 
 

4

 

1

 

ELEMENTARY PROGRAMMING PRINCIPLES

 

 

PROGRAM CONTROL STRUCTURES

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define program control structures

·         List three control structures

·         Describe sequence as a control structure

 

·         Discussions in groups

 

·         Charts

·         chalkboard

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 72-78

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 93

 
   

2

 

ELEMENTARY PROGRAMMING PRINCIPLES

 

 

PROGRAM CONTROL STRUCTURES

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Describe the use of iteration (looping) as a control structure

 

·         Discussion in groups

 

·         Charts

·         chalkboard

 

 

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 94

 

 
   

3-4

 

ELEMENTARY PROGRAMMING PRINCIPLES

 

 

 

Program control structures

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Describe selection as a control structure

·         Design a more complex algorithm

 

·         Illustration by the teacher

·         Discussion in groups

·         Question and answer

 

·         Chart

·         chalkboard

 

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 94

 

 
 

5

 

1

 

PROBLEM SOLVING

     
   

2

 

SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT

 

Definition

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term system

·         Describe a system list

·         List the characteristics of a system

 

·         Discussion

·         Question and answer

 

·         Charts

·         Chalkboard

·         Journals

·         Computer

·         books

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 91-95

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 168

 
   

3-4

 

SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT

 

Information system

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Describe the listed characteristics of a system

·         Define information system

 

·         Discussion in groups

·         Illustration by the teacher

 

·         Charts

·         Flash cards

·         Chalkboard

·         Computer

·         Books

 

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 170

 
 

6

 

1

 

SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT

 

Information system

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         State the main purpose of an information system

·         Give reasons why information system is developed

·         State the role of information system analyst

 

·         Discussion

·         Illustrations by the teacher

·         Question and answer

 

·         Charts

·         Flash cards

·         Computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 95

 

 
   

2

 

SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT

 

Theories of system development

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Describe tradition approach

·         Describe rapid application development

 

·         Discussions in groups

·         Illustration by the teacher

 

·         Chalk board

·         Flash cards

·         Charts

 

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 170

 

 
   

3-4

   

Theories of system development

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Describe the structured approach

·         Give examples of ways of information of gathering

 

·         Discussions in groups

·         Illustration by the teacher

 

·         Chalk board

·         Flash cards

·         Charts

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 97

 

 
 

7

 

1

 

 

SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT

 

Stages of system development

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         State and define all the stages of system development

 

·         Illustration by the teacher

·         Question and answer

 

·         Chalk board

·         charts

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 97

 
   

2

 

SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT

 

Stages of system development

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Give the methods used in information gathering

·         Describe interviews studying of available documents as used in information gathering

 

·         Demonstration

·         Discussion

 

·         Chalk board

·         Charts

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 100-104

·         Computer studies by Onunga and Shah page 175

 
   

3-4

 

SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT

 

Stages of system development

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Prepare a questionnaire

·         Prepare and present a fait finding report

·         Describe how automated methods are used

 

·         Discussions in groups

·         Question and answer

·         Illustration by the teacher

 

·         Sample questionnaire

·         Chalkboard

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 104

 

 
 

8

 

1

 

SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT

 

Requirements specification

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Describe output specification

·         Describe input specification

 

·         Discussions

·         Question and answer

 

·         Chalkboard

·         Charts

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 105

 
     

SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT

 

 

Requirements specification

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Describe file/data stores

·         Describe hardware and software requirements

 

·         Discussions

·         Question and answer

 

·         Chalkboard

·         Charts

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 109

 
     

SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT

 

System design

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define system flowchart

·         Identify common flowchart symbols

 

 

·         Discussions

·         Question and answer

 

·         Chalkboard

·         Charts

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 109

 

 
 

9

 

1

 

SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT

 

Designing a system flowchart

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Identify guidelines fro designing system flowcharts

·         Write a system flowchart using a case study

 

·         Discussions

·         Question and answer

·         Illustration by the teacher

 

·         Charts

·         Chalkboard

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 110

 

 
   

2

   

Designing a system flowchart

 

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Write a simple book borrowing module flowchart

·         Write cleaners information system flowchart

 

·         Illustration by the teacher

·         Discussion in groups

 

·         Charts

·         Chalkboard

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 110

 

 
   

3-4

   

Designing a system flowchart

 

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Write a sample library books management system flowchart

·         Use data flow diagrams

 

·         Question and answer

·         Discussion in groups

 

·         Chalkboard

·         chart

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 110

 
 

10

 

1

 

SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT

 

System Construction

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term system construction

·         Identify number of technique that can be used to construct a designed system

 

·         Question and answer

·         Discussion in groups

 

·         Charts

·         Chalkboard

·         Information system (Cleaner)

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 110

 
   

2

   

System Implementation

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define system implementation and file conversion

·         Describe factors considered during file conversion

 

·         Illustrations by the teacher

·         discussion

 

·         Charts

·         chalkboard

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 116

 

 

 
   

3-4

   

Change over strategies

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term changeover

·         List the system change over strategies

·         Describe three listed changeover strategies

 

·         Discussions

·         Question and answer

 

·         Flash card

·         Charts

·         chalkboard

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 116

 

 
 

11

 

1

   

System maintenance and revision

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define system maintenance

·         Define system review

·         Describe security control measures

 

·         Illustration by the teacher

·         Question and answer

 

·         Charts

·         Flash cards

 

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 116

 

 
   

2

   

System documentation

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Write a report on case study

 

·         Illustration by the teacher

·         Question and answer

 

·         Charts

·         Flash cards

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 117

 
   

3-4

 

 

 

System documentation

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Develop a system using a case study

 

·         Illustration by the teacher

·         Discussions

 

·         A chart

·         Computer

·         Printer

·         Chalkboard

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 117

 
 

12

 

1

   

System documentation

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Identify comprehensive system documentation details

·         Write a report on the case study

 

·         Discussions

·         Question and answer

 

·         Charts

·         Computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 118-120

 

 
  2,3& 4    

PRACTICALS

   
 

END OF TERM EXAMINATION

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

COMPUTER FORM 3 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 3

WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS
 

1

 

1

 

PROGRAMMING WITH VISUAL AIDS

 

Definition

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term visual basic

·         Start up visual basic

·         Identify features of visual basic

 

·         Demonstration by the teacher

·         Discussions

·         Question and answer

 

·         Chalkboard

·         Computer

·         chart

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 122

 

 
   

2

 

PROGRAMMING

 

Visual basic toolbox

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Identify parts of the visual basic tool box

·         Describe parts of the visual basic toolbox

 

·         Demonstration

·         Question and answer

 

·         Chalkboard

·         Photograph

·         computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 123

 
   

3-4

   

Saving a visual project

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Save a visual basic project

·         Open an existing visual basic project

 

·         Demonstration by the teacher

·         Question and answer

·         Practical

 

·         Computer

·         Chalkboard

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 123

 

 
 

2

 

1

   

Visual basic fundamental concepts

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Identify the visual basic fundamental concepts

·         Describe the listed fundamental concepts

 

·         Discussions

·         Questions and answer

 

·         Chalkboard

·         Charts

·         Computer

·         Simple calculators

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 136

 

 
   

2

   

Mathematical operators

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Identify mathematical operators

·         Describe the listed mathematical operators

 

·         Discussions

·         Question and answers

 

·         Chalkboard

·         Charts

·         Computer

·         Simple calculators

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 137

 

 
   

3-4

   

Numeric strings and values

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         convert a numeric string to a value

·         Convert a value to a string

 

·         Illustrations by the teacher

·         Discussions

·         Question and answer

 

·         Charts

·         computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 137

 
 

3

 

1

   

Project developments

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Create a program used to calculate the area of a rectangle

 

·         Discussion in groups

·         Illustrations by the teacher

 

·         Charts

·         Computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 145

 

 
   

2

   

Project developments

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Write a program used to find roots of a quadratic expression

 

·         Discussion in groups

·         Illustrations by the teacher

 

·         Charts

·         Computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 147

 
   

3-4

   

Case construct

Looping construct

 

By the end of this lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Use case statement that can display the name of a weekday when its number is provided

·         Write a program using do-loop

·         Write a program using FOR-NEXT LOOP

 

·         Demonstration by the teacher

·         Discussion

·         Question and answer

 

·         Chart

·         Chalkboard

·         Computer

·         printer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 147

 

 

 

 
 

4

 

1

 

 

 

Working with graphical objects

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Insert a picture using picture box

·         Define module and procedure

·         Declare general subroutines

 

·         Demonstration

·         Question and answer

·         discussion

 

·         chart

·         computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 150

 

 
   

2

   

Working with graphical objects

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Write a general subroutine that solves y= xn given that the value of n are integers

 

·         Demonstration

·         Question and answer

·         practical

 

·         computer

·         printer

·         chart

·         chalkboard

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 151

 

 
   

3-4

   

Creating means and dialog boxes

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Create a dropdown menu

·         Create a message and dialog boxes

 

·         Demonstration

·         Discussions

·         Question and answers

 

·         computer

·         printer

·         chart

·         chalkboard

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 151

 

 
   

1

   

List boxes and control boxes

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define list box and combo box

·         Create a list box and a combo box

·         Create a project that loads a list of items

 

·         Discussion

·         Demonstration

·         Practical

 

·         Chart

·         Photograph

·         Computer

·         chalkboard

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 161

 

 
 

5

 

2

   

Visual basic data structures

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term arrays

·         Declare an array

 

·         Discussion

·         Demonstration

·         Practical

 

 

·         Chart

·         Photograph

·         Computer

·         chalkboard

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 163

 

 
   

3-4

   

Visual basic data structures

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Declare two dimensional arrays

·         Write array of records

 

·         Discussion

·         Demonstration

·         Practical

 

·         Chart

·         Photograph

·         Computer

·         chalkboard

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 161

 
 

6

 

1

   

Data files

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define a file

·         Identify types of files recognized by visual basic

·         Link visual basic to data base

 

·         Demonstration

·         Practical

·         Discussion

 

·         Chart

·         Computer

·         chalkboard

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 187-189

 

 
   

2

 

INTRODUCTION TO DATA BASE DESIGN

 

Definition

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define database

·         Identify relationships in database

 

·         Demonstration

·         Practical

·         Discussion

 

·         Chart

·         Computer

·         chalkboard

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 187-189

 
   

3-4

   

Defining attributes

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define a foreign key

·         Distinguish between an entity and attributes

·         Create one to many relationships

 

·         Question and answer

·         Practical

·         Demonstration

·         discussions

 

·         computer

·         chart

·         chalkboard

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 203-204

 

 
 

7

 

1

   

File table structure

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Create a table

·         Set primary key and foreign key

 

·         Demonstration

·         Discussion

·         Practical

 

·         Computer

·         Chart

·         Chalkboard

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 217

 
   

2

   

Enforcing Referential integrity

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Enforce referential integrity between tables

·         Normalize table

 

·         Demonstration

·         Discussion

·         Practical

 

·         Computer

·         Chart

·         Chalkboard

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 217

 
   

3-4

   

Forms and commands

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Create a form/ interface

·         Call for commands

 

·         Discussion in groups

·         Demonstration

·         Practical

·         Question and answer

 

·         Computer

·         Chart

·         Chalkboard

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 21o

 

 
 

8

 

1

   

Creating reports

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Describe the tools used to automate database

·         Create a switchboard

 

·         Discussion in groups

·         Demonstration

·         Practical

·         Question and answer

 

·         Chart

·         computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 211

 

 
   

2

   

Automating database

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Describe the tools used to automate database

·         Create a switchboard

 

·         Discussion in groups

·         Demonstration

·         Practical

·         Question and answer

 

·         Chart

·         computer

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 212

 
   

3-4

   

 

Automating database

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Create macros

·         Develop a system using a case study

 

·         Demonstration

·         Assignment

 

·         Computer

·         Chart

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by Mburu and Chemwa  Bk 3 page 212

 
REVISION AND END TERM EXAMS
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

COMPUTER FORM 4 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 1

WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS
1 Reporting from home and settling for the first term
 

2

 

1

 

 

 

Definition of networking terms

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term computer network

·         Explain the term data communication

 

·         Q/A discussion

 

·         Newspaper

·         Letters

·         books

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 1-5

·         Computer studies by Onunga & Rena Shah Bk 4 page 1-5

 
   

2-3

 

 

 

Networking

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain the types of computer n/w

·         Discuss the purpose of n/w

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Handouts

·         Books

·         Internet

·         Working Pc

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 5-9

·         Computer studies by Onunga & Rena Shah Bk 4 page 6

 
   

4

     

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain the demerits of n/w

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Twisted cables

·         Internet 5

·         Working pc

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 10-17

·         Computer studies by Onunga & Rena Shah Bk 4 page 6

 
 

3

 

1

 

 

 

Elements of networking

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Discuss communication with cables

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Handouts

·         Books

·         Internet

·         Working PC

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 17-22

·         Computer studies by Onunga & Rena Shah Bk 4 page 9-11

 
   

2-3

 

 

 

Elements of networking

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain the types of wireless communication

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

 

·         Books

·         Internet

·         Working PC

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 23-28

·         Computer studies by Onunga & Rena Shah Bk 4 page 17-22

 
 

4

 

1

 

 

 

 

Communication Devices

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term communication devices

·         Explain the work of: Modems, network cards, hubs

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Letters

·         Software

·         Working Pc

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 30-33

·         Computer studies by Onunga & Rena Shah Bk 4 page 20

 
   

2-3

   

Network Software

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Discuss the different network s/w: O/S, protocols

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Handouts

·         Books

·         Working PC

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 30-31

 
   

4

   

Types of computer networks

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Discuss the three types of computer networks LAN,MAN, WAN

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Internet

·         Books

·         Working PC

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 4-5

·         Computer studies by Onunga & Rena Shah Bk 4 page 22

 
 

5

 

1

   

Network topologies

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term network topology

·         Differentiate btw. Logical and physical topologies

 

Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Internet

·         Books

·         Working PC

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 33-34

·         Computer studies by Onunga & Rena Shah Bk 4 page 16

 
   

2-3

   

Network Topologies

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Define the term network topology

·         Differentiate between Logical and physical topologies

·         Explain a star topology

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Internet

·         Books

·         Working PC

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 35-36

·         Computer studies by Onunga & Rena Shah Bk 4 page 18

 
   

4

   

Network Topologies

 

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to

·         Explain a

Mesh Topology

Tree Topology

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Working PC

·         Handouts

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 37-38

·         Computer studies by Onunga & Rena Shah Bk 4 page 19

 
2.        APPLICATION AREAS OF NFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY
 

6

 

1

   

Application areas of ICT

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain Application areas of ICT

·         Financial system

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Internet

·         Books

·         Working PC

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 37-39

·         Computer studies by Onunga & Rena Shah Bk 4 page 27

 
   

2-3

   

Application areas of ICT

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain application areas of ICT in common system

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Internet

·         Books

·         Working PC

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 40-41

·         Computer studies by Onunga & Rena Shah Bk 4 page 27

 
   

4

   

Application of ICT

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain application areas of ICT in retail system

·         Explain application areas of ICT in Reservation system

 

Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Internet

·         Books

·         Working PC

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 40-59

·         Computer studies by Onunga & Rena Shah Bk 4 page 28

 
 

7

 

1

   

Application areas of ICT

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain Application areas of ICT in Education

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Internet

·         Books

·         Working PC

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 41-58

·         Computer studies by Onunga & Rena Shah Bk 4 page 49

 
   

2-3

   

Application areas of ICT

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain Application of ICT in Education System

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Internet

·         Books

·         Working

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 41-58

·         Computer studies by Onunga & Rena Shah Bk 4 page 50

 
   

4

   

Application areas of ICT

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain Application areas of ICT in industrial System

 

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Internet

·         Books

·         Working PC

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 41-58

·         Computer studies by Onunga & Rena Shah Bk 4 page 39

 
8 Half Term
 

9

 

1

   

Application areas of ICT

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain application areas of ICT in entertainment and virtual reality

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Internet

·         Books

·         Working Pc

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 61,64-65

·         Computer studies by Onunga & Rena Shah Bk 4 page 51/55

 
   

2-3

   

Application areas of ICT

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain application areas of ICT in marketing and law enforcement

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Internet

·         Books

·         Working Pc

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 63

 

 
   

4

   

Application areas of ICT

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain application area of ICT in transportation system

 

·         Q/A Discussion

 

·         Internet

·         Books

·         Working Pc

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 44-46

·         Computer studies by Onunga & Rena Shah Bk 4 page 47

 
   

1

 

 

 

Application areas of ICT

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain Application areas of ICT in Library System

 

 

·         Q/A Discussion

 

·         Internet

·         Books

·         Journals

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 44

 
  IMPACT OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY ON SOCIETY
 

10

 

2-3

   

Application areas of ICT in the society

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Discuss effects on

(i)      Employment

(ii)     Automated production

 

·         Q/A demonstration practical

 

·         Letters

·         Working PC

·         Newspapers

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 44

 
   

4

   

Impact of ICT in the society

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Discuss effects if ICT on work’s health

·         State the characteristics of future trends in ICT

·         Discuss rapid evolution in ICT

 

·         Q/A Discussion

 

·         Handouts

·         Journals

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 44

·         Computer studies by Onunga & Rena Shah Bk 4 page 60

 
 

11

 

1

   

Impact of ICT in the society

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Discuss effects of ICT on

(i)      Environmental issues

(ii)     Cultural effects

 

·         Q/A Discussion

 

·         Handouts

·         Journals

·         Videos

·         Photographs

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 44

·         Computer studies by Onunga & Rena Shah Bk 4 page 63

 
   

2-3

   

Evolution of computer systems

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Discuss Artificial intelligence

 

·         Q/A Discussion

 

·         Class Register

·         Accounts book

·         Journals

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 52-53

·         Computer studies by Onunga & Rena Shah Bk 4 page 81

 
   

4

   

Evolution of Computer systems

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Explain expanded information superhighway

 

·         Q/A Demonstration Practical

 

·         handouts

·         class register

·         accounts

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 79-80

 

 
 

 

 

 

 

COMPUTER FORM 4 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 2

CAREER OPPORTUNITIES IN ICT
WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS
 

1

Reporting from home and settling for the first term work
 

2

 

1

   

Career opportunities in ICT

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Discuss the roles of a system analyst, a chief programmer

 

·         Q/A Discussion

 

·         Books

·          Journals

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 79

·         Computer studies by Onunga & Rena Shah Bk 4 page 95

 
   

2-3

   

Career opportunities in ICT

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Discuss functions of computer programmer and d/b administrator

 

·         Q/A Demonstration Practical

 

·         Books

·         Handouts

·         Newspapers

·         Realia

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 81

·         Computer studies by Onunga & Rena Shah Bk 4 page 97

 
   

4

   

Career Opportunities in ICT

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Discuss the functions of a s/w engineer and a computer engineer

 

·         Q/A demonstration Practical

 

·         Books

·         Working PC

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 80

 
 

3

 

1

   

Career opportunities in ICT

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Discuss the function of a web designer, web administrator and computer operator

 

 

·         Q/A demonstration Practical

 

·         Books

·         Handouts

·         Journals

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 81

 

 

 
   

2-3

   

Career opportunities in ICT

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Discuss the function of computer technician and data processing manager

 

Learner to

Q/A discussion

 

·         Books

·         Realia

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 78

 

 
   

4

   

Career opportunities in ICT

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Discuss other educational opportunities in the various institutions

 

·         Q/A Discussion

 

·         Books

·         Newspapers

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 83-84

 

 
 

4

 

1

   

Identification of further Educational opportunities

 

By the end of the lesson, the leaner should be able to

·         Explain the different courses offered in universities, polytechnics, middle level colleges

 

·         Q/A Discussion

 

·         Books

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 83-84

·         Computer studies by Onunga & Rena Shah Bk 4 page 106-110

 
   

2-3

   

Developing project using ms access  d/base

Description of a given system

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Identify a problem

·         Definition of a problem

 

·         Q/A discussion

 

·         Books

·         Sampled projects

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 83-84

·         Computer studies by Onunga & Rena Shah Bk 4 page 106-112

 
   

4

   

Fact finding

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·         Identify the number of manual documents that are needed for the system given

 

·         Q/A observation

 

·         Books

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 83-84

·         Computer studies by Onunga & Rena Shah Bk 4 page 106-120

 
 

5

 

1

 

   

Fact finding

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Design a sample interview guideline for the system given

 

·         Q/A practical

 

·         Sampled projects

·         Books

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 83-84

 
   

2-3

   

Fact finding

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be ale to

·         Design a sample questionnaire for the system giver

 

·         Q/A practical

 

·         Sampeled projects

·         books

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 93-94

·         Computer studies by Onunga & Rena Shah Bk 4 page 122

 
   

4

   

System design

·         Preliminary design phase

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Identify the flowchart symbols

·         Design a simple flowchart for the system

 

·         Q/A practical

 

·         Sampled projects

·         Books

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 94-95

 

 
 

6

 

1

   

System design

·         Preliminary design phase

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Design a complex flowchart for the system

 

·         Q/A practical

 

·         Sampled projects

·         Books

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 94-95

 
   

2-3

   

Detailed design

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Design the outputs for the system

 

 

Q/A practical

 

·         Sampled projects

·         Books

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 94-95

 
   

4

   

Detailed design

 

By the end  of the lesson, the leaner  should be able to

·         Design input interface for the system

 

·         Q/A practical

 

·         Sampled projects

·         Books

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 96-100

 
 

7

 

1

   

Files and data stores design

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Design a database

 

·         Q/A practical

 

·         Sampled projects

·         Books

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 100-101

 
   

2-3

   

Creating relationships

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Create relationships

 

·         Q/A practical

 

·         Books

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 103

 
   

4

   

Hardware and software requirements

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Identify h/w and s/w requirements for the system

 

·         Q/A discussion

 

·         Books

·         Realia

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 103

 
 

9

 

1,2,3,4

   

Constructing information management system given

·         Designing inputs

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Design inputs

 

·         practical

 

·         internet

·         sampled projects

·         books

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 86-153

 
 

10

 

1,2,3,4

   

Designing outputs

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Design outputs

 

·         practical

 

·         books

·         internet

·         sampled projects

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 86-153

 
 

11

     

·         Designing

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·         Design various management systems

 

·         practical

 

·         Books

 

·         Longhorn Computer studies by S.Mburu and C. Chemwa page 86-153

 
12 1,2,3,4 Writing end of term exams
 

13

 

The school closes

   
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

COMPUTER FORM 4 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 3

 

1

 

Reporting from home and settling for the third term work

 

2-3

 

POST MOCKS AND JOINTS

 

4-7

 

REVISION

 

7

 

K.C.S.E BEGINS

 

Grade 4 & 5 Rationalized Notes

Grade 4 & 5 Rationalized Notes free downloads below:

GRADE-4-IRE-NOTES_Phoenix.pdf
GRADE 5 UPDATED RATIONALISED CREATIVE ARTS NOTES.pdf
GRADE-5-FRENCH-NOTES.pdf
GRADE 5 KISWAHILI NOTES.pdf
G5 AGRIC & NUTRITION-1.pdf
grade_4_rationalized_agriculture_and_nutrition_lesson_notes_Phoenix.pdf
GRADE-4-REVISION-BOOKLET_Phoenix.pdf
GRADE-4-SCIENCE-AND-TECHNOLOGY-NOTES_Phoenix.pdf
GRADE-4-SOCIAL-STUDIES-NOTES_Phoenix.pdf

TSC to issue promotion letters amid protests

The Teachers Service Commission (TSC) has decided not to change the list of teachers who were promoted last month after interviews held in January and February. TSC officials say that the promotion list will stay as it is, even though both the Parliament and Senate are looking into the promotions.

Teachers on the list are expected to receive their appointment letters this week. Some Members of Parliament (MPs) have raised concerns about how fair and transparent the promotion process was. They pointed out that some teachers who were promoted last year appeared on this year’s list again, which led to accusations of favoritism.

The Senate has also started a detailed investigation due to claims of unfair promotions. During discussions, the Senate Education Committee accused the TSC of corruption and asked for a clear explanation about how 25,252 teachers were selected for promotion across the country.

Senator Richard Onyonka questioned whether the TSC followed fair practices, especially since some long-serving teachers with better qualifications were not promoted, while younger teachers with less experience were. He also asked why more populated areas with more teachers received fewer promotions.

The Senate is pushing for answers as dissatisfaction among MPs grows, with some claiming the promotion process seemed biased towards certain regions. Senator Esther Okenyuri accused some TSC officials of asking for bribes from teachers wanting promotions. She highlighted that some teachers with over 17 years of service were not promoted, while others with only one year of experience were.

Okenyuri called for major changes in the TSC to restore integrity. Senators also want to know if there is a way for unhappy teachers to appeal and how many complaints have been made and resolved. They stressed the importance of handling these issues openly to rebuild trust among teachers.

The committee plans to call TSC officials to explain how the promotions were handled and what is being done about the stagnation of teachers’ careers. Many lawmakers are losing confidence in the TSC’s management.

When TSC CEO Dr. Nancy Macharia spoke to the National Assembly, she said the Commission cannot promote enough teachers due to lack of funding. She explained that the government only allocates 1 billion shillings a year for promotions, which is not enough for the large number of eligible teachers.

Dr. Macharia mentioned that this amount can only promote 6,000 teachers out of over 500,000, which is discouraging for those who deserve promotions. She stated that TSC needs 5 billion shillings each year to properly promote teachers and prevent stagnation.

In 2024, TSC promoted 19,943 teachers after receiving 1 billion shillings in the budget. This year, they listed 25,252 teachers for promotion after interviews. These teachers will get their appointment letters before being assigned to schools with openings.

MPs continued to question the fairness of the promotions, noting that some areas received very few. For example, one constituency only had five promotions out of 25,000 teachers.

Despite the scrutiny, the TSC says it is working within its limitations and is committed to improving teacher welfare. They believe that the issues with promotions and staffing are due to insufficient funding and have called on Parliament to adjust policies for better planning.

Targeter series class 8 exams 2021

Here is a collection of the latest Mentor Series Exams with Marking Schemes for Class 8 KCPE Revision Exams. Remember to download more free secondary and primary teachers’ resources here; TEACHERS’ RESOURCES PORTAL.

CLASS 8 FREE MENTOR SERIES KCPE REVISION EXAMS

ENGLISH MENTOR SERIES EXAMS PAPER IN PDF.

MATHEMATICS MENTOR SERIES EXAMS PAPER IN PDF.

KISWAHILI MENTOR SERIES EXAMS PAPER IN PDF.

SOCIAL STUDIES AND RELIGION MENTOR SERIES EXAMS PAPER IN PDF.

MATHS MENTOR SERIES EXAMS PAPER IN PDF.

MENTOR SERIES EXAMS MARKING SCHEMES IN PDF.

SCIENCE MENTOR SERIES EXAMS PAPER IN PDF

ALSO DOWNLOAD;

CLASS 8 KCPE REVISION PAPERS; FREE QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS DOWNLOADS

Free KCPE past papers, class 8 exams and revision materials

Class 8 free notes and exams (KCPE)

Class 8 free latest schemes of work downloads

Schemes of work class 5, 6, 7, and 8 term 1 to 3

Targeter series class 8 exams 2021

Targeter series class 8 exams 2021-2022

Targeter series 2 class 8 exams 2021

Class 8 Targeter, Jesma free exams with marking schemes

Jesma exams 2021 class 8 pdf

English Form 1, 2, 3 & 4 Free Latest Notes (Well arranged for all Topics)

English Form 1, 2, 3 & 4 Free Latest Notes (Well arranged for all Topics)

ENGLISH BOOKLET.doc
KCSE TOPICALS QUESTIONS.docx
SECONDARY SCHOOLS IN KENYA.pdf

ENGLISH, KISWAHILI & MATHS SYLLABUS.pdf
English grammar notes.doc

Past KCSE English Questions and Answers

2012 KCSE ENGLISH PAPER 1 MS.doc
ENGLISH pre mock
2010-2011 ENGLISH ANSWERS.doc
2010-2011 ENGLISH QUESTIONS.doc
2012 KCSE ENGLISH PAPER 1.doc
2012 KCSE ENGLISH PAPER 2 MS.doc
2012 KCSE ENGLISH PAPER 2.doc
2012 KCSE ENGLISH PAPER 3-1.doc
2012 KCSE ENGLISH PAPER 3.doc
ENGLISH 2014 prediction.doc
ENGLISH NOTES.doc
ENGLISH PAST PAPERS MARKING SCHEMES.doc
ENGLISH PAST PAPERS QUESTIONS.doc
english pp 1-3 ans.pdf
english pp 1-3 kcse 2014.pdf
ENGLISH SYLLABUS.docx
english-paper1-answers-kcse-2013.pdf
english-paper1-questions-and-answers-kcse-2013.pdf
english-paper2-answers-kcse-2013.pdf
english-paper2-questions-and-answers-kcse-2013.pdf
english-paper3-answers-kcse-2013.pdf
english-paper3-questions-and-answers-kcse-2013.pdf
KCSE TOPICALS QUESTIONS.docx

English Termly Exams

ENGLISH FORM 1 TERM 2 .docx
english 2014
KCSE 2013 SUMARY
2009 ENGLISH FORM 1 TERM 3 MID-TERM .DOCX
2009 ENGLISH FORM 3 PAPER 2 TERM 3 MID-TERM .DOCX
2009 ENGLISH FORM 3 TERM 3 MID-TERM .DOCX
2010 ENGLISH FORM 1 TERM III .DOCX
2010 ENGLISH FORM 2 MID-TERM .DOCX
2010 ENGLISH FORM 2 TERM 1 MID-TERM .DOCX
2010 ENGLISH FORM 2 TERM III .DOCX
2010 ENGLISH FORM 3 PAPER 2 TERM III .DOCX
2010 ENGLISH FORM 3 TERM 1 MID-TERM .DOCX
2010 ENGLISH FORM 3 TERM III .DOCX
2010 ENGLISH FORM 4 PAPER 1 TERM 1 MID-TERM .DOCX
2010 ENGLISH FORM 4 TERM 1 MID-TERM .DOCX
2010 ENGLISH PAPER 3 TERM III .DOCX
2011 ENGLISH FORM 1 TERM I.DOCX
2011 ENGLISH FORM 1 TERM III .DOCX
2011 ENGLISH FORM 1TERM II.DOCX
2011 ENGLISH FORM 2TERM I MID-TERM .DOCX
2011 ENGLISH FORM 2TERM II.DOCX
2011 ENGLISH FORM 3 PAPER 2 TERM III .DOCX
2011 ENGLISH FORM 3 PAPER 3 TERM III .DOCX
2011 ENGLISH FORM 3 TERM 3 MID-TERM .DOCX
2011 ENGLISH FORM 3TERM II.DOCX
2011 ENGLISH FORM 4TERM I MID-TERM .DOCX
2012 ENGLISH FORM 1 TERM III .DOCX
2012 ENGLISH FORM 1TERM 2 MID-TERM .DOCX
2012 ENGLISH FORM 1TERM II.DOCX
2012 ENGLISH FORM 2 TERM 2 MID-TERM .DOCX
2012 ENGLISH FORM 2 TERM III .DOCX
2012 ENGLISH FORM 2TERM II.DOCX
2012 ENGLISH FORM 4TERM 2 MID-TERM .DOCX
2013 ENGLISH FORM 1 TERM I.DOCX
2013 ENGLISH FORM 2 TERM I.DOCX
2013 ENGLISH FORM 3 TERM I.DOCX
CAREER GUIDANCE.doc
ENG F1 CAT 1 T2.doc
ENG F1.doc
ENG F2 CAT 1 T2.doc
English booklet.doc
TSC ACT 2012.pdf

English Exams

English-CODE003
English- CODE 002
English-CODE 001
English-CODE 004

English Mock Exams

2010-2012
ENGLISH 2013
2006 BONDO DISTRICT PAPER 1 ANSWERS.doc
2006 BONDO DISTRICT PAPER 1.doc
2006 BONDO DISTRICT PAPER 2 ANSWERS.doc
2006 BONDO DISTRICT PAPER 2.doc
2006 BONDO DISTRICT PAPER 3 ANSWERS.doc
2006 BONDO DISTRICT PAPER 3.doc
2006 KEIYO DISTRICT PAPER 1 ANSWERS.doc
2006 KEIYO DISTRICT PAPER 1.doc
2006 KEIYO DISTRICT PAPER 2 ANSWERS.doc
2006 KEIYO DISTRICT PAPER 2.doc
2006 KEIYO DISTRICT PAPER 3 ANSWERS.doc
2006 KEIYO DISTRICT PAPER 3.doc
2006 NANDI NORTH DISTRICT PAPER 1 ANSWERS.doc
2006 NANDI NORTH DISTRICT PAPER 1.doc
2006 NANDI NORTH DISTRICT PAPER 2 ANSWERS.doc
2006 NANDI NORTH DISTRICT PAPER 2.doc
2006 NANDI NORTH DISTRICT PAPER 3 ANSWERS.doc
2006 NANDI NORTH DISTRICT PAPER 3.doc
2006 NAROK DISTRICT PAPER 1 ANSWERS.doc
2006 NAROK DISTRICT PAPER 1.doc
2006 NAROK DISTRICT PAPER 2 ANSWERS.doc
2006 NAROK DISTRICT PAPER 2.doc
2006 NAROK DISTRICT PAPER 3 ANSWERS.doc
2006 NAROK DISTRICT PAPER 3.doc
2006 NYAMIRA DISTRICT PAPER 1 ANSWERS.doc
2006 NYAMIRA DISTRICT PAPER 1.doc
2006 NYAMIRA DISTRICT PAPER 2 ANSWERS.doc
2006 NYAMIRA DISTRICT PAPER 2.doc
2006 NYAMIRA DISTRICT PAPER 3 ANSWERS.doc
2006 NYAMIRA DISTRICT PAPER 3.doc
2006 TESO DISTRICT PAPER 1 ANSWERS.doc
2006 TESO DISTRICT PAPER 1.doc
2006 TESO DISTRICT PAPER 2 ANSWERS.doc
2006 TESO DISTRICT PAPER 2.doc
2006 TESO DISTRICT PAPER 3 ANSWERS.doc
2006 TESO DISTRICT PAPER 3.doc
2006 TRANSZOIA DISTRICT PAPER 1 ANSWERS.doc
2006 TRANSZOIA DISTRICT PAPER 1.doc
2006 TRANSZOIA DISTRICT PAPER 2 ANSWERS.doc
2006 TRANSZOIA DISTRICT PAPER 2.doc
2006 TRANSZOIA DISTRICT PAPER 3 ANSWERS.doc
2006 TRANSZOIA DISTRICT PAPER 3.doc
2006 TURKANA DISTRICT PAPER 1 ANSWERS.doc
2006 TURKANA DISTRICT PAPER 1.doc
2006 TURKANA DISTRICT PAPER 2 ANSWERS.doc
2006 TURKANA DISTRICT PAPER 2.doc
2006 TURKANA DISTRICT PAPER 3 ANSWERS.doc
2006 TURKANA DISTRICT PAPER 3.doc

PHYSICS FORM 3 NOTES LATEST

PHYSICS FORM III

LINEAR MOTION

Definition of terms.

Distance;Is the length between two points.

Displacement; Is the distance moved by a body but in specified direction.

Hence distance is a scalar quantity while displacement is a vector quantity

 

Speed;Is the distance covered per unit time

 

Velocity;  Is the change of displacement per unit time.

Speed is therefore a scalar quantity while velocity is a vector quantity.

 

  Motion- time graphs

They include;      (a) Distance-time graphs;

(b) Displacement – time graphs

(c)  speed – time graphs

(d) Velocity-time graphs

 

a)DISTANCE-TIME GRAPHS

(i) For a body moving with constant speed

 

(ii) For a body moving with variable speed

 

(iii) Stationary body

 

(b) DISPLACEMENT-TIME GRAPHS

(i) Uniform velocity

(ii) Variable velocity

(iii) Stationary body

(c) SPEED-TIME GRAPHS

(i) Constant speed

 

(ii) Variable speed

 

AREA UNDER SPEED-TIME GRAPH

This gives the distance covered

Distance covered=Area under the graph=(½ x 3 x15)+( ½ x 3 x 4)

= 45M

 

 

(d) VELOCITY- TIME GRAPHS

(i) Constant velocity

 

(ii) Uniform acceleration

 

THE AREA UNDER A VELOCITY – TIME GRAPH

This gives displacement. See the fig. below

 

Displacement = Area under graph = ½ 8x 10

= 40M

 

(iii) Increasing acceleration

 

(iv) decreasing acceleration

 

MEASURING SPEED, VELOCITY AND ACCELERATION

 

METHOD 1; Finding the speed of a student running around the field.

-Using a tape measure, measure the perimeter of the field.

– Record the time it takes the student to run round the field once.

– Calculate the speed by the formula

Perimeter

Time taken

 

 

Average speed =

If the time taken by the student to run 100m from the stating point straight to the finishing line, the average velocity can be determined because here the direction is the same.

 

METHOD 2; Using a ticker timer

This method is used to determine velocity for a shorter distance.

A ticker timer has an arm which vibrates regularly due to the changing current in the mains supply. As the arm vibrates, it makes dots on the paper tape. Successive dots are marked at the same interval of time.

Most ticker timers operate at frequency of 50 HZ (50 cycles/Sec).

Such a timer makes 50 dots per second.

Here the time interval for 2 consecutive dots will be equivalent to the time for 1 cycle i.e

1×1

50

50 cycles → 1 sec

1 cycle   →           = 0.02s

 

This time interval is called a tick.

The distance between 2 adjacent dots is thus the distance moved by the paper tape in 0.02s. Since this distance is usually very small; it is necessary to measure the distance moved in 10- tick interval and devide this by the time for covering the 10- tick interval.

– This time = 0.02 x 10 = 0.2 for ticker timer operating at 50HZ

 

N/B The dots on the paper pulled at constant velocity are equally spaced while those on the tape pulled with changing velocity unequally spaced.

See the diagrams below

N/B When the dots are closely packed together, the tape is moving slowly and when the dots are far apart, it is moving fast.

Whenthe spaces between the dots increase uniformly, then the tape is accelerating, and when this distance decreases uniformly, the tape is decelerating.

 

Consider the following tapes obtained in similar experiments

CASE  1; Frequency = 50HZ

Length of 1 ten tick = 5cm

Time to cover 1 ten-tick = 0.02 x 10 = 0.2

Speed = D/t = 0.05/0.2 = 0.25M/S

N/B From the diagram, the velocity is constant

 

CASE 2: FREQUENCY = 50HZ

In this case

VBC0.04/0.2 = 0.2M/S

 

VCD = 0.08/0.2 = 0.4M/S

 

VAB = 0.03/0.2 = 1.5M/S

Here, the trolley is accelerating

 

CASE 3        Frequency = 50HZ

VAB = 0.1/O.2 = 0.5m/s

 

VBC = 0.12/0.2 = 0.1m/s

Here the body is accelerating

 

OTHER QUESTIONS

  1. A tape is pulled through a ticker timer which makes 1 dot every second. If it makes 3 dots, and the distance between the 1st and the 3rd dot is 16cm. Find the velocity of the tape.

Solution

Frequency = 1HZ = 1 cycle per sec.

Hence time between 2 dots (consecutive) = 1 seconds

Distance between the 1st and the 3rd dot = 16cm

Hence velocity = 0.16m/2sec.= 0.08m/s

 

  1. A tape is pulled steadly through a ticker timer of frequency 50HZ. Given the outcome shown in the fig. below, calculate the velocity with which the tape is pulled. ( The diagram is drawn to scale)

 

 

Frequency = 50HZ

Hence time between 2 consecutive dots = 0.02sec.

Distance between consecutive dots = 5cm = 0.05m

V = D/t = 0.05/0.02 = 2.5m/s

 

Other questions; Exercise 1.3 pg 26 KLB  BK 3 qn 1 (a) and 2

 

LINEAR MOTION

Equations of linear motion

Consider a body moving in a straight line with uniform acceleration a so that its velocity increases from an initial value u to final value V in time t.

Acceleration a   =  V –  u

t

Making V the subject of the formula   V = u  + at  ..……this the 1st equation of linear motion

The displace of the body s is  =  Average velocity x time

S =  u + V       x  t

2

Hence S =  ut  +  ½ at2    ……….     This is the 2nd equation of linear motion

Displacement S, can  be given by = Average velocity x time

But     t   = v – u

t

+

Hence  S =  u + v         v – u

2               t

Therefore  V2 = u2 + 2aS  …………….  This is the 3rd equation of linear motion

The 3equations include(i) v=u+at

(ii) s=ut+1/2 as

(iii) v2=u2+2as

Where u is the initial velocity

v      is the final velocity

a     acceleration

t     time

s      distance

N/B   Retardation is -a. The equations for abody undergoing retardation are:

v=u-at

s=ut-1/2at2

v2=u2-2as

 

QUESTIONS

  1. A body is uniformly accelerated from rest to a final velocity of 100 m/s in 10s. Calculate the distance covered

(use first equation to get a then 2nd  equation to get s.)      (s=500m)

  1. A body whose initial velocity is 30 m/s moves with a constant retardation of 3 m/s. Calculate the time taken for the body to come to rest. (t=10s)
  2. Abody moving with uniform acceleration of 10 m/s covers a distance of 320m. If its initial velocity was 60 m/s, calculate its final velocity. (v=100 m/s)

 

MOTION UNDER GRAVITY

FREE FALL

The 3 equations of abody under constant acceleration can be applied in free fall. Herea is replaced by g. So the 3 equations become.

v=u+gt

s=ut+1/2gt2

v2=u2+2gs                               Where g is the acceleration due to gravity

 

Under free fall, a body dropped from a certain height to the ground will have initial velocity  u=0

A velocity – time graph for a body dropped from a certain height to the ground is a straight line from the origin  i.e.

 

N/B   The velocity of the body increases from city with which it hits the 0 to maximum when the body hits the ground.

QUESTIONS

  1. A body is dropped/released from the top of a cliff 180m high. Taking g=10m/s-2 , calculate

(a)  The time it takes to hit the ground

(b)  The velocity with which it hits the ground

The equations still hold here except the value of g which is -10 and not +10.

Hence the equations include

v =  u – gt

s = ut – 1/2gt2

v2 = u2 – 2gs

 

Time to reach maximum height & time of flight

(a)   Time to reach maximum height

At maximum height   v = 0

Hence from v = u-gt

0 = u-gt

t = u/gwheret is time to reach maximum height

(b)     Time of flight

This is the time taken by the body to reach maximum height and fall back to the original point.

Hence it is twice the time to reach the greatest height i.e

Time of flight = 2u/g

(c)  Maximum height:  This is at apoint  where v = 0

N/B  On returning / falling back to the ground, a vertically projected body hits the ground with the same speed to one with which it was projected.

QUESTION

A stone is projected vertically upwards with a velocity of 30m/s from the ground. Calculate:

(a) The time it takes to reach maximum height.  (t = 3 seconds)

(b) Time of flight.  ( t = 6 seconds)

(c) The maximum height reached. (s = 45m)

(d) The velocity with which it hits the ground.  ( v = 30m/s)

 

Determination of acceleration due to gravity (g) using simlependlum

Apparatus:Pendlum bob, thin thread, stand and clamp, metre rule & stop watch.

Procedure

  1. Set up apparatus as shown below
  2. Starting with l = 50cm, set the pendlum bob swinging through an angle of about 100. N/B –  Length of pendlum L = Length of thread + Radius of bob.

see fig. below

 

  1. Time 20 oscillations.
  2. 4. Repeat the experiment and obtain the average time for 20 oscillations.

Hence complete the table below

6

  1.  Determine the periodic time T (time for one oscillation ) and fill in the table.

QUESTIONS

(a)  Plot a graph of T2  against L (in metres)

(b)

Calculate the slope of the graph. What does it represent?

(c)  Use the graph to calculate g.

SOME NOTES

For a simple pendlum oscillating with small amplitude

Where T is the period, L length of pendlum and g acceleration due to gravity.

Thus  T2 = 4∏2L/g

 

HORIZONTAL PROJECTION

Consider a body projected horizontally with horizontal velocity Vhfrom point O as shown

below:

The horizontal velocity remains unchanged throughout the flight

The path followed by the projectile is called the trajectory.

The maximum horizontal distance covered by the projectile R is called Range& iscalculated as

Range =  Vh  x  time

 

N/B

The time the projectile takes to travel from O and land at X is the same time it would take to land at Y if is dropped with zero velocity from O (When it is dropped initial velocity at O = 0 )

 

QUESTIONS

  1. A ball is thrown from the top of a cliff 20m high with a horizontal velocity of 10m/s. Calculate

(a)  The time taken for it to strike the ground.  (Ans = 2 seconds)

(b)   The distance from the foot of the cliff to where the ball strikes the ground.  (Range = 20m)

 

  1. A stone is thrown horizontally from a building that is 45m high above the horizontal ground. The stone hits the ground at a point which is 60m from the foot of the building.p0

Calculate the horizontal velocity of the stone. (Use R = Vh x t )

(Other questions from KLB BK 3 Exercise 1pg 37 – 41 )

 

 

 

 

REFRACTION OF LIGHT

 

REFRACTION is the bending of light at the interface when it travels from one medium to another at an angle. i.e the figure below shows refraction of a ray as it travels from air to water.

 

N/B

  • When light travels from an optically less dense medium to an optically more dense medium it is refracted towards the normal e.g when light travels from air to water as shown in the diagram above. (Here the angle of incidence is larger than the angle of refraction)

 

 

 

 

  • But when light travels from an optically more dense medium to an optically less dense medium, it is refracted away from the normal.

(Angle of refraction > Angle of incidence) e.g when light travels from water to air.

 

 

 

 

A ray through the normal is not refracted i.e

 

N/B Light travels with a velocity of 3.0 x 108 m/s in vacuum. It travels with a velocity slightly lower than this in air. In other optically dense material such as water, glass and Perspex it travels at a much reduced speed.

 

TO INVESTIGATE THE PATH OF LIGHT THROUGH A RECTANGULAR GLASS BLOCK USING PINS.

 

APPARATUS: Soft board, White sheet of paper, Drawing pins, Rectangular glass block.

 

PROCEDURE

  • Fix the white plain paper on the soft board using pins.
  • Place the glass block on the plain paper, trace its outline and label it ABCD. Remove the glass block
  • Draw a normal NON at a point O on side AB.
  • Draw a line PO making an angle of 20o with the normal.
  • Replace the glass bock to its original position.
  • Stick two pins P1 and P2 on the line PO such that they are upright and at least more than 6cm apart.
  • View pins P1 and P2 through the opposite side of AB and stick and stick two pins P3 and P4 such that they appear to be on a straight line with P1 and P2. Mark the positions P3 and P4.
  • Remove the pins and the block.
  • Draw a line joining P3 and P4 and produce it to meet the outline face CD at a point OI.
  • Join O to OI

 

See figure below

 

 

– Measure and record angle NOOI in the table below.

Angle of incidence I (Degrees) Angle of refraction r (Degrees) Sin i Sin r Sin i

Sin r

20o 13      
30o        
40o        
50o        
60o        
70o

80o

       
         

 

-Repeat the procedure for the other angles in the table and complete the table.

Compare all the values of     sin i

Sin r

 

Results :These values are the same /very close/constant – This constant is the refractive index.

  • Plot a graph of sin i against sin r

`

 

Result:  This graph is a straight line through the origin

  • Determine the slope of this graph

Explanation: This slope of the graph is the refractive index.

The symbol for refractive index is   n

 

LAWS OF REFRACTION

 

Law 1 :The incident ray, the refracted ray and the normal at the point of incidence, all lie in the same plane.

 

Law 2 :The ratio of the sine of angle of incidence to the sine of angle of refraction is a constant for a given pair of media. i.e

 

=

n=   Sin i    Refractive index for medium 2

1     2

Sin r

 

 

 

When light travels from medium 2 to medium 1 along the same

Path

1
n

 

 

(this is the refractive index for medium 1)
2  1

=

`refractive index for medium 2

 

 

 

QUESTIONS pg 51- 53, Example 2-6

REFRACTIVE INDEX IN TERMS OF VELOCITY-

Other applicable formula

  1. Refractive index for any medium = velocity of light in air

Velocity of light in medium

 

QUESTIONS: From KLB  BK 3. Example 7-10

REFRACTIVE index for glass with respect to water

REFRACTION IN TERMS OF REAL AND APPARENT DEPTH

An object under water/ glass block, when viewed normally, appears to be nearer the surface than it actually is. See the figure below

The actual depth is called the real depth

The false depth is the apparent depth, (as in the figure above)

The distance from the real position to the apparent position of the coin is the Vertical displacement of the coin.

Here

 

 

QUESTIONS

From KLB BK III Pg 63-65 Example 14- 17.  Example 19 Pg 67-68

 

The critical angle ( c )

Is the angle of incidence (in the optically more dense medium) for which the angle of refraction (in the optically less dense medium) is 90o.

See the fig below

TOTAL INTERNAL REFLECTION :This occurs when the angle of incidence has exceeded the critical angle.

See the figure below

At this stage  i=r  and  i>C

For total internal reflection to occur;

  • Light must be travelling from an optically dense medium to an optically less dense medium
  • The angle of incidence must be greater than the critical angle

Relationship between C and n

Consider a ray of light striking a glass-air interface as shown below

QUESTIONS:

  1. The fig. below shows the path of light passing through a rectangular block of perspex placed in air

 

 

Calculate the refractive index of Perspex      (1.48)

 

 

  1. A ray of light travels fro a transparent material to perspex as shown below

Calculate the critical angle c     (24.6)

  1. Calculate the critical angle of diamond given that its refractive index is 2.42

 

 

 

  1. The critical angle for water is 48.6o. Calculate the refractive index for water.

 

 

 

 

  1. A ray of light travels through air into medium as shown in the fig. below

Calculate the critical angle for the medium

 

 

 

  1. Calculate the critical angle for glass water interface (refractive indices for water and glass are 4/3 and 3/2 respectively.

 

EFFECTS OF TOTAL INTERNAL REFLECTION

  1. MIRAGE

This happens 0n a hot day when then ground gets heated and in turn heats the air above it. This heated air is optically less dense than the air far above the ground.

Therefore, a ray from the sun passes through the colder (optically more dense) air to the warmer (optically less dense) air and is hence refracted away from the normal.

For some of these rays, total internal reflection results. See figure below

To the observer, the ray seems to come from point I. This appears like a pool of

water. This phenomenon is called mirage.

Two theories have been advanced to explain mirage. One is of total internal reflection as explained above, and the other advocates the direct rays travelling through air of the same temperature to the observer as shown in the diag. above.

Mirages are also seen in very cold regions , but here light curves in the opposite direction as shown below

Here the air next to the ground is colder than the one far away from the ground. The mirage appears above the ground.

  1. ATMOSPHERIC REFRACTION

This is a phenomenon which enables us to see the sun after it has set.  (Wee see the sun in its apparent position).  See the fig below

Similarly, the sun is seen before it rises.

TOTAL INTERNAL REFLECTION PRISMS

Using  a right angled glass or perspex prism. ( angles are 90,  45, 45).

(a)  To turn a ray of light through 90o

Consider a ray of light incident to face AB of a right angled isosceles prism shown below:

The incident ray is unrefracted because it passes through the normal. It meets face AC at a point  O, where it makes an angle of 45o with the normal. This angle is greater than the critical angle for glass (42o), hence the ray is totally internally reflected. The reflected ray meets BC normally (through the normal) and passes on unrefracted.

 

(b) To turn a ray through 180o

(c) Inversion  with deviation

(d) Inversion without deviation.

APPLICATIONS OF TOTAL INTERNAL REFLECTION

  1. In periscopes: A periscope is an instrument used to view objects over obstacles.

Prisms rather than plane mirrors are used in periscopes because plane mirrors have the following disadvantages:

– Mirrors absorb some of the incident light

– The silvering on mirrors can become tarnished and peel off.

– Mirrors, especially if they are thick, produce multiple images. (See fig 2.50 pg 76 KLB BK III)

 

A prism periscope

Here light is deviated through 90o by the first prism before the second prism deviates it a further 90o in the opposite direction.The image formed is erect, vitual and the same size as the object.

 OTHER APPLICATIONS OF TOTAL INTERNAL REFLECTION

  • Used in prism binoculars – Instrument used for viewing distant objects.
  • In optical fibre. Optical fibre is used in:
  • Transmitting sinals in communication.
  • In medicine to view the internal parts of human body

 

DISPERSION OF WHITE LIGHT

  • When a beam of white light is directed to an equilateral prism and a white screen placed infront of the prism, a band of 7 colours is formed on the screen as shown below

White light is a mixture of  7colours and the separation is due to their different velocities in the prism. The velocity of red light is the greatest hence it is deviated least while the violet light with least velocity is deviated most.

Light from the sun is an example of white light.

 

DISPERSION OF WHITE LIGHT IN THE RAINBOW

The rainbow is a bow – shaped colour band of visible spectrum seen in the sky when white light from the sun is refracted, dispersed and totally internally reflected by rain drops.

It can also be seen on spray fountains and water falls when the sun shines on the drops of water.

 

 

NEWTON LAWS OF MOTION

The effects of a force on motion of a body are based on 3 laws known as newton’s laws of motion

  1. NEWTON’S FIRST LAW OF MOTION

It  states that a body remains in its state of rest or uniform motion in a straight line unless acted upon by an external force.

(Illustrate the examples on page 87 & 88)

INERTIA:  Is the property of bodies to resist change in state of motion. This explains why cars have seat belts. They hold passengers on the seats when a vihecle comes to stop or when it decelerates sharply.

Momentum of a body:  Is the product of mass of the  body and its velocity.

i.e                 Momentum  =  Mass (kg)  xVelocity (m/s)

Momentum  = MV,      SI unit is  Kgm/s

Momentum is a vector quantity. The direction of momentum is the same as that of the velocity of the body.

QUESTIONS

  1. A van of mass 3 tonnes is travelling at 72km/h. Calculate the momentum of the vihecle.
  2. A car is moving at 36km/h. What velocity will double its momentum?

 

  1. NEWTON SECOND LAW OF MOTION

The rate of change of momentum of a body is directly proportional to the resultant external force producing the change, and takes place in the direction of the force.

Relationship between mass, force and acceleration

If the resultant force F

Acts on a body of mass M

For time      t

and causes velocity to change from U to V

Then change in momentum = Final momentum – Initial momentum

Change in momentum   =MV – MU

t

Rate of change of momentum = MV – MU

 

QUESTIONS

  1. What is the mass of an object which is accelerated at 3m/s by a force of 125N?

Others are examples 4,5& 6 pg 94 KLB BK 3

 

IMPULSE:  When a force acts on a body for a very short time, the force is referred to as an impulsive force. The result produced is called the impulse of the force. Impulsive forces occur when two moving bodies collide.

If a force F acts on a body of mass M for a time t,

Impulse = Force x time

Impulse  = Ft

t

From newton’s  second law  F   =   MV – MU   ,         Ft  =  MV – MU,

 

Hence impuse is change in momentum

QUESTIONS  pg  96 to 97 example  8 to 10

 

  1. NEWTON’S THIRD LAW OF MOTION: Action and reaction are equal and opposite

 

ACTION AND REACTION FORCES ON A STATIONARY BLOCK

QUESTIONS

Example 13 pg 102, No 3 & 4 pg 103 KLB BK III

 

LAW OF CONSERVATION OF LINEAR MOMENTUM

For a system of colliding bodies, the total linear momentum remains constant, provided no external forces act.

Qn  1.   A body of mass 5kg moving with a velocity of 3m/scollides head – on with another body B of mass 4kg moving in the opposite direction at 6m/s. If after collision the bodies move together (coalese), calculate the common velocity V.

2.Pg 107 example 15  KLB BK III

 

COLLISIONS

There are two types of collisions namely:

  • Elastic collision
  • Inelastic collision
  • Elastic collision: This is one in which both kinetic energy and momentum are conserved.

(b)Inelastic collision:  This is one in which momentum is conserved but kinetic energy is not.

QUESTIONS;   Example 16 & 17 pg 106 to 108   KLB BK III

 

APPLICATIONS OF THE LAW OF CONSERVATION OF MOMENTUM

  1. In the rocket and jet propulsion; The rocket propels itself forward by forcing out its exhaust gases. The hot exhaust gases are pushed out of the exhaust nozzle at high velocity and gain momentum in the one direction. The rocket thus gains momentum in the opposite direction which gives it a forward thrust.

 

  1. Garden sprinkler. (see fig. on pg 108 KLB BK III)

 

FRICTION

Is the force that opposes relative motion between two bodies in contact.

Molecular explanation of friction: Surfaces of bodies are made of tiny bumps and troughs when viewed under powerful microscope.

Hence when two surfaces are in contact the bumps and troughs interlock as shown below

The interlocking opposes relative motion , hence friction.

 

Factors affecting friction between solid surfaces

Consider a wooden block resting on a wooden surface as shown below;

The block exerts a force F = Mg = weight, and this equals to the normal reaction R.

When the block is pushed e.g in direction A, it experiences a friction force in the opposite direction.

The following factors are true about this  friction force

 

(a) Normal reaction: Friction is directly proportional to the norm al reaction R, i.e friction increases with increase in normal reaction

(b) Nature of surface:  Smooth surfaces under relative motion  yield low friction, while rough surfaces yield high friction.

(c) Friction force does not depend on the area of surfaces in contact.

N/B The applied force FA  is equal to friction when the block just starts to move. The friction at this point called limitingfriction / static friction  (friction on a body that is still stationary).

Since friction is directly proportional to the normal reaction, FA is therefore also directly proportional to normal reaction R.

Limiting friction here (F) here α R

F α R

Since at this point the applied force FA = Limiting friction F

FA α R

The constant of proportionality here is µs (coefficient of static friction)

Hence  F =  µsR

Where F is either limiting friction or the applied force.

 

Similarly, for body in motion, friction force acting on it is directly proportional to the normal reaction. i.e

F α R

But here the constant of proportionality is  µk (coefficient of kinetic friction). Hence

F =  µkR

N/B

  • µs and µk have no units
  • When the applied force moves the body with constant speed, then the applied force = Friction force. i.e force that overcomes friction will give the body uniform speed.
  • If a larger force is applied, then this force is called the resultant force.

Resultant force = Applied force – Force needed to overcome friction

  • The force needed to start motion is higher than that needed to maintain motion.

 

Questions

  1. Awooden box of mass 5kg rests on a rough floor. The coefficient of friction between the floor and the box is 0.6

 

(a) Calculate the force required to just move the box.   (Take g = 10)

R = 5×10=50N

F = 0.6 x 50

= 30

 

(b)  If a force of 200N is applied on the box, with what acceleration will it move?  (Take g = 10)

 

solution

Resultant force (F) = Applied force – friction

Resultant force   = 200  –  30 = 170

=

 

F = Ma

170 = 5 x a

a = 34m/s2

 

 

  1. A block of metal with a mass of 20kg requires a horizontal force of 50N to pull it with uniform velocity along a horizontal surface. Calculate the coefficient of Friction between the surface and the block. (Take g = 10)

F =  µk xR

50 = µk x 200

50

200

 

 

µk =

 

µk  = 0.25

 

Methods of reducing friction

  • Placing rollers between the two rough surfaces
  • Lubrication- The application of oil or grease between moving parts.
  • Use of ball bearings in the rotating axles
  • Air cushioning- done by blowing air between the rough surfaces to prevent the surfaces fro coming into contact.

Uses of friction

  • Walking
  • Motor vehicles
  • Brakes: Friction between the brake drum and the brake lining halts the vehicle
  • Match stick: Friction between the match stick head and the rough surface develops heat, igniting the stick head.

Limitations of friction

  • Causes wear and tear between moving parts
  • Causes noise
  • Causes energy loss since work has to be done against it.

 

VISCOSITY

This is the frictional resistance to motion in fluids

For example,

  • It is more difficult to wade through water than to move the same distance in open air space –  water has higher viscosity than air.
  • A steel ball dropped in glycerinetakes a longer time to reach the bottom than when dropped into cylinder full of water.

Terminal velocity

Is the constant velocity attained  by a body falling in a fluid when the sum of the upward forces equal to the weight of the body

 

N/B Viscosity decreases with temperature

QUESTIONS :  ON pg 119 to 120

 

WORK, ENERGY, POWER & MACHINES

ENERGY;  Is the ability to do work. It is measured in joules (J)

WORK ;  Is done when an applied force makes its point of application to move in the direction of the force.i.e        work done  = Force  x  Distance moved by the object in     t                                                                                           the direction of the force

W  =  F  X  D

Units    NM

 

1NM  =  1J     Hence work is also measured in joules.

POWER;Is the rate of doing work.

i.e  power  =

MACHINE;  Is a device that makes work to be done more easily or conveniently.

SOURCES OF ENERGY

These include

  • Wind- For driving wind mills, pumping water or generating electricity.
  • Fuels- Wood and charcoal, petroleum and natural gas.
  • Geothermal
  • High dams and water falls – used to turn turbines in HEP stations to produce electricity.
  • Oceans – Waves and tidal energy
  • Nuclear/ Atomic energy.

 

FORMS OF ENERGY

  • Chemical energy
  • Mechanical energy
  • Heat energy
  • Wave energy
  • Electric energy

 

TRANSFORMATIONS OF ENERGY

Any device that facilitates transformation of energy is called a transducer. E.g

ENERGY TRANSFORMATION                                               TRANSDUCER

Chemical to electrical energy     _________________    Battery

Electrical to sound energy          _________________ Loudspeaker

Heat to electrical energy  __________________Thermocouple

Solar to electrical energy          __________________      Solar cell

Kinetic energy to electric energy  _______________     Dynamo

Electric energy to kinetic energy   _______________      Motor

Solar energy to heat energy      ________________     Solar panel

 

Note the following;

1KJ  =  103J

1MJ = 106J

Questions on work and energy

  1. Calculate the work done by a stone mason in lifting a stone of mass 15kg through a height of 2M. ( Take g=10N/kg)
  2. A boy of mass 40kg walks up a flight of 12 steps. If each step is 20M high, calculate the work done by the boy. (g = 10N/kg)

 

POTENTIAL ENERGY / GRAVITATIONAL POTENTIAL ENERGY

This is the work done to lift an object through a height h.  i.e

P.E   =   Force  x  height

But force  =  Weight of the object  =  Mg

Hence   P.E  =Mgh

 

Qn;  A student climbs a vertical rope 10M long. If the mass of the student is 50kg, how much work does the student perform?

Solution

P.E  =Mgh  =  50  x10  10  =5000J

 

ELASTIC POTENTIAL ENERGY

This is the work done in stretching or compressing a spring. (It is the same as the energy stored I spring).

In stretching spring, the applied force varies from 0 to maximum force F.

Below is a sketch for extension plotted against force for a stretched spring.

Since force has changed 0 to F

But  W  =  ½ Fe  =  ½  x  12  x  0.08

W  =  0.48 J

 

KINETIC ENERGY  (K.E)

This is the energy a body possesses due to motion.

Mathematically,  K.E  =  ½ MV2

Where   M  =  Mass of the body

V    =  Velocity

But we can have,

Final  K.E  =  ½ MV2final           Where  Vfinal is the final velocity,         and

Initial  K.E  =  ½ MU2initial       Where  Uinitial is the initial velocity.

QUESTIONS;

  1. A trolley of mass 2.0kg is pulled from rest by a horizontal force of 5N for 1.2 seconds. Assuming that there is no friction between the horizontal surface and the wheels of the trolley, calculate;

(a) The distance covered by the trolley

Solution;    Use     S  =ut  +  ½ at2   to get  S      and  F = Ma   to find  a

Answer  =  1.8M

 

(b)The K.E gained by the trolley

Solution;  K.E  gained by the trolley is the final K.E ( because initial K.E was zero)

Hence  K.E  =  ½ MV2final

Use V  =  U  +  at    to find Vfinal

Answer = 9J

Qn  2.    Example 6 Pg131  KLB PHY BK 3

 

THE PENDLUM

The fig below shows a pendulum bob released so that it swings to and from a vertical axis.

At points A and C, the pendulum bob has maximum potential energy and no K.E. At point B, it has maximum K.E and no P.E.

At   x   K.E  =  P.E

At   y   K.E  =  P.E

 

QUESTIONS ON POWER

Joules               Hence units are J/S

Seconds                 Alternative = Watt (W)

Work done

Time taken

 

 

P =                   =

T
 
 

 

 

1W = 1 J/S

 

Qn. 1. A person weighing 500N takes 4 seconds to climb to climb upstairs to a height of 3m. What is the average power in climbing up the height.

Work

Time

Solution:

P =                 W = F x D = 500 x 3 = 1500J

1500

4

 

 

P =           = 375N

 

Qn. 2.   An electric motor raises 50kg load at a constant velocity. Calculate the power of the motor if it takes 40 seconds to raise the load through a height of 24M (Take g = 10N/kg)

Solution;      W  =  500 x 24 = 12000J                Time = 40s

300W
=
W

t

=
1200

40

 

 

P  =

 

Assignment;  Example 8 pg 134 K.L.B PHY BK 3  &  Exercise 4.1 pg 136-137

 

MACHINES

A machine is a device that makes work to be done more easily or conveniently.

Simple machines include; Levers, pulleys, hydraulic press, gears etc. If a machine, say a pulley, is used to raise a stone, then the weight of the stone is the load and the fore applied is the effort.

TERMS ASSOCIATED WITH MACHINES

EFFORT (E) ; Is the force applied to the machine. Measured in N.

LOAD (L);Is the force exerted to the machine. Measured in N.

Load

Effort

MECHANICAL ADVANTAGE (MA); Is the ratio of load to the effort.

IeMA  =   MA  has no units

 

 

 

VELOCITY RATIO  (V.R);

Distance moved by effortDE

Distance moved by  load     DL

 

 

 

V.R  =

DE

DL

ie      V.R  =

 

EFFICIENCY (ƞ)

100
x
Work done on load

Work done by effort

Is the ratio of work done on the load (work output) to work done by effort (work input), usually expressed as a percentage. i.e efficiency is either,

(i)      ƞ  =

Work output

Work input

 

 

100
x

or    (ii)   ƞ  =

 

X  100
Work done on load

Wok done by effort

RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN M.A, efficiency & V.R

In (i) above, ƞ  =

 

Load x Distance moved by load

Effort x Distance moved by effort

and     Work done  =  Force  x  Distance moved by force

ƞ  =                                               x 100

1

V.R

 

 

 

Hence     ƞ = M.A  xx  100

M.A

V.R

 

 

Ƞ  =               x  100

 

Load x Distance moved by load

Effort x Distance moved by effort

QUESTION;  In a machine, the load moves 2M when the effort moves 8M. If an effort of 80N is used to raise a load of 60N, What is the efficiency of the machine?

Ƞ  =x  100

60 x 2

20 x 8

 

 

=x  100

 

=   75o/o

 

LEVERS

A SIMPLE LEVER

Questions; Answer Example 12 pg 140 KLB secondary PHY BK 3.

THERE ARE 3 CLASSES OF LEVERS NAMELY;

(i) LEVERS WITH THE PIVOT BETWEEN THE LOAD AND THE EFFORT; Ee.g pliers, hammer, beam balance, crow bar, pair of scissors.

(ii) LEVERS WITH THE LOAD BETWEEN  THE PIVOT AND THE EFFORT; E.g wheelbarrow, nut crackers, bottle openers etc.

 

(iii) LEVERS WITH THE EFFORT BETWEEN THE LOAD AND THE PIVOT; e.g sweeping brooms, fishing road, human arm, spade etc.

INCLINED PLANES

QN; A man uses an inclined plane to lift a load of 50kg through a vertical height of 4M. The inclined plane makes an angle of 30o with the horizontal. If the efficiency of the inclined plane is 72%, calculate;

(a) the effort needed to move the load up the inclined plane at a constant velocity.

1

0.5

1

Sin 30

1

Sin ϴ

From expts,   V.R  =            =  =                =                     = 2

72

100

 

 

M.A  =  ƞ  x  V.R  =           x   2   =   1.44

50×10

1.44

L

MA

 

 

E  =           =                    =  347.2N

 

 

(b) The work done against friction in raising the load through a height of 4M.

Soln;    Work against friction  =  Work input  –  Work output

Work output  =  50 x 10 x 4 = 2000N

Work input  =  Effort  x Distance moved by effort

4

Sin 30

= E x  AC

Work input =   347.2  x=   2777.6

 

Work done against friction  =   2777 – 2000  =777.6 J

The distance between two successive threads is called the pitch. In one revolution, the screw moves through a distance equal to one pitch.

 

V.R of screw    =    Circumference of the screw head (handle)

Pitch

V.R = 2πR/Pitch where R is the radius of the screw head/ handle

N/B  A screw combined with a lever can be used as a jack for lifting heavy loads such as cars.

GEARS: A gear is a wheel which can rotate about its centre.

Below is an arrangement of two gears

The driver wheel; Is the wheel on which the effort is applied

The load wheel: Is the driven wheel

Assuming that the driver wheel has n teeth and the driven wheel N teeth, then when the driver wheel makes 1 revolution, the driven wheel makes n/N revolutions.

 

V.R  =      Revolutions made by the driven wheel

Revolutions made by the driver wheel

 

V.R  =  1

n/N

 

V.R  = N/n

Therefore the V.R of the gear =No of teeth on the driven wheel

No of teeth in the driver wheel

 

 

PULLEYS

PULLEY: Is also a type of machine.

There are several types of pulley systems. The 3 common ones include;

  1. The single fixed pulley
  2. The single movable pulley
  3. The block and tackle pulley

 

V.R of a pulley;Is the number of ropes supporting the load.

 

  • THE SINGLE FIXED PULLEY

Here V.R = 1

 

(b) SINGLE MOVABLE PULLEY

The velocity ratio for the two arrangements above is the same = 2

( The number of ropes supporting the load is 2)

 

(c) THE BLOCK AND TACKLE

Here the velocity ratio (number of ropes supporting the load) = 4

Questions to be answered here from page 151 example 17 to pg 153 example 153 example 18 KLB sec. PHY BK III

 

THE HYDRAULIC MACHINE (LIFT)

Here

Distance moved    x    Cross-section area   = Distance moved   x   Cross

by effort piston           of effort piston            by load piston        section

area of

load piston

HENCE

Distance moved by effort    =    Cross section area of load piston

Distance moved by load             Cross section area of effort piston

πR2

πr2

 

 

V.R  =                     Where R is the radius of the load piston

r is the radius of the effort piston

 

0r       V.R  =  R2/r2

 

Qns; Example 20, 21 from KLB SEC PHY BK 3.

Other qns for general practice – Exercise 4 pg 159-161 KLB PHY BK 3.

 

 

CURRENT ELECTRICITY II

Electric current: Is the rate of flow of charge through a conductor.

Ammeter:  Is the instrument used to measure electric current.

SI unit for current is Ampere (A)

Potential difference (p.d) of a cell: Is the voltage across the cell in a closed circuit ( when it is supplying current).

Electromotive force (Emf) of a cell: Is the voltage across the cell in an open circuit (when it is supplying no current).

Voltmeter: Is an instrument used to measure voltage (Emf or P.d) .

N/B-  Potential difference between two points A and B VAB of a conductor , (see the fig. below)

is the work done in moving a unit charge from point B to A of the conductor.

Hence P.d  =  Work done (in joules)

Charge moved (in coulombs)

 

Or   VAB  =W/Q

  1. In moving charge of 10 coulombs from point B to A, 120 J of work is done. What is the Pd between A and B?

VAB  =W/Q  =  120/10  =  12V

 

A voltmeter is usually connected in parallel with the circuit (across the appliance whose voltage is to be determined e.g the bulb). See fig. below.

Reason:  Because it has very high resistance.

The ammeter on the other hand is usually connected in series with the circuit because it has very low resistance. See the figs. below

 

CURRENT IN A PARALLEL CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENT

 

CURRENT IN SERIES  CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENT

 

VOLTAGE IN PARALLEL CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENT

 

VOLTAGE IN SERIES

Qn ;  Example 2 pg 169

 

OHM’S LAW; The current flowing through a conductor is directly proportional to the potential difference across it,provided the temperature and other physical conditions are kept constant.

OHM’S LAW; The current flowing through a conductor is directly proportional to the potential difference across it,provided the temperature and other physical conditions are kept constant.

(Carryout expt 5.3 pg 168 KLB phy BK 3 3rd ed. Pg 168-169)

TABLE

Current (A) 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.10
Voltage (Volts) 0.30 0.50 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.35 1.50 1.85 2.00

 

Here a graph of current against voltage is a straight line through the origin

Sample graph

=  Constant

The gradient of the graph      ∆ Voltage

∆  Current

The constant is the resistance (R) of the nichrome wire used in the experiment.

The SI unit of resistance is the Ohm (Symbol Ω)

 

Ohms law can also be verified using a standard resister is used in place of nichrome wire in the experiment and a graph of current agaist voltage plotted.

The graph will also be a straight line through the origin as shown below

From Ohm’s law, an Ohm is defined as the resistance of a conductor when a current of 1 ampere flowing through it produces a voltage drop of 1 volt across its ends.

The multiples of an Ohm are;

1 Kilo Ohm (1KΩ)  =  1000Ω

1 Mega Ohm (1MΩ) = 1000000Ω

Qns on pg 170 Example 4, 5 and 6.

 

OHMIC AND NON OHMIC CONDUCTORS

Ohmic conductors:  Are the conductors which obey Ohm’s law.

Current-Voltage graphs for Ohmic conductors is a straight line through the origin.

Examples of Ohmic conductors are metals and electrolytes e.g copper II sulphate.

 

Non Ohmicconductors :  Are the conductors which do not obey Ohm’s law. Current-Voltage graphs for non Ohmic conductors are not straight lines. Examples of non Ohmic conductors are:  Torch bulb, Thermister, Semiconductor diode, Thermionic diode. See the figs. below:

 

Electric resistance: Is the opposition offered by a conductor to flow of electric current. It is measured in Ohms (Ω).

A material with high conductance has very low resistance e.g copper metal. The instrument used to measure resistance is called the Ohm meter.

 

FACTORS THAT AFFECT RESISTANCE OF A METALLIC CONDUCTOR

  1. Temperature: Resistance of good conductorse.g metals increase with increase in temperature.
  2. Length of the conductor: Resistance of a uniform conductor increases with increase in length (Resistance is directly proportional to length).
  3. Cross-sectional area: Resistance of a conductor is inversely proportional to its cross-section area. i.e the larger the cross-section area the lower the resistance and the smaller the cross-section area, the larger the resistance.

 

RESISTIVITY OF A MATERIAL

Is the resistance of the material of unit length and unit cross-section area at a certain temperature. The SI unit of resistivity is Ohm Meter (ΩM). The symbol for resistivity is ρ. Hence mathematically,

Resistivity ρ =  Area of cross-section (A)  x  Resistance (R)

Length of the material  (L)

 

ρ  =

AR

L

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

RESISTIVITY OF SOME MATERIAL AT 200 AND THEIR USES

 

MATERIAL

 

RESISTIVITY (ΩM)

 

USE

Silver 1.6  x10-8 Contacts on some switches
Copper 1.7×10-8 Connecting wire
Aluminium 2.8 x10-8 Power cables
Tungsten 5.5 x10-8 Lamp filaments
Constantan 49×10-8 Resistance boxes, variable resisters
Nichrome 100×10-8 Heating elements
Carbon 3000 x10-8 Radio resisters
Glass 10-8 -10-14  
Polystyrene  1015  

 

QUESTIONS

KLB PHY BK 3, 3rded.  Pg 173-174 example 7-9

 

RESISTERS

Are conductors specially designed to offer particular resistance to flow of electric current.

 

TYPES OF RESISTERS

They include:

  1. FIXED RESISTERS: They are resisters designed to give fixed resistance. They include: Wire wound resisters and carbon resisters.

 

2.VARIABLE RESISTERS:  These are resisters with varied range of resistance.

They include:

(a) Rheostat         (b) Potentiameter

 

(a) Rheostat:  Is a two terminal variable resister. It is represented in electric circuits by the symbols shown below:

N/B- Moving the sliding contact along the length of the resister varies the resistance between points A and B. When the contact is nearer A, the resistance of the rheostat is lower.

(b) Potentiameter:  Is a variable resister with 3 terminals. See the fig below.

  1. NON LINEAR RESISTERS: The current flowing through these resisters not changelinearly with the change in the applied voltage. Such resisters include; Thethermister, the light dependent resister (LDR).

 

MEASUREMENT OF RESISTANCE

There are 2 ways of determining resistance namely:

  1. The voltmeter ammeter method
  2. The wheatstone bridge method

 

  1. VOLTMETER AMMETER METHOD

Apparatus:  Two cells, Switch, Voltmeter, Ammeter, Variable resister,  Resister R.

-Set up apparatus as shown below

– With the switch open, record the voltmeter reading V and the corresponding ammeter reading I. Here no current is flowing and hence both V and A read 0.

– Close the switch and by adjusting the variable resister to the given lengths, record the other 5 values of V and the corresponding values of I in the table.

Length of resistance wire (cm) 0 20 40 60 80 100
Voltage V (Volts) 0          
Current I (Amps) 0          
V/I (V/A) 0          

 

It is observed that, as I increases V also increases.

–  Compare all the values of  V/I

All the values of  V/I  are found to be the same/ almost the same.

–  Plot a graph of V against I.

–  Determine the gradient of the graph.

It is a straight line graph whose gradient  =  resistance R

 

Question on using a meter bridge to determine resistance

In an expt. to determine resistance a nichrome wire using a meter bridge, the balance point was found to be the 38cm mark. If the value of the resistance in the right hand gap needed to balance the bridge was 25 Ω. Calculate the value of the unknown resister.

 

Since AB  =  100cm   and AC  =  38cm,             CB  =  100-38  =62cm

 

But   R     =     25                      R = 38 x 25   = 15.32Ω

38           62   62

 

RESISTER NETWORKS

  1. RESISTERS IN SERIES

 

Here    VT  = V1 +  V2  +  V3

RT  = R1  +  R2  +  R3

 

QnsExample  11  and 12 pg 181 KLB BK 3  PHYSICS

 

  1. RESISTERS CONNECTED IN PARALLEL

The figure below shows   R1, R2, and R3 connected in parallel

Here   IT  =  I1  +  I2  +  I3

and     1     =    1     +   1     +    1

RT         R1        R2         R3

 

Qns:  Example 13, 14, 15 and 16 pg 183-184 KLB BK 3 PHY 3rd Ed

N/B  Equivalent resistance, total resistance and effective resistance mean the same thing.

Qns:  Example 17, 21 and 19  pg 185-186

Other qns : Example 20 pg 188, Example 20 pg189

 

ELECTROMOTIVE FORCE AND INTERNAL RESISTANCE

Electromotive force of a cell is the p.d across its terminals when it is supplying no current, (Cell in open circuit).

Once a cell supplies current to an external circuit, the p.d across it it drops by a value called  ‘ lost voltage’. This loss in voltage is due to the internal resistance (r) of the cell.

Internal resistance: A cell or any source of emf is made up of material that  are not perfect conductors of electricity. They therefore offer some resistance to the flow of current that they generate. This resistance is usually low and is called internal resistance (r) of the cell or battery.

 

Relationship between emf and r

If a resister R is connected in series with a cell (see fig. below),

 

I    =       Emf

Total resistance

 

I    =     E

R  +  r

 

Hence  E  =  I  (R+r)        or        E  =  IR  +  Ir

N/B  IR is the voltage drop across resister and Ir the voltage drop across r

 

To determine the internal resistance of a cell

Apparatus:  Voltmeter, ammeter, variable resister, cells, connecting wire.

–  Connect apparatus as shown below;

Adjust the resister to minimum value of  current.

–  Increase the current in stages and record the corresponding values of current in the table below.

Current  I  (Amps)              
Voltage  V  (Volts)              

 

Plot a graph of voltage against current

 

The graph is straight line as shown below

 

–  If the equation of the graph is  E = V  +  Ir

 

(a) Find the value of :

(i)  E

Solution;

V    =  -r  I     +    E

 

y    =  m  x     +   c

 

Hence  E  =  y-intercept  =  ————   ( read from the graph plotted)

 

(ii)  r

Solution

-r  =  gradient

 

Questions;  Example 21, 22, 23 pg 193-194 KLB PHY BK3

Other qnsexercise  5qn 7.

 

 

WAVES II

A Wave: Is the disturbance that moves through a medium.

In this topic, we shall study characteristics of waves which include:

–  Reflection

–  Refraction

–  Diffraction

–  Interference

A ripple tank; Is an apparatus used to demonstrate the properties of wave like reflection, refraction, diffraction and interference.

Below is the diagram of a ripple tank

 

It consists of  a transparent tray containing water having a lamp above and a screen below the tank.

Circular waves shown below are seen on the screen when a finger is dipped into the water.

When a ruler is drugged in the water, straight pulses are formed on the screen as shown below;

A wave front:  Is an imaginary line which joins a set of particles which are in phase in wave motion.

See figs. below

 

CHARACTERISTICS OF WAVES

 

(a) REFLECTION

 

(i) Reflection of a plane wave front by a plane reflector

PROCEDURE

– Generate plane wave fronts in a ripple tank e.g by letting the frame of a running motor touch the water surface.

– Observe on the screen how the waves are reflected on the straight walls of the ripple tank, (Plane reflector).

The following will be observed

Diagram to show reflection of plane waves on a plane reflector

It is observed that waves obey the laws of reflection i.eagle of

incidence = angle of reflection.

–  The lines drawn from the reflecting surface cutting the incident waves perpendicularly are called incident wave fronts.

– The lines drawn from the reflecting surface cutting the reflected waves perpendicularly are called the reflected wave fronts

 

(ii)  Reflection of plane waves by curved reflectors

(I)  CONCAVE REFLECTOR

Just like parallel rays of light are reflected through the principle focus (F) of the concave mirror, (or converge at F and spread out),

The reflected waves too converge at F and spread out as if originating from F as shown below.

N/B  The reflected waves here are circular.

 

(II) CONVEX REFLECTOR

Just like the convex mirror where parallel rays converge to F behind the mirror, where they appear to diverge from on the real side of the mirror,

(see fig. below)

reflected waves too appear to diverge from the virual principle focus of the reflector as shown below;

 

The direction and velocity of a wave changes during reflection.

The reflected wave is also 180o out of phase with the incident wave, (hence troughs of the incident wave fall below the crests of the reflected wave). See the figs below;

 

 

λ             Is the distance from crest to crest of incident wave or crest to crest of the reflected wave.

 

(b) REFRACTION OF WAVES

Is the bending of waves as they travel from one medium to another.

 

TO DEMONSTRATE REFRACTIONOF WAVES

Here a glass plate is placed inside a ripple tank as shown below:

A plane wave is then introduced from the deeper end of the ripple tank.

 

OBSERVATION

As the plane wave travels across the water the wavelength in the shallow region λ2 is less than the wavelength in the deeper region  λ1.

See the fig. below

 

Since during refraction the frequency of the wave does not change and  V = f λ,  the speed of wave reduces in the shallow as the wavelength reduces.

Speed of wave in deep water

Speed of wave in shallow water

 

 

So therefore here ,        n  =

 

From     V  =fλ  and given that f does not change,

fλ1

fλ2

 

 

 

n  =

λ1

λ2

 

 

n  =

If the fig. above, λ1  =  1cm and λ2  =  0.15cm

 

 

(c)  DIFFRACTION OF WAVES

Is the spreading of waves behind an obstacle.

This can be demonstrated by allowing water waves to pass through holes of various sizes as shown below;

 

(I) Plane (water) wave through a small gap

 

 

(II) Plane waves through a wide gap

 

 

(III) Diffraction of plane waves around an obstacle

 

(IV) Diffraction of circular waves through a small gap / Small arpature

 

 

N/B   (a)  A narrow gap diffracts waves more than a wide gap.

(b)  Increase in wavelength reduces diffraction.

 

 (d) INTERFENCE OF WAVES

Is the interference between waves to cancel or reinforce each other.

This happens when waves from one source meet others from another source so that they either reinforce or cancel each other depending on whether the meet in phase or out of phase

 

To show interference using plane waves and 2 small slits S1 and S2.

 

(I)  CONSTRUCTIVE INTERFERENCE  (Constructive superposition)

Is the interaction between waves in phase such that they reinforce each other to give a bigger amplitude e.g

 

During this process, the resultant amplitude doubles i.e

Amplitude of wave 1  + Amplitude of wave 2  =  Total amplitude

but wavelength and hence frequency  does not change

Coherent sources: Are sources which produce waves in phase and with the same frequency.

 

DESTRUCTIVE INTERFERENCE  (Destructive superposition)

Is the interaction between waves which are out of phase such that they cancel each other.e.g

 

 

APPLICATIONS OF DIFFRACTION

  • Study of crystal structure e.g in determining the spacing of atoms and their arrangement.
  • In x-ray photography for medical diagonosis.
  • Used in electron diffraction microscope

 

Interference is used

  • To cancel unwanted noise in hall (silencer) through destructive interference.
  • In stereo radios and T.V systems to produce louder sound where sound from different loudspeakers interfere constructively at most of the points thus producing an enhanced louder sound

 

 

STATIONARY WAVES

This is the wave in which the amplitude of oscillation depends on the position of a particle.

Stationary waves are formed when two ends of a tight  rope are made fixed and the middle of the rope plucked as shown below:

He displacement increases gradually from the node towards A (antinode) . The A is the position of maximum displacement. (See the fig. above).

 

The wave above has only 1 loop (A) and hence its wavelength  L  =  λ/2 .

When the frequency of the wave is increased  2 , 3, 4 etc loops can be formed within the same region as shown below:

 

 

 

 

 

QUESTION.

The apparatus below show how to set up a stationary wave on stretched string. The stationary wave is produced when the frequency of the vibrator is 40HZ.

 

Calculate the speed of the wave in the string.

Solution:  V  =  f λ

=  40  x   1  =  40m/s

 

 

STATIONARY WAVES IN AN OPEN TUBE

This can be demonstrated using a vibrating tuning fork, a beaker, an open  tube and water as shown below;

A vibrating tuning fork is held above the open tube and the tube raised up gradually until there is resonance (loud sound is heard). This will be at the first node, N (Resonance occurs at the node)

Measure the length L1       Say = 0.25 cm

Continue raising the open tube until there is another resonance. This will be at the next node. i.e

Measure the length  L2             Say = 0.75 cm

 

Then    ½ λ = L2  –  L1  =  0.75  –  0.25  =  0.5cm

½ λ = 0.5cm

λ  = 0.5 x 2 = 1cm (This is the λ for this wave)

If the frequency of the tuning fork is known, the velocity of the wave can be calculated using the formula:

V  =   f  λ

N/B- The loud sound (at resonance) is also called overtone

–  When the end correction (e) is there, then it is added to the length L of

the wave before it is used the calculation.

 

 

ELECTROSTATICS  II

Electrostatics:  Is the study of charge at rest.

The charge is acquired by rubbing.

Like charges repel while unlike charges attract.

The force of attraction/repulsion is stronger when the charged bodies are closer to one another. The force diminishes when they are moved far apart.

The amount of charge on a body can be determined using the gold leaf electroscope.

 

ELECTRIC FIELD PATTERNS

(a) Positive and negative point charges

 

(b) Positive and positive point

 

N/B – The lines of force move from the positive charge to the negative charge.

–  The lines of force do not cross one another.

–  The lines of force are close where the field is strong and far apart where

the field is weak.

 

CHARGE DISTRIBUTION THE SURFACE OF CONDUCTORS.

  • spherical shaped conductor

 

 

 

(b) Pear shaped body

 

(c)  Cuboid

 

N/B- Sharp points have high charge concentration,  See fig. (b) and (c) above.

 

CHARGE ON SHARP POINTS

Since charge on sharp point is extremely concentrated, when the sharp part of the conductor is brought close to a candle flame, the flame is diverted as if wind is emanating from the sharp point. See the dgm below

 

EXPLANATION :  If the charge on the conductor is positive (as above), the high concentration of positive charges at the sharp point on the conductor causes ionization of the sorrounding air to produce positive ions and electrons. The electrons are attracted towards the positive conductor while heavy ions drift towards the flame forming an electric wind.

If the conductor is brought close to the conductor from above, the flame splits as shown below:

In this case the flame causes ionization of the surrounding air molecules. The positive ions formed move away from the charged rod towards the flame by repulsion, causing the division of the flame as shown in the diagram.

 

LIGHTINING ARRESTOR

Movement of the clouds in the atmosphere produce large amounts of static charges due to friction with air. The static charges in the cloud induce large opposite charges on the Earth, producing high P.d between the Earth and the cloud. The high P.d makes air to become a charge conductor. The opposite charge strongly attract and neutralize causing lighting and thunder.

 

Lightning can cause destruction to buildings and other objects on the Earth’s surface. To save the buildings from being struck, a lightning arrestor is used.

It comprises of thick copper wire with sharp spikes at the top. See the fig. below:

 

The wire is connected to large  thick copper plate buried deep into the ground.

When the cloud gets –vely charged, it induces a positive charge on the spikes of the arrestor.

The  +ve charges concentrated at the spikes, ionize the air around it.

Positive charges formed go to neutralize the –ve on the cloud as the –ve charges neutralize the +ve on the spikes and the building. Hence the building is protected.

 

CAPACITOR

A capacitor is a device for storing charge.

It consists of two or more plates separated by either a vacuum or material media called dielectric. A dielectric can be air, glass or plastic.

There are 3 main types of capacitors namely

  • Paper capacitors
  • Electrolytic capacitors
  • Variable air capacitors

 

CHARGING AND DISCHARNING A CAPACITOR

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FACTORS THAT AFFECT CAPACITANCE OF A PARALLEL PLATE CAPACITOR

 

  1. AREA OF OVERLAP; Increasing area of overlap increases the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor while reducing the area of overlap reduces the capacitance.

 

  1. THE DISTANCE OF SEPARATION; Increasing the distance of separation of plates of parallel plate capacitor, reduces the capacitance while reducing the distance of separation increases the capacitance.

 

  1. THE NATURE OF THE DILECTRIC; Using glass as the dielectric material give a different value of capacitance from when air is used. Plastic will also give a different value when used as the diletric.

 

 

From 1 and 2 above,  capacitance is directly proportional to the area of overlap and inversely proportional to the distance of separation,

 

C  α

 

C  =

 

 

QUESTION

Two plates of a parallel plate capacitor are 0.6mm apart and each has an aea of 4cm2. Given that the potential difference between the plates is 100V, calculate the charge stored in the capacitor.    (answer = 5.9 x 10-10C)

CAPACITOR COMBINATIONS

Just like resistors, capacitors can be arranged in series or in parallel.

  1. CAPACITORS IN SERIES

 

APPLICATIONS OF CAPACITORS

  • Rectification: This is the conversion of the a.c to d.c . During this conversion, in order to maintain high voltage, capacitors are included in the circuit.
  • A capacitor is included in the primary circuit of the induction coil to eliminate sparking at the contacts
  • A variable capacitor is connected in parallel with an inductor in tuning of radio in order to receive the signal
  • Capacitors re used in delay circuits designed to give intermittent flow of current in car indicators.
  • A capacitor is included in the flash circuit of a camera. The camera flashes during the discharging process of the capacitor.

 

 

 

 

 

 

HEATING EFFECT OF AN ELECTRIC CURRENT

SIMPLE EXPERIMENTS TO SHOW THE HEATING EFFECT OF AN ELECTRIC CURRENT

  • Set up apparatus as shown below

 

Note the initial temperature of water.

Close the switch for about 10 mins and note the new temperature.

Results: The temperature of the water increases

Explanation: The hot coil (heated by the heating effect of an electric current) heats up the water.

here experiments are:

 

  • When an immersion heater is dipped into water and the switch closed, the temperature of the water rises. Here the electric energy is converted to heat energy.
  • A bulb feels warm/hot to touch after lighting for some time.

 

Factors affecting heating by electric current

  • The amount of current
  • The resistance of the conductor

(ii) The time for which the current flows

 

Electrical energy formulae

Since Voltage  V  =  Work done W

Charge Q

 

V  =   W

Q                            W  =  VQ    …………………… (i)   Where W=E

 

and     Q  =  I t       …………………….(ii)

 

Combining  (i) and (ii)     E  =  W  =  VQ  =  V It

Hence electric energy       E  =VIt          The SI unit of electrical energy is the Joule (J)

 

Electrical Power

Power  =  Work   =   Electrical energy  =  VIt

timetime                       t

 

Hence   P  =  VI

From Ohm’s law,    V  =  IR

Hence  P  =  I2 R

 

Also by substituting  I  with  V/R

P   =    V2

R

 

Substitution of  V as IR in equation   E  =  VIt   gives;

E  =  I2Rt

 

QUESTIONS

  1. A torch bulb is lebelled 2.5V, 0.3A. Calculate the power of the bulb.

 

Answer other questions from KLB and foundation PHY

 

 

 

 

APPLICATIONS OF HEATING EFFECT OF AN ELECTRIC CURRENT

The heating effect of an electric current is used in the following electric appliances:

  • THE FILAMENT LAMPS
  • A conductor may be heated to white hot without melting. Under this condition, it emmits light. The electric bulb operatesthis way.
  • e, when current flows through the lamp filament, it heats up to a high temperature and becomes white hot . For this reason it is made of tungsten (a metal with high melting point.).

 

 

DIAGRAM OF AN ELECTRIC BULB    longhorn pg 228

 

  • The filament is enclosed in a glass bulb from which air has been removed to prevent the oxidation of the filament
  • Since hot metals evaporate in the vacuum the bulb is filled with inactive gas like nitrogen and argon to slow down the rate of evaporation and hence increase the life of the filament.

 

 

  • FLUORESCENT LAMPS
  • They are more efficient than filament lamps.

 

 

DIAGRAM OF A FLUORESCENT LAMP/TUBE     KLB PG 256

 

 

  • When the lamp is switched on, the mecuryvapouremmits ultra-violet radiation which makes the powder on the inside wall of the tube to fluoresce/ glow/ emmit visible light.Different powders emmit different colours.

 

 

  • THE FUSE
  • Is a short length of wire of material of low melting point which melts and breaks the circuit when the current through it exceeds a certain value.
  • The breaking of the fuse, saves the wiring from becoming hot and catching fire.

 

 

DIAGRAM OF THE FUSE    KLB PG 257

 

  • A 15A fuse will blow out if a current of 15A  flows through the circuit.

 

 

 

 

 

Other appliances in which the heating effect of an electric current is used include:

 

  • Electric iron
  • Electric kettle
  • A radiation room heater
  • Immersion heater

 

 

 

 

QUANTITY OF HEAT

  • Heat is a form of energy that flows from one body to another due to temperature difference.
  • The absorption of heat by a body results in the rise in temperature while the loss of heat results in the fall in temperature.

 

 

  HEAT CAPACITY AND SPECIFIC HEAT CAPACITY

 

  • HEAT CAPACITY

Is the quantity of heat required to raise temperature of a given mass of a material by one Kelvin. It is denoted by C.

 

C  =   Heat energy absorbed Q

Temperature change θ

i.e      C  =   Q

θ         The SI unit for heat capacity is J/K-1.

 

QUESTION

Calculate the quantity of heat required to raise temperature of metal block with a heat capacity of  460 J/K-1 from 150C to 450C.

 

SOLUTION

C  =  460 J/K-1

Temperature change   θ  =  45 –  15   =   300C

Q  =Cθ

=   460  x  30

=   13800J

 

 

 

  • SPECIFIC HEAT CAPACITY

Is the quantity of heat required to raise the temperature of a unit mass of a substance

by 1 K ie heat capacity per unit mass .

 

c  =   Heat capacity

Mass

 

It is denoted by c .

 

c  =    Q

θ

m

 

c  =   Q

mθ         The SI unit for c is J kg-1K-1

 

Q  =mcθ

 

 

From the above equation,   mc  =  Q

θ

=  C

But    Q

θ

Hence   C  =  mc

 

 

 

QUESTIONS

  1. A block of metal of mass 1.5kg which is suitably insulated is heated fro 300C to 500C in 8mins and 20 seconds by an electric heater coil rated at 54W. Find:

 

(a) The quantity of heat supplied by the heater

 

Solution

Q  =  P  x  t

Q  =  54  x  500

=  27000 J

 

(b) The heat capacity of the block

 

C  =  Q

θ

 

But  Q  =  27000          and  θ   = 50  –  30  =  200C

 

 

C  =  27000

20

 

= 1350  J/K

 

  • The specific heat capacity c

 

C  =  mc

1350  =  1.5  x  c

c  =  900Jkg-1K-1

 

 

  1. Find the final temperature if a heater rated at 42W heats 50g of water from 200C in five mins. (Specific heat capacity of water is 4200 Jkg-1K-1)

 

SOLUTION

Heat lost by heater   =  heat gained by water

P  x t  =  mcθ

42 x 5 x 60  =  0.05 x 4200 x θ

θ  =  60

The final temp  =  20  +  60  =  800C

 

 

  1. A piece of copper of mass 60g and specific heat capacity 390Jkg-1K-1 cools fro 900C to 400C. Find the quantity of heat given out.

 

Solution

Q  =mcθ

=  0.06  x  390  x  (90-40)

=  1170J

 

 

SPECIFIC HEAT CAPACITIES OF SOME MATERIALS

MATERIAL Specific heat capacity ( x 103 Jkg-1K-1)
Water

Alcohol

Kerosene

Ice

Aluminium

Glass

Iron

Copper

Mercury

Lead

4.2

2.3

2.2

2.1

0.9

0.83

0.46

0.39

0.14

0.13

 

 

 

 

DETERMINATION OF SPECIFIC HEAT CAPACITY

 

 

EXPERIMENT TO DETERMINE SPECIFIC HEAT CAPACITY OF A SOLID BY ELECTRICAL METHOD

Apparatus: Cylindrical solid metal block with 2 holes, connecting wires, voltmeter, ammeter, dry cells, variable resistor, stop watch.

Measure the mass m  of the  metal block and set up apparatus as  shown below

 

Close the switch and start the stop watch. Record the time taken for the temperature to rise by 80C.

 

N/B-  Cotton wool acts as lagging material to prevent heat loss by radiation from  the metal  block to the outside.

  • The silver foil is used to minimize heat loss by radiation
  • The wooden container minimizes heat loss by conduction

 

Electrical energy E spent by the heater  in time t is given by E  =  IVt. This energy is converted into heat energy that is absorbed by the metal block (mcѲ).  i.e

 

Heat lost by the heater =  Heat gained by the metal block

 

IVt  =mcѲ

From this specific heat capacity c, of the solid can be calculated as:

c   =   VIt

 

 

QUESTION.

In an experiment to determine specific heat capacity of copper, the following data was obtained:

  • Mass of copper block =  200g
  • Initial temperature of the block =  220C
  • Ammeter reading =   5A
  • Voltmeter reading  = 3.0V
  • Final temperature of the block =  300C
  • Time of heating =  7  mins

Use the data to calculate specific heat capacity c of copper

(Ans = 394 JKg-1K-1)

 

DETERMINATION OF SPECIFIC HEAT CAPACITY OF WATER BY METHOD OF MIXTURES

 

This can be done by heating a solid to a certain temperature and transferring to cold water in a beaker as shown below.

 

Here,

Heat lost by the hot solid  =  Heat gained by the cold water + Heat gained by the container

 

MscsѲs=  MwcwѲw  +  Mc ccѲc

 

QUESTION

In an experiment to determine the specific heat capacity of water, the following data was obtained;

  • Mass of solid =  50g
  • Specific heat capacity of the solid = 400J/kg/k,
  • Initial temperature of the hot solid  =  1000C
  • Mass of the container =   200g
  • Specific heat capacity of the material of the container = 400J/Kg/K
  • Mass of water = 100g
  • Initial temperature of water and the container = 220C
  • When the hot solid was transferred into the cold water in the container, the final temperature of the mixture was = 250C

Use the data to determine the specific heat capacity of the water.

Answer  =   4200

 

 

 

 

 

TO DETERMINE SPECIFIC HEAT CAPACITY OF A LIQUID ELECTRIC METHOD

 

Apparatus: Lagged Copper container, heating coil, thermometer, connecting wires, ammeter, voltmeter stop watch

Measure the mass mc of the copper container and mass ml of the liquid   and set up apparatus as shown below

Close the switch and start the stop watch. Record the time taken for the temperature to rise by say 100C.

 

Here,

Heat energy produced by the heater  =Heat energy gained  +  Heat energy gained

by the liquidby the container

 

 

 

  QUESTION

In an experiment to determine specific heat capacity of a liquid, the following data was obtained:

  • Power of the heater =   30W
  • Mass of the container = 200g
  • Specific heat capacity =   400J/Kg/K
  • Mass of water in the container =  100g
  • Specific heat capacity of water =  4200J/Kg/K

Use se the data to calculate the time taken by the heater to raise the temperature of the water and container from 200C to 230C.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CHANGE OF STATE

 

Heating a substance is known to cause an increase in temperature of the substance. However there are situations when heating does not cause any increase in temperature. These include:

  • When a solid is melting to  liquid
  • When a liquid is boiling to ga

 

 

Below is a temperature – time graph for a solid heated from -200C to 1040C.

 

 

 

In Region AB, temperature rises steadly from  -200C to 00C.

In this region heating causes an increase in temperature.

This happens during the first 10 seconds.

 

Region BC is the melting point of the solid. Here, the heat energy supplied to the solid does not  cause a rise in temperature of the solid, it is used to change (melt) the solid to liquid by breaking the forces of attraction between the solid molecules. This heat energy absorbed by a solid during melting is called LATENT HEAT OF FUSION.

 

DEFINITION OF LATENT HEAT OF FUSION; Is the quantity of heat required to change the state of a material from solid to liquid without temperature change.

 

 

SPECIFIC LATENT HEAT OF FUSION: Is the quantity of heat required to change a unit mass (1kg) of substance from solid to liquid without change in temperature.

Its SI unit is  J/kg

 

 

QUESTION

From the graph above,

  • how long does it take for the solid to melt?
  • At what temperature does the solid melt?

 

 

After the melting process, in region CD, as further heating takes place, temperature increases steadly to the boiling point.

 

Region DE is the boiling point of this substance. Here the heat energy supplied is not used to increase the temperature of the liquid. It is used to change (boil) the liquid to gas. Such heat  energy absorbed  by a solid during boiling is called LATENT HEAT OF VAPOURIZATION.

 

DEFINITION OF LATENT HEAT OF VAPOURIZATION: Is the quantity of heat required to change the state of a material from liquid to gas without change in temperature.

 

SPECIFIC LATENT HEAT OF VAPOURIZATION: Is the quantity of heat required to change a unit mass of a material from liquid state to gas without change in temperature.

Its SI unit is J/kg

 

 

QUESTIONS (From the graph)

  1. How long does it take for the liquid to change to change to gas.
  2. At What temperature does the solid boil?

 

After the boiling process, as heating continues (Region EF), the temperature rises steadily.

 

N/B- During cooling;

  • Latent heat of vapourization is lost as the gas changes to liquid.
  • Also latent heat of fusion is lost as the liquid changes back to solid.

 

 

 

N/B – When there is temperature change, heat is determined using the formula    H  =M x c x Ө

 

Where      H is the heat loss/gain

M is the mass of the substance

c   is the specific heat capacity

Ө  is the temp change

 

-When there is no temperature change, heat is determined using the formula     H = ML

 

Where M = Mass

L = Latent heat of fusion/vapourization

 

QUESTIONS

  1. Determine the amount of heat required to change 0.5kg of ice at

-100C to liquid water at 200C.  (Specific heat capacity of ice 2100J/kg/K, specific heat capacity of water is 4200J/kg/K, specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 3.36 x 105J/Kg/K).

 

SOLUTION

H for raising temp of ice from -100C to 00C

H  =  M c Ө

H  = 0.5 x 2100 x (10-0)

= 10500J

 

H for melting the ice

H = ML

H = 0.5 x 3.36 x 105

= 1.68 x 105J

 

H for raising temp of water from 00C to 200C

H =  M c Ө

= 0.5 x 4200 x (20-0)

= 42000J

TOTAL HEAT REQUIRED = 10500 + 1.68 x 105 + 42000

=      220500J

 

 

 

  1. Calculate the amount of heat required to change 2kg of ice at -200C to liquid water at 1000C.(Specific heat capacity of ice 2100J/kg/K, specific heat capacity of water is 4200J/kg/K, specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 3.36 x 105J/Kg/K).

 

 

  1. Calculate the amount of heat required to change 2kg of ice at -200C to steam at 1000C.(Specific heat capacity of ice 2100J/kg/K, specific heat capacity of water is 4200J/kg/K, specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 3.36 x 105J/Kg/K, Specific Latent heat of vapourization of steam = 2.26 x 106 J/kg).

 

Extra question; Example 9 &10  pg 277 to 279 KLB BK 3 THIRD ED.

 

 

FACTORS AFFECTING MELTING AND meltng POINTS

These include:

  • Pressure
  • Impurities

 

 

EFFECT ON MELTING POINT

 

  • Pressure

Increase in pressure lowers the melting point.

 

(b)Impurities

Adding impurities to substance lowers its melting point.

 

EFFECT ON BOILING POINT

 

  • Pressure

Increase in pressure increases boiling point of a liquid.

 

(b) Impurities

The presence of impurities in a liquid raises its boiling point.

 

 

EVAPORATION

Molecules in a liquid are in continuous random motion. A molecule on the surface of the liquid may acquire sufficient K.E to overcome the attraction force from the neighbouring molecules in the liquid.

This process is known as evaporation and takes place at all temperatures.

 

 

FACTORS AFFECTING THE RATE OF EVAPORATION

 

  • Temperature

Increasing temperature of liquid makes the molecules on its surface to move faster. This makes it easier for more of them to escape.E.g it takes a shorter time for clothes to dry on hot day than on a cold day.

Hence increase in temperature increases the evaporation rate.

 

     (b)Surface area

Increasing the surface area increases the rate of evaporation e.g a wet bed sheet dries faster when spread out than when folded.

 

     (c )Draught

Passing air over a liquid surface increases the rate of evaporation, this is why wet clothes dry faster on windy day.

 

      (d) Humidity

This is the concentration of water vapour in the atmosphere. High humidity reduces the rate of evaporation, this is why wet clothes take a longer time to dry up on a humid day.

 

DIFFERENCES BETWEEN BOILING AND EVAPORATION

 

EVAPORATION BOILING
Takes place at all temperatures Takes place  at a fixed temperature
Takes place on the surface of the liquid Takes place throughout the  liquid
Decreasing the atmospheric pressure increases the rate of evaporation Decreasing the atmospheric pressure lowers the boiling point

 

APPLICATIONS OF COOLING BY EVAPORATION

  • Sweating
  • Cooling of water in a porous pot (water pot).
  • The refrigerator

 

THE MAIN PARTS OF A REFRIGERATOR ARE SHOWN BELOW

 

 

 

In the upper coil, the volatile liquid (Freon) takes latent heat from the air around and evaporates causing cooling in the cabinet. The vapour is moved by the pump into the lower coil where it is compressed and changes back to liquid form (Freon). During this process, heat is given out and is conducted away by the copper fins. The liquid (Freon) goes back to the upper part of the coil and the cycle is repeated.

 

REVISION EXERCISE 9 PG 288 KLB BK 3, 3RD EDITION.

 

 

 

 

GAS LAWS

 

These are laws which show the relationship that exists between pressure, temperature and volume of gases.

 

They include:

  • Boyles law

(b) Charles law

(c ) Pressure law

 

BOYLE’S  LAW

It states that ‘pressure of a fixed mass of gas is inversely proportional to its volume provided temperature is kept constant’.

 

This can be demonstrated using the arrangements shown below:

 

 

When the nozzle of the syringe is closed with a finger and the piston slowly pushed inwards as shown above, it is observed that an increase in pressure of the fixed mass of gas results in decrease in volume.

 

THE APPARATUS BELOW CAN ALSO BE USED TO SHOW THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN PRESSURE AND VOLUME OF FIXED  MASS OF GAS

 

 

 

Any pressure here recorded by the pressure gauge is shown by a fall in the level of oil in the right arm. This results in the rise of the oil level in the right arm by a certain height hence reducing the height h. The height h is the represents the volume of the air because the glass tube has uniform cross-section area.

Hence in this experiment, as pressure increases, volume decreases.

 

 

 

From the statement of Boyle’s law,

P α 1         Since  K is the constant,

V

P = K x  1

V

Hence PV = K

Meaning that   P1V1  =  P2V2

 

THE SHAPE OF AGRAPH OF P PLOTTED AGAINST V IS SHOWN BELOW

 

QUESTIONS

  1. The pressure of fixed mass of gas is 760mmHg when its volume is 38cm3. What will be its pressure when the volume increases to 100cm3.

 

  1. Complete the table by filling in the missing values.
Pressure (cmHg) 0  _ 90  _
Volume (cm3) 36 80  _ 40

 

  1. The volume V of a gas at a pressure P is reduced to 3/8V without change in temperature. Determine the new pressure of the gas.

 

  1. A column of air 26cm long is trapped by mercury thread 5cm long as shown in fig. (a) below. When the tube is inverted as in fig. (b), the air column becomes 30cm long.

 

 

What is the value of the atmospheric pressure?

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CHARLE’S   LAW

It states that ‘ volume of a fixed mass gas is directly proportional to its absolute temperature if the pressure is kept constant’.

 

The apparatus shown below can be used to illustrate this law

 

 

 

As the temperature rises (shown on the thermometer), the height h (volume) also increases i.e the sulphuric acid index moves up.

This shows that an increase in temperature of the air increases volume.

 

 

A graph of volume against temperature is a straight line as shown below

 

 

If the graph is extrapolated as shown above, it cuts the temperature axis

at -273C (absolute zero).This is the lowest temperature a gas can fall to. At this temperature, the volume of the gas is assumed to be zero (from the graph).

 

From the statement of Charle’s law above,

 

V α T

V = KT   Where K is a constant

 

= K

V

T

 

Which implies that

 

 

=

V1        V2

T1         T2

 

NB- The absolute temperature is the temperature on the Kelvin scale. When carrying out calculations use the temperature in K.

 

-ASK  AQUESTION ON CONVERSION OF 0C TO K-

 

 

QUESTIONS

  1. 02m3 of a gas at 270C is heated at a constant pressure until the volume is 0.03m3. Calculate the final temperature of the gas in 0C.
  2. A mass of air of volume 750cm3 is heated at a constant pressure from 100C to 1000 What is the final volume of the air?

 

 

PRESSURE LAW

It states that the pressure of fixed mass of gas is directly proportional to its absolute temperature provided the volume is kept constant.

 

The  apparatus below can be used to illustrate the pressure law

 

 

In the experiment above, an increase in the thermometer reading results to an increase in the reading of the pressure gauge.

 

 

From the statement of Pressure law above, it is true that;

=

P1         P2

T1         T2

 

QUESTIONS

  1. A cylinder contains oxygen at 00C and 1 atmosphere pressure. What will be the pressure in the temperature rises to 1000
  2. At 200C, the pressure of a gas is 50cm of mercury. At what temperature would the pressure of the gas fall to 10cm of mercury?

 

 

EQUATION OF STATE

Consider a fixed mass of gas being changed from state 1 to state 2 through an intermediate state C as shown in the fig. below:

 

 

 

 

QUESTIONS

  1. A mass of 1200cm3 of oxygen at 270C and pressure 1.2 atmospheres is compressed until its volume is 600cm3 and its pressure is 3.0 atmospheres. What is the new temperature of the gas in 0C?
  2. The volume of a fixed mass of air at 270C and 75cmHg is 200cm3. Find the volume of the air at -730C and 80cmHg.

BIOLOGY SCHEMES OF WORK FORM 1-4 (EDITABLE)

BIOLOGY FORM 1 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 1
WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS
5 1 INTRODUCTION TO BIOLOGY Definition of Biology By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

1)      Define Biology

2)      List the branches of Biology

·        Define Biology

·        Linking biology with the science that students learnt in primary

·        Charts on various disciplines ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 1

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 1-4

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 1

·        Golden tips Biology Page 1

 
2 INTRODUCTION TO BIOLOGY Importance of Biology

 

Characteristics of organisms

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

1.      Explain the importance of Biology

2.      State and explain some of the characteristics of organisms

·        Explain the importance of Biology

·        Naming common Characteristics of organisms.

·        Organisms in the school compound

·        Charts on the characteristics of organisms.

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 1-2

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 1-4

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 1-2

·        Golden tips Biology Page 1

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 14-16

 
3-4 INTRODUCTION TO BIOLOGY Characteristics of organisms

 

External features of plants and animals

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

1.      State and explain some of the general characteristics of organisms

2.      Explain the external features of plants and animals

3.      Write down the difference between plants and animals

·        Discussion on the other general characteristics of organisms

·        Collecting, observing and recording external features of plants and animals.

·        Organisms in the school compound

·        Charts on external features of plants and animals

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 2-3

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 1-4

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 2-6

·        Golden tips Biology Page 1-2

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 14-16

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 1-3

 
6 1 CLASSIFICATION 1 Definition

 

Use of magnifying lens

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

1.      Define classification

2.      Use the magnifying lens to observe the external features of plants/ animals

·        Define classification

·        Drawing of a magnifying lens

·        Using magnifying lens to observe the external features of plants and animals

·        Discussion on how to calculate magnification

·        Magnifying lens

·        Different specimen of plants and animals

·        Rulers with measurement in mm

·        Chart on external features of plants and animals

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 5

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 5-10

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 8

·        Golden tips Biology Page 3-5

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 14-16

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 5-12

 
2 CLASSIFICATION 1 Observation of features of organisms

 

Plant leaf forms

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

1.      Record observations of the main external features of plant leaf form

2.      Draw different types of leaf forms

·        Observing, recording the main external features of the leaf forms of plants ·        Different types of leaves

·        Chart on different types of leaves

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 6-8

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 5-10

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 8-10

·        Golden tips Biology Page 4-5

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 17-20

 
3-4 CLASSIFICATION 1 External features of plants and animals By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

1.      Observe, record and draw the main external features of plants

2.      Observe record and draw the main external features of animals

·        Observing, recording and drawing the main external features of plants

·        Observing, recording and drawing the main external features of animals

·        Different types of stems and roots

·        Different types of small animals

·        Chart on features of plants and animals

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 8-12

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 5-10

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 10-14

·        Golden tips Biology Page 3

 
7 1-2 CLASSIFICATION 1 Necessity and significance of classification

 

Major units of classification

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

1.      State the necessity and significance of classification

2.      Name the major units of classification

3.      Name the five kingdoms of living things

  • Discussion on the necessity and significance of classification

 

·        Charts on classification

·        Charts with the five kingdoms and examples in each case.

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 12-13

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 5-10

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 14-15

·        Golden tips Biology Page 6-12

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 17-20

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 5-12

 
3-4 CLASSIFICATION 1 Taxonomic units in plants and animal kingdom By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

1.      List the taxonomic units in plant and animal kingdoms

2.      Classify maize and human beings

  • Naming taxonomic units in plants and animal kingdoms
  • Classification of maize and human beings

 

  • Charts on Classification of maize and human beings

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 13-14

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 5-10

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 14

·        Golden tips Biology Page 6-12

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 17-20

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 5-12

 
8 1-2 CLASSIFICATION 1 Binomial nomenclature in naming organisms By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

1.      Define Binomial nomenclature

2.      State the principles of Binomial nomenclature In naming organisms

  • Defining Binomial nomenclature on the principles of Binomial nomenclature
  • Classification of given organisms using generic and specific names

 

Charts on Binomial nomenclature ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 14

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 5-10

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 15-16

·        Golden tips Biology Page 6

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 17-20

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 5-12

 
3-4 CLASSIFICATION 1 Collection of plants and animals By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

1.      Use collecting nets, cutting instructions instruments and hand lens

2.      Preserve the collected specimen

  • Collecting plants and animals
  • Preserving Collecting plants and animals collected

 

·        Specimen bottle

·        Sweep nets

·        Cotton wool

·        Forceps

·        chloroform

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 14-16

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 5-10

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 9

·        Golden tips Biology Page 6-12

 
9 1-2 CLASSIFICATION 1 Grouping of organisms according to their similarities By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

1.      Observe and group collected and preserved specimen according to their similarities

  • Observing and grouping animals according to their similarities
  • Observing and grouping plants according to their similarities

 

·        Collected and preserved specimen

·        Hand lens

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 15

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 5-10

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 15-16

·        Golden tips Biology Page 7-9

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 17-20

 
3-4 THE CELL Introduction to light microscope By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

1.      Define a cell

2.      Draw and label the light microscope

  • Description of a cell
  • Drawing and labeling the light microscope

 

·        Light microscope

·        Diagram of light microscope

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 17

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 11-19

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 18

·        Golden tips Biology Page 15-16

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 23-25

 
10 1-2 THE CELL Parts of the light microscope and their functions

 

Calculation of magnification using light microscope

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

1.      Identify parts of the light microscope and state their functions

2.      Describe how to care for a light microscope

3.      Describe how a light microscope is used.

  • Discussion on parts of a light microscope
  • Caring for the light microscope
  • Demonstration on how to use the light microscope
  • Prepared slides

 

·        Light microscope

·        Chart of light microscope

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 20

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 11-19

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 21

·        Golden tips Biology Page 17-18

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 23-25

 
3-4 THE CELL Plant and animal cells as seen under a light microscope

 

Calculation of magnification using light microscope

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

1.      Draw and label plant and animal cells as seen under a light microscope

2.      Calculate the magnification of objects as seen under a light microscope

  • Drawing and labeling of plant and animal cells as seen under a light microscope
  • Demonstration on how to calculate magnification of objects as seen under a light microscope

 

·        Charts of plants and animal cells as seen under a light microscope

·        Microscope

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 20

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 11-19

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 18-20

·        Golden tips Biology Page 15-17

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 23-25

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 26-32

 
11 1-2 THE CELL Using the light microscope with prepared slides By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

1.      Observe a prepared slide under a light microscope

2.      Prepare temporary slide of onion epidermis and observe it under a light microscope

  • Permanent slides of animal and plant cells
  • Light microscope
  • Microscope slide
  • Cover slip
  • scalpel
  • Distilled water
  • Iodine solution
  • Onion bulb
  • Droppers
  • Pointed forceps
  • Glass rod
  • Mounted needle
  • Blotting paper

 

·        Observing prepared slides of plant and animal cells

·        Preparing and mounting onion epidermal cells

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 33

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 11-19

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 22

·        Golden tips Biology Page 16

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 23-25

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 26-32

·        Longman biology page 31-32

 
3-4 THE CELL Cell structure as seen under the electron microscope By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

1.      Draw and label plant and animal cells as seen under electron microscope

  • Drawing and labeling plant and animal cells as seen under an electron microscope

 

·        Diagrams of plant and animal cells as seen under electron microscope

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 19-20

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 11-19

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 23

·        Golden tips Biology Page 18

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 23-25

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 26-32

 
12 1 THE CELL Physiology of the cell

Cell wall

Cell membrane

cytoplasm

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe the structure and function of the cell

·        Cell wall

·        Cell membrane

·        cytoplasm

  • discussion on the functions of cell components

– cell wall

– cell membrane

– cytoplasm

  • drawing and labeling these parts  of the cell
·        chart  on plant and animal cells as seen under electron microscope

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 23-24

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 11-19

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 24-26

·        Golden tips Biology Page 18-19

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 23-25

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 26-32

 
  2 THE CELL Cell organelles

 

Estimating the size of a cell

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe the structure and function of the cell organelles

·        Estimate the size of a cell as seen in the field of view of a microscope

  • discussion on the functions of cell organelles
  • Drawing and labeling the cell and organelles
  • Explain how to estimate the size of onion epidermal cells
  • Estimating the size of onion epidermal cells
·        chart  on    various cell organelles

·        cover slip

·        iodine solution

·        distilled water

·        scalpel

·        two droppers

·        pointed scalpel

·        mounting needle

·        filter paper

·        transparent ruler with mm markings

·        onion bulb

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 24-33

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 11-19

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 27-28

·        Golden tips Biology Page 15-20

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 23-25

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 27-32

·        Longman biology pages 30-31

 
  3-4 THE CELL Comparison between plant and animal cells

 

Cell specialization

–         Tissues

–         Organs

–         Organ systems

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Write down the differences between plants and animal cells

·        Write down similarities between plant and animal cells

·        List down specialized plant and animal cells

·        State the modifications and functions  of specialized cells

·        Define tissues, organs and organ systems

·        Give examples of tissues organs and organ systems

  • Distinguishing between plant and animal cells
  • Naming specialized cells and their functions
  • Drawing specialized cells
  • Explaining modification of cells to their functions
·        Table summarizing the differences between plant and animal cells

·        Charts on similarities between plant and animal cells

·        Charts on various specialized cells

·        Chart on plant and animal tissues

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 22-32

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 11-19

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 26-31

·        Golden tips Biology Page 17-20

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 23-25

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 26-32

·        Longman biology pages 32

·        Fly higher series pages 6-7

 
13 REVISION AND EXAMINATION

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

BIOLOGY FORM 1 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 2
WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS
1 1-2 CELL PHSIOLOGY Cell physiology

 

Properties of the cell membrane

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define the term cell physiology

·        Describe the structure and properties of cell membrane

·        Defining the term cell physiology

·        Describing the structure of the cell membrane and its properties

·        Charts on the structure of the cell membrane ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 37-38

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 20-30

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 32-33

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 28-32

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 32-36

 
2 CELL PHSIOLOGY Diffusion

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define diffusion

 

·          Defining diffusion

·          Discussion on diffusion in liquids, gasses and solids

·        Charts on distribution of molecules during distribution ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 38

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 20-30

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 33

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 28-32

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 32-36

 
3-4 CELL PHSIOLOGY Diffusion

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

Carry out experiments to demonstrate

  • diffusion in liquids
  • diffusion in gasses

 

·          Carrying out experiments on diffusion in liquids and gasses

·          Discussions of results from experiments

·        Beaker

·        Potassium permanganate crystals

·        Cold water

·        Glass tube

·        Strong smelling perfume

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 38-39

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 20-30

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 33-34

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 28-32

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 32-36

·        Golden tips biology pages 23-24

 
2 1 CELL PHSIOLOGY Factors affecting Diffusion

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Explain the factors affecting diffusion
  • Explain the role of diffusion in living things

 

·          Discussing the factors affecting diffusion

·          Discussing the role of diffusion in living things

·        Charts on factors affecting diffusion ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 39

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 20-30

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 35-36

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 28-32

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 32-36

·        Golden tips biology pages 24

·        Longman biology page 36

 
2 CELL PHSIOLOGY Osmosis

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Define osmosis
  • Describe movement of water molecules across semi-permeable membrane

 

·          Defining osmosis

·          Describing osmosis across a semi -permeable membrane

·        Diagram on movement of water molecules across a semi -permeable membrane ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 40

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 20-30

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 36-38

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 28-32

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 33-36

·        Golden tips biology pages 24-25

·        Longman biology page 37

 
3-4 CELL PHSIOLOGY Osmosis (practical lesson)

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • demonstrate osmosis by using a Viking tubing
  • carry out an experiment on osmosis using Irish potatoes

 

  • carry out an experiment on osmosis using a Viking tubing
  • carry out an experiment on osmosis using Irish potatoes
  • Discussion on results of both experiments

 

·        Viking tubing

·        Thread

·        Tap water

·        Sucrose solution

·        Irish potatoes

·        Scalpel

·        Cork borer

·        Transparent ruler

·        Distilled water

·        20% sucrose solution

·        Two petri-dishes

·        Tissue paper

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 46

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 20-30

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 37-39

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 28-32

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 34-36

·        Golden tips biology pages 24-25

·        High flyer series pages 10-11

 
3 1-2 CELL PHSIOLOGY Terms used in the study of Osmosis By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to: define and describe the terms used in the study of osmosis such as:
  • Osmotic pressure
  • Osmotic potential
  • Isotonic solution
  • Hypertonic solution
  • Hypotonic solution
  • Turgor pressure
  • Hemolysis
  • Wall pressure
  • Plasmolysis
  • Deplasmolysis

 

  • Defining terms used in the study of osmosis
  • Discussion on the terms used in the study of osmosis

 

·        Charts on turgid cells and plasmolysed cells ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 42

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 20-30

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 37-39

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 28-32

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 33-36

·        Golden tips biology pages 24-26

·        High flyer series pages 37

 
  3-4 CELL PHSIOLOGY Osmosis in plant cells By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to carry out an experiment on selective permeability of membrane
  • carry out an experiment on selective permeability of membranes and movement of water in Irish potatoes

 

 

·        Scalpel

·        Ruler

·        Means of heating

·        3 Irish potatoes

·        3 petri-dishes

·        Viking tubing

·        20% starch solution

·        Iodine solution

·        50cm3 beaker

·        thread

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 47

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 20-30

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 40-42

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 28-32

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 34-36

·        Golden tips biology pages 26

·        Longman biology pages 37-38

·        High flyer series pages 10

 
4 1 CELL PHSIOLOGY Factors affecting Osmosis

 

Role of osmosis in organisms

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to
  • State factors affecting osmosis
  • Explain the role of osmosis in organisms
  • Explain the factors affecting osmosis
  • Discussion on factors  affecting osmosis
  • Discussion on the role of osmosis in organisms

 

·        Charts on factors affecting osmosis and role of osmosis in organisms ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 40-41

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 20-30

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 43-44

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 28-32

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 33

·        Golden tips biology pages 27

·        Longman biology pages 37

·        High flyer series pages 10

 
2 CELL PHSIOLOGY Water relations in plant cells By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to
  • Describe what happens when a plant cell is placed in a hypertonic, hypotonic or isotonic solution
  • Discussion on how plant cells behave in hypertonic, hypotonic or isotonic solutions

 

·        Charts on water movement in and out of plant cells ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 42-43

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 20-30

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 40-42

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 28-32

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 34-36

·        Golden tips biology pages 25-26

 
  3-4 CELL PHSIOLOGY Plasmolysis in onion bulb cells By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to
  • Carry out an experiment  to show plasmolysis in epidermal cells of an onion bulb
  • Carry out an experiment to show plasmolysis in epidermal cells from an onion bulb
  • Discussion of results of the experiment on movement of water in and out of the cells

 

·        Distilled water

·        Two microscope slides

·        Two cover slips

·        10% sucrose solution

·        Forceps

·        Dropper

·        Light microscope

·        Onion bulb

·        scalpel

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 46

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 20-30

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 42

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 28-32

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 34-36

·        Golden tips biology pages 26

·        Longman Biology page 37

·        High Flyer page 10

 
5 1 CELL PHSIOLOGY Water relations in animals By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to
  • Describe osmosis of animal cells in a hypertonic solution
  • Discussion on osmosis in animal cells when placed in hypertonic or hypotonic solution

 

·        Charts on cremated animal cell and haemolyzed animal cell ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 44

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 20-30

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 40

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 28-32

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 34-36

·        Golden tips biology pages 25-26

·        Longman Biology page 37

 
  2 CELL PHSIOLOGY Active transport By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to
  • List down factors affecting active transport
  • Define active transport
  • Define the role of active transport in living things
  • Discussion on active transport factors affecting active transport and its role in organisms

 

·        Charts on factors affecting active transport and role of active transport ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 41-42

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 20-30

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 44

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 28-32

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 35-36

·        Golden tips biology pages 27-28

·        Longman Biology page 36

·        High flyer series pages 10-11

 
  3 and 4 NUTRITION IN PLANTS Meaning importance and types of nutrition

 

External structure of a leaf

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to
  • Define nutrition
  • Write down the importance of nutrition
  • List down the modes of feeding in organisms
  • Draw and label the external structure of a leaf
  • Discussion on definition of nutrition, importance and modes of feeding
  • Drawing and labeling the external structure of a leaf
  • Observing the external parts of a leaf

 

·        Green leaves

·        Chart on the external structure of a leaf

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 51

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 31-44

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 48-49

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 46-47

·        Golden tips biology pages 31

·        Longman Biology page 40

 
6 1 NUTRITION IN PLANTS internal structure of a leaf By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Draw and label the internal structure of the leaf

  • Drawing and labeling the internal structure of the leaf

 

·        Chart on the internal structure of the leaf ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 51-52

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 31-44

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 50

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 47-48

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 46-47

·        Golden tips biology pages 32

·        Longman Biology page 41

 
  2 NUTRITION IN PLANTS Parts of a leaf and their functions By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to
  • Name the parts of a leaf
  • State the functions of the parts of a leaf
  • Discussion on the functions of the different parts of a leaf

 

·        Chart on the internal and external structure of the leaf ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 52-53

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 31-44

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 50-51

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 47-48

·        Golden tips biology pages 33

·        Longman Biology page 41

 
  3 and 4 NUTRITION IN PLANTS photosynthesis By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to
  • Define photosynthesis
  • Draw and label the chloroplast
  • Describe the process of photosynthesis
Discussion on photosynthesis , the structure of the chloroplasts and the stages involved in photosynthesis ·        Chart on the stages of photosynthesis ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 54-55

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 31-44

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 53-54

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 48-49

·        Golden tips biology pages 33-34

 
7 1-2 NUTRITION IN PLANTS Importance of photosynthesis and factors affecting photosynthesis By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to
  • List down the importance of photosynthesis
  • Explain some of the factors influencing photosynthesis
  • Discussion on the importance of photosynthesis
  • Discussion factors influencing photosynthesis
·        Chart on the factors influencing photosynthesis ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 55-56

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 31-44

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 55-59

 
  3-4 NUTRITION IN PLANTS Factors affecting photosynthesis (continued) By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to
  • Explain the factors affecting photosynthesis
  • Discussion on factors influencing photosynthesis
·        Variegated leaves

·        Charts on factors influencing photosynthesis

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 56-57

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 31-44

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 55-59

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 48-49

·        Golden tips biology pages 34

 
8 1-2 NUTRITION IN PLANTS Adaptation of the leaf to photosynthesis By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to
  • Explain how the leaf is adapted to the process of photosynthesis
  • Discussion on adaptations of the leaf to  photosynthesis
·        Green leaves

·        Chart showing internal structure of a leaf

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 52-53

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 31-44

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 51-52

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 47

·        Golden tips biology pages 32-33

 
  3-4 NUTRITION IN PLANTS Factors influencing photosynthesis (practical lessons) By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to
  • Test the presence of starch in a green leaf
  • Investigate whether chlorophyll is necessary for photosynthesis
  • Investigate whether light is necessary for photosynthesis
  • Carrying out experiments on
  • -presence of starch in a leaf
  • -factors influencing photosynthesis in plants
·        Green leaves

·        Boiling tube

·        Means of heating

·        Methylated spirit

·        Iodine solution

·        Dropper

·        White tile

·        Pair of forceps

·        Variegated leaf

·        Aluminum foil on carbon paper

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 64-66

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 31-44

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 55-59

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 48-49

·        Golden tips biology pages 35-36

·        Longman biology 42

 
9 1-2 NUTRITION IN PLANTS Factors influencing photosynthesis (practical lessons) By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to carry out an experiment to investigate whether
  • Carbon (IV) oxide is necessary for photosynthesis
  • Oxygen is produced during photosynthesis

 

  • carry out an experiment to investigate whether

Carbon (IV) oxide is necessary for photosynthesis and whether Oxygen is produced during photosynthesis

 

·        Potted plant

·        Heat source

·        Boiling tubes

·        Two conical flasks

·        Potassium hydroxide

·        Materials for testing for  starch in a leaf

·        Test tubes

·        500cm3 beaker

·        Funnel

·        Pod weed

·        Sodium hydrogen Carbonate

Wooden splint

·        leaf

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 66-67

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 31-44

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 15-59

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 48-49

·        Golden tips biology pages 35-36

·        Longman biology 42

 
  3 CONTINUOUS ASSESMENT TEST Work covered since previous test By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able

 

  • To answer the questions asked

 

  • Learner to answer the given questions
  • Teacher to supervise test
·        Question paper

·        Marking scheme

·        Work covered since previous test  
  4 NUTRITION IN PLANTS Chemicals of life

carbohydrates

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to
  • Define Chemicals of life
  • List down types of carbohydrates
  • Write down properties and functions of monosaccharaides

 

  • Defining Chemicals of life
  • Discussion on
  1. Types of

chemicals of life

  1. Types of carbohydrates
  2. Properties of monosaccharaides
·        Samples of sources of carbohydrates, proteins, lipids and glucose ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 57-58

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 31-44

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 59-60

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary biology pages 49-50

 
10 1 NUTRITION IN PLANTS disaccharides By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to
  • Define disaccharides
  • List properties and functions of disaccharides
  • Define hydrolysis and condensation

 

  • Defining disaccharides
  • Discussion on properties and functions of disaccharides
·        Charts on condensation and hydrolysis of disaccharides ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 58

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 31-44

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 60-61

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary biology page 50

 
  2 NUTRITION IN PLANTS Polysaccharides

 

lipids

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to
  • Define polysaccharides and lipids
  • Write down the properties of polysaccharides and lipids

 

  • Defining polysaccharides and lipids
  • Discussion on properties and functions of polysaccharides and lipids
·        Charts on properties of polysaccharides

·        Charts on properties of lipids

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 58-61

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 31-44

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 61-64

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary biology page 50-52

·        Golden tips biology pages 37-40

 
  3-4 NUTRITION IN PLANTS Food tests By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to carry out tests on
  • Starch
  • Reducing sugars
  • Non-reducing sugar
  • Lipids
  • Proteins
  • Vitamin c

 

  • Demonstration of experiments on food tests
  • Carry out experiments on food tests
  • Discussion on results obtained from experiments
·        Food test reagents and apparatus

·        Benedicts solution

·        Dilute HCL

·        0.5% copper sulphate

·        10% sodium hydroxide

·        DCPIP

·        Iodine solution

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 67-68

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 31-44

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 61-64

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary biology page 51-52

·        Golden tips biology pages 39-40

·        Longman biology  page 43

 
11 1 NUTRITION IN PLANTS proteins By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to
  • Write down the properties and functions of proteins
  • Distinguish between carbohydrates, proteins and lipids

 

  • Discussion on  functions of proteins
  • Distinguishing between carbohydrates, proteins and lipids

 

  • Charts on  the properties  of proteins
  • Charts on a comparison between carbohydrates, proteins and lipids

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 60-61

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 31-44

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 65-67

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary biology page 50-51

·        Golden tips biology pages 38-39

·        Longman biology  page 43

 
  2 NUTRITION IN PLANTS enzymes By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to
  • Define enzymes
  • Write down the properties and functions of enzymes
  • Know the naming of the enzymes and their substrates
  • Explain the importance of enzymes

 

  • Discussion on properties and functions of enzymes
·        Charts on  the properties  enzymes ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 62-64

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 31-44

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 67-69

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary biology page 52-53

·        Golden tips biology pages 42

 
  3-4 NUTRITION IN PLANTS Factors affecting enzymes By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to carry out an experiment on
  • Effect of temperature on enzymes
  • Effects of enzyme concentration on the rate of  a reaction
  • Effect of PH on enzyme activities

 

  • Carrying out an experiment on factors affecting enzymes
·        Materials and apparatus for various experiments

·        Soaked beans

·        Hydrogen peroxide

·        Test tube (5)

·        Test tube rack

·        Water bath

·        Thermometer

·        Measuring cylinder

·        Watch

·          10% starch solution

·        0.1% and o.2% diastase

·        White tiles

·        Egg albumens

·        Distilled water

·        2m HCL

·        2m  sodium hydrogen carbonate

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 68-69

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 31-44

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 67-69

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary biology page 53-55

·        Golden tips biology pages 40-41

·        Longman biology pages 43-44

·        High flyer series pages 15-16

 
12-13 REVISION AND END OF TERM EXAMS

 

 

 

 

 

 

BIOLOGY FORM 1 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 3
WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS
1 1 NUTRITION IN ANIMALS Definition of heterotrophism

 

Modes of heterotrophic nutrition

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to
  • Define hetetrophism
  • List down the different modes of heterotrophism  and describe them

 

  • Defining the term   heterotrophism
  • Discussion on modes of heterotrophism
·        Chart on modes of heterotrophism ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 73

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 45-55

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 72

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary biology page

 
  2 NUTRITION IN ANIMALS Dentition

 

Types of teeth

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to
  • Define dentition
  • Draw and label different types of teeth
  • Describe the structure of a tooth

 

  • Defining the term   dentition
  • Identifying and drawing different  types of teeth
·        Different types of teeth

·        Chart on different types of  teeth

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 74

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 45-55

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 73-76

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

 
  3-4 NUTRITION IN ANIMALS Adaptations of teeth to their functions By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

1.      Identify different types of teeth

2.      Describe the adaptations of the teeth to their functions

 

·        Discussions on the adaptations of teeth to their functions ·        Different types of teeth

·        Chart on different types of teeth

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 75

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 45-55

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 75

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 56-58

·        Gold tips biology page 43

 
2 1 NUTRITION IN ANIMALS Dental formulae By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Define dental formulae
  • Describe and write down the dental formulae of  herbivore carnivore and omnivore

 

·        Defining the term dental formulae

·        Discussion on the dental formulae of herbivores, carnivores, omnivores

·        Jaws of herbivore and carnivore

·        Model of human skeleton with teeth on the jaws (artificial teeth)

·        Chart on various dental formulae

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 75-77

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 45-55

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 73-75

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 56-58

·        Gold tips biology page 43-44

 
  2 NUTRITION IN ANIMALS Dental adaptations of herbivores, carnivores, omnivores By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Write down the definition of herbivores, carnivores and omnivores
  • Explain the adaptations of dental formulae in various groups of animals, to their  mode of feeding

 

·        Discussion on dental adaptation of herbivores and omnivores ·        Jaws of herbivore and carnivore

·        Model of human skeleton with teeth on the jaws (artificial teeth)

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 77

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 45-55

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 73-75

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 56-58

·        Gold tips biology page 42-43

 
  3-4 NUTRITION IN ANIMALS Internal structure of different types of teeth

 

Functions of the internal structure of a tooth

 

Common dental diseases

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Draw and label the internal structure of different types of teeth
  • Write down the functions of the different parts of the internal structure of teeth
  • Name and discuss common dental diseases

 

·        Drawing of internal structure of different types of teeth

·        Discussion on the functions of various parts of the teeth

·        Discussion on common dental diseases

·        Jaws of herbivores and carnivores

·        Model of human skeleton with teeth on the jaws (artificial teeth)

·        Chart on teeth with some dental diseases

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 77-78

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 45-55

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 75-76

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 56-57

·        Gold tips biology page 44

·        Longman biology page 46

 
3 1 NUTRITION IN ANIMALS Adaptation to the modes of feeding in herbivores By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Write down the adaptations of herbivores to their mode of feeding

 

·        Discussion on adaptation of herbivores to their modes of feeding ·        Chart on the jaws of herbivores

·        Chart on the molars from the jaws of a herbivore

·        Jaws of a herbivore

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 76

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 45-55

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 73-74

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 55-56

·        Gold tips biology page 43

·        Longman biology page 45

 
  2 NUTRITION IN ANIMALS carnivores By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Write down the adaptations of carnivores to their modes of feeding

 

·        Discussion on adaptation of carnivores to their modes of feeding ·        Chart on the jaws of a carnivores animal

·        Chart on the different teeth from the jaws of a carnivore

·        Jaws of a carnivore

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 77

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 45-55

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 74

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 56

·        Gold tips biology page 43

·        Longman biology page 45

 
  3-4 NUTRITION IN ANIMALS Digestive system of a rabbit By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Identify various organs associated with the digestive system of a rabbit

 

·        Dissecting a rabbit assisted by a few students (students to wear gloves) ·        Live rabbit

·        Gloves

·        Chloroform

·        Dissection kit

·        Cotton wool

·        Dissecting board

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 90-91

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 45-55

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 85-86

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 58-59

·        Gold tips biology page

·        Longman biology page

 
4 1 NUTRITION IN ANIMALS Human Digestive system By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Draw and label parts of the human digestive system

 

·        Drawing and labeling the human digestive system

·        Discussion on the parts of the human digestive system

·        Chart on the human digestive system ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 79

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 45-55

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 78-82

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages

·        Gold tips biology page

·        Longman biology page

 
  2 CONTINOUS ASSESSMENT TEST Topic covered so far By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Answer all the questions asked

 

·        Learners to answer all the questions asked

·        Teacher to supervise the students while they do the test

·        Question paper

·        Marking scheme

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 73-80

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 45-55

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages  64-83

 
  3-4 NUTRITION IN ANIMALS Human Digestive system By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe the regions of the alimentary canal of human digestive system
  • Explain the functions of the human digestive system

 

·        Discussion on various regions of the human alimentary canal

·        Discussion on some of the human digestive system

·        Chart on the human digestive system ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 80-81

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 45-55

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 78-82

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 58-60

·        Gold tips biology page 45-47

·        Longman biology page

 
5 1 NUTRITION IN ANIMALS Human Digestive system By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe the various regions of the human alimentary canal and their functions

 

·        Discussion on other parts of the human alimentary canal

 

·        Chart on the human digestive system ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 81

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 45-55

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 78-82

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 58-60

·        Gold tips biology page 45-47

·        Longman biology page

 
  2 NUTRITION IN ANIMALS Adaptation of the Ileum to its functions By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe how the ileum is adapted to its function

 

  • Discussion on how the ileum is adapted to its functions

·        Drawing of the intestinal villi

 

·        Chart on the intestinal villi ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 83

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 45-55

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 83-84

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 61

·        Gold tips biology page

·        Longman biology page

 
  3-4 NUTRITION IN ANIMALS Food content in alimentary canal of a herbivore

 

Breakdown of starch by diastase enzyme

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Analyze the food content in the alimentary canal of a herbivore
  • Carry out an experiment on the breakdown of starch by diastase enzymes

 

·        Dissecting a rabbit to obtain food content  from the ileum

·        Carry out analysis on food content of the ileum

 

·        Dead rabbit/rat

·        Dissecting board and kit

·        Cotton wool

·        Benedicts solution

·        Dilute HCL

·        Sodium hydrogen carbonate

·        1% diastase enzyme

·        Starch, test tube

·        Iodine solution

·        Means of heating

·        Test tube holder

·        Dropper

·        Measuring cylinder

·        Water bath

·        White tile

·        Boiled diastase

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 90-91

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 45-55

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 85-86

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 49-50

·        Gold tips biology page 40-42

·        Longman KCSE revision 48

·        Longman biology page 47- 48

·        High flyer series pages 14-15

 
6 1-2 NUTRITION IN ANIMALS More adaptation of ileum to its function By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe how the ileum is farther adapted to its functions

 

·        Discussion on further adaptation of ileum to its function

 

·        Chart on intestinal villi ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 82

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 45-55

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 81-82

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 61

 
  3-4 NUTRITION IN ANIMALS Products of digestion

 

Food assimilation

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Explain the end products of the digestion of various food
  • Explain the function of the colon
  • Explain the process of assimilation of food substances

 

·        Discussion on the products of digestion and assimilation of food

·        Discussion on the functions of colon

 

·        Chart on the products of digestion ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 82

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 45-55

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 84

·        Golden tips biology page 49

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 61-62

 
7 1-2 NUTRITION IN ANIMALS Chemical digestion in alimentary canal By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Write down the summary of chemical digestion in alimentary canal

 

·        Discussion on chemical digestion In alimentary canal

 

·        Chart showing summary of chemical digestion in alimentary canal ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 82-83

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 45-55

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 80-81

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Golden tips biology page 48

 
  3-4 NUTRITION IN ANIMALS Importance of vitamins in human nutrition By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Write down the importance of vitamins in human nutrition
  • Write down the sources of vitamins
  • State deficiency diseases of various vitamins

 

·        Discussion on the importance of vitamins, their sources and deficiency diseases

·        Test for vitamin C

 

·        Materials and procedure required ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 83-92

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 45-55

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 85-86

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 61-62

·        Golden tips biology page 49

 
8 1-2 NUTRITION IN ANIMALS Continuous assessment test By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to
  • Answer the questions
·        Learner to answer the questions asked

·        Teacher to supervise the students as they do the test

 

·        Question papers

·        Marking schemes

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 73-86

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 45-55

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 89-92

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 52-55

 
  3-4 NUTRITION IN ANIMALS Importance of mineral salts in human nutrition, their sources and deficiency diseases By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Write down the importance of mineral salts in human nutrition

·        State the source of mineral salts

·        State the deficiency diseases of mineral salts

·        Discussion on importance of mineral salts in humans, their sources and deficiency diseases

 

·        Chart showing mineral salts, their sources and deficiency diseases ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 84

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 45-55

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 86-87

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 63

 
9 1-2 NUTRITION IN ANIMALS Role of water and roughage in nutrition By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Write down the role of roughage in nutrition

·        Write down the role of water in nutrition

·        Discussion on the role of water and roughage in nutrition

 

·        Sample of sources of roughage ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 86-87

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 45-55

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 84

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 61

 
  3-4 NUTRITION IN ANIMALS Factors determining energy requirements in humans By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to
  • Discuss factors which determine energy requirements in human beings
·        Discussion on the factors determining energy requirements in human beings

 

·        Chart showing factors that determine energy requirements in human beings ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 87-88

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 45-55

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 88-89

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55

 
10 1-4 NUTRITION IN ANIMALS Factors determining energy requirements in human beings (group activity) By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to
  • Participate in group discussions and present findings on factors that determine energy requirements in human beings
·        Group discussions coordinated by the teacher

·        Group presentations by preventatives members

 

·        Research material obtained by students ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 1 page 87-88

·        Teachers bk. 1 pages 48-55

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book Page 88-89

·        KLB teachers book 1 pages 37-55 Gateway secondary Biology pages 63-64

 
12   REVISION & END YEAR EXAMINATIONS

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

BIOLOGY  FORM 2 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 1
WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS
1 1-2 TRANSPORT IN PLAN TS Introduction By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define the term transport

·        List substances transported in plants and animals

·        Link surface area to volume ratio of organisms to the transport system of the organism

·        Explain the necessity of transport in plants

 

·        Defining the term transport

·        Listing substances transported in organisms

·        Relating surface area to volume ratio of organisms to transport systems

·        Large and small cubes

·        Surface area

·        Surface area to volume ration of different cubes

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 1-2

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 1

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 1

·        Golden tips biology pages 54-58

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 84

·        Longman biology page 52

 
  3 TRANSPORT IN PLANTS Structure of roots and root hairs By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Draw the structure of roots and root hairs

·        Relate the structure of the root to their functions

 

·        Discussing the structure of root and root hairs

·        Drawing the root and root hair

·        Relating the structure to functions

·        Chart of root and root hair

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 2-4

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 2

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 1

·        Golden tips biology pages 55-56

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 84

·        Longman biology page

 
  4 TRANSPORT IN PLANTS Structure of roots and root hairs (practical lesson) By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Observe prepared slides of roots and root hairs

·        Compare monocotyledons and dicotyledonous root sections

·        Observe charts and drawings of root sections

 

·        Observing and comparing prepared slides of monocotyledonous and dicotyledonous roots and root hairs under a light microscope

·        Observing charts and drawings of root section

·        Microscopes prepared slides of root sections and root hairs

·        Charts on root sections of monocotyledonous and dicotyledonous roots

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 2-4

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 1-2

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 2-5

·        Golden tips biology pages 56

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 84

·        Longman biology page

 
2 1 TRANSPORT IN PLANTS Xylem Vessels By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Draw and label the structure of the Xylem Vessel

·        Define Xylem Vessel

·        Relate the structure of the Xylem Vessel to its function

 

·        Defining the term Xylem Vessel

·        Drawing and labeling  the structure of the Xylem Vessel

·        Relating the structure of the Xylem Vessel to its function

 

·        Photographs of Xylem Vessels

·        Chart on Xylem Vessels

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 8-9

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 2-10

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 17-20

·        Golden tips biology pages 58

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 84-85

·        Longman biology page

 
  2 TRANSPORT IN PLANTS Tracheid elements By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define Tracheid elements

·        Relate the structure of the Tracheid elements to their functions

·        Distinguish between xylem vessels and Tracheid elements

 

·        Defining Tracheid elements

·        Distinguishing between vessels and tracheids

·        Discussion on the structure of Tracheid elements

·        Relating the structure of the Tracheid elements to their functions

 

·        Photographs of Tracheid elements

·        Chart on Tracheid elements

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 8-9

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 10-11

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 5-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 19-20

·        Golden tips biology pages 58

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 84-85

·        Longman biology page 53-54

 
  3 TRANSPORT IN PLANTS Absorption water and mineral salts By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe water and salt uptake by roots from the soil

·        Explain the physiological process involved in the uptake of water and mineral salts

 

·        Explaining water absorption and mineral salt uptake by roots in plants

·        Discussion of water absorption and uptake of mineral salts in plants

 

·        Photographs of monocotyledonous and dicotyledonous stem sections showing the xylem

·        Chart on the stem sections

·        Chart on roots, roots hairs and section of roots

·        Photographs of roots and root hairs

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 2-5

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 7-9

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 2-8

·        Golden tips biology pages 54-56

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 84-85

·        Longman biology page 54

 
3 1 TRANSPORT IN PLANTS Internal tissues of the stem By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Draw the monocotyledonous and dicotyledonous stem sections

·        Define the term transpiration and relate the structure of xylem to its role in transpiration

 

·        Defining transpiration

·        Discussion on the structure of the xylem to its function

·        Drawing the stem section

 

·        Photographs of monocotyledonous and dicotyledonous stem sections showing the xylem

·        Chart on the stem sections

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 6-7

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 5-7

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 4-10

·        Golden tips biology pages 59

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 86-87

·        Longman biology page

 
  2 TRANSPORT IN PLANTS The role of the leaf in transpiration By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Draw and label the internal and the external structure of a leaf

·        Describe the functions of the leaf

·        Relate the parts of a leaf to their functions

 

·        Drawing and labeling the structure of a leaf

·        Discussion on the parts of a leaf and how they relate to their functions

 

·        Sample leaves of various pants

·        Charts on the section of a leaf

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 7

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 9-10

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 10-12

·        Golden tips biology pages 57-58

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 84

·        Longman biology page 54

 
  3-4 TRANSPORT IN PLANTS Transport of water and mineral salts in plants (practical lesson) By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Demonstrate the movement of water in plants

·        Observe prepared leaf sections to identify vascular tissues

 

·        Carrying out an experiment to demonstrate the movement of water in plants

·        Observing  prepared leaf section under a light microscope

·        Identifying vascular tissues in leaves

 

·        Sample leaves of various pants

·        Charts on the section of a leaf sections

·        microscopes

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 14

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 14-16

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 7

 
4 1 TRANSPORT IN PLANTS Movement of water in plants By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Discuss the forces involved in movement of water in plants such as transpiration, pull, cohesion and adhesion capillarity and root pressures

·        Demonstrate the forces involved in movement of water in plants

 

·        Describing the forces involved in movement of water in plants

·        Discussion on forces involved in movement of water in plants

·        Carrying out experiments to show the forces involved

 

·        Tubes of different diameters

·        Beakers containing colored water

·        Fresh plant stump with fluid oozing

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 11-12

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 11-12

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 5-6

·        Golden tips biology pages 59-60

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 86-87

·        Longman biology page

 
  2 TRANSPORT IN PLANTS Importance of transpiration By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Identify the importance of transpiration in plants

·        Discuss the importance of transpiration in plants

 

·        Discussion on the significance of transpiration in plants

 

·        Wilted potted plants

·        Potted plants growing normally

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 12

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 12

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 12

·        Golden tips biology pages 54

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 84

·        Longman biology page

 
  3-4 TRANSPORT IN PLANTS The phloem By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Explain what the phloem is

·        Draw the structure of the phloem and relate its structure to its function

·        List down materials translocated in the phloem

 

·        Drawing the structure of the phloem

·        Discussing the functions of phloem in relation to its structure

·        Listing down the materials translocated in plants

 

·        Chart on structure of the phloem

·        Photographs of the phloem

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 12-14

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 1-13

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 24-26

·        Golden tips biology pages 61-62

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 86

·        Longman biology page

 
6 1 TRANSPORT IN PLANTS The phloem By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Draw the structure of the phloem

·        Relate the parts of the phloem to its functions

·        Drawing the phloem

·        Discussion on  the functions of the parts of the phloem

 

·        Chart of the phloem structure

·        Drawings of the phloem structure

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 12

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 17-18

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 24-25

·        Golden tips biology pages 62

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 86-87

·        Longman biology page 55

 
  2 TRANSPORT IN PLAN TS Function of phloem By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Discuss the function of the phloem

·        List down materials translocated and the sites of storage in the phloem

·        Discussion on the functions of the phloem

·        Listing down materials translocated and storage sites in the phloem

 

·        Chart of the phloem structure

·        Photographs of the phloem

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 12-14

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 17-18

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 24-26

·        Golden tips biology pages 61-62

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 86-87

·        Longman biology page 55

 
  3-4 TRANSPORT IN PLAN TS Function of phloem (practical lesson) By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Set up an experiment to investigate translocation of food substances in dicotyledonous plants

·        Set up an experiment to investigate translocation of food substances in a monocotyledonous plant

·        Explain the processes involved in the translocation of food in plants

·        Setting up an experiment to investigate translocation

·        Explaining the processes involved in the translocation of food in plants

·        Discussion on the result of the experiment

·        A young plant

·        Sharp knife

·        Saplings

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 14

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 12-14

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 25-26

·        Golden tips biology pages 62

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 86-87

·        Longman biology page

 
7 1-2 TRANSPORT IN ANIMALS Introduction

 

Transport in unicellular animals

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Identify unicellular organisms such as amoeba

·        Describe transport of substances in unicellular organisms

·        Explain the necessity of an elaborate transport system in most animals

 

·        Identify some unicellular organisms such as amoeba

·        Explaining transport in unicellular organisms

·        Explaining the need for an elaborate transport system in most animals

·        Chart showing movement of gasses in and out of an amoeba by diffusion

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 21

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 18

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 26

·        Golden tips biology pages 63

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 88

·        Longman biology page  55-56

 
  3-4 TRANSPORT IN ANIMALS Open circulatory system By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define an open circulatory system

·        Discuss the open circulatory system

·        Draw the open circulatory system of an insect

 

·        Explaining open circulatory system in insects

·        Discussing the open circulatory system

·        Drawing the open circulatory system of an insect

·        Labeling the open circulatory system

·        Chart showing the circulatory system of a cockroach

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 21

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 14-25

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 18-20

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 26-27

·        Golden tips biology pages 63-64

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 88

·        Longman biology page

 
8 1 TRANSPORT IN ANIMALS Closed circulatory system By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define an closed transport system

·        Identify animals with the open circulatory system

·        Distinguish between closed and open circulatory systems

 

·        Defining closed circulatory systems

·        Stating organisms with closed circulatory systems such as human beings

·        Distinguishing between closed and open circulatory systems

 

·        Chart showing closed circulatory system

·        Chart showing the difference between closed circulatory system and open circulatory system

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 22-23

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 14-25

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 19-20

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 26-27

·        Golden tips biology pages 64-65

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 88-89

·        Longman biology page  55-56

 
  2-3 TRANSPORT IN ANIMALS Double circulatory system By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define an Double circulatory system

·        Draw and label circulatory systems in mammals

·        Dissect a rabbit and observe its transport system

 

·        Discussing the Double circulatory system

·        Observing the transport system in a rabbit

·        Drawing the double circulatory system of a mammal

·        Chart showing the circulatory system of a mammal

·        Dissected rabbit displaying the circulatory system

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 24-42-44

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 14-25

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 19-20

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 28-34

·        Golden tips biology pages 64-65

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 88-89

·        Longman biology page  56

·        High flyer series pages 30-32

 
  4 CONTINOUS ASSESMENT TEST Topics covered so far By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to answer the given questions in the test ·        Learner to answer questions

·        Teacher to supervise the test

·        Question paper

·        Marking scheme

 

   
9 1 TRANSPORT IN ANIMALS The mammalian heart By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Draw and label the external parts of the mammalian heart

·        Draw and label the internal structure of the mammalian heart

·        Explain the functions of the heart

·        Relate the structure of the heart to its functions

 

·        Drawing and labeling the mammalian heart and relating its structure to its functions

·        Discussing the structure of the mammalian heart

·        Chart showing the structure of a mammalian heart

·        Model of a heart

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 24-25

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 14-25

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 21-23

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 28-32

·        Golden tips biology pages 65-66

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 89

·        Longman biology page

·        High flyer series pages

 
  2 TRANSPORT IN ANIMALS Blood flow in the circulatory system of mammals By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Trace the path taken by blood from the heart to the body parts and back to the heart

·        State the substances supported by the blood of mammals

·        Describe the flow of oxygenated blood in and out of the body through the heart

 

·        Discussing the blood flow in mammals

·        Tracing the path taken by blood from the heart to all body parts and back to the heart

·        Chart showing the path of blood flow in the circulatory system of a mammal

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 25-26

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 14-25

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 19-20

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 31-32

·        Golden tips biology pages 65-67

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 88-90

·        Longman biology page 56

·        High flyer series pages

 
  3-4 TRANSPORT IN ANIMALS Blood vessels By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Explain the structure of arteries, veins and capillaries

·        Relate the structure of the arteries, veins and capillaries to their function

 

·        Explaining and relating the structure to their functions

·        Drawing the arteries, veins and capillaries

·        Making medals of blood vessels

·        Chart showing arteries, veins, and capillaries

·        Modes of blood vessels

·        Different colours of Plasticine

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 29-31

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 14-25

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 25-30

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 33-43

·        Golden tips biology pages 67-68

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 88-90

·        Longman biology page 56

·        High flyer series pages

 
10 1 TRANSPORT IN ANIMALS Diseases and defects of the circulatory system By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Name the common diseases of circulatory system such as thrombosis, varicose veins

·        Suggest methods of control/prevention for the diseases.

 

·        Name the diseases of the circulatory system

·        Suggest methods of control/prevention

·        Resource person such as the school nurse

·        Photographs of people suffering from diseases of the circulatory system

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 32-33

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 14-15

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 31-32

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 43-45

·        Golden tips biology pages 73-74

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 92-93

·        Longman biology page 57

·        High flyer series pages

 
  2 TRANSPORT IN ANIMALS The structure and function of the blood By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        List the components of the blood

·        State the functions of each of the blood components

 

·        Listing components of blood

·        Relating blood components to their functions

·        Modeling red blood cells (RBC)

·        Resource person such as the school nurse

·        Model RBCs using Plasticine

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 33-37

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 14-25

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 32-35

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 45-50

·        Golden tips biology pages 69-71

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 90

·        Longman biology page 58-59

·        High flyer series pages

 
  3-4 TRANSPORT IN ANIMALS The structure and function of the blood By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Explain how oxygen and carbon dioxide are transported in the blood

·        Describe the mechanisms of blood clotting and its importance

 

·        Explaining how oxygen and carbon dioxide are transported in the blood

·        Describing  the mechanisms of blood clotting and its importance

·

·        Resource person such as the school nurse

·        Chart showing blood clotting mechanism

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 34-35

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 14-25

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 36-38

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 45-51

·        Golden tips biology pages 70-71

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 90

·        Longman biology page

·        High flyer series pages

 
11 1 TRANSPORT IN ANIMALS Blood grouping and blood transfusion By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe the human blood group system

·        State the importance of blood groups  in blood transfusion

 

·        Describing blood groups

·        Stating the importance of human blood groups in blood transfusion

·        Playing cards/bottle tops in pairs

·

·        Resource person such as the school nurse

·        Chart showing blood groups and possible transfusions

·        Prepared cards/bottle tops

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 37-38

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 14-25

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 36-38

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 51-54

·        Golden tips biology pages 72-73

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 90-91

·        Longman biology page 56

·        High flyer series pages

 
  2 TRANSPORT IN ANIMALS Blood grouping and blood transfusion By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Discuss the rhesus factor

·        State the role of the rhesus factor in blood transfusion

 

·        Discussing the rhesus factor and its role in blood transfusion

·

·        Resource person such as the school nurse

·        Blood transfusion personnel

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 38-39

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 14-25

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 37-39

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 52-55

·        Golden tips biology pages 72-73

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 92

·        Longman biology page 59

·        High flyer series pages

 
  3-4 TRANSPORT IN ANIMALS The structure of the heart (practical lesson) By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Examine the external and internal structure of a cows heart

·        Investigate pulse rate at the wrist

 

·        Examining a mammalian heart structure and identifying various parts

·        Working in pairs to examine pulse rate before and after vigorous activities

·

·        Fresh heart of a mammal such as a cow

·        Dissecting kit

·        Hand lens

·        Stop watch

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 44-45

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 14-25

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 30-31

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 28

·        Golden tips biology pages 66

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 89

·        Longman biology page 59

·        High flyer series pages

 
12 1 TRANSPORT IN ANIMALS Immune responses By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Defining immunity

·        Describe immune response

·        Differentiate between natural and artificial immunity

 

·        Defining immunity

·        Describing immune responses

·        Distinguishing between natural and artificial immunity

·        Chart showing types of immunity

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 39-41

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 14-25

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 40-41

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 56-58

·        Golden tips biology pages 74-75

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 93

·        Longman biology page

·        High flyer series pages

 
  2 TRANSPORT IN ANIMALS vaccination By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define vaccination

·        Describe importance of vaccination against diseases such as tuberculosis, poliomyelitis, measles, diphtheria, whooping cough

 

·        Defining vaccination

·        Describing the importance of vaccination

·        Drawing the vaccination table

·        Chart showing the vaccination table

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 40-41

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 14-25

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 41-43

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 58-59

·        Golden tips biology pages 75-76

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 93-94

·        Longman biology page

·        High flyer series pages

 
  3-4 TRANSPORT IN ANIMALS Allergic reactions By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define allergic reactions and explain their causes

·        Carry out an experiment to demonstrate the unidirectional flow of blood in the cutaneous veins of the forearm

 

·        Defining allergic reactions and explaining  their causes

·        Carrying out an experiment to demonstrate the unidirectional flow of blood in the cutaneous veins

·        School nurse

·        Rubber bands

·        Bandages or handkerchiefs

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 41-42-45

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 14-25

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 43

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 15-34

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 58

·        Golden tips biology pages 76-77

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 93-94

·        Longman biology page59-60

·        High flyer series pages

 
13 REVISION AND END OF TERM EXAMINATIONS

 

 

 

 

BIOLOGY FORM 2 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 2
WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS
1 1 GASEOUS EXCHANGE IN PLANTS Definition and importance of gaseous exchange By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define gaseous exchange

·        Identify the gases that are exchanged in the living organism

·        Explain the importance of gaseous exchange in organisms

 

·        Defining gaseous exchange

·        state the gases that are exchanged in the living organisms such as oxygen and carbon dioxide

·        discussion on the importance of gaseous exchange in organisms

 

·        charts on the importance of gaseous exchange in organisms

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 48

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 26-33

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 48-50

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 35-44

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 70

·        Golden tips biology pages 79

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 113

·        Longman biology page 62

·        High flyer series pages 36

 
  2 GASEOUS EXCHANGE IN PLANTS Gaseous exchange in the stomata By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe the stomata

·        Draw and label open and closed stomata

·        Explain stomata and gaseous exchange

 

·        Describing  the parts of the stomata

·        Drawing and labeling of open and closed stoma

·        Discussion on stomatal gaseous exchange

 

·        Chart showing open and closed stomata

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 48-49

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 48-51

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 35-44

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 70-74

·        Golden tips biology pages 79-80

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 114

·        Longman biology page 62

·        High flyer series pages

 
  3-4 GASEOUS EXCHANGE IN PLANTS Stomata (practical lesson) By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Investigate the presence of stomata on leaves

·        Investigate the shape of guard cells and the distribution of stomata on leaves

 

·        Investigating the presence of stomata on leaves in groups

·        Investigating the shape of guard cells

·        Discussion on the distribution of stomata on leaves of various plants

·        Water in a beaker

·        Leaves of various leaves

·        Means of heating

·        Clear nail varnish

·        Light microscope

·        Cover slip

·        Forceps

·        Microscope slide

·        Leaves of various plants

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 54

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 26-33

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 48-50

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 35-44

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 76

·        Golden tips biology pages

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 114

·        Longman biology page

·        High flyer series pages

 
2 1 GASEOUS EXCHANGE IN PLANTS Mechanism of opening and closing stomata By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Explain the mechanism of opening and closing of stomata

·        Describe photosynthetic/glucose accumulation theory of opening and closing stomata

 

·        Explaining the mechanism of opening and closing of stomata

·        Discussion on the photosynthetic/glucose accumulation theory of opening and closing stomata

 

·        Chart showing open and closed stomata

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 49-50

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 26-33

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 50-51

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 35-44

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 71-74

·        Golden tips biology pages 79-80

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 114

·        Longman biology page 62

·        High flyer series pages

 
  2 GASEOUS EXCHANGE IN PLANTS Mechanism of opening and closing stomata By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe inter-conversion of starch and glucose and ion accumulation theories

·        Discussion on the inter-conversion of starch and glucose and ion accumulation theories ·        Chart showing open and closed stomata

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 50

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 26-33

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 50-51

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 35-44

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 76

·        Golden tips biology pages 79-80

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 114

·        Longman biology page

·        High flyer series pages

 
  3-4 GASEOUS EXCHANGE IN PLANTS Internal structure of stems and leaves (practical lessons) By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Investigate the internal structure of stems and leaf stalk in aerial and aquatic plants

·        Investigate tissue distribution in aerial leaves and stems

·        Investigation of the structure of stems and leaf stalks in aerial and aquatic plants ·        Microscope

·        Prepared permanent slides of aerial leaves and stems

·        Water lily leaf stalk

·        Bougainvillea twig

·        Beaker containing water

·        scalpel

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 55

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 26-33

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 50-52

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 35-44

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 75-76

·        Golden tips biology pages

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages

·        Longman biology page 62

·        High flyer series pages

 
3 1 GASEOUS EXCHANGE IN PLANTS Cuticular and lenticular gaseous exchange By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to describe Cuticular and lenticular gaseous exchange ·        Discussion on lenticular gaseous exchange

·        Discussion on Cuticular gaseous exchange

·        Chart showing internal leaf structure and lenticels

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 52

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 26-33

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 51-53

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 35-44

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 75

·        Golden tips biology pages 81

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 114-115

·        Longman biology page 62-64

·        High flyer series pages 36-37

 
  2 GASEOUS EXCHANGE IN PLANTS gaseous exchange through the roots By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to;

·        Draw the structure of the root

·        Describe how gaseous exchange takes place through the epidermis of the roots

·        Drawing the structure of the root

·        Discussion on gaseous exchange through the roots

·        Photograph of pneumatophic

·        Chart showing breathing roots

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 52-54

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 26-33

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 48-52

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 35-44

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 74-75

·        Golden tips biology pages 81-82

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 113-114

·        Longman biology page

·        High flyer series pages

 
  3-4 GASEOUS EXCHANGE IN PLANTS gaseous exchange structures By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to;

·        Examine various types of gaseous exchange structure in different organisms

·        Relate the various types of gaseous exchange structure to their functions in different organisms

·        Examining various types of gaseous exchange structures

·        Relating the various types of gaseous exchange structure to their functions in different organisms

·        Tadpoles

·        Insects (alive)

·        Fish

·        Frog

·        earthworm

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 57

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 34-48

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 58-61

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 35-44

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 80-81

·        Golden tips biology pages 82

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 115

·        Longman biology page

·        High flyer series pages

 
4 1 GASEOUS EXCHANGE IN ANIMALS Gaseous exchange types and characteristics of respiratory surfaces in animals By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to;

·        State the characteristics of gaseous exchange surfaces in different organisms

·        Discussion on characteristics of gaseous exchange surfaces

·        Discussion on mechanism of gaseous exchange surfaces

·        Discussion on mechanism of gaseous exchange in amoeba

·        Chart showing diagrams of different gaseous exchange surfaces such as insects fish, frogs and earth worms

·        Chart showing diagram on gaseous exchange in amoeba

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 57-58

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 34-48

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 53

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 35-44

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 80

·        Golden tips biology pages 82-83

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 115

·        Longman biology page 65

·        High flyer series pages

 
  2-3 GASEOUS EXCHANGE IN ANIMALS gaseous exchange in an insect By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to;

·        Examine the gaseous exchange structures of a grasshopper or a locust

·        Draw the gaseous exchange structure of an insect

·        Examining the gaseous exchange structures in insects

·        Drawing the gaseous exchange structure of an insect

·        Chart on tracheal system in insects

·        Live grasshoppers

·        Dissecting board

·        Pins

·        Hand lens

·        Dissecting kit

·        Chloroform

·        Cotton wool

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 58

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 34-48

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 54-56

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 35-44

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 81-84

·        Golden tips biology pages 83

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 115-116

·        Longman biology page 64

·        High flyer series pages 37-38

 
  4 GASEOUS EXCHANGE IN ANIMALS & PLANTS Continuous assessment test By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to answer all questions asked in the test

 

·        Learner to write down the answers

·        Teacher to supervise test

·        Question papers

·        Marking scheme

 

·  
5 1 GASEOUS EXCHANGE IN ANIMALS gaseous exchange in bony fish By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to;
  • Draw and label the structure of gaseous exchange in bony fish
  • Relate the gills to their function
  • discussion on gills of a bony fish
  • drawing and labeling the gill chamber and gills of bony fish
  • discussion on functions of parts of the gills

 

·        Chart showing diagram of gill chamber of bony fish

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 59-60

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 34-48

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 56-58

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 35-44

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 84-88

·        Golden tips biology pages 84

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 116-117

·        Longman biology page

·        High flyer series pages

 
  2 GASEOUS EXCHANGE IN ANIMALS Gaseous exchange in bony fish By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to describe the mechanism of gaseous exchange in bony fish

 

  • Discussion on the mechanism of gaseous exchange in bony fish

 

·        Chart showing diagram of gill chamber of bony fish

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 60-61

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 34-48

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 57-58

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 35-44

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 84

·        Golden tips biology pages 84

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 116-117

·        Longman biology page

·        High flyer series pages 38

 
  3-4 GASEOUS EXCHANGE IN ANIMALS Gaseous exchange in bony fish (practical lesson) By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Examine the location and number of gills in gill chambers of bony fish
  • Examine, draw and label the gill of a bony fish
  • Examining the location and number of gills in gill chambers of bony fish
  • Examining, drawing and labeling isolated gills in bony fish

 

·        Tilapia fish

·        Hand lens

·        Gills of a bony fish

·        Dissecting kit

·        Pins

·        Dissecting board

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 69

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 34-48

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 58

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 35-44

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 84-85

·        Golden tips biology pages 84

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 116

·        Longman biology page

·        High flyer series pages

 
6 1 GASEOUS EXCHANGE IN ANIMALS gaseous exchange in frogs By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to describe the gaseous exchange I a frog through its gills, skin, mouth and lungs.

 

  • Discussion on gaseous exchange in a frog

 

·        Chart showing position of mouth cavity, lungs and nostrils in a frog

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 61-62

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 34-48

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 58-59

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 35-44

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 88-90

·        Golden tips biology pages 84-85

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 117

·        Longman biology page 65-66

·        High flyer series pages

 
  2 GASEOUS EXCHANGE IN ANIMALS gaseous exchange in human beings By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • State the structure involved in gaseous exchange in human beings
  • Explain the features of the structures involved in gaseous exchange in human beings
  • Draw and label the structures involved in gaseous exchange  in human beings
  • Stating the structures involved in gaseous exchange in human beings
  • Explaining the features of the structures involved in gaseous exchange in human beings
  • Drawing and labeling the structures involved in gaseous exchange in humans

 

·        Chart showing the lungs and rib cage in human beings

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 63-65

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 34-48

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 59-64

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 35-44

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 90-94

·        Golden tips biology pages 85-86

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 117-118

·        Longman biology page 66

·        High flyer series pages 38-39

 
6 3-4 GASEOUS EXCHANGE IN ANIMALS gaseous exchange in human beings By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Examine a dissected mammal to locate the gaseous exchange structures
  • Describe the mechanism of breathing in human beings

 

·        Identifying the structures of gaseous exchange in a dissected rabbit (mammal)

·        Discussion on mechanism of breathing in human beings

 

·        Chart showing the lungs and rib cage in human beings

·        Dissected rabbit displaying the gaseous exchange system

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 64

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 34-48

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 59-64

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 35-44

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 94-97

·        Golden tips biology pages 86

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 119

·        Longman biology page

·        High flyer series pages 38-39

 
7 1-2 GASEOUS EXCHANGE IN ANIMALS Breathing mechanisms in human beings By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Draw and label the alveoli where gaseous exchange occur in human beings
  • Describe how gaseous exchange occurs in alveoli

 

  • Drawing  and labeling the alveoli where gaseous exchange occur in human beings
  • Describing  how gaseous exchange occurs in alveoli
  • Discussion on gaseous exchange at the alveoli

 

·        Chart showing the exchange of gases in alveoli of human beings

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 66

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 34-48

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 61-65

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 35-44

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 96-99

·        Golden tips biology pages 86-87

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 119-120

·        Longman biology page 67

·        High flyer series pages 38-39

 
  3-4 GASEOUS EXCHANGE IN ANIMALS AND PLANTS Continuous assessment test By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

·        Answer all questions asked in the test

  • Learners to write down the answers to the questions
  • Teacher to supervise the students

 

·        Question papers

·        Marking scheme

 

·  
8 1-2 GASEOUS EXCHANGE IN ANIMALS Gaseous exchange in human beings By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Explain how human beings are adapted to their functions
  • Able to examine the mammalian lung

 

  • Explaining how human beings are adapted to their functions
  • Discussion on the adaptations of lungs in humans and examination of mammalian lung

 

·        Lungs from a mammal eg. goat, sheep and cow

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 66

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 34-48

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 59-65

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 35-44

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page

·        Golden tips biology pages 86-87

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 120

·        Longman biology page 66-67

·        High flyer series pages 38-39

 
  3-4 GASEOUS EXCHANGE IN ANIMALS Gaseous exchange in mammals (practical lesson) By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Demonstrate the breathing mechanism of the lungs and diaphragm in a model thoracic cavity
  • Demonstrate the breathing movement of ribs and muscles by using a model

 

  • Carrying out a demonstration of breathing mechanism in human beings using a model

 

·        A bell jar

·        Two balloons

·        Rubber stopper with a hole

·        Y-shape glass tube

·        Rubber sheet

·        String

·        Petroleum jelly

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 71

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 34-48

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 63

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 35-44

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 96-99

·        Golden tips biology pages 86-87

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 117-119

·        Longman biology page

·        High flyer series pages

 
9 1 GASEOUS EXCHANGE IN ANIMALS Factors affecting the rate of breathing By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Examine the factors affecting the rate of breathing in human beings
  • Explain the factors which control the rate of breathing  in human beings

 

  • Examining the factors affecting the rate of breathing in human beings
  • Discussion on factors affecting the rate of breathing  in human beings

 

·        Chart with table showing factors affecting breathing

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 66-67

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 34-48

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 65-66

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 35-44

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 101-102

·        Golden tips biology pages 87

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 119

·        Longman biology page 67-68

·        High flyer series pages

 
  2 GASEOUS EXCHANGE IN ANIMALS Respiratory diseases By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • State the causes of respiratory diseases
  • Discuss the symptoms of respiratory disease
  • explain the prevention measures of respiratory diseases

 

  • Discussion on causes, symptoms and prevention measures of respiratory diseases

 

·        Chart on respiratory diseases

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 71

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 34-48

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 67-70

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 35-44

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 104-107

·        Golden tips biology pages 87-88

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 121

·        Longman biology page 68

·        High flyer series pages

 
  3-4 GASEOUS EXCHANGE IN ANIMALS Gaseous exchange in animals (practical lesson) By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to demonstrate the effect of exercise on the rate of breathing
  • Carrying out experiment to show the effect of exercise on rate of breathing

 

·        Chair

·        Stop watch

·        Skipping rope

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 74

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 34-48

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 66-67

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 35-44

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 101-104

·        Golden tips biology pages

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages

·        Longman biology page

·        High flyer series pages

 
10 1 RESPIRATION Introduction

 

Tissue respiration

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define respiration

·        State the significance of respiration

·        Draw and label mitochondria

  • Discussion on definition and significance of respiration
  • Drawing and labeling mitochondria

 

·        Chart showing diagram of mitochondria

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 74

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 49-57

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 73-74

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 45-48

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 112-113

·        Golden tips biology pages 91

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 130

·        Longman biology page 71

·        High flyer series pages

 
  2 RESPIRATION Anaerobic respiration By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define Anaerobic respiration

·        Describe Anaerobic respiration in plants

·        Describe Anaerobic respiration in animals

 

  • Defining Anaerobic respiration
  • Discussion on Anaerobic respiration in plants and animals

 

·        Chart showing diagram of mitochondria

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 76-77

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 49-57

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 77-78

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 45-48

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 116-119

·        Golden tips biology pages 92-93

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 131

·        Longman biology page 72

·        High flyer series pages 41-42

 
  3-4 RESPIRATION Respiration (practical lesson) By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Identify the gas given off when food is burnt

·        Investigate the gas produced during fermentation

 

  • Carrying out experiments to investigate the gas produced when food is burnt
  • Discussion on the gas produced when food is burnt

 

·        Retort stand

·        Maize flour

·        Test-tubes

·        Source of heat

·        Boiling tubes

·        Delivery tube

·        Rubber stopper

·        Lime water

·        clump

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 80-81

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 49-57

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 75-74

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 45-48

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 116-118, 120-121

·        Golden tips biology pages

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages

·        Longman biology page

·        High flyer series pages

 
11 1-2 RESPIRATION Economic importance of anaerobic respiration By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        State the economic importance of anaerobic respiration

·        Discuss the economic importance of anaerobic respiration in both plants and animals

 

  • Discussion on economic importance of anaerobic respiration

 

·        Chart on the economic importance of anaerobic respiration

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 77

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 49-57

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 77-78

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 45-48

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 119-120

·        Golden tips biology pages 92-93

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 130

·        Longman biology page 71

·        High flyer series pages 41

 
  3-4 RESPIRATION Aerobic respiration By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Explain anaerobic respiration

·        Distinguish between anaerobic and aerobic respiration

·        Compare energy production in anaerobic  and aerobic respiration

 

  • explain aerobic respiration
  • Distinguishing between aerobic respiration and anaerobic respiration
  • Discussion on energy formation and energy output in aerobic and anaerobic respiration

 

 

·        Chart on the economic importance of aerobic respiration

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 74-76

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 49-57

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 74-76

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 45-48

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 113-115

·        Golden tips biology pages 91-92

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 130-131

·        Longman biology page 72-73

·        High flyer series pages 41

 
12 1-2 RESPIRATION Tissue respiration

(practical lesson)

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Investigate the production of heat by germinating seeds

·        Demonstrate that respiration takes place in plants

 

·        Carrying out the various experiments in groups

·        Discussion on the observation or results observed

 

·        Two vacuum flasks

·        Two thermometers

·        Beans and cotton wool

·         Sterilizer such as formalin

·        Bell jar

·        Soda lime

·        Two conical flasks

·        Black cloth

·        Lime water

·        Potted plant

·        Delivery tube

·        Filter pump

·        Corks

·        Petroleum jelly

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 81-82

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 49-57

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 76-77

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 45-48

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 115

·        Golden tips biology pages 94

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages

·        Longman biology page

·        High flyer series pages

 
  3-4 RESPIRATION Tissue respiration

(practical lesson)

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Show aerobic respiration in animals

·        Show the aerobic respiration takes place in animals

 

·        Carrying out the experiments

·        Discussion on the results observed

 

·        Grasshopper

·        Two pieces of insulin cloth or wire net

·        Bicarbonate indicator

·        Two conical flasks

·        Measuring cylinder

·        Two rubber bands

·        Two labels

·        Bell jar

·        Lime water

·        Delivery tubes

·        Soda lime

·        Rat

·        Filter pump

·        Petroleum jelly

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 83-84

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 49-57

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 78

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 45-48

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 117

·        Golden tips biology pages 94

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages

·        Longman biology page

·        High flyer series pages

 
13 REVISION AND END OF TERM EXAMINATION

 

 

 

 

BIOLOGY FORM 2 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 3
WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS
1 1 EXCRETION AND HOMEOSTASIS Definition of terms By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Define terms stated
  • Distinguish between excretion and egestion
  • Explain the necessity of excretion in plants and animals

 

·        Defining excretion, homeostasis and secretion

·        Distinguishing between excretion and egestion

·        Explaining the necessity of excretion in plants and animals

·        Chart showing major terms and their definitions

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 86

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 58-68

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 83-84

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 49-54

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 124

·        Golden tips biology pages 96

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 141

·        Longman biology page 75

·        High flyer series pages 44

 
  2 EXCRETION AND HOMEOSTASIS Excretion in plants By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe the methods of excretion in plants
  • List down useful and harmful excretory products in plants

 

·        Describing the methods of excretion in plants

·        Listing excretory products in plants

 

·        Chart showing excretory products in plants and methods of excretion in plants

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 86-87

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 58-68

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 83-84

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 49-54

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 124-125

·        Golden tips biology pages 96-97

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 141

·        Longman biology page 75-76

·        High flyer series pages 44

 
  3-4 EXCRETION AND HOMEOSTASIS Excretion in plants By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Identify the uses of excretory products in plants
  • Describe  the uses of excretory products in plants

 

  • Identifying  the uses of excretory products in plants
  • Describing  the uses of excretory products in plants

 

·        Chart showing excretory products , sources and their economic importance in plants

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 88

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 58-68

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 84

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 125-127

·        Golden tips biology pages 96-97

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 141

·        Longman biology page 76

·        High flyer series pages 44

 
2 1 EXCRETION AND HOMEOSTASIS Excretion and homeostasis in Animals By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe excretion and homeostasis in unicellular animals such as amoeba
  • Draw an amoeba
  • Describe excretion in fresh water amoeba

 

  • Describing excretion and homeostasis in unicellular organism such as amoeba
  • Drawing of amoeba
  • Describing the excretion of water and nitrogenous wastes in amoeba

 

·        Chart showing an amoeba in stages of excreting water and wastes

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 88

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 58-68

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 84-85

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 49-54

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 127-128

·        Golden tips biology pages 97-98

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 142

·        Longman biology page 77

·        High flyer series pages 44

 
  2 EXCRETION AND HOMEOSTASIS Excretion and homeostasis in Animals By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Explain the need for complex animals for excretion
  • List down organs involved In excretion in animals
  • List down waste products released by various organs

 

  • Explaining the need for complex excretory organs
  • Listing the excretory organs and substances released

 

·        Chart showing  the specialized organs and the main excretory products

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 88

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages

·        KLB secondary Biology

·        Students book 2 Page 84-87

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 49-54

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 128-131

·        Golden tips biology pages 98

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 142

·        Longman biology page 77

·        High flyer series pages 44-45

 
  3-4 EXCRETION AND HOMEOSTASIS The human kidney By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Examine the kidney of a mammal
  • Draw and label the external structure of a kidney
  • Make a vertical section through the kidney
  • Identify the internal parts of the kidney

 

  • Examining the kidney
  • Making a vertical section and identifying the parts of the kidney
  • Drawing the internal structure of the kidney

 

·        Kidney of a mammal

·        Sharp knife

·        Chart showing section of a kidney

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 91, 105

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages

·        KLB secondary Biology 58-68

·        Students book 2 Page 88-92

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 49-54

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 132-135

·        Golden tips biology pages 100-101

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 144

·        Longman biology page 77

·        High flyer series pages

 
3 1 EXCRETION AND HOMEOSTASIS Functions of the nephron By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Draw and label parts of the nephron
  • Relate its structure to its role in urine formation

 

  • Drawing and labeling the nephron
  • Discussion on the structure of the nephron in relation to its function

 

·        Chart showing the structure of the nephron

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 92-94

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages

·        KLB secondary Biology 58-68

·        Students book 2 Page 90-92

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 49-54

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 135-137

·        Golden tips biology pages 101-102

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 145

·        Longman biology page 77

·        High flyer series pages 47

 
  2 EXCRETION AND HOMEOSTASIS Neuro-endoctrine system and homeostasis By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Identify the hormones involved in Neuro-endoctrine system and homeostasis eg insulin
  • Explain the process of urine formation in the kidney
  • Describe the role of various hormones in urine formation

 

  • Identifying the hormones involved in Neuro-endoctrine system and homeostasis such as insulin, ADH and aldosterone I urine formation
  • Describing the role of insulin, ADH and aldosterone in urine formation

 

·        Diagram of the nephron showing the movement of sodium ions and water

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 93-94

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages

·        KLB secondary Biology 58-68

·        Students book 2 Page 97-100

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 49-54

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 139-142

·        Golden tips biology pages 103-104

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 145

·        Longman biology page 78

·        High flyer series pages 45-47

 
  3-4 EXCRETION AND HOMEOSTASIS Neuro-endoctrine system and homeostasis By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe the components and role of Neuro-endoctrine systems
  • Distinguish between internal and external environments
  • Explain the general working of the homeostatic mechanism

 

  • Describing the components and role of the Neuro-endoctrine system
  • Distinguishing between internal  and external environment
  • explaining the general working of the homeostatic mechanism

 

·        Flow chart showing homeostatic mechanism, positive and negative feedback

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 94-95

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages

·        KLB secondary Biology 58-68

·        Students book 2 Page 97-100

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 49-54

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 139-142

·        Golden tips biology pages 103-104

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 145-146

·        Longman biology page 78-79

·        High flyer series pages 49-51

 
4 1 EXCRETION AND HOMEOSTASIS osmoregulation By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Define osmoregulation
  • Describe the role of the kidney in osmoregulation
  • Explain the role of hypothalamus in osmoregulation

 

  • Defining

Osmoregulation

  • Describing  the role of the kidney in osmoregulation

 

 

 

·        Flow chart showing the homeostatic mechanism in regulating osmotic pressure by the kidney ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 95-97

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages 58-68

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 2 Page 100-101

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 49-54

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 140-142

·        Golden tips biology pages 105

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 145-146

·        Longman biology page 78

·        High flyer series pages 45-47

 
  2-3 EXCRETION AND HOMEOSTASIS Diabetes insipidus and other common kidney diseases By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Explain Diabetes insipidus and other common kidney diseases
  • Describe the causes of Diabetes insipidus and other common kidney diseases
  • State possible control/prevention methods of Diabetes insipidus
  • Explaining Diabetes insipidus and other common kidney diseases
  • Describing  the causes of Diabetes insipidus and other common kidney diseases

 

·        Chart showing the diseases, causes, symptoms and control/ prevention methods ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 96, 101-102

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages  58-68

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 2 Page 49-54

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 101, 93-94

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 142, 138-140

·        Golden tips biology pages 105, 102-103

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 147

·        Longman biology page 77

·        High flyer series pages 47

 
  4 EXCRETION AND HOMEOSTASIS Continuous assessment test By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Answer all the questions asked in the test
  • Learner to answer all the questions
  • Teacher to prepare and give the test
  • Teacher to supervise the students

 

·        Question paper

·        Marking schemes

   
5 1 EXCRETION AND HOMEOSTASIS Excretion and homeostasis in animals By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Draw and label parts of the skin
  • Relate the parts of the skin to their functions
  • Discussion on the parts of the skin and their functions
  • Drawing and labeling parts of the skin and relating parts to their functions

 

·        Chart showing the section of the skin ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 89-90

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages  58-68

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 2 Page 85-87

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 49-54

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 129-132

·        Golden tips biology pages 98-100

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 142

·        Longman biology page 78

·        High flyer series pages 45

 
  2 EXCRETION AND HOMEOSTASIS The role of the skin in  homeostasis By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Distinguish between osmoregulation and thermoregulation
  • Describe the role of the skin in osmoregulation
  • Describe the role of the skin in thermoregulation
  • Distinguishing between osmoregulation and thermoregulation
  • Describing  the role of the skin in osmoregulation
  • Describing the role of the skin in thermoregulation
·        Chart showing diagram of the skin

·        Photograph of a section of the skin

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 98-99

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages  58-68

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 2 Page 98-101

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 49-54

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 131-132

·        Golden tips biology pages 98-100

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 142-143

·        Longman biology page 78

·        High flyer series pages 45-47

 
  3-4 EXCRETION AND HOMEOSTASIS Thermoregulation in human beings By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Identify behavioral and physiological means of thermoregulation in animals
  • Describe behavioral and physiological means of thermoregulation in animals
  • Identifying behavioral and physiological means of thermoregulation in animals
  • Describing behavioral and physiological means of thermoregulation in animals
·        Photographs of warmly dressed people during cold weather

·        Photograph of people with light cloth during hot weather

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 99-100

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages  58-68

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 2 Page 98-100

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 49-54

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page

·        Golden tips biology pages 106-108

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 147-148

·        Longman biology page 78

·        High flyer series pages

 
6 1 EXCRETION AND HOMEOSTASIS Heat loss and heat gain By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Explain Heat loss and heat gain
  • Describe the various methods of Heat loss and heat gain in mammals
  • Explaining Heat loss and heat gain
  • Discussion on methods of Heat loss and heat gain in mammals
·        Resource person e.g. physics teacher to describe methods of heat loss and heat gain ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 99-100

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages  58-68

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 2 Page 98-100

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 49-54

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 149-153

·        Golden tips biology pages 106-108

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 148

·        Longman biology page 78-79

·        High flyer series pages 49-50

 
  2 EXCRETION AND HOMEOSTASIS Surface area to volume ratio in relation to thermoregulation By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Explain the terms Surface area to volume ratio in relation
  • Relate the body size of mammals to heat loss and heat gain
  • Explaining the terms Surface area to volume ratio in relation
  • Discussion on the relationship between the body size of mammals to heat loss and heat gain
·        Pictures of large sized mammals and small sized mammals ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 99

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages  58-68

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 2 Page 100-101

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 49-54

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 152

·        Golden tips biology pages 106-108

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 148

·        Longman biology page 78-79

·        High flyer series pages 49-50

 
  3-4 EXCRETION AND HOMEOSTASIS The role of the liver in homeostasis By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Draw and label the liver and its associated parts
  • Describe the liver and its role in homeostasis
  • Drawing and labeling the liver and its associated parts
  • Describing  the liver and its role in homeostasis
·        Chart showing the external structure of the liver in relation to the gut, gall bladder and blood vessels ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 102-104

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages  58-68

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 2 Page 93-96

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 49-54

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 153-156

·        Golden tips biology pages 108

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 148-149

·        Longman biology page

·        High flyer series pages

 
7 1-2 EXCRETION AND HOMEOSTASIS Functions of the liver By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • List down some of the functions of the liver
  • Describe the functions of the liver
  • Listing down some of the functions of the liver
  • Describing  the functions of the liver
·        Chart showing the functions of the liver ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 103-104

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages  58-68

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 2 Page 95-96

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 49-54

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page

·        Golden tips biology pages 108

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 149-150

·        Longman biology page 79

·        High flyer series pages 48

 
  3-4 EXCRETION AND HOMEOSTASIS Diseases of the liver By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Identify all the diseases of the liver
  • Describe the symptoms and possible control of diabetes mellitus and other liver diseases
  • Explain the causes symptoms and diseases of the liver

 

  • Identifying all the diseases of the liver
  • Describing  the symptoms and possible control of diabetes mellitus and other liver diseases
  • Explaining  the causes symptoms and diseases of the liver

 

·        Chart showing diseases of liver cause and control/treatment ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 103-104

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages  58-68

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 2 Page 96-97

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 49-54

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 156-158

·        Golden tips biology pages 109-110

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 149

·        Longman biology page 79-80

·        High flyer series pages 48-49

 
8 1-2 EXCRETION AND HOMEOSTASIS Excretion and homeostasis in animals (practical lesson) By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • explain catalase enzyme and hydrogen peroxide
  • describe the role of catalase enzyme in breaking down hydrogen peroxide
  • use liver and kidney to investigate the reaction
  • explaining catalase enzyme and hydrogen peroxide
  • carrying out the experiment to investigate the effect of catalase enzyme in breaking down hydrogen peroxide
  • discussion on results obtained in the experiment
·        hydrogen peroxide

·        two beakers

·        measuring cylinder

·        piece of liver and kidney

·        splint

·        ruler

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 86-105

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages  58-68

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 2 Page 96

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 49-54

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 155-156

·        Golden tips biology pages 110

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages

·        Longman biology page

·        High flyer series pages

 
  3-4 EXCRETION AND HOMEOSTASIS Continuous assessment test By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to
  • Answer all the questions asked in the test

 

  • Learner to answer all the questions
  • Teacher to supervise students
·        Question paper

·        Marking scheme

   
9 1-2 EXCRETION AND HOMEOSTASIS Role of the liver in the regulation of blood glucose By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe the role of the liver in blood sugar control
  • Describe the role of insulin hormone
  • Describing the role of the liver in blood sugar control
  • Describing the role of insulin hormone
·        Chart showing steps in controlling blood sugar levels ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 97

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages  58-68

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 2 Page 102-103

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 153-156

·        Golden tips biology pages 105-106

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 149

·        Longman biology page 79

·        High flyer series pages

 
  3-4 EXCRETION AND HOMEOSTASIS Regulation of blood sugar By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Explain the regulation of blood sugar
  • Describe a flow chart showing the regulation of blood sugar
  • Explaining the regulation of blood sugar
  • Describing a flow chart showing the regulation of blood sugar
·        Flow chart showing regulation of blood sugar ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 98

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages  58-68

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 2 Page 102-103

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 49-54

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 153-156

·        Golden tips biology pages 105-106

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 146

·        Longman biology page 78-79

·        High flyer series pages

 
10 1-2 EXCRETION AND HOMEOSTASIS Thermo regulation in other animals By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to
  • Describe temperature regulation in other animals

 

  • Describing temperature regulation in other animals

 

·        Photographs of birds, reptiles and camels showing behavior of temperature regulation ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 100

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages  58-68

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 2 Page 98-100

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 49-54

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 146-152

·        Golden tips biology pages 106-108

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 148

·        Longman biology page

·        High flyer series pages

 
  3-4 EXCRETION AND HOMEOSTASIS Continuous assessment test By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to
  • Answer all the questions asked in the test

 

  • Learner to be able to answer questions in the test
  • Teacher to supervise students as they do the test
·        Question paper

·        Marking scheme

   
11 1-2 REVISION Gaseous exchange in animals By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Relate parts of the lungs to its functions
  • Draw and label parts of the lungs
  • Describing the parts of the lungs and relating the to its functions
  • Drawing and labeling parts of the lungs
·        Chart showing parts of the lungs ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 63-64,66

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages  58-68

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 2 Page 59-64

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 35-44

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 91-94

·        Golden tips biology pages 86

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 117

·        Longman biology page 66-67

·        High flyer series pages

 
  3-4 REVISION Gaseous exchange in animals By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to describe the functions of the lungs as discussed during gaseous exchange
  • Reviewing gaseous exchange and functions of lungs
  • Reading notes on gaseous exchange
·        Notes on gaseous exchange

·        Charts showing lungs

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 63-65

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages  58-68

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 2 Page 59-62

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 35-44

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 91-94

·        Golden tips biology pages 85-87

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages 117-118

·        Longman biology page 65-67

·        High flyer series pages

 
12 1-4 REVISION Gaseous exchange in animals

(practical lesson)

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Identify a mammals lungs
  • Observe and describe structures of lungs in relation to functions
  • Identifying fresh lungs of a mammal
  • Observing and describing the structure of a mammals lungs in relation to their functions
·        Fresh lungs of a cow

·        Livestock officer

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 2 page 63-65

·        Teachers bk. 2 pages  58-68

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 2 Page 63

·        KLB teachers book 2 pages 35-44

·        Longhorn secondary biology: students book 2 page 91-94

·        Golden tips biology pages

·        Gateway secondary Biology pages

·        Longman biology page 66-67

·        High flyer series pages

 
13 REVISION AND EXAMINATIONS

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

BIOLOGY FORM 3 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 1
WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS
1 1 CLASSIFICATION 2 Review of binominal nomenclature By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Classify common organisms into their main taxonomic units
  • Write scientific names of organisms correctly
  • List the kingdoms of organisms
  • Reviewing the work done in classification 1
  • Classifying and naming common organisms like maize, beans, domestic dog and jack
·        Local environment

·        Potted plant

·        Use of preserved specimen of plants and animals

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 1-2

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages  1-8

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 1-3

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 1-3

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 1-4

 
  2 CLASSIFICATION 2 Kingdom monera By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe the general characteristics of Kingdom monera
  • Discussion on the general characteristics of Kingdom monera
·        Local environment on a typical bacteria cell and different types of bacteria ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 3-4

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 12-27

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 5-6

 
  3 CLASSIFICATION 2 Kingdom protoctista By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe the general characteristics of Kingdom protoctista
  • Discussion on the general characteristics of Kingdom protoctista
  • Listing down the members of kingdom protoctista
·        Local environment

·        Wall charts on protoctista

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 3-6

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 1-8

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 3-4

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 12-27

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 6-8

 
  4-5 CLASSIFICATION 2 Kingdom protoctista By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe the general characteristics of Kingdom protoctista
  • Observe, draw and name parts of spirogyra, amoeba, paramecium and euglena
  • Observing, drawing and naming parts of spirogyra, amoeba, paramecium and euglena
·        Local environment

·        Hand lenses

·        Microscope

·        Protozoa infusion (cultured)

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 3-6

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 1-8

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 4-5

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 12-27

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 6-8

 
2 1 CLASSIFICATION 2 Kingdom fungi By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe the general characteristics of Kingdom fungi
  • List down all the members of kingdom fungi
  • Describing  the general characteristics of Kingdom fungi
  • Naming and drawing organisms in this kingdom
·        Local environment

·        Wall charts on fungi

·        Specimen of fungi

·        Hand lenses

·        microscope

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 6-8

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 1-8

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 6

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 12-27

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 11-14

 
  2 CLASSIFICATION 2 Kingdom fungi By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Draw and name parts of bread mold (mucor), yeast and mushrooms
  • Observing, drawing and labeling structures of yeast, bread mold and mushroom
·        Hand lenses

·        Charts on yeast, mushrooms and bread mold

·        Live specimens e.g. mushrooms

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 6-8

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 1-8

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 6

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 12-27

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 11-14

 
  3 CLASSIFICATION 2 Kingdom plantae By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe the main characteristics of kingdom plantae
  • Describe the main characteristics of bryophyta

 

  • Discussion on the main characteristics of kingdom plantae
  • Describing and stating the main characteristics of bryophyta

 

·        Local environment

·        Wall charts

·        Live specimens of moss

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 8-9

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 1-8

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 7

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 12-27

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 15

 
  4-5 CLASSIFICATION 2 Kingdom plantae By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Identify examples of hyophyta
  • Observe draw and name parts of liverworts and moss plants

 

  • Observing drawing and labeling structures of moss and liverworts
  • Asking and answering questions

 

·        Local environment

·        hand lenses

·        Wall charts on bryophytes

·        Live specimens of moss plants

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 8-9

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 1-8

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 7

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 12-27

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 15

 
3 1 CLASSIFICATION 2 Kingdom plantae By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Identify examples of pleridophyta
  • Observe draw and name parts of fern plant

 

  • Discussing main characteristics of division pleridophyes
  • Stating and describing characteristics of pteridophytes

 

·        Live specimen of fern

·        Local environment

·        Hand lenses

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 9-10

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 1-8

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 8-9

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 16

 
  2 CLASSIFICATION 2 Kingdom plantae By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Identify examples of division spermatophyta
  • Identify major sub-division of spermatophyta

 

  • Discussing main characteristics pleridophyes
  • Stating main characteristics of pleridophytes and their sub-division of the same I.e ginkgoales, cycadales and coniferles

 

  • Live specimen spermatophytes
  • Wall charts on common spermatophytes
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 10-11

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 1-8

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 9-10

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 12-27

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 17

 
  3 CLASSIFICATION 2 Kingdom plantae -spermatophyta

 

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • List main characteristics of angiospermae
  • Differentiate between angiospermae and gymnospermae

 

  • Discussing the characteristics of angiospermae and gymnospermae
  • Differentiating between angiospermae and gymnospermae
  • Live specimen of corn leaves
  • Wall charts on angiospermae and gymnospermae
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 10-11

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 1-8

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 9-10

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 12-27

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 17

 
  4-5 CLASSIFICATION 2 Kingdom plantae angiospermapyta By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • State the characteristics of angiospermapyta
  • Identify and state major characteristics of classes of angiospermapyta eg dicotyledonare &monocotyledonoe
  • Differentiating between class monocotyledonae and dicotyledonae
  • Observing drawing and labeling parts of monocotyledonous plants

 

·        Live specimen of both monocotyledenous and dicotyledenous plants

·        B;ade

·        Staining material

·        Handlenses

·        microscope

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 11-12

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 1-8

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 10-11

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 12-27

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 18-20

 
4 1 CLASSIFICATION 2 Kingdom animalia By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • describe the general characteristics of kingdom animalia

 

  • discussion on the main characteristics of phylum anthropoda
  • stating and describing general characteristics of kingdom animalia

 

  • Preserved specimen of kingdom animalia

·        wall charts showing different animals

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 12

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 1-8

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 12-13

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 12-27

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 20-24

 
  2 CLASSIFICATION 2 Phylum arthropda By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • describe the general characteristics of Phylum arthropda
  • list down the classes of the Phylum arthropda
  • stating and describing the general characteristics of Phylum arthropda
  • discussing the characteristics of arthropods
  • Preserved specimen of arthropods

·        Wall charts showing different arthropods

·        Local environment

·        hand lenses

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 14

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 1-8

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 12-13

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 12-27

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 25-26

 
  3 CLASSIFICATION 2 Class crutacea By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • describe the general characteristics of Class crutacea
  • describing  the general characteristics of Class crutacea
  • observing, drawing and labeling various types of  crutacea
·        preserved specimen of crutacea

·        wall charts showing diagrams of crutacea

·        local environment

·        hand lenses

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 14

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 1-8

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 13-14

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 12-27

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 29

 
  4-5 CLASSIFICATION 2 Class arachnida and insecta By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • describe the general characteristics of Class insect
  • describe the general characteristics of Class arachnida
  • list down the members of class arachnida and insecta
  • discussion on classes arachnida and insect
  • stating and describing the characteristics of classes arachnida and insect
  • observing, drawing and labeling parts of various types of arachnida and insecta
·        preserved specimen of class arachnida and insecta

·        wall charts showing diagrams of common members of class arachnida and insecta

·        local environment

·        hand lenses

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 1-8

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 14-16

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 12-27

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 25,30

 
5 1 EVALUATION Continuous assessment test By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to
  • Answer all questions on the subtopics covered previously
  • Learner answers questions
  • Teacher supervises learners as they write down their examination
·        Question papers

·        Marking scheme

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 30

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 1-8

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages

 
  2 CLASSIFICATION 2 Classes chilopoda and diplopoda By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe the general characteristics of Classes chilopoda and diplopoda
  • List down the members of class chilopoda and diplopoda
  • Describing the general characteristics of Classes chilopoda and diplopoda
  • Observing, drawing and labeling of diplopods and chilopods
  • Differentiating between chilopoda and diplopoda classes
·        Preserved specimen of chilopods and diplopods

·        Wall charts showing diagrams of centipedes and millipedes

·        Local environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 15

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 1-8

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 14

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 12-27

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 31

 
  3 CLASSIFICATION 2 Phylum chordata By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe the general characteristics of Phylum chordata
  • Describing the general characteristics of Classes Phylum chordate
  • listing down the members of Phylum chordata
·        Preserved specimen of Phylum chordata

·        local environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 16-17

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 1-8

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 16-17

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 12-27

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 32

 
  4-5 CLASSIFICATION 2 Classes Pisces and amphibia By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • describe the general characteristics of Pisces and amphibia
  • describing the general characteristics of Classes Pisces and amphibian
  • observing, drawing and labeling different  types of fish
  • differentiating between bony and cartilaginous fish

 

·        Wall charts of fish

·        Live specimen amphibia

·        Local environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 17-19

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 1-8

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 32-33

 
6 1 CLASSIFICATION 2 Classes amphibian and reptilia By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • describe the general characteristics of reptilia
  • Describing the general characteristics of reptilia
  • Observing, drawing and labeling different  types of amphibia and reptilia

 

  • Photographs/diagrams of amphibia and reptilia
  • Preserved specimen reptilia

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 18-19

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 1-8

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 18-19

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 12-27

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 33-34

 
  2 CLASSIFICATION 2 Class aves By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • describe the general characteristics of Class aves
  • Describing and stating the general characteristics of Class aves
  • Observing, drawing and labeling different  parts of aves

 

  • Photographs/diagrams of birds

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 19-20

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 1-8

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 19-20

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 12-27

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 34-35

 
  3 CLASSIFICATION 2 Class Mammalia By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe the general characteristics of Class Mammalia
  • Identify different types of members of Class Mammalia
  • Describing and stating the general characteristics of Class Mammalia
  • Asking and answering questions
  • Photographs/diagrams of different mammals

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 20-21

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 1-8

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 21

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 12-27

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 35-36

 
  4-5 CLASSIFICATION 2 dichotomous key By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Construct a simple dichotomous to identify given organisms
  • Constructing a simple dichotomous key using common organisms
  • Common plant and animal species

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 21-22

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 1-8

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 22-26

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 12-27

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 37-41

 
7 1 CLASSIFICATION 2 dichotomous key By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Use an already constructed dichotomous key to identify given organisms
  • Using a dichotomous key to identify arthropods
  • Chart showing a constructed dichotomous key

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 21-22

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 1-8

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 27-28

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 12-27

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 37-41

 
  2 CLASSIFICATION 2 dichotomous key By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Use an already constructed dichotomous key to identify given organisms
  • Using a dichotomous key to identify plants
  • Chart showing a constructed dichotomous key

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 21-22

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 1-8

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 29

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 12-27

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 37-41

 
  3 CLASSIFICATION 2 Dichotomous key By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Use an already constructed dichotomous key to identify given organisms
  • Using a dichotomous key to identify phylum chordata
  • Chart showing a constructed dichotomous key

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 21-22

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 1-8

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 12-27

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages

 
  1 EVALUATION & REVISION OF THE TOPICS Continuous assessment test By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • answer all questions on the topic covered
  • draw and label organisms correctly
  • Learner answers questions
  • Teacher supervises learners as they write down their examination
·        Question papers

·        Marking scheme

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page25-26

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 1-8

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 30

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 12-27

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 42-47

 
8 1 ECOLOGY Introduction to ecology By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Define the term ecology and identify terms used in ecology
  • Defining the terms used in ecology
  • Wall chart showing terms used in ecology and their definitions and their Local environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 27-28

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 33-34

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 48

 
  2 ECOLOGY Introduction to ecology By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Define the term ecology and identify terms used in ecology
  • Defining the terms used in ecology
  • Wall chart showing terms used in ecology and their definitions and their Local environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 27-28

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 33-34

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 48

 
  3 ECOLOGY Factors affecting the distribution of organisms in an ecosystem

 

Light

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Identify the types of ecosystems
  • State and explain how light determines distribution of organisms in an ecosystem
  • Discussing how light determines distribution of organisms in an ecosystem
  • Instruments for measuring light or their diagrams
  • Local environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 29

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 34

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 50

 
  4-5 ECOLOGY Factors affecting the distribution of organisms in an ecosystem

 

temperature

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Identify and describe how temperature  determines distribution of organisms in an ecosystem
  • Discussing on the role of temperature in the distribution of organisms in an ecosystem
  • Drawing and labeling parts of  a thermometer
  • Instruments for measuring temperature or their diagrams
  • Local environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 34

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 50

 
9 1 ECOLOGY Factors affecting the distribution of organisms in an ecosystem

 

Rainfall and humidity

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Identify and describe how Rainfall and humidity determines distribution of organisms in an ecosystem
  • Discussing on the role of Rainfall and humidity in the distribution of organisms in an ecosystem
  • Stating and describing how Rainfall and humidity determines distribution of organisms
  • Drawing of instruments e.g. rain gauge
  • Instruments for measuring Rainfall and humidity  or their diagrams/photographs
  • Local environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 31

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 34-35

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 51

 
  2 ECOLOGY Factors affecting the distribution of organisms in an ecosystem

 

Wind and atmospheric pressure

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • describe how Wind and atmospheric pressure determines distribution of organisms in an ecosystem
  • describing how Wind and atmospheric affects the distribution of organisms in an ecosystem
  • Drawing and labeling of instruments used in measuring wind direction & strength
  • Instruments for measuring strength of wind, direction of wind and atmospheric pressure
  • Local environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 29-30

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 34-35

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 51-52

 
  3 EVALUATION Continuous assessment test By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Write down correct  answers to questions asked in the test
  • Learner recalls and writes down  answers questions asked
  • Teacher supervises learners as they write down their examination
·        Question papers

·        Marking scheme

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 1-30

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 70

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 94

 
  4-5 ECOLOGY Factors affecting the distribution of organisms in an ecosystem

 

salinity

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • describe how salinity affects the distribution of organisms in aquatic ecosystems
  • describing  how salinity affects the distribution of organisms in aquatic ecosystems
  • discussion on the role of salinity in distribution of organisms and methods of measuring salinity
  • diagrams of aquatic profile of lakes/oceans
  • Local environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 31

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 35-36

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 51

 
10 1 ECOLOGY Factors in an ecosystem and how they affect distribution of organisms

Waves, curves and Tides

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • describe how waves, currents and tides affects the distribution of organisms in aquatic ecosystem
  • describing  how waves, currents and tides affects the distribution of organisms in aquatic ecosystems
  • diagrams of aquatic profile of lakes/oceans
  • Local environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 31-32

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 36

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 49- 51

 
  2 ECOLOGY Factors in an ecosystem and how they affect distribution of organisms

 

Edaphic factors

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe how Edaphic factors affects the distribution of organisms in an ecosystem
  • Describing  how Edaphic factors affects the distribution of organisms in an ecosystem
  • Discussion on the role of edaphic factors in distribution of organisms in an ecosystem
  • Soil samples of different types from different places
  • petri dishes
  • Local environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 32

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 36

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 52

 
  3 ECOLOGY Factors in an ecosystem and how they affect distribution of organisms

 

(practical lesson)

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Measure certain factors in samples of different soils
  • Measuring the PH and soil water content in sandy, clay and loamy soils
  • Samples of sandy, clay and loamy soils
  • Weighing balance
  • Source of heat
  • Universal indicator
  • Funnel/filter papers
  • Cotton wool
  • Measuring cylinders

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 32

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 36

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 92-93

 
  4-5 ECOLOGY Factors in an ecosystem and how they affect distribution of organisms

 

Geological factors

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe how Geological factors affect the distribution of organisms in an ecosystem
  • Describing how Geological factors affect the distribution of organisms in an ecosystem
  • Discussion on the role of geological factors in the distribution of organisms in an ecosystem
  • Local environment
  • Maps or photographs of various landscapes

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 32-33

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 54

 
11 1 ECOLOGY Abiotic factors in an ecosystem By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe how Abiotic factors  affect the distribution of organisms in an ecosystem
  • Describing how other Abiotic factors affect the distribution of organisms in an ecosystem
  • Discussion on the role of pollutants, oxygen concentration in the distribution of organisms in an ecosystem
  • Local environment
  • Photographs of polluted environments

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 33

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 52-54

 
  2 ECOLOGY Biotic factors in an ecosystem

 

Competition

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe how competition  affects the distribution of organisms in an ecosystem
  • Describing how competition affects the distribution of organisms in an ecosystem
  • Discussion on how competition affects the distribution of organisms in an ecosystem
  • Local environment
  • Graphs showing relation of different organisms in an ecosystem using a factor e.g. food

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 40

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 37-38

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 56-58

 
  3 ECOLOGY Biotic factors in an ecosystem

 

Predation and

Symbiosis

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe how Predation and Symbiosis  affects the distribution of organisms in an ecosystem
  • Describing how Predation and Symbiosis  affects the distribution of organisms in an ecosystem
  • Discussion on the role of Predation and Symbiosis  in the distribution of organisms in an ecosystem
  • Drawing and labeling parts of a leguminous root
  • Leguminous root
  • Local environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 40-41

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 39-40

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 57-59

 
  4-5 ECOLOGY Parasitism and saprophytism By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Differentiate between Parasitism and saprophytism
  • Describe how Parasitism and saprophytism influence the distribution of organisms in an ecosystem e.g. Tick and cattle
  • Differentiating between Parasitism and saprophytism
  • Describing  how Parasitism and saprophytism influence the distribution of organisms in an ecosystem e.g. Tick and cattle
  • Discussion on Parasitism and saprophytism and their role in distribution of organisms in an ecosystem
  • Live/preserved specimen of common parasites
  • Diagrams or photographs of common Parasitism and saprophytism
  • Local environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 41

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 39-40

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 58-59

 
12 1 ECOLOGY Recycling of matter and energy flow in an ecosystem By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe the interaction between organisms in an ecosystem
  • Describing the interaction between organisms in an ecosystem
  • Discussion on the role of producers, consumers and decomposers in an ecosystem
  • Construction of a pyramid of biomass and numbers
  • Chart showing pyramid of biomass and numbers
  • Local environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 37-39

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 44-45

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 69-71

 
  2 ECOLOGY Nitrogen cycle & carbon cycle By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe the role of decomposers in Nitrogen cycle & carbon cycle
  • Describing the Nitrogen cycle
  • Discussion on the role of decomposers in Nitrogen cycle
  • Construction of the Nitrogen cycle
  • Wall chart on Nitrogen cycle
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 41-42

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 41-42

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 71-73

 
  3 ECOLOGY Recycling of matter & energy flow in an ecosystem By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Define   the terms food chain and food web
  • Construct food chains and food webs
  • Defining   the terms food chain and food web
  • Discussion on food chains and food webs
  • Constructing food chains and food webs
  • Examples of food chains and food webs
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 37-38

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 42-44

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 74

 
  4-5 ECOLOGY Recycling of matter & energy flow in an ecosystem By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe energy flow in a local ecosystem and Construct food chains and food webs
  • Studying energy flow in a local ecosystem
  • Constructing food chains and food webs
  ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 37-38, 39-40

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 42-44

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 69-70

 
13 REVISION AND END OF TERM EXAMINATIONS

 

 

 

 

 

 

BIOLOGY FORM 3 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 2
WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS
1 1 ECOLOGY population By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Define population
  • List down the characteristics of population
  • Defining population
  • Listing characteristics of population
  • Photographs of population
  • Data on population of some organisms shown e.g. in a graph
  • Local environment
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 33-34

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 46

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 75-81

 
  2 ECOLOGY Population estimation By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Explain the use of quadrants and transects as methods of Population estimation
  • Describing how  quadrants and transects as methods of Population estimation
  • Discussion on the use of quadrants and transects as methods of Population estimation

 

  • quadrants
  • wall charts with transects
  • 2 ropes with IM interval marks
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 35-36

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 46-48

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 82-84

 
  3 ECOLOGY Population estimation By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Explain the capture –recapture method of population estimation
  • Describing capture recapture method of population estimation
  • Using capture –recapture method by estimating the total number of beads in a beaker

 

  • Beads of  two colours
  • Local environment
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 36-37

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 49

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 84

 
  4-5 ECOLOGY Population estimation (practical lesson) By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Use quadrant method to estimate population of named organisms within the compound
  • Identifying, estimating and recording organisms in the school compound using quadrant method

 

  • School compound
  • Quadrant
  • herbs
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 36-37

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 47

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 82-83

 
2 1 ECOLOGY Population estimation By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe total count, aerial count and aerial photography and other methods of population estimation
  • Describing  total count, aerial count and aerial photography and other methods of population estimation
  • Discussion on these methods of population estimation.
  • Photographs of populations
  • Local environment
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 35

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 46

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 81-82

 
  2 ECOLOGY Adaptation of organisms to their habitats By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Relate to the adaptations of xerophytes to their habitats
  • Discuss the adaptations of xerophytes to their habitats
  • Photographs and diagrams of xerophytes
  • Local environment
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 42-44

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 50-51

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 60-62

 
  3 ECOLOGY Adaptation of organisms to their habitats By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Relate to the adaptations of mesophytes  to their habitats
  • Discuss the adaptations of mesophytes to their habitats
  • Photographs and diagrams of mesophytes
  • Local environment
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 44-45

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 51

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 62-63

 
  4-5 ECOLOGY Adaptation of organisms to their habitats By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Relate to the adaptations of hydrophytes  to their habitats
  • Observe, draw and label parts of named hydrophytes, mesophytes and xerophyte plants
  • Discuss the adaptations of hydrophytes to their habitats
  • Observing, drawing and labeling structures of xerophytes, mesophytes and hydrophytes
  • Photographs and diagrams of mesophytes e.g. black jack
  • Hydrophytes e.g. papyrus
  • Xerophytes e.g. cactus
  • Hand lens
  • blade
  • Local environment
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 42-46

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 52-53

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 63-64

 
3 1 ECOLOGY Adaptation of organisms to their habitats By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Relate to the adaptations of halophytes  to their habitats

 

  • Discussion on the adaptations of halophytes  to their habitats
  • Describing  the adaptations of halophytes  to their habitats

 

  • Photographs and diagrams of halophytes
  • Local environment
  • Wall charts on halophytes
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 46-47

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 53-54

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 65

 
  2 ECOLOGY Environmental pollution By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Explain pollution and give examples of pollutants

 

  • Defining pollution and identifying various pollutants
  • Discussion on pollutants within and around the school compound

 

  • Photographs and diagrams of polluted areas
  • Local environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 46-47

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 55-56

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 100-101

 
  3 ECOLOGY Air pollution By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe the various air pollutants

 

  • Identify various air pollutants
  • Describing various air pollutants

 

  • Photographs and diagrams of  air pollution
  •  Local environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 47

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 56

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 100-104

 
  4-5 ECOLOGY Air pollution By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Discuss the effects of air pollution on the environment
  • Suggest methods of controlling air pollution

 

  • Discussing the effects of air pollution on human health and animals
  • Suggesting methods of controlling air pollution

 

  • Photographs and diagrams of  areas polluted by air
  •  Local environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 47-50

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 56-59

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 101-104

 
4 1 ECOLOGY Land/ soil pollution By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe various causes of Land/ soil pollution

 

  • Identification and description of various causes of Land/ soil pollution

 

  • Photographs and diagrams of  polluted land
  • Local  environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 47-50

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 62-64

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 104-105

 
  2 ECOLOGY Land/ soil pollution By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Discuss the effects of Land/ soil pollution and human health in rural and urban centers
  • Suggest methods of controlling Land/ soil pollution

 

  • Discussion on the effects of Land/ soil pollution on human and animal health
  • Suggesting methods of controlling Land/ soil pollution

 

  • Photographs and diagrams of  polluted land
  • Local  environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 47-50

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 62-64

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 104-105

 
  3 ECOLOGY Water pollution By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe the causes of  Water pollution

 

  • Identifying and describing  the causes of  Water pollution

 

  • Photographs and diagrams of  polluted water
  • Local  environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 50-52

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 60-62

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 105-108

 
  4-5 ECOLOGY environmental pollution By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Identify other causes of environmental pollution in rural and urban centers

 

  • Identifying and describing  the causes of  environmental pollution e.g. noise, radioactive pollutions

 

  • Photographs and diagrams of  polluted environment
  • Local  environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 47-53

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 64

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 108-112

 
5 1 EECOLOGY Continuous assessment test By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Write down correct  answers to questions asked in the test
  • Learner recalls and writes down  answers questions asked
  • Teacher supervises learners as they write down their examination
·        Question papers

·        Marking scheme

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page  33-52

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 100-110

 
  2 ECOLOGY water pollution By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Discuss the effects  of water pollution on human health in rural and urban centers and other organisms
  • Suggest methods of controlling water pollution

 

  • Discussion on  the effects  of water pollution on human health in rural and urban centers and other organisms
  • Suggesting methods of controlling water pollution

 

 

  • Photographs and diagrams of  polluted areas
  • Local  environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 50-52

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 60-62

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 105-108

 
  3 ECOLOGY Human diseases By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Identify symptoms of cholera and typhoid fever
  • State methods of transmission
  • Suggest control measures

 

  • Discussion on  the symptoms, methods of transmission and control of cholera and typhoid fever

 

 

  • resource person e.g. school nurse
  • Journals, periodicals and newspapers from library having information about cholera and typhoid fever

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 53-54

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 64-66

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 121-122

 
  4-5 ECOLOGY protozoan diseases By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Identify the causes, symptoms and methods of transmission and control of malaria

 

  • Discussion on  the causes, symptoms and methods of transmission and control of malaria

 

  • resource person e.g. school nurse
  • Journals, periodicals and newspapers from library having information about malaria

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 54-55

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 66-70

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 129-130

 
6 1 ECOLOGY protozoan diseases By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Identify the causes, symptoms and methods of transmission of amoebic dysentery
  • Suggest control methods of amoebic dysentery

 

  • Discussion on  the causes, symptoms and methods of transmission and control of amoebic dysentery

 

  • resource person e.g. school nurse
  • Wall charts on life cycle of entomoeba hystolitica

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 55

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 66-67

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 131

 
  2 ECOLOGY Diseases caused by parasitic  worms By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Identify the causes, symptoms and methods of transmission of ascariosis

 

 

  • Discussion on  the causes, symptoms and methods of transmission of ascariosis

 

 

  • Resource person e.g. school nurse
  • Wall charts on life cycle of ascaris tumbricoides
  • Journals, periodicals and newspapers having information about ascaris tumbricoides

 

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 56

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 67-68

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 124-128

 
  3 ECOLOGY Diseases caused by parasitic worms By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Identify the causes, symptoms and methods of transmission and control of schistomiasis

 

  • Discussion on  the causes, symptoms and methods of transmission and control of schistomiasis

 

  • Recourse person e.g. school nurse
  • Wall charts on life cycle of schistomiasis

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 55-56

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 8-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 69-70

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 28-56

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 124-128

 
  4-5 REPRODUCTION Introduction to reproduction By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Define reproduction and state its importance
  • Differentiate between asexual and sexual reproduction

 

  • Defining reproduction
  • Differentiation between asexual and sexual reproduction
  • Stating the importance of reproduction
  • Recourse person e.g. school nurse
  • Wall charts on significance of reproduction

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 64,103

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 78

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 141

 
7 1 REPRODUCTION Concepts of  reproduction By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe the appearance and location of chromosomes

 

  • Describing  the appearance and location of chromosomes
  • Modeling chromosomes using Plasticine
  • Drawing and labeling chromosomes

 

  • Chart showing chromosomes
  • Plasticine of different colours
  • Manila paper

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 64-65

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 79

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 141

 
  2 REPRODUCTION mitosis By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Define mitosis
  • Describe chromosomic movement during mitosis

 

  • Defining mitosis and description  of stages of mitosis
  • Description of chromosomic movement in mitosis

 

  • Wall Chart showing mitosis
  • Plasticine of different colours
  • Use of mitosis  pictures

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 65-67

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 79-82

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 142-144

 
  3 REPRODUCTION mitosis By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe e the movement of chromosomes in mitosis
  • Identify stages of mitosis

 

  • Identifying  stages of mitosis
  • Describing  chromosomic movement in mitosis
  • Drawing the stages of mitosis

 

 

  • Wall Chart showing mitosis
  • Plasticine of different colours
  • Use of mitosis  pictures
  • photomicrographs

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 65-67

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 79-82

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 142-144

 
  4-5 REPRODUCTION mitosis By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Identify and describe stages of mitosis

 

  • Identifying  stages of mitosis
  • Describing  the stages of mitosis
  • Drawing the stages of mitosis

 

 

 

  • Wall Chart showing mitosis
  • Plasticine of different colours
  • Use of mitosis  pictures
  • photomicrographs

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 65-67

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 79-82

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 142-144

 
8 1 REPRODUCTION Significance of mitosis By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • State the significance of mitosis in reproduction

 

  • Stating the significance of mitosis in reproduction
  • Discussion on the significance of mitosis

 

  • Wall Chart showing stages of mitosis

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 66-67

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 82

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 142-143

 
  2 EVALUATION Continuous assessment test By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Write down correct  answers to questions asked in the test
  • Learner recalls and writes down  answers questions asked
  • Teacher supervises learners as they write down their examination
·        Question papers

·        Marking scheme

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page  64-112

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 128-131

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 180-185

 
  3 REPRODUCTION meiosis By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Define meiosis
  • State the stages of meiosis
  • Describe the chromosome movement during meiosis

 

  • Defining meiosis
  • Describing the stages of meiosis
  • Describing the chromosome movement during meiosis

 

 

  • Wall Chart showing stages of meiosis
  • Plasticine
  • photomicrograhics

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 67-70

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 82-85

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 144-145

 
  4-5 REPRODUCTION meiosis By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Observe the stages of meiosis
  • Describe the movement of chromosomes during meiosis

 

Observing, identifying and drawing stages of meiosis in anther cells under a microscope

 

  • Mature flower of hibiscus plant
  • microscopes
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 104-105

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 86

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 144-145

 
9 1 REPRODUCTION Significance of meiosis in reproduction By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • State the significance of meiosis in reproduction

 

  • Stating the significance of meiosis in reproduction
  • Discussion on the significance of meiosis in reproduction

 

  • Charts showing stages of meiosis
  • photomicrograhics

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 70

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 86

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 145

 
  2 REPRODUCTION Difference between mitosis and meiosis By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Differentiate between mitosis and meiosis
  • Discussion on the difference between mitosis and meiosis
  • Charts on meiosis and mitosis

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 70

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 87

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 145-146

 
  3 REPRODUCTION Asexual reproduction

 

Binary fission

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • State and describe the importance of Binary fission
  • Describing the importance of Binary fission
  • Drawing on stages of Binary fission in amoeba
  • Protozoan infusion
  • Microscope
  • Hand lenses

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 70-72

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 87-88

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 146

 
  4-5 REPRODUCTION Binary fission By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Observe spore formation in bread mould (mucor) and binary fission in paramecium

  • Description of  binary fission and sporulation in reproduction
  • Drawing and labeling bread mould showing pore-producing structures

 

  • Protozoan infusion
  • Light Microscope
  • Hand lenses
  • Bread mould (mucor) growing on bread

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 70-72

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 87-88

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 146-147

 
10 1 REPRODUCTION Asexual reproduction

 

Budding

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        State and describing the importance of budding in reproduction

·        Observing drawing and budding cells of yeast

  • Identifying, stating and describing the importance of budding in reproduction
  • Observing, drawing and labeling budding cells of yeast
  • Yeast fermentation (prepared an hour to the lesson)
  • Microscope, slides
  • Cover slips

Methylene blue  stain

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 72

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 89

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 146-147

 
  2 REPRODUCTION Asexual reproduction in flowering plants By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe the external structure of a typical flower

  • Identifying the external floral parts
  • Observing, drawing and describing corolla and calyx of a flower

 

  • Big mature flowers e.g. hibiscus
  • Hand lenses

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 73

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 90-91

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 152-155

 
  3 REPRODUCTION Sexual reproduction in flowering plants By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe the internal structure of a typical flower

  • Identifying the internal floral parts
  • Observing, identifying and describing stamens and carpels of a flower

 

  • Big mature flowers e.g. hibiscus & Nandi flame
  • Hand lenses
  • blade

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 73

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 91

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 154-156

 
  4-5 REPRODUCTION Sexual reproduction in flowering plants By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Observe, describe and draw different types of pollen grains

·        Describe the structure of ovules

·        Describe other characteristics of flowers

  • Observing, Identifying, and recording  other characteristics of flowers
  • Comparing insect pollinated and wind pollinated flowers

 

  • A variety of mature wind and insect pollinated flowers
  • Light microscope
  • Microscope slides
  • Cover slips

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 79,105

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 91-92

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 157-158

 
11 1 REPRODUCTION Sexual reproduction in flowering plants By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe and compare adaptations of wind and insect pollinated flowers

  • Observing, Identifying, and recording  other characteristics of flowers
  • Comparing insect pollinated and wind pollinated flowers

 

  • A variety of mature flowers still attached to their stem
  • Local environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 74-75

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 94-95

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 159

 
  2 REPRODUCTION Sexual reproduction in flowering plants By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe the features and mechanisms that hinder self-pollination and self-fertilization

  • Describing pollination
  • Stating the types of pollination
  • Comparing adaptations of wind pollinated and insect pollinated flowers

 

  • Insect and wind pollinated flowers
  • Local environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 74-78

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 94-95

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 159

 
  3 REPRODUCTION Sexual reproduction in flowering plants By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe the process of fertilization in flowering plants

  • Describing double fertilization in flowering plants
  • Describing features and mechanisms hindering self-pollination and self-fertilization

 

  • Variety of mature flowers
  • Local environment
  • Wall charts of various types of flowers

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 78

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 96-97

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 159-160

 
  4-5 REPRODUCTION Sexual reproduction in flowering plants By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe and explain how embryo and seeds are formed in flowering plants

  • Describing and explaining the formation of embryo and seed in flowering plants

 

  • Wall charts showing embryo formation in flowering plants
  • Bean seeds

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 79-80

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 97-98

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 161-162

 
12 1 REPRODUCTION Sexual reproduction in flowering plants By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe how fruits are formed in flowering plants

  • Describing and explaining fruit formation in flowering plants

 

  • Specimen of fruits

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 80-82, 107

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 97-100

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 161-165

 
  2 REPRODUCTION Sexual reproduction in flowering plants By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Differentiate between a fruit and a seed

  • Differentiating between fruits and seeds

 

  • Fruits
  • seeds

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 82, 107

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 97-100

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 161-165

 
  3 REPRODUCTION Sexual reproduction in flowering plants By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe and explain how different  seeds and fruits are dispersed

  • Describing and explaining methods of fruit and seed dispersal

 

  • Different types of fruits and seeds

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 80-82

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 102-104

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 164-165

 
  4-5 REPRODUCTION Classifying fruits By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Classifying various types of fruits and describe their placentation

  • Description and examination of placentation of various fruits

 

  • Handouts on types of fruits
  • Various types of fruits

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 84-87

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 101-104

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 162-165

 
13 REVISION AND END OF TERM EXAMINATIONS

 

 

 

 

 

BIOLOGY FORM 3 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 3
WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS
1 1 REPRODUCTION Sexual reproduction By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Differentiate between internal and external fertilization

·        Describe external fertilization in amphibians

  • Differentiating between internal and external fertilization
  • Discussion on external fertilization in amphibians
  • Amphibian eggs in a jelly string
  • Hand lenses
  • Local environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 91,107

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 104

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 165-166

 
  2 REPRODUCTION Sexual reproduction in mammals By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Relate the structure of mammalian male reproductive system to its functions

  • Relating the structure of mammalian male reproductive system to its functions
  • Drawing and labeling the male reproductive system
  • Wall chart on the male reproductive system
  • Dissected small mammal

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 93,107

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 105-106

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 166-167

 
  3 REPRODUCTION Sexual reproduction in mammals By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Relate the structure of mammalian male reproductive organ and spermatozoa to its function

  • Drawing and labeling the structure of the spermatozoa
  • Relating the spermatozoa to its function
  • Wall chart on spermatozoa

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 93-95

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 112

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 169

 
  4-5 REPRODUCTION Sexual reproduction in mammals By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Relate the structure of mammalian female reproductive system to its function

  • Discussion of the female reproductive system
  • Drawing and labeling and relating the female reproductive system to its functions

 

  • Charts showing female reproductive system
  • Dissected small animals

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 95,107

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 108-110

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 167-168

 
2 1 REPRODUCTION Sexual reproduction in mammals By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Relate the structure of mammalian ovum to its function

  • Drawing and labeling and relating the structure of the ovum to its functions

 

  • Wall Charts showing structure of the ovum

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 92-93

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 108-109

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 169-170

 
  2 REPRODUCTION Sexual reproduction in mammals By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe internal fertilization in mammals

  • Defining fertilization
  • Discussion on internal fertilization in mammals

 

  • Wall Charts on fertilization process

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 95

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 111-113

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 171-172

 
  3 REPRODUCTION Sexual reproduction in mammals By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe the fertilization process

  • Describing the fertilization process
  • Drawing  and labeling the fertilized ovum
  • Wall Charts on the process of fertilization

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 95

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 112-114

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 171-172

 
  4-5 REPRODUCTION Sexual reproduction in mammals By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe implantation and the role of the placenta in mammals

  • Describing implantation
  • Explaining the role of the placenta in mammals
  • Wall Charts showing the stages of implantation

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 95

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 114-116

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 173-174

 
3 1 REPRODUCTION Sexual reproduction in mammals By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define gestation in mammals

·        Identify different gestation periods in different mammals

  • Defining  gestation
  • Identifying different gestation periods in different mammals
  • Wall Charts containing gestation periods of different mammals
  • Photograph of a foetus
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 97

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 116-117

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 173-174

 
  2 REPRODUCTION Sexual reproduction in mammals By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe birth and explain parental care

  • Defining  different terms used in birth
  • Explaining the parental care
  • Drawing and labeling the foetus

 

  • Wall Charts showing definitions of different terms in birth
  • Photographs on parturition
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 76

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 117-119

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 177-179

 
  3 REPRODUCTION Role of hormones in human reproduction By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe the role of hormones in reproduction of humans

  • Discussion on role of hormones in reproduction of humans

 

  • Wall Charts showing hormones involved with reproduction in human beings and their effects
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 97-98

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 120-123

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 175-176

 
  4-5 REPRODUCTION Menstrual cycle By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe the role of hormones in the menstrual cycle

  • Discussion on role of hormones in the menstrual cycle
  • Wall Charts on the menstrual cycle
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 97-98

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 121-124

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 175-177

 
4 1 REPRODUCTION Sexually transmitted diseases/infections By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Identify symptoms and explain the methods of transmission and prevention of gonorrhea and herpes simplex

  • Discussion on symptoms, methods of transmission and prevention of gonorrhea and herpes simplex
  • Photographs of body parts affected by STI’s
  • Resource persons e.g. school nurse
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 99-101

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 123-125

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 179

 
  2 REPRODUCTION Sexually transmitted diseases By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Identify symptoms and explain the methods of transmission and prevention of syphilis and trichomoniasis

  • Discussion on symptoms and explain the methods of transmission and prevention of syphilis and trichomoniasis
  • Photographs of body parts affected by STI’s
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 99-100

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 124

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 179

 
  3 REPRODUCTION Sexually transmitted infections By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Identify symptoms and explain the methods of transmission and prevention of candidiasis and hepatitis

  • Discussion on symptoms and explain the methods of transmission and prevention of candidiasis and hepatitis
  • Photographs showing the symptoms of candidiasis and hepatitis

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 100-102

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 124-125

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 179

 
  4-5 REPRODUCTION Sexually transmitted diseases By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Identify the causes and modes of transmission of HIV/AIDS and prevention of HIV and AIDS

·        Identify effects of HIV/AIDS in human economy

  • Identifying the causes and modes of transmission of HIV/AIDS
  • Discussion on the causes and modes of transmission of HIV/AIDS

 

  • Photographs of patients showing the signs & symptoms HIV and AIDS
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 100-102

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 125-127

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 179-180

 
5 1 REPRODUCTION Sexually transmitted diseases By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Identify the symptoms of HIV/AIDS and stages of HIV and AIDS

 

  • Discussion on symptoms of HIV/AIDS

 

  • Photographs of patients showing the signs & symptoms HIV and AIDS
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 102-103

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 125-126

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 180

 
  2 REPRODUCTION Sexually transmitted diseases By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Explain ways of preventing and controlling the spread of HIV/AIDS

 

·        Explaining ways of preventing and controlling the spread of HIV/AIDS

·        Discussion on methods of preventing and controlling the spread of HIV/AIDS

 

  • Photographs of patients showing the signs & symptoms HIV and AIDS
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 102-103

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 126

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 179

 
  3 EVALUATION Continuous assessment test By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Answer questions asked in the test

 

·        Learner recalls and writes down answers to questions asked

·        Teacher supervises the learners as they write examinations

 

  • Question papers
  • Marking scheme
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 64-103

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 128-131

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 180-184

 
  4-5 REPRODUCTION Sexually transmitted diseases By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Discuss the social effects of  HIV/AIDS

 

·        Discussion on the social effects of HIV/AIDS

 

  • Handouts on STDs
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 103

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 127

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 180

 
6 1 REPRODUCTION Asexual and sexual reproduction By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Explain the advantages and disadvantages of sexual and asexual reproduction

 

·        Explaining the advantages and disadvantages of sexual and asexual reproduction

 

  • Charts showing advantages and disadvantages of sexual and asexual reproduction
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 103

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 25-45

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 127-128

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 57-78

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 179-180

 
  2 GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT Concept of growth and development By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define the terms growth and development

·        Describe the sigmoid growth curve

 

·        Defining the terms growth and development

·        Describing the sigmoid growth curve

 

 

·        Charts showing sigmoid curve

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 113

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 46-64

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 132

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 79-98

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 186

 
  3 GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT Measurement of growth By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe the phases of sigmoid curve

·        Describe the intermittent growth curve

 

·        Describing the phases of sigmoid curve

·        Describing the intermittent growth curve

 

 

·        Charts showing growth curves

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 113

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 46-64

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 133-135

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 79-98

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 186-190

 
  4-5 GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT Measurement of growth By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Analyze data on growth rate

·        Draw growth curves

 

·        Analyzing data on growth rate

·        Drawing growth curves

 

·        Charts showing growth curves

·        Data on growth rate

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 113,116-117,125

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 46-64

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 133-135

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 79-98

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 190

 
7 1 GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT Growth and development in plants By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define seed dormancy

·        Identify factors affecting viability and dormancy of seeds

 

·        Defining seed dormancy

·        Identifying factors affecting viability and dormancy of seeds

 

·        Dry bean seeds

·        Dry maize seeds

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 113-114

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 46-64

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 136-137

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 79-98

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 190,198

 
  2 GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT Growth and development in plants By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Identify factors affecting seed dormancy

 

·        Identifying causes of seed dormancy

·

·        Dry bean seeds

·        Dry maize seeds

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 113-114

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 46-64

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 136-137

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 79-98

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 190,198

 
  3 GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT Growth and development in plants By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define seed germination

·        Differentiate between types of seed germination

 

·        Observing, drawing and labeling types of seed germination in beans and maize

·        Differentiate between  epigeal and hypogeal germination

·

·        Seedling of maize and beans at different stages of development

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 114-145

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 46-64

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 137,141-142

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 79-98

·        Principles of biology vol.2 pages 191

 
  4-5 GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT Conditions necessary for germination By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Identifying Conditions necessary for germination – oxygen

 

 

·        setting up experiments to investigate conditions (oxygen) necessary for germination of seeds ·        maize grains and beans seeds

·        cotton wool

·        flasks

·        pyrogallic acid

·        muslin bags

·        germination maize and bean seeds

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 114-115

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 46-64

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 138

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 79-98

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 192-193

 
8 1 GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT Conditions necessary for  seed  germination By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Investigate the necessity of water and warmth

·        Investigating the necessity of water and warmth ·        Beans seeds

·        cotton wool

·        4 petri dishes

·        Labels

·        Thermometer

·        refrigerator

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 127-128

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 46-64

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 138,140

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 79-98

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 192

 
  2 GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT Conditions necessary for  seed  germination By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Investigate the necessity of water and warmth

·        Investigating the necessity of warmth ·        Beans seeds

·        cotton wool

·        4 petri dishes

·        Labels

·        Thermometer

·        refrigerator

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 127-128

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 46-64

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 138,140

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 79-98

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 192

 
  3 EVALUATION Continuous assessment test By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Write down the correct answers to questions asked in the  test

·        Learner recalls and writes down answers to questions asked

·        Teacher supervises the learners as they write down the exams

·        Question paper

·        Marking scheme

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 132

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 46-64

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 134,138

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 79-98

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 203,206

 
  4-5 GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT Growth in seedling By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe the region of growth in seedlings

·        Identify the regions of growth

·        Describing the region of growth in seedlings

·        Identifying  the regions of growth

·        Charts on shoot and root tips

·        Potted plants

·        Local environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 131-132

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 46-64

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 143-144

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 79-98

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 193-194

 
9 1 GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT Growth in seedling By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Determine the regions of growth in seedlings

·        Measure the aspect of growth in a given seedling

·        Determine the regions of growth in seedlings by measuring one parameter -height

 

·        Growing seedling

·        Rulers

·        Local environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 115-116

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 46-64

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 143-144

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 79-98

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 194, 196

 
  2-3 GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT Primary and secondary growth By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe growth in plants I.e. Primary and secondary growths

·        Investigate primary and secondary growth in a seedling

·        Discussion on Primary and secondary growth in plants

·        Investigating primary and secondary growth in a seedling

 

·        Bean seeds

·        Beakers

·        Cotton wool

·        Soft board

·        Piece of wire

·        Indian ink

·        Thread

·        Ruler

·        Petri dishes

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 118-120

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 46-64

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 144-145

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 79-98

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 195-198

 
  4-5 GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT Role of hormones in plants By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Explain the role of hormones in regulation of growth and development in plants

·        Discussion on the role common hormones in growth and development of plants

·     cytokinius

·     eltylene

·     Doscisic acid

·     Auxines and gibbrellins

 

·        Chart on plant hormones and their effects

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 121-122

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 46-64

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 146-147

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 79-98

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 195-199

 
10 1 GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT Apical dominance By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Explain Apical dominance in plants

·        Discussion on Apical dominance in plants

·        Explaining Apical dominance in plants

·        Stating the application of Apical dominance in agriculture

·        Photographs of plants

·        Specimen of plants that are pruned and others that are not

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 122

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 46-64

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 147-148

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 79-98

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 198-199

 
  2-3 GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT metamorphosis By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define metamorphosis

·        Distinguish between complete and incomplete metamorphosis

·        Describe complete metamorphosis in housefly and anopheles mosquito

·        Defining metamorphosis

·        Distinguishing between complete and incomplete metamorphosis

·        Describing complete metamorphosis in housefly and anopheles mosquito

·        Chart on the life cycles of housefly and anopheles mosquito ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 118-120

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 46-64

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 148-149

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 79-98

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 199-203

 
  4-5 GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT Incomplete metamorphosis By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe incomplete metamorphosis in a cockroach

·        Describing incomplete metamorphosis in a cockroach

·        Discussion on the life cycle of a cockroach

·        Drawing and labeling Incomplete metamorphic stages

·        Chart on the life cycles of a cockroach

·        Preserved specimens showing stages of growth in a cockroach

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 124-125

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 46-64

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 144-150

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 79-98

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 203

 
11 1-2 GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT Role of growth hormones in insects By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe and explain the Role of growth hormones in metamorphosis in insects

·        Discussion of the Role of growth hormones in metamorphosis in insects ·        Wall Charts on hormones involved in metamorphosis ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 125-126

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 46-64

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 150-151

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 79-98

·        Principles of biology vol 2 pages 203

 
  3-5 GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT Metamorphosis (practical lesson) By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Observe metamorphosis in some insects

·        Observing, identifying, drawing and labeling various stages of insect development ·        Eggs of various insects

·        Pupae and caterpillars

·        Specimen bottles

·        Transparent reagent bottles

·        Green vegetables

·        forceps

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 3 page 129-130

·        Teachers bk. 3 pages 46-64

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 3 Page 150

·        KLB teachers book 3 pages 79-98

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 200-203

 
12 REVISION AND END OF TERM EXAMINATIONS

 

BIOLOGY FORM 4 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 1
WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS
1 1 GENETICS Introduction to genetics By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define the term genetics

·        Differentiate between heredity and variation

·        Distinguish between continuous and discontinuous variations

·        Defining the term genetics

·        Differentiating between heredity and variation

  • Demonstrating tongue rolling
  • Members of the class
  • Teacher to demonstrate tongue rolling

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 1

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 1

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 207

 
  2 GENETICS Variation within plants and animals By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe continuous and discontinuous variations

·        Observe variations in plants and animals

·        Describing continuous and discontinuous variations
  • Observing variations in plants and animals in the surrounding
  • Students to be observed on variations like tongue rolling, sex, finger prints, eye colour, height
  • Leaves of different plants
  • Seeds of different plants

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 1-4

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 1-4

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 207

 
  3 GENETICS chromosomes By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe the structure, nature and properties of chromosomes

  • Reviewing the nature and structure of  chromosomes
  • Discussion on the structure and properties of chromosomes
  • Drawing and labeling the chromosomes
  • Wall chart on structure of chromosomes
  • Plasticine to mold the chromosomes

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 4-6

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 4-7

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 221

 
  4-5 GENETICS chromosomes By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe the structure, nature and properties of DNA molecule

  • Describing  the basic nature of DNA molecule and gene
  • Illustrating the structure of the DNA molecules using models
  • Models of diagrams of DNA molecule
  • Wires and different colours of beads for DNA genes

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 7-10

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 221-222

 
2 1 GENETICS chromosomes By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Differentiate between DNA and RNA

  • Differentiating between DNA and RNA
  • Discussion on differences between DNA and RNA molecules
  • Models of DNA and RNA strands
  • Charts on DNA and RNA molecules

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 5-6

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 9-10

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 221-226

 
  2 GENETICS First law of inheritance By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Distinguish between F1 and F2 generation

·        Determine Mendel’s first law of inheritance

·        Differentiating between F1 and F2 off springs
  • Defining Mendel’s first law of inheritance
  • Discussion on the differences  between F1 and F2 off springs
  • Chart showing genetic crossing

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 6-10

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 11-15

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 211-213

 
  3 GENETICS First law of inheritance By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define other terms used in inheritance such as phenotype, genotype, dominant gene, recessive gene, haploid and diploid

  • Defining terms used in inheritance
  • Chart on terms used in inheritance

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 7-8

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 13-14

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 210

 
  4-5 GENETICS First law of inheritance By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Demonstrate monohybrid inheritance in plants and animals

·        Predict outcomes of various genetic crosses

·        Demonstrating monohybrid inheritance in plants and animals
  • Working out F1 and F2 offspring in monohybrid crosses
  • Predicting outcomes of various crosses
  • Illustrations on monohybrid crosses
  • Pannet squares on charts

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 6-9

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 12-15

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 207-209

 
3 1 GENETICS First law of inheritance By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Construct and make use of pannet squares

·        Work out genotypic and phenotypic ratios

·        Predict outcomes of various crosses

·        Working out monohybrid ratio of F2 offspring

·        Working out phenotypic and genotypic ratios and probabilities

 

  • Chart showing punnet  squares and illustrations on monohybrid inheritance
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 7-9

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 14-16

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 213-214

 
  2 GENETICS Back cross or test cross By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Determine the unknown genotypes in a cross using a test cross

·        Defining a test cross or back cross

·        Explaining the use of test cross in determining unknown genotypes

  • Chart showing punnet  squares illustrating monohybrid inheritance (test cross)

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 10-11

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 22-23

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 212-213

 
  3 GENETICS Monohybrid inheritance By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe albinism as an example of monohybrid inheritance in human beings

·        Describing inheritance of albinism in human beings
  • Chart showing crosses on punnet squares to show inheritance of albinism

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 21

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 25

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 213-214

 
  4-5 GENETICS Inheritance of ABO blood groups By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Explain the inheritance of ABO blood groups in human beings

·        Explaining the inheritance of ABO blood groups in human beings

·        Demonstrating crosses

  • Chart showing blood group crosses on punnet squares
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 11-12

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 20-21

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 220-221

 
4 1 GENETICS Inheritance of rhesus factor By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Explain the inheritance of rhesus factor as an example of monohybrid inheritance in human beings

·        Describing the inheritance of rhesus factor in human beings
  • Chart showing blood group crosses on punnet squares
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 12

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 21-22

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 221

 
  2 GENETICS Inheritance of blood groups By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Predict the inheritance of blood groups human beings

·        Predicting the inheritance of blood groups human beings
  • Demonstration of crosses
  • Punnet squares
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 11-12

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 20-21

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 220-221

 
  3 EVALUATION Continuous assessment test By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Write down the correct answers to the questions in the test

·        Learner recalls and writes down answers to questions

·        Teacher supervises as learners do the test

  • Question papers
  • Marking scheme
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 11-12

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 1-22

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 207-220

 
  4-5 GENETICS Incomplete dominance By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe incomplete dominance

·        Describe inheritance of colour in flowers of mirabis jalapa

·        Defining incomplete dominance

·        Describing inheritance of colour in flowers of mirabis jalapa

  • Punnet squares
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 9-10

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 19-20

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 214-215

 
5 1 GENETICS Inheritance of sickle cell anemia By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe Inheritance of sickle cell anemia in human beings

·        Describe Inheritance of sickle cell anemia as co-dominant
  • Illustrations of crosses
  • Punnet squares
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 21-22

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 35-37

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 215-216

 
  2 GENETICS Sex determination in human beings By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Explain how sex is determined in human beings

·        Describe sex linkages in human beings

·        Explaining and describing sex determination

·        Explaining and discussing sex linkage in human beings

  • Charts showing diagrams of sex chromosomes
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 13-14

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 23-24

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 217-220

 
  3 GENETICS linkage By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define linkage and sex-linkage

·        Describe linkage in human beings e.g.  colour blindness and hemophilia

·        Defining and describing linkage and sex-linkage

·        Demonstrating crosses on colour blindness and hemophilia

  • Charts showing crosses on colour blindness and hemophilia
  • Punnet squares
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 14-16

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 24-27

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 218-220

 
  4-5 GENETICS Inheritance of colour blindness By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe colour blindness as an example of sex-linked  trait in human beings

·        Interpret pedigree of inheritance

·        Describing colour blindness

·        Discussion on inheritance of colour blindness

·        Interpreting pedigree chart of inheritance

  • Charts showing pedigree chart of inheritance
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 15-16

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 25-26

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 218-219

 
6 1-2 GENETICS Inheritance of hemophilia By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe the Inheritance of hemophilia as an example of sex-linked traits in human beings

·        Describing Inheritance of hemophilia as an example of sex-linked traits in human beings

·         Discussions on inheritance of hemophilia in human beings

  • Punnet squares
  • Pedigree chart of inheritance from texts
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 16-17

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 27

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 220

 
  3 GENETICS EVALUATION Continuous assessment test By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        write down the correct answers to the questions given

·        Students recalls and writes down answers to questions asked

·        Teacher supervises as students do the test

  • Question papers
  • Marking scheme
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 1-18

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 234-236

 
  4-5 GENETICS Sources of variations in organisms By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define mutation

·        Differentiate between mutations and mutagens

·        List down causes of mutations

·        Defining mutations

·        identifying mutagens

·        Listing down causes of mutations

  • Pictures or photographs of organisms that have mutations
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 17-18

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 28-29

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 232-233

 
7 1-2 GENETICS Types of mutations By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        State the types of mutations

·        List down the various chromosal mutations

·        Describe chromosal mutations

·        Stating  the types of chromosal mutations

·        Listing down the various chromosal mutations

·        Describing chromosal mutations

·        Discussion on duplication, inversion, translocation and non-disjunction

  • Chart on the various types of chromosal mutations
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 17-19

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 28-33

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 229-231

 
  3 GENETICS Effects of chromosal mutations By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Explain the Effects of chromosal mutations

·        Discussion on effects of Effects of chromosal mutations

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 19

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 30-33

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 230-231

 
  4-5 GENETICS Gene  mutations By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe gene mutations and their effects on organisms

·        Describing gene mutations

·        Discussion on substitution, point mutation, insertion and gene mutations

 

  • Chart showing diagrams on gene mutations
  • Photographs
  • Magazines
  • Newspaper cuttings
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 20-22

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 33-34

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 228-229

 
8 1-2 GENETICS Practical application of genetics By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe areas in which the knowledge of genetics has been applied

·        Discussion on scientific fields where genetic knowledge has been applied

 

  • Photographs
  • Magazines
  • Newspaper cuttings
  • Scientific journals
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 23-28

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 39-44

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 233

 
  3 GENETICS Practical application of genetics By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Explain the practical applications of genetics

·        Discussion on  the practical applications of genetics
  • Photographs
  • Magazines
  • Newspaper cuttings
  • Scientific journals
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 23-28

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 1-13

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 39-44

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 12-30

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 233

 
  4-5 EVOLUTION Introduction to evolution By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define evolution

·        Explain the current concepts of the origin of life

·        Defining evolution

·        Explaining the current concepts of the origin of life

  • Local museum
  • Historical sites
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 35-36

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 14-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 49-51

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 31-37

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 238-239

 
9 1 EVOLUTION Continuous assessment test By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Write down correct answers to questions asked

·        Learner to recall and  write down answers to questions asked

·        Teacher to supervise the learners as they do their exams life

  • Question paper
  • Marking schemes
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 1-36

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 14-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 46-48

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 31-37

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 234-237

 
  2 EVOLUTION Origin of life By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Explain the current concepts on origin of life

·        Explaining current concepts of origin of life

·        Discussion on evolution theory

  • Information from a local museum and historical sites
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 36

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 14-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 49-51

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 31-37

·        Principles of biology vol 2 pages 239-242-243

 
  3 EVOLUTION Evidence of organic evolution theory By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe the study of fossils as evidence of organic evolution theory

·        Describing the study of fossils

·        Discussion on evolution theory based on the study of fossils

  • Information from a local museum and historical sites
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 36-37

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 14-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 51-56

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 31-37

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 245-249

 
  4-5 EVOLUTION Evidence of organic evolution theory By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe competitive anatomy as evidence of organic evolution

·        Identifying homologous structures in organisms and describing divergent evolution

 

  • Diagrams and photographs of homologous structures
  • Information from local museums and historical sites
  • Vertebrate limbs
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 39-40

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 14-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 59-64

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 31-37

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 250-251

 
10 1 EVOLUTION Evidence of organic evolution theory By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe competitive anatomy

·        Identifying analogous structures in organisms and describing convergent evolution

·        Discussion on divergent evolution

  • Diagrams and photographs of analogous structures in organisms
  • Information from local museums and historical sites
  • Wings of birds and insects
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 41

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 14-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 59-64

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 31-37

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 250-251

 
  2-3 EVOLUTION Evidence of organic evolution theory By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe occurrence of vestigial structures and geographical distribution of organisms as evidence of organic evolution

·        Describing vestigial structures

·        Discussion on geographical distribution of organisms

  • Diagrams and photographs of vestigial structures
  • Chart of globe showing geographical distribution of organisms
  • Information from local museums and historical sites

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 37-41

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 14-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 56,64

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 31-37

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages

 
  4-5 EVOLUTION Evidence of organic evolution theory By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe comparative embryology, cell biology and biochemistry as evidence of organic evolution

·        Describing comparative embryology, cell biology and biochemistry as evidence of organic evolution theory
  • Diagrams and photographs of embryos of different chorales and plant and animal cells
  • Information from local museums and historical sites

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 39-42

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 14-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 59,64-65

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 31-37

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 252-253

 
11 1-2 EVOLUTION Human evolution By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe evolution of hominids

·        Describing evolution of hominids from earliest common proconsul  ancestors to date

·        Discussion on evolution of hominids

  • Diagrams skulls and limbs of hominids
  • Information from local museums and historical sites

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 42-44

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 14-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 52-53

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 31-34

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 256-261

 
  3 EVOLUTION Mechanism of evolution By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe Lamarck’s theory

·        Describing Lamarck’s theory

·        Discussion on Lamarck’s theory

  • Information from local museums and historical sites

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 45-46

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 14-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 67

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 31-37

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 238-239

 
  4-5 EVOLUTION Mechanism of evolution By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe and discuss the struggle for existence and survival for the fittest

·        Discussion on Darwin’s theory of natural  selection

·        Discussion on struggle for existence and survival for the fittest

  • Information from local museums and historical sites

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 46-47

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 14-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 68-69

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 31-37

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 240-241

 
12 1-2 EVOLUTION Mechanism of evolution By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe and discuss new concepts of Darwin’s theory

·        Discussion on Neo-Darwinism with regard to new discoveries e.g. mutations
  • Information from local museums and historical sites

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 47

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 14-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 67-69

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 31-37

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 239-240

 
  3 EVOLUTION Mechanism of evolution By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe natural selection in action

·        Describing mechanism of peppered moth
  • Photographs of peppered moth

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 46-47

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 14-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 69-71

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 31-37

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 261-262

 
  4-5 EVOLUTION Mechanism of evolution By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe natural selection in nature

·        Describing resistance to antibiotics, fungicides and pesticides by organisms
  • Journals, periodicals and magazines
  • Local environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 48

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 14-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 70-71

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 31-37

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 262-263

 
13 REVISION AND END OF TERM EXAMINATIONS

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

BIOLOGY FORM 4 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 2
WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS
1 1-2 EVOLUTION Mechanism of evolution By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe the isolation mechanism in speciation

·        Discussion on the isolation mechanism in speciation
  • Journals, periodicals and magazines
  • Local environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 48

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 14-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 31-37

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 243-244

 
  3 EVOLUTION Artificial selection By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe Artificial selection in plants and animals and how it leads to speciation

·        Identifying the role of artificial selection in evolution

·        Discussion on hybridization, cultivars and green revolution

 

  • Journals, periodicals and magazines
  • Local environment

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 48-49

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 14-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 263-264

 
  4-5 EVOLUTION Evolution and sexual reproduction By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Explain the importance of sexual reproduction in evolution

·        Explaining the role of sexual reproduction in evolution

 

  • Journals, periodicals and magazines
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 47-48

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 14-24

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 243-244

 
2 1 RECEPTION RESPONSE AND CO-ORDINATION Introduction By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define stimulus

·        Define irritability

·        Define response

 

·        Defining stimulus, irritability  and response

·        Demonstrating how stimulus, response and irritability are related and coordinated

 

  • Pin
  • Candle
  • Match box
  • bell

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 52

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-38

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 73-74

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 266-267

 
  2 RECEPTION RESPONSE AND CO-ORDINATION Reception response and co-ordination in plants By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define tactic and tropic responses

·        List down tactic responses in plants

·        List down tropic responses in plants

·        Differentiate between tactic and tropic responses

 

·        Defining  tactic and tropic responses

·        Defining and demonstrating tropism in plants

·        List down tactic responses in plants

·        List down tropic responses in plants

·        Differentiate between tactic and tropic responses

 

  • Chart showing tactic and tropic responses in plants
  • Potted seedlings
  • Source of light
  •  Cotton box

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 52-54

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-38

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 76-78

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 294-299

 
  3 RECEPTION RESPONSE AND CO-ORDINATION Geotropism By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define geotropism

·        Describe geotropism in roots and shoots of plants

 

·        Defining and illustrating geotropism

·        Discussion on geotropism

 

  • Plants with shoots and roots
  • Charts showing geotropism and phototropism

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 55

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-38

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 80-83

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 298-300

 
  4-5 RECEPTION RESPONSE AND CO-ORDINATION Phototropism and Geotropism By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Differentiate between Phototropism  and geotropism

·        Carry out experiments demonstrating both Phototropism  and geotropism in a plant seedling

 

·        Differentiating between Phototropism  and geotropism

·        Carrying out experiments demonstrating both Phototropism  and geotropism

 

  • Potted plants
  • Carton/cardboard
  • Knife/blade
  • Source of light
  • Germinating bean seeds
  • Clinostat
  • Cello tape
  • Cotton wool
  • Pin
  • Plasticine
  • Petri dishes

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 82-83

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-38

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 82-83

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 297-300

 
3 1-2 RECEPTION RESPONSE AND CO-ORDINATION Reception response and co-ordination in organisms By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Carry out experiments to demonstrate tactic responses to light and water

·        Carry out experiments to show chemotactic response using fruit juice

 

·        Carrying out experiments to demonstrate tactic response and to show chemotactic response using fruit juice

 

  • 4 test tubes
  • Black paper
  • Woodlice
  • Silverfish
  • Termites or fly maggots
  • Plasticine
  •  Moist soil
  • Dry soil
  • 3 petri dishes with lids
  • Fruit flies drosophila melanogarta
  • Mashed over ripe bananas
  • Fruit insect net
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 81-82

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-38

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 79-80

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 294-295

 
  3 RECEPTION RESPONSE AND CO-ORDINATION IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS Hydrotropism and thigmotropism By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define Hydrotropism and thigmotropism

 

·        Defining Hydrotropism and thigmotropism juice

·        Discussion on Hydrotropism and thigmotropism

 

  • Charts on Hydrotropism and thigmotropism
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 55

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-38

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 83

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 301-302

 
  4-5 RECEPTION RESPONSE AND CO-ORDINATION Tactic and tropic responses By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        State the importance of Tactic and tropic responses

 

·        Discussion on the importance of Tactic and tropic responses

 

  • Chart with listed survival values of Tactic and tropic responses
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 53-55

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-38

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 79-80

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 298-302

 
4 1-2 RECEPTION RESPONSE AND CO-ORDINATION Plant hormones and their effects on plant growth By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Explain the production of Plant hormones and their effects on plants

 

·        Discussion on production of auxins and their movement and effect on plant

 

  • Chart showing plant hormones and their effects on plants
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 55

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-38

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 80-83

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 296-301

 
  3-4 RECEPTION RESPONSE AND CO-ORDINATION IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS Hydrotropism (practical lesson) By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Carry out experiment to investigate hydrotropism

·        Carry out experiment to investigate etiolation

 

·        Carrying out experiments to investigate hydrotropism and etiolation

 

  • Fine wire gauze
  • Wooden box
  • Blotting paper
  • Soil or sand
  • Soaked beans
  • Box or dark cupboard
  • Tins with perforated bases
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 83-84

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-38

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 77-78

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 300

 
  5 RECEPTION RESPONSE AND CO-ORDINATION IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS Simple reflex action By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Demonstrate the knee jerk in a reflex action

 

·        Demonstrating knee jerk (reflex action)

·        Discussion on the knee jerk

 

  • Wooden ruler
  • stool
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 64

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-38

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 89-90

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 271-272

 
5 1 EVALUATION Continuous assessment test By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Answer the questions asked in the test

 

·        Learner to recall and writes down answers to questions in the test

·        Teacher to supervise students as they do the test

 

  • Question papers
  • Marking schemes
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 86-87

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-38

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 107-109

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 304-308

 
  2-3 RECEPTION RESPONSE AND CO-ORDINATION Conditioned reflex actions By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Defined Conditioned reflex actions

·        Describe Conditioned reflex action using parlous dog

·        Compare simple and conditioned reflex actions

 

·        Defining Conditioned reflex actions

·        Describing Conditioned reflex action

·        Differentiating between simple and conditioned reflex actions

 

  • Chart on the differences between simple and conditioned reflex actions
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 64-65

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-65

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 90

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 274-275

 
  4-5 RECEPTION RESPONSE AND CO-ORDINATION IN ANIMALS AND PLANTS The role of hormones in co-ordination in mammals By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Explain the role of endocrine system in a human being

·        Explain the effect over secretion and under secretion of thyroxin and adrenaline

 

·        Naming endocrine organs in human beings

·        Stating the functions of endocrine organs

·        Discussion on the effect of under secretion and over secretion of thyroxin and adrenaline

 

  • Chart on position of endocrine glands in females and males human beings
  • Charts showing feedback mechanisms of adrenaline and thyroxin
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 65-66

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-38

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 93-95

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 291-294

 
6 1-2 RECEPTION RESPONSE AND CO-ORDINATION IN ANIMALS AND PLANTS The role of hormones in co-ordination in mammals By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Isolate and list the similarities and differences between the endocrine and the nervous system

 

·        Explaining the similarities and differences between the endocrine and the nervous system

 

 

·        Chart on the comparison between endocrine and the nervous system

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 66-67

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-38

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 95

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 291-292

 
  3 RECEPTION RESPONSE AND CO-ORDINATION Effects of drug abuse on human health By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        State the effects of drug abuse on human health

 

·        Defining drugs and drug abuse

·        Discussion on drugs, drug abuse and effects on human health

 

 

·        Chart with table on effects of drug abuse on human health

·        Photographs of people affected by drug abuse

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 67-68

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-38

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 96

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages

 
  4-5 RECEPTION RESPONSE AND CO-ORDINATION IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS Structure of mammalian eye By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Draw and label the mammalian eye

·        State the functions of the mammalian eye

 

·        Drawing and labeling the mammalian eye

 

·        Chart showing the human eye ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 68-69

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-38

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 96-97

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 279-281

 
7 1-2 RECEPTION RESPONSE AND CO-ORDINATION IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS Structure of the human eye

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe how the structure of the mammalian eye is adapted to its functions

 

·        Discussion on the adaptations of the various parts of the eye to their functions

 

·        Chart showing the mammalian eye

·        Chart with table showing summary of parts, adaptations and functions of the mammalian heart

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 69-72

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-38

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 97-98

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 280-281

 
  3-4 RECEPTION RESPONSE AND CO-ORDINATION IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS Structure of the mammalian eye

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Dissect and display parts of the mammalian eye

 

·        Dissecting mammalian eye and identifying the various parts (external and internal)

 

·        mammalian eye

·        dissecting tray

·        gloves

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 69

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-38

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 97

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 280

 
  5 RECEPTION RESPONSE AND CO-ORDINATION Image formation in the mammalian eye

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe how an image is formed and interpreted in the mammalian eye

 

·        Describing how an image is formed and interpreted in the mammalian eye

 

·        Chart on image formation in the retina ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 69

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-38

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 100-101

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 280-281

 
8 1-2 RECEPTION RESPONSE AND CO-ORDINATION IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS Accommodation in the mammalian eye

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe Accommodation in the mammalian eye

 

 

·        Defining accommodation

·        Drawing diagrams on accommodation of the far and near objects

·        Discussion on accommodation

 

·        Chart on accommodation of distant and nearby objects in the mammalian eye ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 72-73

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-38

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 101-102

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 283-285

 
  3 RECEPTION RESPONSE AND CO-ORDINATION IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS Common eye defects

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Name and explain the Common eye defects

 

 

  • Naming and explaining the Common eye defects

 

·        Chart on defects and their corrections ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 73-75

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-38

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 102-104

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 287-288

 
  4-5 RECEPTION RESPONSE AND CO-ORDINATION IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS Common eye defects

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe Common eye defects and their corrections
  • Investigate the blind spot In the eye
  • Investigate which eye is used more during vision

 

 

  • Describing and illustrating common eye defects e.g. long sightedness and short sightedness

 

·        Chart on eye defects and their corrections

·        Pencils

·        Ruler

·        Paper

·        Biro

·        Window/door frame

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 73-75,84

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-38

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 102-104

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 289-286

 
9 1-2 RECEPTION RESPONSE AND CO-ORDINATION IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS Common eye diseases

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Name and describe Common eye diseases

 

  • Naming and describing Common eye diseases

 

·        Resource person e.g. eye specialist ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 75-76

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-38

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 102-104

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 285-286

 
  3 RECEPTION RESPONSE AND CO-ORDINATION IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS Structure of the mammalian ear

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Draw and label the mammalian ear

 

  • Drawing and labeling  the mammalian ear

 

·        Chart showing parts of the mammalian ear ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 76-77

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-38

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 104-105

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 286

 
  4-5 RECEPTION RESPONSE AND CO-ORDINATION IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS Structure of the mammalian ear

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe the mammalian ear and how it is adapted to its functions

 

  • Discussion on the structures of the mammalian ear and how they are adapted to their functions

 

·        Chart showing parts of the mammalian ear ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 76-78

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-38

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 104-105

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 286-287

 
10 1-2 EVALUATION Continuous assessment test By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Answer the questions asked in the test

 

·        Learner to recall and writes down answers to questions in the test

·        Teacher to supervise students as they do the test

 

  • Question papers
  • Marking schemes
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 86-87

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-38

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 107-110

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 304-308

 
  3 RECEPTION RESPONSE AND CO-ORDINATION IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS The mechanism of hearing

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe the mechanism of hearing

·        Discussion on the mechanism of hearing ·        Chart showing the mechanism of hearing ·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 79-80

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-38

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 106-107

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 287-289

 
  4-5 RECEPTION RESPONSE AND CO-ORDINATION IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS Common defects of the ear

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Discuss thick ear drum, damaged cochlea, raptured eardrum, fussed ossicles, otitis media, ostosceleross and tinnitus

·        Discussion on common ear defects ·        Chart showing common defects of the ear

·        Ear specialist

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 79-80

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 24-80

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 107

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages  38-58

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 289-290

 
11-13 REVISION AND END OF TERM EXAMINATIONS

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

BIOLOGY FORM 4 SCHEMES OF WORK – TERM 3
WEEK LESSON TOPIC SUB – TOPIC OBJECTIVES LEARNING/TEACHING ACTIVITIES LEARNING/TEACHING RESOURCES REFERENCES REMARKS
1 1 SUPPORT AND MOVEMENT IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS Introduction By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define support and movement

·        Describe the necessity of movement in plants and animals

·        Defining support and movement

·        Describing the necessity of movement in plants and animals

  • Potted plants
  • Small animals e.g. Fish rabbits and rats

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 88-89

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 39-58

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 111-112

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 59-68

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 309

 
  2 SUPPORT AND MOVEMENT IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS support and movement in plants By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Review the tissue distribution in monocotyledonous an dicotyledonous plants

·        Reviewing stem sections of monocotyledonous an dicotyledonous plants
  • Chart showing sections of tracheids and xylem vessels

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 89-90

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 39-58

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 112-114

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 59-68

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 327-328

 
  3 SUPPORT AND MOVEMENT IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS Plants with woody stems and tendrils By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe support in woody and non-woody stems

·        Describe the role of tendrils and tender stems in support

·        Describing support in woody and non-woody stems

·        Describing  the role of tendrils and tender stems in support

  • Plants with tender stems e.g. Morning glory
  • Plants with tendrils e.g. Passion fruit
  • Pictures of climbing plants
  • Pictures of woody plants

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 90-91

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 39-58

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 114-116

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 59-68

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages

 
  4-5 SUPPORT AND MOVEMENT IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS Support and movement in plans (practical lesson) By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Observe prepared sections of woody and herbaceous stems

·        Observe a wilting plant

·        Observing prepared sections of woody and herbaceous stems

·        Observing  a wilting plant

·        Discussion on the observations made

  • Wilting plant
  • prepared

sections of stems

  • slides
  • fine point brush
  • cover slips
  • scalpels
  • iodine solution
  • beaker
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 115-116

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 39-58

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 115-116

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 59-68

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages

 
2 1-2 SUPPORT AND MOVEMENT IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS Types of skeletons By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        List  he types of skeletons

·        Describe the role of exoskeleton in insects

·        Describe the role and components of endoskeleton

·        Listing  the types of skeletons

·        Describing  the role of exoskeleton in insects

·        Distinguishing between a bone and a cartilage

  • Earth worm
  • Insect e.g. Locust
  • Bones from a chicken or goat
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 92-96

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 39-58

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 116-117

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 59-68

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 310-312

 
  3 SUPPORT AND MOVEMENT IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS Supported movement in animals By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe the role of skeleton in vertebrates

·        Draw the structure of a finned fish (tilapia)

·        Calculate the tail power

·        Description of skeleton in vertebrate

·        Drawing of a tilapia fish

  • Finned fish
  • Ruler
  • Chart showing finned fish
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 96-97

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 39-58

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 117-118

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 59-68

·        Principles of biology vol 2 pages 325-326

 
  4-5 SUPPORT AND MOVEMENT IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS Locomotion in a finned fish By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Explain how locomotion occurs in fish

·        Name and draw the different fins and state their functions

·        Describing external and internal features of the fish to explain how it is adapted to locomotion in water

·        Observing locomotion of tilapia fish in water

  • Finned fish in an aquarium
  • Chart showing tilapia fish
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 96-98

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 39-58

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 118

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 59-68

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 325-326

 
3 1 SUPPORT AND MOVEMENT IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS Locomotion and support in mammals By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Draw the human skeleton and identify the component parts

·        Identify and draw the skull

·        Drawing and labeling the human skeleton

·        Using model to identify the components of the skeleton

  • Model of human skeleton
  • Chart on human skeleton
  • Skull of a goat
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 98-99

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 39-58

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 119-120

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 59-68

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 312-313

 
  2 SUPPORT AND MOVEMENT IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS Axial skeleton By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Identify bones of  Axial skeleton in the vertebral column

·        Identify the cervical vertebrae

·        Identifying bones of  the vertebral columns

·        Drawing the cervical  vertebrae

·        Relating the structures to their functions

  • Model of human skeleton
  • Chart on showing the cervical vertebrae
  • Axis, atlas and other cervical vertebrae
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 99-101

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 39-58

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 120-122

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 59-68

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 312-315

 
  3 SUPPORT AND MOVEMENT IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS thoracic By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Identify the structures of the  thoracic vertebrae

·        Relate the structure of the thoracic vertebrae to their  functions

·        Identifying, drawing and relating the structure of the thoracic vertebrae from goat

·        Charts showing thoracic vertebrae

  • Model of human skeleton
  • Chart on showing the cervical vertebrae
  • Axis, atlas and other cervical vertebrae
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 102

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 39-58

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 122

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 59-68

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 315

 
  4-5 SUPPORT AND MOVEMENT IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS thoracic By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Identify the structures of lumbar, sacral and candal vertebrae

·        Show how ribs articulate with thoracic vertebrae

 

·        Drawing and labeling the lumbar sacral and candal vertebrae

·        Relating the parts of the vertebrae to their functions

  • Model of human skeleton
  • Chart on showing the lumbar, sacral and candal vertebrae of a goat
  • Axis, atlas and other cervical vertebrae
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 102-103

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 39-58

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 122-124

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 59-68

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 315-317

 
4 1 EVALUATION Continuous assessment test By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Answer the questions asked in the test

 

·        Learner to recall and writes down answers to questions in the test

·        Teacher to supervise students as they do the test

 

  • Question papers
  • Marking schemes
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 120

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 39-58

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 12131-132

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 59-68

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 328-329

 
  2 SUPPORT AND MOVEMENT IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS Ribs and sternum By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Draw and label Ribs and sternum

·        Relate the structure to their functions

 

·        Drawing and labeling the Ribs and sternum

·        Relating the structure to their functions

  • Model of human skeleton
  • Rib bones
  • Sternum
  • Charts showing Ribs and sternum

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 104-105

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 39-58

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 120-121

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 59-68

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 315-316

 
  3 SUPPORT AND MOVEMENT IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS Appendicular skeleton By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Identify components of Appendicular skeleton

·        Draw the scapula bone and relate it to its functions

 

·        Identifying the bones of the Appendicular skeleton

·        Drawing and labeling scapula and relating the structure to its functions

  • Model of human skeleton
  • Scapula bones
  • Chart showing scapula bone
·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 105

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 39-58

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 124-125

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 59-68

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 317-320

 
  4-5 SUPPORT AND MOVEMENT IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS The fore limbs By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Identify the bones of the fore limbs

·        Draw the structure of the humerus, radius and ulna

 

·        Identifying drawing and labeling the structure of the humerus, radius and ulna

·        Discussing the adaptations of these bones to their functions

·        humerus, radius and ulna bones

·        model of human skeleton

·        charts showing humerus, radius and ulna

 

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 105-106

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 39-58

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 125

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 59-68

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 318-320

 
5 1 SUPPORT AND MOVEMENT IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS Bones of the hand By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Identify the bones of the hands

·        Draw and label bones of the hand

 

·        Identifying drawing and labeling the bones of the hands

·        Relating the structure to their functions

·        Bones of the hand

·        Model of the human skeleton

·        Chart showing bones of the hand

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 106

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 39-58

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 126

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 59-68

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 318

 
  2 SUPPORT AND MOVEMENT IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS The pelvic girdle By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Draw the pelvic girdle

·        Name the bones of The pelvic girdle

·        Relate the structure to their functions

 

·        Identifying drawing and labeling the pelvic girdle relating its structure to its functions ·        Pelvic  girdle bones

·        Model of the human skeleton

·        Chart showing the pelvic girdle

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 107

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 39-58

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 126

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 59-68

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 320

 
  3 SUPPORT AND MOVEMENT IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS The hind limb By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Identify, draw and label the femur, tibia and tibula bones

·        Relate their structure to their functions

 

·        Identifying drawing and labeling the bones of the hind limb

·        Relating the structure to their functions

·        Tibia and tibula bone

·        Femur bone

·        Model of human skeleton

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 107-108

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 39-58

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 59-68

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 319,320,321

 
  4-5 SUPPORT AND MOVEMENT IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS Bones of the foot By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Draw and label the bones of the foot

·        Relate the structure of bones of the foot to their functions

 

·        drawing, labeling and relating the structure of the foot to its functions ·        Model of the human skeleton

·        Bones of the foot

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 108-109

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 39-58

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 119

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 59-68

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 319

 
6 1 SUPPORT AND MOVEMENT IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS joints By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define a joint

·        List the three types of joints

·        Describe the types of joints

·        Defining a joint

·        Identifying the  types of joints

·        Describing the types of joints

·        Model of the human skeleton

·        Chart showing types of joints

·        Bones showing all types of joints

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 109-112

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 39-58

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 127-128

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 59-68

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 320-321

 
  2 SUPPORT AND MOVEMENT IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS Joints

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        List examples of movable joints, hinge joints and bell and socket joints

·        Naming examples of movable joints, hinge joints and bell and socket joints on a model skeleton ·        Model of the human skeleton

·        Chart showing all types of joints

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 110-112

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 39-58

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 127-128

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 59-68

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 320-321

 
  3 SUPPORT AND MOVEMENT IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS Immovable joints By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define Immovable joints

·        Name Immovable joints

·        Defining and naming Immovable joints ·        Model of the human skeleton

·        Chart showing Immovable joints , gliding joints and skull

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 109-110

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 39-58

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 127-128

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 59-68

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 320-321

 
  4-5 SUPPORT AND MOVEMENT IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS muscles By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define muscles

·        Explain the differences between the three types of muscles

·        Identifying biceps and triceps in the arm movement

·        Defining muscles

·        Differentiating between the three types of muscles

·        Describing the role of Biceps and triceps in movement of the arm

·        Chart showing smooth skeletal and cardiac muscles

·        Chart showing biceps and triceps muscles

·        Students arm

 

·        Comprehensive secondary Biology students Bk. 4 page 109-112

·        Teachers bk. 4 pages 39-58

·        KLB secondary Biology Students book 4 Page 129-131

·        KLB teachers book 4 pages 59-68

·        Principles of biology vol. 2 pages 321-325

 
7-12 REVISION AND END OF TERM EXAMINATIONS

 

FORM 2 CHEMISTRY NOTES- UPDATED

A.ATOMIC STRUCTURE

The atom is the smallest particle of an element that take part in a chemical reaction. The atom is made up of three subatomic particles:

          (i)Protons

          (ii)Electrons

          (iii)Neutrons

 

(i)Protons

1.The proton is positively charged

2.Is found in the centre of an atom called nucleus

3.It has a relative  mass 1

4.The number of protons in a atom of an element is its Atomic number

 

 (ii)Electrons

1.The Electrons is negatively charged

2.Is found in fixed regions surrounding the centre of an atom called energy levels/orbitals.

3.It has a relative  mass 1/1840

4.The number of protons and electrons  in a atom of an element is always equal

 

(iii)Neutrons

1.The Neutron is neither positively or negatively charged thus neutral.

2.Like protons it is found in the centre of an atom called nucleus

3.It has a relative  mass 1

4.The number of protons and neutrons in a atom of an element is its Mass number

 

Diagram showing the relative positions of protons ,electrons and neutrons in an atom of an element

 

 

 

Diagram showing the relative positions of protons, electrons and neutrons in an atom of Carbon

 

 

 

The table below show atomic structure of the 1st twenty elements.

 


Element
Symbol Protons Electrons Neutrons Atomic
number
Mass number

 

Hydrogen H 1 1 0 1 1
Helium He 2 2 2 2 4
Lithium Li 3 3 4 3 7
Beryllium Be 4 4 5 4 9
Boron B 5 5 6 5 11
Carbon C 6 6 6 6 12
Nitrogen N 7 7 7 7 14
Oxygen O 8 8 8 8 16
Fluorine F 9 9 10 9 19
Neon Ne 10 10 10 10 20
Sodium Na 11 11 12 11 23
Magnesium Mg 12 12 12 12 24
Aluminium Al 13 13 14 13 27
Silicon Si 14 14 14 14 28
Phosphorus P 15 15 16 15 31
Sulphur S 16 16 16 16 32
Chlorine Cl 17 17 18 17 35
Argon Ar 18 18 22 18 40
Potassium K 19 19 20 19 39
Calcium Ca 20 20 20 20 40

Most atoms of elements exist as isotopes.

Isotopes are atoms of the same element, having the same number of protons/atomic number but different number of neutrons/mass number.

By convention, isotopes are written with the mass number as superscript and the atomic number as subscript to the left of the chemical symbol of the element. i.e.

mass number

atomic  number                   m n  X            symbol of element

 

Below is the conventional method of writing the 1st twenty elements showing the mass numbers and atomic numbers;

 

11H                        42He             73Li              94Be             115B                 126C

 

147N                         168O          199F              2010Ne                    2311Na                       2412Mg

 

2713Al                     2814Si            3115P             3216S             3517Cl               4018Ar

 

3919K                      4020C

 

The table below shows some common natural isotopes of some elements

 

Element Isotopes Protons Electrons Neutrons Atomic

number

Mass

number

Hydrogen 11H

21H(deuterium)

31H(Tritium)

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

2

3

1

1

1

 

1

2

3

Chlorine 3517Cl

3717Cl

17

17

17

17

18

20

17

17

35

37

Potassium 3919K

4019K

4119K

19

19

19

19

19

19

20

21

22

19

19

19

39

40

41

Oxygen 168O

188O

8

8

8

8

8

10

8

8

16

18

Uranium 23592U

23892U

 

92

92

92

92

143

146

92

92

235

238

Neon 2210Ne

2010Ne

2110Ne

10

10

10

10

10

10

12

10

11

10

10

10

22

20

21

The mass of an average atom is very small (10-22 g).Masses of atoms are therefore expressed in relation to a chosen element.

The atom recommended is 12C isotope whose mass is arbitrarily assigned as 12.000 atomic mass units(a.m.u) .

All other atoms are compared to the mass of 12C isotope to give the relative at The relative atomic mass(RAM) is therefore defined as “the mass of average atom of an element  compared to  1/12  an atom of 12C isotope whose mass is arbitrarily fixed as 12.000 atomic mass units(a.m.u) ” i.e;

 

RAM   =      mass of  atom of an element

1/12  of one atom of 12C isotope

 

Accurate relative atomic masses (RAM) are got from the mass spectrometer. Mass spectrometer determines the isotopes of the element and their relative abundance/availability.

Using the relative abundances/availability of the isotopes, the relative atomic mass (RAM) can be determined /calculated as in the below examples.

  1. Chlorine occurs as 75% 3517Cl and 25% 3717Cl isotopes. Calculate the relative atomic mass of Chlorine.

 

Working

100 atoms of chlorine contains 75 atoms of 3517Cl isotopes

100 atoms of chlorine contains 75 atoms of 3717Cl isotopes

Therefore;

RAM  of chlorine = ( 75/100 x 35)   +  25/100  x 37 =  35.5

Note that:

Relative atomic mass has no units

More atoms of chlorine exist as 3517Cl(75%) than as 3717Cl(25%)     therefore RAM is nearer to the more abundant isotope.

 

  1. Calculate the relative atomic mass of potassium given that it exist as;

93.1%  3919K ,  0.01%  4019K  ,  6.89%  4119K ,

 

Working

100 atoms of potassium contains 93.1 atoms of 3919K isotopes

100 atoms of potassium contains 0.01 atoms of 4019K isotopes

100 atoms of potassium contains 6.89 atoms of 4119K isotopes

Therefore;

RAM  of potassium = (93.1/100 x39) + (0.01/100 x 40) +(6.89 /100 x 39)

=

Note that:

Relative atomic mass has no units

More atoms of potassium exist as 3919K (93.1%) therefore RAM is nearer to the more abundant 3919K  isotope.

 

  1. Calculate the relative atomic mass of Neon given that it exist as;

90.92%  2010Ne ,  0.26%  2110Ne  ,  8.82%  2210Ne,

 

Working

100 atoms of Neon contains 90.92 atoms of 2010Ne  isotopes

100 atoms of Neon contains 0.26 atoms of 2110Ne  isotopes

100 atoms of Neon contains 8.82 atoms of 2210 Ne  isotopes          Therefore;

RAM  of  Neon = (90.92/100 x20) + (0.26/100 x 21) +(8.82 /100 x 22)

=

Note that:

Relative atomic mass has no units

More atoms of Neon exist as 2010Ne (90.92%) therefore RAM is nearer to the more abundant 2010Ne  isotope.

 

  1. Calculate the relative atomic mass of Argon given that it exist as;

90.92%  2010Ne ,  0.26%  2110Ne  ,  8.82%  2210Ne,

NB

The relative atomic mass is a measure of the masses of atoms. The higher the relative atomic mass, the heavier the atom.

 

Electrons are found in energy levels/orbital.

An energy level is a fixed region around/surrounding the nucleus of an atom occupied by electrons of the same (potential) energy.

By convention energy levels are named 1,2,3… outwards  from the region nearest to nucleus.

 

Each energy level is occupied by a fixed number of electrons:

The 1st energy level is occupied by a maximum of two electrons

The 2nd  energy level is occupied by a maximum of eight electrons

The  3rd  energy level is occupied by a maximum of eight electrons( or   eighteen electrons if available)

The  4th   energy level is occupied by a maximum of eight electrons( or eighteen or thirty two electrons if available)

 

This arrangement of electrons in an atom is called electron configuration / structure.

By convention the electron configuration / structure of an atom of an element can be shown in form of a diagram using either cross(x) or dot() to

 

Practice examples  drawing electronic configurations

 

a)11H has – in nucleus1proton and 0 neutrons

– 1 electron in the 1st energy levels thus:

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons(represented by cross(x)

 

Electronic structure of Hydrogen is thus: 1:

                   

  1. b) 42He has – in nucleus 2 proton and 2 neutrons – 2 electron in the 1st energy levels thus:

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by cross(x)

 

 

Electronic structure of Helium is thus: 2:

 

  1. c) 73Li has – in nucleus 3 proton and 4 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

1 electron in the 2nd  energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by cross(x)

 

 

Electronic structure of  Lithium is thus: 2:1

 

  1. d) 94Be has – in nucleus 4 proton and 5 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

2 electron in the 2nd  energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by cross(x)

 

Electronic structure of  Beryllium is thus: 2:2

 

  1. e) 115B has – in nucleus 5 proton and 6 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

3 electron in the 2nd  energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by cross(x)

 

 

Electronic structure of  Boron is thus: 2:3

 

  1. f)   126C  has      – in nucleus 6 proton and 6 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

4 electron in the 2nd  energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by cross(x)

 

 

Electronic structure of  Carbon is thus: 2:4

 

  1. g) 147N has – in nucleus 7 proton and 7 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

5 electron in the 2nd  energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by cross(x)

 

 

Electronic structure of  Nitrogen is thus: 2:5

 

  1. h) 168O has – in nucleus 8 proton and 8 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

6 electron in the 2nd  energy levels thus

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by cross(x)

 

 

Electronic structure of  Oxygen is thus: 2:6

 

 

  1. i) 199F has – in nucleus 9 proton and 10 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

7 electron in the 2nd  energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by cross(x)

 

 

 

Electronic structure of  Fluorine is thus: 2:7

  1. i) 2010Ne has – in nucleus 10 proton and 10 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

8 electron in the 2nd  energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by cross(x)

 

 

Electronic structure of  Neon is thus: 2:8

 

  1. j) 2311Na has – in nucleus 11 proton and 12 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

8 electron in the 2nd  energy levels

1 electron in the 3rd   energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by dot(.)

 

 

Electronic structure of  Sodium is thus: 2:8:1

 

  1. k) 2412Mg has – in nucleus 12 proton and 12 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

8 electron in the 2nd  energy levels

2 electron in the 3rd   energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by dot(.)

 

 

Electronic structure of  Magnesium is thus: 2:8:2

  1. l) 2713Al has – in nucleus 13 proton and 14 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

8 electron in the 2nd  energy levels

3 electron in the 3rd   energy levels thus

 

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by dot(.)

 

 

Electronic structure of  Aluminium is thus: 2:8:3

 

  1. m) 2814Si has – in nucleus 14 proton and 14 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

8 electron in the 2nd  energy levels

4 electron in the 3rd   energy levels thus

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by dot(.)

Electronic structure of  Silicon is thus: 2:8:4

 

  1. n) 3115P has – in nucleus 14 proton and 15 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

8 electron in the 2nd  energy levels

5 electron in the 3rd   energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by dot(.)

Electronic structure of  Phosphorus is thus: 2:8:5

 

  1. o) 3216S has – in nucleus 16 proton and 16 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

8 electron in the 2nd  energy levels

6 electron in the 3rd   energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by dot(.)

Electronic structure of  Sulphur is thus: 2:8:6

 

  1. p) 3517Cl has – in nucleus 18 proton and 17 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

8 electron in the 2nd  energy levels

7 electron in the 3rd   energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by dot(.)

Electronic structure of  Chlorine is thus: 2:8:7

 

  1. p) 4018Ar has – in nucleus 22 proton and 18 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

8 electron in the 2nd  energy levels

8 electron in the 3rd   energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by dot(.)

Electronic structure of  Argon is thus: 2:8:8

 

  1. q) 3919K has – in nucleus 20 proton and 19 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

8 electron in the 2nd  energy levels

8 electron in the 3rd   energy levels

1 electron in the 4th   energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by dot(.)

Electronic structure of  Potassium is thus: 2:8:8:1

 

  1. r) 4020Ca has – in nucleus 20 proton and 20 neutrons

2 electron in the 1st energy levels

8 electron in the 2nd  energy levels

8 electron in the 3rd   energy levels

2 electron in the 4th   energy levels thus

 

 

Nucleus

Energy levels

Electrons (represented by dot(.)

Electronic structure of  Calcium is thus: 2:8:8:2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

B.PERIODIC TABLE

 

There are over 100 elements so far discovered. Scientists have tried to group them together in a periodic table.

A periodic table is a horizontal and vertical arrangement of elements according to their atomic numbers.

This table was successfully arranged in 1913 by the British scientist Henry Moseley from the previous work of the Russian Scientist Dmitri Mendeleev.

The horizontal arrangement forms period. Atoms in the same period have the same the same number of energy levels in their electronic structure. i.e.

The number of energy levels in the electronic configuration of an element determine the period to which the element is in the periodic table.

e.g.

Which period of the periodic table are the following isotopes/elements/atoms?

  1. 126C

 

Electron structure 2:4 => 2 energy levels used thus Period 2

  1. 2311Na

 

Electron structure 2:8:1 => 3 energy levels used thus Period 3

  1. 3919K

 

Electron structure 2:8:8:1 => 4 energy levels used thus Period 4

  1. 11H

Electron structure 1: => 1 energy level used thus Period 1

 

The vertical arrangement of elements  forms a group. Atoms in the same have the same the same group have the same number of outer energy level electrons as  per their electronic structure. i.e.

The number of electrons in the outer energy level  an element determine the group to which the element is ,in the periodic table.

 

  1. 126C

Electron structure 2:4 => 4 electrons in outer energy level thus Group IV

  1. 2311C

Electron structure 2:8:1 => 1 electron in outer energy level thus Group I

 

  1. 3919K

 

Electron structure 2:8:8:1=>1 electron in outer energy level thus Group I

 

  1. 11H

Electron structure 1: => 1 electron in outer energy level thus Group I

 

By convention;

 (i)Periods are named using English numerals 1,2,3,4,…

(ii)Groups are named using Roman numerals I,II,III,IV,…

 

There are eighteen groups in a standard periodic table.

There are seven periods in a standard periodic table.

 

THE STANDARD PERIODIC TABLE OF ELEMENTS

 

 

When an atom has maximum number of electrons in its outer energy level, it is said to be stable.

When an atom has no maximum number of electrons in its outer energy level, it is said to be unstable.

 All stable atoms are in group 8/18 of the periodic table. All other elements are unstable.

All unstable atoms/isotopes try to be stable through chemical reactions. A chemical reaction involves gaining or losing outer electrons (electron transfer) .When electron transfer take place, an ion is formed.

 

An ion is formed when an unstable atom gain or donate electrons in its outer energy level inorder to be stable. Whether an atom gain or donate electrons depend on the relative energy required to donate or gain extra electrons i.e.

Examples

  1. 199 F has electronic structure/configuration 2:7.

It can donate the seven outer electrons to have stable electronic structure/configuration 2:.

It can gain one extra electron to have stable electronic structure/configuration 2:8. Gaining requires less energy, and thus  Fluorine reacts by gaining one extra electrons.

  1. 2313 Al has electronic structure/configuration 2:8:3

It can donate the three outer electrons to have stable electronic structure/configuration 2:8.

It can gain five extra electrons to have stable electronic structure/configuration 2:8:8. Donating requires less energy, and thus  Aluminium reacts by donating its three outer electrons.

 

Elements with less than four electrons in the outer energy level donates /lose the outer electrons to be stable and form a positively charged ion called cation.

A cation therefore has more protons(positive charge) than electrons(negative charge)

 Generally metals usually form cation

Elements with more than four electrons in the outer energy level gain /acquire extra  electrons in the outer energy level to be stable and form a negatively charged ion called anion.

An anion therefore has less protons(positive charge) than electrons(negative charge)

Generally non metals usually form anion. Except  Hydrogen

The charge carried by an ion is equal to the number of electrons gained/acquired or donated/lost.

 

Examples of ion formation

 

1.11H

H                    ->              H+                +                   e

(atom)     (monovalent cation)       (electrons donated/lost)

Electronic configuration 1:                  (No electrons remains)

 

 

  1. 2713 Al

Al                ->                 Al3+              +                  3e

(atom)                              (trivalent cation)  (3 electrons donated/lost)

Electron    2:8:3                                   2:8

structure   (unstable)                          (stable)

 

  1. 2311 Na

Na                ->                 Na+              +                  e

(atom)                              (cation)           ( 1 electrons donated/lost)

Electron    2:8:1                                   2:8

structure   (unstable)                          (stable)

 

  1. 2412Mg

Mg               ->                 Mg2+            +                  2e

(atom)                              (cation)           ( 2 electrons donated/lost)

Electron    2:8:1                                   2:8

structure   (unstable)                          (stable)

 

  1. 168O

O       +                 2e                     ->                  O2-

(atom)             ( 2 electrons gained/acquired)      (anion)

Electron    2:6                                                                         2:8

structure   (unstable)                                                           (stable)

 

  1. 147N

N       +                 3e                     ->                  N3-

(atom)             ( 3 electrons gained/acquired)      (anion)

Electron    2:5                                                                         2:8

structure   (unstable)                                                           (stable)

 

  1. 3115P

P        +                 3e                     ->                  P3-

(atom)             ( 3 electrons gained/acquired)      (anion)

Electron    2:5                                                                         2:8

structure   (unstable)                                                           (stable)

 

  1. 199F

F        +                 e                     ->                    F

(atom)             ( 1 electrons gained/acquired)      (anion)

Electron    2:7                                                                         2:8

structure   (unstable)                                                           (stable)

 

  1. 3517Cl

Cl       +                 e                     ->                    Cl

(atom)             ( 1 electrons gained/acquired)      (anion)

Electron    2:8:7                                                                      2:8:8

structure   (unstable)                                                           (stable)

 

  1. 3919 K

K                 ->                 K+                +                  e

(atom)                              (cation)           ( 1 electrons donated/lost)

Electron    2:8:8:1                                2:8:8

structure   (unstable)                          (stable)

 

When an element donate/loses its outer electrons ,the process is called oxidation. When an element acquires/gains extra electrons in  its outer energy level,the process is called reduction.The  charge carried by an atom, cation  or anion is its oxidation state.

 

Table showing the oxidation states of some isotopes

Element Symbol of element / isotopes Charge of ion Oxidation state
Hydrogen 11H

21H(deuterium)

31H(Tritium)

H+

H+

H+

+1

+1

+1

Chlorine 3517Cl

3717Cl

 

 

Cl

Cl

-1

-1

Potassium 3919K

4019K

4119K

 

K+

K+

K+

+1

+1

+1

Oxygen 168O

188O

 

O2-

O2-

-2

-2

Magnesium 2412Mg Mg2+ +2
sodium 2311Na Na+ +1
Copper Cu Cu+

Cu2+

+1

+2

Iron   Fe2+

Fe3+

+2

+3

Lead   Pb2+

Pb4+

+2

+4

Manganese   Mn2+

Mn7+

+2

+7

Chromium   Cr3+

Cr6+

+3

+6

Sulphur   S4+

S6+

+4

+6

Carbon   C2+

C4+

+2

+4

 

Note :

Some elements can exist in  more than one oxidation state.They are said to have variable oxidation state.

Roman capital numeral is used to indicate the oxidation state of an element with a variable oxidation state in a compound.

 

Examples:

  • Copper (I) means Cu+ as in Copper(I)oxide
  • Copper (II) means Cu2+ as in Copper(II)oxide
  • Iron (II) means Fe2+ as in Iron(II)sulphide

(iv)    Iron (III) means Fe3+ as in Iron(III)chloride

  • Sulphur(VI)mean S6+ as in Iron(III)sulphate(VI)
  • Sulphur(VI)mean S6+ as in sulphur(VI)oxide
  • Sulphur(IV)mean S4+ as in sulphur(IV)oxide
  • Sulphur(IV)mean S4+ as in sodium sulphate(IV)

(ix)    Carbon(IV)mean C4+ as in carbon(IV)oxide

(x)     Carbon(IV)mean C4+ as in Lead(II)carbonate(IV)

(xi)    Carbon(II)mean C2+ as in carbon(II)oxide

(xii)   Manganese(IV)mean Mn4+ as in Manganese(IV)oxide

 

A compound is a combination of two or more elements in fixed proportions. The   ratio of the atoms making a compound is called the chemical formulae. Elements combine together to form a compound depending on their combining power.

The combining power of atoms in an element is called Valency.Valency of an element is equal to the number of:

(i)hydrogen atoms that an atom of element can combine with or displace.

(ii)electrons gained /acquired in outer energy level by non metals to be   stable/attain  duplet/octet.

(iii)electrons donated/lost by outer energy level of metals to be stable/attain octet/duplet.

(iv)charges carried by ions/cations/ions

Group of atoms that react as a unit during chemical reactions are called radicals.Elements with variable oxidation state also have more than one valency.

 

Table showing the valency of common radicals.

 

Radical name Chemical formulae Combining power / Valency
Ammonium NH4 + 1
Hydroxide OH 1
Nitrate(V) NO3 1
Hydrogen carbonate HCO3 1
Hydrogen sulphate(VI) HSO4 1
Hydrogen sulphate(IV) HSO3 1
Manganate(VII) MnO4 1
Chromate(VI) CrO42- 2
Dichromate(VI) Cr2O72- 2
Sulphate(VI) SO42- 2
Sulphate(IV) SO32- 2
Carbonate(IV) CO32- 2
Phosphate(V) PO42- 3

 

Table showing the valency of some common metal and non metals

 

Element/metal Valency Element/non metal Valency

 

Hydrogen 1 Florine 1
Lithium 1 Chlorine 1
Beryllium 2 Bromine 1
Boron 3 Iodine 1
Sodium 1 Carbon 4
Magnesium 2 Nitrogen 3
Aluminium 3 Oxygen 2
Potassium 1 Phosphorus 3
Calcium 2    
Zinc 2    
Barium 2    
Mercury 2    
Iron 2 and 3    
Copper 1 and 2    
Manganese 2 and 4    
Lead 2 and 4    

 

From the valency of elements , the chemical formular of a compound can be derived using the following procedure:

(i)Identify the elements and radicals making the compound

(ii)Write  the symbol/formular  of the elements making the compound     starting with the metallic element

(iii)Assign the valency of each element /radical as superscript.

(iv)Interchange/exchange the valencies of each element as subscript.

(v)Divide by the smallest/lowest valency to derive the smallest whole  number ratios

Ignore a valency of 1.

This is the chemical formula.

 

Practice examples

Write the chemical formula of

 (a)Aluminium oxide

 

Elements making compound Aluminium Oxygen
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound Al O
Assign valencies as superscript Al3 O2
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript Al2 O3
Divide by smallest valency to get whole number

 

Chemical formula of Aluminium oxide is thus: Al2 O3

This means:2atoms of Aluminium combine with 3 atoms of Oxygen

 

(b)Sodium oxide

 

Elements making compound Sodium Oxygen
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound Na O
Assign valencies as superscript Na1 O2
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript Na2 O1
Divide by smallest valency to get whole number

 

Chemical formula of Sodium oxide is thus: Na2 O

This means:2atoms of Sodium combine with 1 atom of Oxygen

 

(c)Calcium oxide

 

Elements making compound Calcium Oxygen
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound Ca O
Assign valencies as superscript Ca2 O2
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript Ca2 O2
Divide by two to get smallest whole number ratio Ca1 O1

 

Chemical formula of Calcium oxide is thus: CaO

This means:1 atom of calcium combine with 1 atom of Oxygen.

 

(d)Lead(IV)oxide

 

Elements making compound Lead Oxygen
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound Pb O
Assign valencies as superscript Pb4 O2
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript Pb2 O4
Divide by two to get smallest whole number ratio Pb1 O2

 

Chemical formula of Lead(IV) oxide is thus: PbO2

This means:1 atom of lead combine with 2 atoms of Oxygen.

 

(e)Lead(II)oxide

 

Elements making compound Lead Oxygen
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound Pb O
Assign valencies as superscript Pb2 O2
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript Pb2 O2
Divide by two to get smallest whole number ratio Pb1 O1

 

Chemical formula of Lead(II) oxide is thus: PbO

This means:1 atom of lead combine with 1 atom of Oxygen.

 

(e)Iron(III)oxide

 

Elements making compound Iron Oxygen
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound Fe O
Assign valencies as superscript Fe3 O2
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript Fe2 O3
Divide by two to get smallest whole number ratio

 

Chemical formula of Iron(III) oxide is thus: Fe2O3

This means:2 atom of lead combine with 3 atom of Oxygen.

 

(f)Iron(II)sulphate(VI)

 

Elements making compound Iron sulphate(VI)
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound Fe SO4
Assign valencies as superscript Fe2 SO4 2
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript Fe2 SO4  2
Divide by two to get smallest whole number ratio Fe1 SO4  1

 

Chemical formula of Iron(II) sulphate(VI) is thus: FeSO4

This means:1 atom of Iron combine with 1 sulphate(VI) radical.

 

(g)Copper(II)sulphate(VI)

 

Elements making compound Copper sulphate(VI)
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound Cu SO4
Assign valencies as superscript Cu2 SO4 2
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript Cu2 SO4  2
Divide by two to get smallest whole number ratio Cu1 SO4  1

 

Chemical formula of Cu(II)sulphate(VI) is thus: CuSO4

This means:1 atom of Copper combine with 1 sulphate(VI) radical.

 

(h)Aluminium sulphate(VI)

 

Elements making compound Aluminium sulphate(VI)
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound Al SO4
Assign valencies as superscript Al3 SO4 2
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript Al2 SO4  3
Divide by two to get smallest whole number ratio

 

Chemical formula of Aluminium sulphate(VI) is thus: Al2(SO4)3

This means:2 atom of Aluminium combine with 3 sulphate(VI) radical.

 

(i)Aluminium nitrate(V)

 

Elements making compound Aluminium nitrate(V)
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound Al NO3
Assign valencies as superscript Al3 NO3 1
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript Al1 NO3  3
Divide by two to get smallest whole number ratio

 

Chemical formula of Aluminium sulphate(VI) is thus: Al (NO3)3

This means:1 atom of Aluminium combine with 3 nitrate(V) radical.

 

(j)Potassium  manganate(VII)

 

Elements making compound Potassium manganate(VII)
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound K MnO4
Assign valencies as superscript K 1 MnO4 1
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript K1 MnO4 1
Divide by two to get smallest whole number ratio

 

Chemical formula of Potassium manganate(VII) is thus: KMnO4

This means:1 atom of Potassium combine with 4 manganate(VII) radical.

 

(k)Sodium  dichromate(VI)

 

Elements making compound Sodium dichromate(VI)
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound Na Cr2O7
Assign valencies as superscript Na 1 Cr2O7 2
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript Na2 Cr2O7 1
Divide by two to get smallest whole number ratio

 

Chemical formula of Sodium dichromate(VI) is thus: Na2 Cr2O7

This means:2 atom of Sodium combine with 1 dichromate(VI) radical.

 

(l)Calcium  hydrogen carbonate

 

Elements making compound Calcium Hydrogen carbonate
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound Ca CO3
Assign valencies as superscript Ca 2 HCO3 1
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript Ca1 HCO3  2
Divide by two to get smallest whole number ratio

 

Chemical formula of Calcium hydrogen carbonate is thus: Ca(HCO3)2

This means:1 atom of Calcium  combine with 2 hydrogen carbonate radical.

 

(l)Magnesium  hydrogen sulphate(VI)

 

Elements making compound Magnesium Hydrogen sulphate(VI)
Symbol of elements/radicals in compound Mg HSO4
Assign valencies as superscript Mg 2 HSO4 1
Exchange/Interchange the valencies as subscript Mg1 HSO4  2
Divide by two to get smallest whole number ratio

 

Chemical formula of Magnesium hydrogen sulphate(VI) is thus: Mg(HSO4)2

This means:1 atom of Magnesium  combine with 2 hydrogen sulphate(VI) radical.

 

Compounds are formed from chemical reactions. A chemical reaction is formed when atoms of the reactants break free to bond again and form products. A chemical reaction is a statement showing the movement of reactants to form products. The following procedure is used in writing a chemical  equations:

  1. Write the word equation
  2. Write the correct chemical formula for each of the reactants and products
  3. Check if the number of atoms of each element on the reactant side is equal to the number of atoms of each element on the product side.
  4. Multiply the chemical formula containing the unbalanced atoms with the lowest common multiple if the number of atoms on one side is not equal. This is called balancing.

 Do not change the chemical formula of the products/reactants.

  1. Assign in brackets, the physical state/state symbols of the reactants and products after each chemical formula as:

(i) (s) for solids

(ii) (l) for liquids

(iii) (g) for gas

(iv) (aq) for aqueous/dissolved in water to make a solution.

 

Practice examples

Write a balanced chemical equation for the following

  • Hydrogen gas is prepared from reacting Zinc granules with dilute hydrochloric acid.

Procedure

 

  1. Write the word equation

Zinc + Hydrochloric acid -> Zinc chloride + hydrogen gas

 

  1. Write the correct chemical formula for each of the reactants and products

Zn      +        HCl             ->       ZnCl2           +        H2

 

  1. Check if the number of atoms of each element on the reactant side is equal to the number of atoms of each element on the product side.

      Number of atoms of Zn on the reactant side is equal to product side

     One atom of H in HCl on the reactant side is not equal to two atoms in H2 on product side.

One atom of Cl in HCl on the reactant side is not equal to two atoms in ZnCl2 on product side.

 

  1. Multiply the chemical formula containing the unbalanced atoms with the lowest common multiple if the number of atoms on one side is not equal.

    Multiply  HCl by “2” to get “2” Hydrogen and “2” Chlorine on product and reactant side.

Zn      +        2 HCl          ->       ZnCl2           +        H2

  1. Assign in brackets, the physical state/state symbols .

Zn(s)          +        2 HCl(aq)              ->       ZnCl2 (aq)   +        H2(g)

 

  • Oxygen gas is prepared from decomposition of Hydrogen peroxide solution to water

Procedure

 

  1. Write the word equation

Hydrogen peroxide -> Water + oxygen gas

 

  1. Write the correct chemical formula for each of the reactants and products

H2O2           ->       H2O             +        O2

 

  1. Check if the number of atoms of each element on the reactant side is equal to the number of atoms of each element on the product side.

      Number of atoms of H on the reactant side is equal to product side

     Two atom of O in H2O2 on the reactant side is not equal to  three atoms (one in H2O and two in O2) on product side.

 

  1. Multiply the chemical formula containing the unbalanced atoms with the lowest common multiple if the number of atoms on one side is not equal.

    Multiply  H2O2 by “2” to get “4” Hydrogen and “4” Oxygen on reactants

    Multiply  H2O  by “2” to get “4” Hydrogen and “2” Oxygen on product side

   When the “2” Oxygen in O2 and the“2” in H2O are added on product side they are equal to the“4” Oxygen on reactants side.  

2H2O2                   ->       2H2O           +        O2

 

  1. Assign in brackets, the physical state/state symbols .

2H2O2(aq)             ->       2H2O(l)                 +        O2(g)

 

  • Chlorine gas is prepared from Potassium manganate(VII) reacting with hydrochloric acid to form potassium chloride solution, manganese(II) chloride solution,water and chlorine gas.

 

Procedure

  1. Write the word equation

Potassium manganate(VII) + Hydrochloric acid ->

potassium chloride + manganese(II) chloride + chlorine +water

 

  1. Write the correct chemical formula for each of the reactants and products

KMnO4 + HCl      -> KCl  + MnCl2   +H2O + Cl2

 

  1. Check if the number of atoms of each element on the reactant side is equal to the number of atoms of each element on the product side.

      Number of atoms of K and Mn on the reactant side is equal to product side

     Two atom of H in H2O on the product side is not equal to one atom on reactant side.

Four atom of O in KMnO4 is not equal to one in H2

One atom of Cl in HCl on reactant side is not equal to three (one in H2O and two in Cl2)

 

  1. Multiply the chemical formula containing the unbalanced atoms with the lowest common multiple if the number of atoms on one side is not equal.

    Multiply  HCl by “16” to get “16” Hydrogen and “16” Chlorine on reactants

    Multiply  KMnO4  by “2” to get “2” Potassium and “2” manganese, “2 x4 =8” Oxygen on reactant side.

Balance the product side to get:

  

2 KMnO4 +16 HCl         -> 2 KCl  + 2 MnCl2       +8 H2O        + 5 Cl2

 

  1. Assign in brackets, the physical state/state symbols .

2KMnO4(s) +16 HCl(aq)-> 2 KCl (aq) + 2MnCl2(aq)+8 H2O(l)+5 Cl2(g)

 

(d)Carbon(IV)oxide  gas is prepared from Calcium carbonate reacting with hydrochloric acid to form calcium chloride solution, water and carbon(IV)oxide gas.

 

Procedure

  1. Write the word equation

Calcium carbonate + Hydrochloric acid ->

calcium chloride solution+ water +carbon(IV)oxide

  1. Write the correct chemical formula for each of the reactants and products

CaCO3 + HCl       -> CaCl2      +H2O + CO2

 

  1. Check if the number of atoms of each element on the reactant side is equal to the number of atoms of each element on the product side.

    

  1. Multiply the chemical formula containing the unbalanced atoms with the lowest common multiple if the number of atoms on one side is not equal.

   

  1. Assign in brackets, the physical state/state symbols .

CaCO3(s)   +    2 HCl(aq)  ->   CaCl2(aq)  +  H2O(l)  +   CO2(g)

 

(d)Sodium hydroxide solution neutralizes hydrochloric acid to form salt and water.

NaOH(aq)   +     HCl(aq)  ->   NaCl (aq)  +  H2O(l)

 

(e)Sodium reacts with water to form sodium hydroxide and hydrogen gas.

2Na(s)   +     2H2O(l)  ->   2NaOH(aq)  +  H2(g)

 

          (f)Calcium reacts withwater to form calcium hydroxide and hydrogen gas

Ca(s)   +     2H2O(l)  ->   Ca(OH)2(aq)  +  H2(g)

 

          (g)Copper(II)Oxide solid reacts with dilute hydrochloric acid to form copper(II)chloride and water.

CuO(s)   +     2HCl(aq)  ->   CuCl2(aq)  +  H2O(l)

 

(h)Hydrogen sulphide reacts with Oxygen to form sulphur(IV)Oxide and water.

                    2H2S(g) + 3O2(g)   ->  2SO2(g) + 2H2O(l)

 

(i)Magnesium reacts with steam to form Magnesium Oxide and Hydrogen gas.

Mg(s)   +     2H2O(g)  ->   MgO(s)  +  H2(g)

 

(j)Ethane(C2H6) gas burns in air to form Carbon(IV)Oxide and water.

2C2H6(g)  +  7O2(g)  ->  4CO2(g)  +  6H2O(l)

 

(k)Ethene(C2H4) gas burns in air to form Carbon(IV)Oxide and water.

C2H4(g)  +  3O2(g)  ->  2CO2(g)  +  2H2O(l)

 

(l)Ethyne(C2H2) gas burns in air to form Carbon(IV)Oxide and water.

2C2H2(g)  +  5O2(g)  ->  4CO2(g)  +  2H2O(l)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

C.PERIODICITY OF CHEMICAL FAMILES/DOWN THE GROUP.

 

The number of valence electrons and the number of occupied energy levels in an atom of an element determine the position of an element in the periodic table.i.e

The number of occupied energy levels determine the Period and the valence electrons determine the Group.

Elements in the same group have similar physical and chemical properties. The trends in physical and chemical properties of elements in the same group vary down the group. Elements in the same group thus constitute a chemical family.

 

  • Group I elements: Alkali metals

 

Group I elements are called Alkali metals except Hydrogen which is a non metal. The alkali metals include:

 

Element Symbol Atomic number Electron structure Oxidation state Valency
Lithium Li 3 2:1 Li+ 1
Sodium Na 11 2:8:1 Na+ 1
Potassium K 19 2:8:8:1 K+ 1
Rubidium Rb 37 2:8:18:8:1 Rb+ 1
Caesium Cs 55 2:8:18:18:8:1 Cs+ 1
Francium Fr 87 2:8:18:32:18:8:1 Fr+ 1

 

All alkali metals atom has one electron in the outer energy level. They therefore are monovalent. They donate /lose the outer electron to have oxidation state M+

The number of energy levels increases down the group from Lithium   to Francium. The more the number of energy levels the bigger/larger the atomic size. e.g.

The atomic size of Potassium is bigger/larger than that of sodium because Potassium has more/4 energy levels than sodium (3 energy levels).

 

Atomic and ionic radius

The distance between the centre of the nucleus of an atom and the outermost energy level occupied by electron/s is called atomic radius. Atomic radius is measured in nanometers(n).The higher /bigger the atomic radius the bigger /larger the atomic size.

 

The distance between the centre of the nucleus of an ion and the outermost energy level occupied by electron/s is called ionic radius. Ionic radius is also measured in nanometers(n).The higher /bigger the ionic radius the bigger /larger the size of the ion.

Atomic radius and ionic radius depend on the number of energy levels occupied by electrons. The more the number of energy levels the bigger/larger the atomic /ionic radius. e.g.

The atomic radius of Francium is bigger/larger than that of sodium because Francium has more/7 energy levels than sodium (3 energy levels).

Atomic radius and ionic radius of alkali metals increase down the group as the number of energy levels increases.

 

The atomic radius of alkali metals is bigger than the ionic radius. This is because alkali metals react by losing/donating the outer electron and hence lose the outer energy level.

 

Table showing the atomic and ionic radius of some alkali metals

 

Element Symbol Atomic number Atomic radius(nM) Ionic radius(nM)
Lithium Li 3 0.133 0.060
Sodium Na 11 0.157 0.095
Potassium K 19 0.203 0.133

 

The atomic radius of sodium is  0.157nM .The ionic radius of Na+ is 0.095nM. This is because sodium reacts by donating/losing the outer electrons and hence the outer energy level. The remaining electrons/energy levels experience more effective / greater nuclear attraction/pull towards the nucleus reducing the atomic radius.

 

Electropositivity

The ease of donating/losing electrons is called electropositivity. All alkali metals are electropositive. Electropositivity  increase as atomic radius increase. This is because the effective nuclear attraction on outer electrons decreases with increase in atomic radius. The outer electrons experience less nuclear attraction and can be lost/ donated easily/with ease. Francium is the most electropositive element in the periodic table because it has the highest/biggest atomic radius.

 

Ionization energy

The minimum amount of energy required to remove an electron from an atom of element in its gaseous state is called  1st ionization energy. The SI unit of ionization energy is kilojoules per mole/kJmole-1 .Ionization energy depend on atomic radius. The higher the atomic radius, the less effective the nuclear attraction on outer electrons/energy level and thus the lower the ionization energy. For alkali metals the 1st ionization energy decrease down the group as the atomic radius increase and the effective nuclear attraction on outer energy level electrons decrease.

e.g. The 1st ionization energy of sodium is 496 kJmole-1  while that of potassium is 419 kJmole-1 .This is because atomic radius increase and thus effective nuclear attraction on outer energy level electrons decrease down the group from sodium to Potassium. It requires therefore less energy to donate/lose outer electrons in Potassium than in sodium.

 

Physical properties

Soft/Easy to cut: Alkali metals are soft and easy to cut with a knife. The softness and ease of cutting increase down the group from Lithium to Francium. This is because an increase in atomic radius, decreases the strength of metallic bond and the packing of the metallic structure

Appearance: Alkali metals have a shiny grey metallic luster when freshly cut. The surface rapidly/quickly tarnishes on exposure to air. This is because the metal surface rapidly/quickly reacts with elements of air/oxygen.

Melting and boiling points: Alkali metals have a relatively low melting/boiling point than common metals like Iron. This is because alkali metals use only one delocalized electron to form a weak metallic bond/structure.

Electrical/thermal conductivity: Alkali metals are good thermal and electrical conductors. Metals conduct using the outer mobile delocalized electrons. The delocalized electrons move randomly within the metallic structure.

 

          Summary of some physical properties of the 1st three alkali metals

 

Alkali metal Appearance Ease of cutting Melting point

(oC)

Boiling point

(oC)

Conductivity 1st  ionization energy
Lithium Silvery white Not easy 180 1330 Good 520
Sodium Shiny grey Easy 98 890 Good 496

 

Potassium Shiny grey Very easy 64 774 Good 419

 

Chemical properties

(i)Reaction with air/oxygen

On exposure to air, alkali metals reacts with the elements in the air.

Example

On exposure to air, Sodium first reacts with Oxygen to form sodium oxide.

4Na(s)         +        O2(g)           ->       2Na2O(s)

The sodium oxide formed further reacts with water/moisture in the air to form sodium hydroxide solution.

            Na2O(s)      +       H2O(l)         ->      2NaOH(aq)

Sodium hydroxide solution reacts with carbon(IV)oxide in the air to form sodium carbonate.

2NaOH(aq)   +      CO2(g)        ->   Na2CO3(g)    +   H2O(l)

 

(ii)Burning in air/oxygen

Lithium burns in air with a crimson/deep red flame to form Lithium oxide

4Li (s)          +        O2(g)           ->       2Li2O(s)

Sodium burns in air with a yellow flame to form sodium oxide

4Na (s)        +        O2(g)           ->       2Na2O(s)

Sodium burns in oxygen with a yellow flame to form sodium peroxide

2Na (s)        +        O2(g)           ->       Na2O2 (s)

Potassium burns in air with a lilac/purple flame to form potassium oxide

4K (s)          +        O2(g)           ->       2K2O (s)

 

(iii) Reaction with water:

 

Experiment

Measure 500 cm3 of water into a beaker.

Put three drops of phenolphthalein indicator.

Put about 0.5g of Lithium metal into the beaker.

Determine the pH of final product

Repeat the experiment using about 0.1 g of Sodium and Potassium.

Caution: Keep a distance

 

Observations

Alkali metal Observations Comparative speed/rate of the reaction
Lithium -Metal floats in water

-rapid effervescence/fizzing/bubbling

-colourless gas produced (that extinguishes burning splint with explosion /“pop” sound)

-resulting solution turn phenolphthalein indicator pink

-pH of solution = 12/13/14

 

Moderately vigorous
Sodium -Metal floats in water

-very rapid effervescence /fizzing /bubbling

-colourless gas produced (that extinguishes burning splint with explosion /“pop” sound)

-resulting solution turn phenolphthalein indicator pink

-pH of solution = 12/13/14

Very vigorous
Potassium -Metal floats in water

-explosive effervescence /fizzing /bubbling

-colourless gas produced (that extinguishes burning splint with explosion /“pop” sound)

-resulting solution turn phenolphthalein indicator pink

-pH of solution = 12/13/14

 

Explosive/burst into flames

 

Explanation

Alkali metals are less dense than water. They therefore float in water.They react with water to form a strongly alkaline solution of their hydroxides and producing hydrogen gas. The rate of this reaction increase down the group. i.e. Potassium is more reactive than sodium .Sodium is more reactive than Lithium.

The reactivity increases as electropositivity increases of the alkali increases. This is because as the atomic radius increases , the ease of donating/losing outer electron  increase during chemical reactions.

 

Chemical equations

2Li(s)           +        2H2O(l)       ->       2LiOH(aq)   +        H2(g)

2Na(s)         +        2H2O(l)       ->       2NaOH(aq)  +        H2(g)

2K(s)           +        2H2O(l)       ->       2KOH(aq)   +        H2(g)

2Rb(s)         +        2H2O(l)       ->       2RbOH(aq)  +        H2(g)

2Cs(s)          +        2H2O(l)       ->       2CsOH(aq)  +        H2(g)

2Fr(s)          +        2H2O(l)       ->       2FrOH(aq)   +        H2(g)

Reactivity increase down the group

 

(iv) Reaction with chlorine:

 

Experiment

Cut about 0.5g of sodium into a deflagrating spoon with a lid cover. Introduce it on a Bunsen flame until it catches fire. Quickly and carefully lower it into a gas jar containing dry chlorine to cover the gas jar.

Repeat with about 0.5g of Lithium.

Caution: This experiment should be done in fume chamber because chlorine is poisonous /toxic.

 

Observation

Sodium metal continues to burn with a yellow flame forming white solid/fumes.

Lithium metal continues to burn with a crimson flame forming white solid / fumes.

Alkali metal react with chlorine gas to form the corresponding metal chlorides. The reactivity increase as electropositivity increase down the group from Lithium to Francium.The ease of donating/losing the outer electrons increase as the atomic radius increase and the outer electron is less attracted to the nucleus.

 

Chemical equations

2Li(s)           +        Cl2(g)           ->       2LiCl(s)

2Na(s)         +        Cl2(g)           ->       2NaCl(s)

2K(s)           +        Cl2(g)           ->       2KCl(s)

2Rb(s)         +        Cl2(g)           ->       2RbCl(s)

2Cs(s)          +        Cl2(g)           ->       2CsCl(s)

2Fr(s)          +        Cl2(g)           ->       2FrCl(s)                                                                                       Reactivity increase down the group

 

The table below shows some compounds of the 1st three alkali metals

 

  Lithium sodium Potassium
Hydroxide LiOH NaOH KOH
Oxide Li2O Na2O K2O
Sulphide Li2S Na2S K2S
Chloride LiCl NaCl KCl
Carbonate Li2CO3 Na2CO3 K2CO3
Nitrate(V) LiNO3 NaNO3 KNO3
Nitrate(III) NaNO2 KNO2
Sulphate(VI) Li2SO4 Na2SO4 K2SO4
Sulphate(IV) Na2SO3 K2SO3
Hydrogen carbonate NaHCO3 KHCO3
Hydrogen sulphate(VI) NaHSO4 KHSO4
Hydrogen sulphate(IV) NaHSO3 KHSO3
Phosphate Na3PO4 K3PO4
Manganate(VI) NaMnO4 KMnO4
Dichromate(VI) Na2Cr2O7 K2Cr2O7
Chromate(VI) Na2CrO4 K2CrO4

 

Some uses of alkali metals include:

(i)Sodium is used in making sodium cyanide for extracting gold from gold ore.

(ii)Sodium chloride is used in seasoning food.

(iii)Molten mixture of sodium and potassium is used as coolant in nuclear reactors.

(iv)Sodium is used in making sodium hydroxide used in making soapy and soapless detergents.

(v)Sodium is used as a reducing agent for the extraction of titanium from Titanium(IV)chloride.

(vi)Lithium is used in making special high strength glasses

(vii)Lithium compounds are used to make dry cells in mobile phones and computer laptops.

 

Group II elements: Alkaline earth metals

 

Group II elements are called Alkaline earth metals . The alkaline earth metals include:

 

Element Symbol Atomic number Electron structure Oxidation state Valency
Beryllium Be 4 2:2 Be2+ 2
Magnesium Mg 12 2:8:2 Mg2+ 2
Calcium Ca 20 2:8:8:2 Ca2+ 2
Strontium Sr 38 2:8:18:8:2 Sr2+ 2
Barium Ba 56 2:8:18:18:8:2 Ba2+ 2
Radium Ra 88 2:8:18:32:18:8:2 Ra2+ 2

 

All alkaline earth metal atoms have two electrons in the outer energy level. They therefore are divalent. They donate /lose the two outer electrons to have oxidation state M2+

The number of energy levels increases down the group from Beryllium   to Radium. The more the number of energy levels the bigger/larger the atomic size. e.g.

The atomic size/radius of Calcium is bigger/larger than that of Magnesium because Calcium has more/4 energy levels than Magnesium (3 energy levels).

 

Atomic radius and ionic radius of alkaline earth metals increase down the group as the number of energy levels increases.

 

The atomic radius of alkaline earth metals is bigger than the ionic radius. This is because they react by losing/donating the two outer electrons and hence lose the outer energy level.

 

Table showing the atomic and ionic radius of the 1st three alkaline earth metals

 

Element Symbol Atomic number Atomic radius(nM) Ionic radius(nM)
Beryllium Be 4 0.089 0.031
Magnesium Mg 12 0.136 0.065
Calcium Ca 20 0.174 0.099

The atomic radius of Magnesium is  0.136nM .The ionic radius of Mg2+ is 0.065nM. This is because Magnesium reacts by donating/losing the two outer electrons and hence the outer energy level. The remaining electrons/energy levels experience more effective / greater nuclear attraction/pull towards the nucleus reducing the atomic radius.

 

Electropositivity

All alkaline earth metals are also electropositive like alkali metals. The electropositivity increase with increase in atomic radius/size. Calcium is more electropositive than Magnesium. This is because the effective nuclear attraction on outer electrons decreases with increase in atomic radius. The two outer electrons in calcium experience less nuclear attraction and can be lost/ donated easily/with ease because of  the higher/bigger atomic radius.

 

Ionization energy

For alkaline earth metals the 1st ionization energy decrease down the group as the atomic radius increase and the effective nuclear attraction on outer energy level electrons decrease.

e.g. The 1st ionization energy of Magnesium  is 900 kJmole-1  while that of Calcium is 590 kJmole-1 .This is because atomic radius increase and thus effective nuclear attraction on outer energy level electrons decrease down the group from magnesium to calcium.

It requires therefore less energy to donate/lose outer electron in calcium than in magnesium.

 

The minimum amount of energy required to remove a second electron from an ion of an element in its gaseous state is called the 2nd ionization energy.

The 2nd ionization energy is always higher /bigger than  the 1st  ionization energy.

This because once an electron is donated /lost form an atom, the overall effective nuclear attraction on the remaining electrons/energy level increase. Removing a second electron from the ion require therefore more energy than the first electron.

The atomic radius of alkali metals is higher/bigger than that of alkaline earth metals.This is because across/along the period from left to right there is an increase in nuclear charge from additional number of protons and still additional number of electrons entering the same energy level. Increase in nuclear charge increases the effective nuclear attraction on the outer energy level which pulls it closer to the nucleus. e.g.

Atomic radius of Sodium (0.157nM) is higher than that of Magnesium (0.137nM). This is because Magnesium has more effective nuclear attraction on the outer energy level than Sodium hence pulls outer energy level more nearer to its nucleus.

Physical properties

 

Soft/Easy to cut: Alkaline earth metals are not soft and easy to cut with a knife like alkali metals. This is because of the decrease in atomic radius of corresponding alkaline earth metal, increases the strength of metallic bond and the packing of the metallic structure. Alkaline earth metals are

(i)ductile(able to form wire/thin long rods)

(ii)malleable(able to be hammered into sheet/long thin plates)

(iii)have high tensile strength(able to be coiled without breaking/ not brittle/withstand stress)

 

Appearance: Alkali earth metals have a shiny grey metallic luster when their surface is freshly polished /scrubbed. The surface slowly tarnishes on exposure to air. This is because the metal surface slowly undergoes oxidation to form an oxide. This oxide layer should be removed before using the alkaline earth metals.

 

Melting and boiling points: Alkaline earth metals have a relatively high melting/ boiling point than alkali metals. This is because alkali metals use only one delocalized electron to form a weaker metallic bond/structure. Alkaline earth metals use two delocalized electrons to form a stronger metallic bond /structure.

The melting and boiling points decrease down the group as the atomic radius/size increase reducing the strength of metallic bond and packing of the metallic structure. e.g.

 

Beryllium has a melting point of 1280oC. Magnesium has a melting point of 650oC.Beryllium has a smaller atomic radius/size than magnesium .The strength of metallic bond and packing of the metallic structure is thus stronger in beryllium.

 

Electrical/thermal conductivity: Alkaline earth metals are good thermal and electrical conductors. The two delocalized valence electrons move randomly within the metallic structure.

Electrical conductivity increase down the group as the atomic radius/size increase making the delocalized outer electrons less attracted to nucleus. Alkaline earth metals are better thermal and electrical conductors than alkali metals because they have more/two outer delocalized electrons.e.g.

Magnesium is a better conductor than sodium because it has more/two delocalized electrons than sodium. The more delocalized electrons the better the electrical conductor.

Calcium is a better conductor than magnesium.

Calcium has bigger/larger atomic radius than magnesium because the delocalized electrons are less attracted to the nucleus of calcium and thus more free /mobile and thus better the electrical conductor

Summary of some physical properties of the 1st three alkaline earth metals

 

Alkaline earth metal Appearance Ease of cutting Melting point

(oC)

Boiling point

(oC)

Conduct- ivity 1st  ionization energy 2nd ionization energy
Beryllium Shiny grey Not

easy

1280 3450 Good 900 1800
Magnesium Shiny grey Not Easy 650 1110 Good 736

 

1450
calcium Shiny grey Not

easy

850 1140 Good 590 970

 

Chemical properties

(i)Reaction with air/oxygen

On exposure to air, the surface of alkaline earth  metals is slowly oxidized to its oxide on prolonged exposure to air.

Example

On exposure to air, the surface of magnesium ribbon is oxidized to form a thin film of Magnesium oxide

.         2Mg(s)         +        O2(g)           ->       2MgO(s)

 

(ii)Burning in air/oxygen

Experiment

Hold a about 2cm length of Magnesium ribbon on a Bunsen flame. Stop heating when it catches fire/start burning.

Caution: Do not look directly at the flame

Put the products of burning into 100cm3 beaker. Add about 5cm3 of distilled water. Swirl. Test the mixture using litmus papers.
Repeat with Calcium

Observations

-Magnesium burns with a bright blindening flame

-White solid /ash produced

-Solid dissolves in water to form a colourless solution

-Blue litmus paper remain blue

-Red litmus paper turns blue

-colourless gas with pungent smell of urine

Explanation

Magnesium burns in air with  a bright blindening flame to form a mixture of Magnesium oxide and Magnesium nitride.

2Mg (s)        +        O2(g)           ->       2MgO(s)

3Mg (s)        +        N2 (g)           ->       Mg3N2 (s)

Magnesium oxide dissolves in water to form magnesium hydroxide.

MgO(s)        +        H2O (l)        ->       Mg(OH)2(aq)

Magnesium nitride dissolves in water to form magnesium hydroxide and produce ammonia gas.

Mg3N2 (s)    +        6H2O(l)       ->       3Mg(OH)2(aq) + 2NH3 (g)

 

Magnesium hydroxide and ammonia are weakly alkaline with pH 8/9/10/11 and turns red litmus paper blue.

 

Calcium burns in air with faint orange/red flame to form a mixture of both Calcium oxide and calcium nitride.

2Ca (s)         +        O2(g)           ->       2CaO(s)

3Ca (s)         +        N2 (g)           ->       Ca3N2 (s)

 

Calcium oxide dissolves in water to form calcium hydroxide.

CaO(s)         +        H2O(l)         ->       Ca(OH)2(aq)

Calcium nitride dissolves in water to form calcium hydroxide and produce ammonia gas.

Ca3N2 (s)     +        6H2O(l)       ->       3Ca(OH)2(aq) + 2NH3 (g)

Calcium hydroxide is also weakly alkaline solution with pH 8/9/10/11 and turns red litmus paper blue.

 

(iii)Reaction with water

 

Experiment

Measure 50 cm3 of distilled water into a beaker.

Scrub/polish with sand paper 1cm length of Magnesium ribbon

Place it in the water. Test the product-mixture with blue and red litmus papers.

Repeat with Calcium metal.

 

Observations

-Surface of magnesium covered by bubbles of colourless gas.

-Colourless solution formed.

-Effervescence/bubbles/fizzing takes place in Calcium.

-Red litmus paper turns blue.

-Blue litmus paper remains blue.

 

Explanations

Magnesium slowly reacts with cold water to form Magnesium hydroxide and bubbles of Hydrogen gas that stick on the surface of the ribbon.

 

Mg(s)  +  2H2O (l)     ->   Mg(OH)2(aq)   +    H2 (g)

Calcium moderately reacts with cold water to form Calcium hydroxide and produce a steady stream of Hydrogen gas.

 

Ca(s)  +  2H2O (l)      ->   Ca(OH)2(aq)   +    H2 (g)

 

(iv)Reaction with water vapour/steam

Experiment

Put some cotton wool soaked in water/wet sand in a long boiling tube.

Coil a well polished magnesium ribbon into the boiling tube.

Ensure the coil touches the side of the boiling tube. Heat the cotton wool/sand slightly then strongly heat the Magnesium ribbon .

Set up of apparatus

 

Observations

-Magnesium glows red hot then burns with a blindening flame.

-Magnesium continues to glow/burning even without more heating.

-White solid/residue.

-colourless gas collected over water.

Explanation

On heating wet sand, steam is generated which drives out the air that would otherwise react with /oxidize the ribbon.

Magnesium burns in steam/water vapour generating enough heat that ensures the reaction goes to completion even without further heating. White Magnesium oxide is formed and hydrogen gas is evolved.

To prevent suck back, the delivery tube should be removed from the water before heating is stopped at the end of the experiment.

Mg(s)  +  H2O (l)       ->   MgO(s)   +    H2 (g)

 

(v)Reaction with chlorine gas.

 

Experiment

Lower slowly  a burning magnesium ribbon/shavings into a gas jar containing Chlorine gas. Repeat with a hot piece of calcium metal.

Observation

-Magnesium continues to burn in chlorine with a bright blindening flame.

-Calcium continues to burn for a short time.

-White solid formed .

-Pale green colour of chlorine fades.

Explanation

Magnesium continues to burn in chlorine gas forming white magnesium oxide solid.

Mg(s)  +  Cl2 (g)        ->     MgCl2 (s)

Calcium burns slightly in chlorine gas to form white calcium oxide solid. Calcium oxide formed coat unreacted Calcium stopping further reaction

Ca(s)  +  Cl2 (g)         ->     CaCl2 (s)

 

(v)Reaction with dilute acids.

Experiment

Place about 4.0cm3 of 0.1M dilute sulphuric(VI)acid into a test tube. Add about 1.0cm length of magnesium ribbon into the test tube. Cover the mouth of the test tube using a thumb. Release the gas and test the gas using a burning splint.

Repeat with about 4.0cm3 of 0.1M dilute hydrochloric/nitric(V) acid.

Repeat with 0.1g of Calcium in a beaker with all the above acid

Caution: Keep distance when using calcium

 

Observation

-Effervescence/fizzing/bubbles with dilute sulphuric(VI) and nitric(V) acids

-Little Effervescence/fizzing/bubbles with calcium and dilute sulphuric(VI) acid.

-Colourless gas produced that extinguishes a burning splint with an explosion/ “pop” sound.

-No gas is produced with Nitric(V)acid.

-Colourless solution is formed.

 

Explanation

Dilute acids react with alkaline earth metals to form a salt and produce hydrogen gas.

Nitric(V)acid is a strong oxidizing agent. It quickly oxidizes the hydrogen produced to water.

Calcium is very reactive with dilute acids and thus a very small piece of very dilute acid should be used.

Chemical equations

Mg(s)  +  H2SO4 (aq)           ->   MgSO4(aq)   +    H2 (g)

Mg(s)  +  2HNO3 (aq)         ->   Mg(NO3)2(aq)   +    H2 (g)

Mg(s) +  2HCl (aq)             ->   MgCl2(aq)         +    H2 (g)

 

Ca(s)   +  H2SO4 (aq)           ->   CaSO4(s)           +    H2 (g)

(insoluble CaSO4(s) coat/cover Ca(s))

Ca(s)   +  2HNO3 (aq)         ->   Ca(NO3)2(aq)    +    H2 (g)

Ca(s)  +  2HCl (aq)             ->   CaCl2(aq)          +    H2 (g)

 

Ba(s)   +  H2SO4 (aq)           ->   BaSO4(s)           +    H2 (g)

(insoluble BaSO4(s) coat/cover Ba(s))

Ba(s)   +  2HNO3 (aq)         ->   Ba(NO3)2(aq)    +    H2 (g)

Ba(s)  +  2HCl (aq)             ->   BaCl2(aq)          +    H2 (g)

 

The table below shows some compounds of some alkaline earth metals

 

  Beryllium Magnesium Calcium Barium
Hydroxide Be(OH)2 Mg(OH)2 Ca(OH)2 Ba(OH)2
Oxide BeO MgO CaO BaO
Sulphide MgS CaS BaS
Chloride BeCl2 MgCl2 CaCl2 BaCl2
Carbonate BeCO3 MgCO3 CaCO3 BaCO3
Nitrate(V) Be(NO3)2 Mg(NO3)2 Ca(NO3)2 Ba(NO3)2
Sulphate(VI) BeSO4 MgSO4 CaSO4 BaSO4
Sulphate(IV) CaSO3 BaSO3
Hydrogen carbonate Mg(HCO3)2 Ca(HCO3)2
Hydrogen sulphate(VI) Mg(HSO4)2 Ca(HSO4)2

 

Some uses of alkaline earth metals include:

(i)Magnesium hydroxide is a non-toxic/poisonous mild base used as an anti acid medicine to relieve stomach acidity.

(ii)Making duralumin. Duralumin is an alloy of Magnesium and aluminium used for making aeroplane bodies because it is light.

(iii) Making plaster of Paris-Calcium sulphate(VI) is used in hospitals to set a fractures bone.

(iii)Making cement-Calcium carbonate is mixed with clay and sand then heated to form cement for construction/building.

(iv)Raise soil pH-Quicklime/calcium oxide is added to acidic soils to neutralize and raise the soil pH in agricultural farms.

(v)As nitrogenous fertilizer-Calcium nitrate(V) is used as an agricultural fertilizer because plants require calcium for proper growth.

(vi)In the blast furnace-Limestone is added to the blast furnace to produce more  reducing agent and remove slag in the blast furnace for extraction of Iron.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(c)Group VII elements: Halogens

 

Group VII elements are called Halogens. They are all non metals. They include:

 

Element Symbol Atomic number Electronicc configuration Charge of ion Valency State at Room Temperature
Fluorine

Chlorine

Bromine

Iodine

Astatine

F

Cl

Br

I

At

9

17

35

53

85

2:7

2:8:7

2:8:18:7

2:8:18:18:7

2:8:18:32:18:7

F

Cl

Br

I

At

1

1

1

1

1

Pale yellow gas

Pale green gas

Red liquid

Grey Solid

Radioactive

 

All halogen atoms have seven electrons in the outer energy level. They acquire/gain one electron in the outer energy level to be stable. They therefore are therefore monovalent .They exist in oxidation state X

The number of energy levels increases down the group from Fluorine   to Astatine. The more the number of energy levels the bigger/larger the atomic size. e.g.

The atomic size/radius of Chlorine is bigger/larger than that of Fluorine because Chlorine has more/3 energy levels than Fluorine (2 energy levels).

 

Atomic radius and ionic radius of Halogens increase down the group as the number of energy levels increases.

 

The atomic radius of Halogens is smaller than the ionic radius. This is because they react by gaining/acquiring extra one electron in the outer energy level. The effective nuclear attraction on the more/extra electrons decreases. The incoming extra electron is also repelled causing the outer energy level to expand to reduce the repulsion and accommodate more electrons.

 

Table showing the atomic and ionic radius of four Halogens

 

Element Symbol Atomic number Atomic radius(nM) Ionic radius(nM)
Fluorine F 9 0.064 0.136
Chlorine Cl 17 0.099 0.181
Bromine Br 35 0.114 0.195
Iodine I 53 0.133 0.216

 

The atomic radius of Chlorine is  0.099nM .The ionic radius of Cl is 0.181nM. This is because Chlorine atom/molecule reacts by gaining/acquiring extra one electrons. The more/extra electrons/energy level experience less effective nuclear attraction /pull towards the nucleus .The outer enegy level expand/increase to reduce the repulsion of the existing and incoming gained /acquired electrons.

Electronegativity

The ease of gaining/acquiring extra electrons is called electronegativity. All halogens are electronegative. Electronegativity decreases as atomic radius increase. This is because the effective nuclear attraction on outer electrons decreases with increase in atomic radius.

The outer electrons experience less nuclear attraction and thus ease of gaining/acquiring extra electrons decrease.

It is measured using Pauling’s scale.

Where Fluorine with Pauling scale 4.0 is the most electronegative element  and thus the highest tendency to acquire/gain extra electron.

 

Table showing the electronegativity of the halogens.

 

Halogen F Cl Br I At
Electronegativity (Pauling scale) 4.0 3.0 2.8 2.5 2.2

 

The electronegativity of the halogens decrease down the group from fluorine to Astatine. This is because atomic radius increases down the group and thus decrease electron – attracting power down the group from fluorine to astatine.

Fluorine is the most electronegative element in the periodic table because it has the small atomic radius.

 

Electron affinity

The minimum amount of energy required to gain/acquire an extra electron by  an atom of element in its gaseous state is called  1st electron affinity. The SI unit of electron affinity is kilojoules per mole/kJmole-1 . Electron affinity depend on atomic radius. The higher the atomic radius, the less effective the nuclear attraction on outer energy level electrons and thus the lower the electron affinity. For halogens the 1st electron affinity decrease down the group as the atomic radius increase and the effective nuclear attraction on outer energy level electrons decrease. Due to its small size/atomic radius Fluorine shows exceptionally low electron affinity. This is because a lot of energy is required to overcome the high repulsion of the existing and incoming electrons.

 

Table showing the election affinity of halogens for the process

X   +    e      ->       X

Halogen F Cl Br I
Electron affinity kJmole-1 -333 -364 -342 -295

 

 

 

The higher the electron affinity the more stable theion.i.e

Cl is a more stable ion than Brbecause it has a more negative / exothermic electron affinity than Br

Electron affinity  is different from:

(i) Ionization energy.

Ionization energy is the energy required to lose/donate an electron in an atom of an element in its gaseous state while electron affinity is the energy required to gain/acquire extra electron by an atom of an element in its gaseous state.

      (ii) Electronegativity.

-Electron affinity is the energy required to gain an electron in an atom of an element in gaseous state. It involves the process:

X(g)   +       e        ->       X(g)

Electronegativity is the ease/tendency of gaining/ acquiring electrons by an element during chemical reactions.

It does not involve use of energy but theoretical arbitrary Pauling’ scale of measurements.

 

Physical properties

 

State at room temperature

Fluorine and Chlorine are gases, Bromine is a liquid and Iodine is a solid. Astatine is radioactive .

All halogens exist as diatomic molecules bonded by strong covalent bond. Each molecule is joined to the other by weak intermolecular forces/ Van-der-waals forces.

Melting/Boiling point

The strength of intermolecular/Van-der-waals forces of attraction increase with increase in molecular size/atomic radius.

Iodine has therefore the largest atomic radius and thus strongest intermolecular forces to make it a solid.

Iodine sublimes when heated to form (caution: highly toxic/poisonous) purple vapour.

This is because Iodine molecules are held together by weak van-der-waals/intermolecular  forces which require little heat energy to break.

Electrical conductivity

All Halogens are  poor conductors of electricity because they have no free delocalized electrons.

Solubility in polar and non-polar solvents

All halogens are soluble in water(polar solvent).

When  a boiling tube containing either chlorine gas or bromine vapour is separately inverted in a beaker containing distilled water and tetrachloromethane (non-polar solvent), the level of solution in boiling tube rises in both water and tetrachloromethane.

This is because halogen are soluble in both polar and non-polar solvents. Solubility of halogens in water/polar solvents decrease down the group. Solubility of halogens in non-polar solvent increase down the group.

The level of water in chlorine is higher than in bromine and the level of tetrachloromethane in chlorine is lower than in bromine.

Caution: Tetrachloromethane , Bromine vapour and Chlorine gas are all highly toxic/poisonous.

 

Table showing the physical properties of Halogens

 

Halogen Formula of molecule Electrical conductivity Solubility

in water

Melting point(oC) Boiling point(oC)
Fluorine F2 Poor Insoluble/soluble in tetrachloromethane -238 -188
Chlorine Cl2 Poor Insoluble/soluble in tetrachloromethane -101 -35
Bromine Br2 Poor Insoluble/soluble in tetrachloromethane 7 59
Iodine I2 Poor Insoluble/soluble in tetrachloromethane 114 sublimes

 

Chemical properties

 

(i)Displacement

 

Experiment

Place separately in test tubes about 5cm3 of sodium chloride, Sodium bromide and Sodium iodide solutions.

Add 5 drops of chlorine water to each  test tube:

Repeat with 5 drops of bromine water instead of chlorine water

Observation

Using Chlorine water

-Yellow colour of chlorine water fades in all test tubes   except with sodium chloride.

-Coloured Solution formed.

Using Bromine water

Yellow colour of bromine water fades in  test tubes containing sodium iodide.

-Coloured Solution formed.

Explanation

The halogens displace each other from their solution. The more electronegative displace the less electronegative from their solution.

  Chlorine is more electronegative than bromine and iodine.

On adding chlorine water, bromine and Iodine are displaced from their solutions by chlorine.

Bromine is more electronegative than iodide but less 6than chlorine.

On adding Bromine water, iodine is displaced from its solution but not chlorine.

 Table showing the displacement of the halogens

(V) means there is displacement (x ) means there is no displacement

                                Halogen ion in

solution

Halogen

F Cl Br I
F2 X      
Cl2 X X    
Br2 X X X  
I2 X X X X

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chemical /ionic equations

With Fluorine

F2(g) +        2NaCl(aq)   ->       2NaF(aq)     +        Cl2(aq)

F2(g) +        2Cl(aq)       ->       2F(aq)         +        Cl2(aq)

 

F2(g) +        2NaBr(aq)   ->       2NaF(aq)     +        Br2(aq)

F2(g) +        2Br(aq)       ->       2F(aq)         +        Br2(aq)

 

F2(g) +        2NaI(aq)     ->       2NaF(aq)     +        I2(aq)

F2(g) +        2I(aq)          ->       2F(aq)         +        I2(aq)

 

With chlorine

Cl2(g)           +        2NaCl(aq)   ->       2NaCl(aq)    +        Br2(aq)

Cl2(g)           +        2Br(aq)       ->       2Cl(aq)       +        Br2(aq)

 

Cl2(g)           +        2NaI(aq)     ->       2NaCl(aq)    +        I2(aq)

Cl2(g)           +        2I(aq)          ->       2Cl(aq)       +        I2(aq)

 

With Bromine

Br2(g)          +        2NaI(aq)     ->       2NaBr(aq)   +        I2(aq)

Br2(g)          +        2I(aq)          ->       2Br(aq)       +        I2(aq)

 

 

 Uses of halogens

  • Florine – manufacture of P.T.F.E (Poly tetra fluoroethene) synthetic fiber.
  • Reduce tooth decay when added in small amounts/quantities in tooth paste.

NB –large small quantities of fluorine /fluoride ions in water cause browning of teeth/flourosis.

  • Hydrogen fluoride is used to engrave words /pictures in glass.

 

  • Bromine – Silver bromide is used to make light sensitive photographic paper/films.

 

  • Iodide – Iodine dissolved in alcohol is used as medicine to kill bacteria in skin cuts. It is called tincture of iodine.

 

The table below to show some compounds of halogens.

 

 

                      Element

Halogen

H Na Mg Al Si C P
F HF NaF MgH2 AlF3 SiF4 CF4 PF3
Cl HCl NaCl MgCl AlCl3 SiCl3 CCl4 PCl3
Br HBr NaBr MgBr2 AlBr3 SiBr4 CBr4 PBr3
I Hl Nal Mgl2 All3 SiI4 Cl2 PBr3

 

 

  • Below is the table showing the bond energy of four halogens.

Bond                           Bond energy k J mole-1

Cl-Cl                                     242

Br-Br                                    193

I-I                                       151

 

  1. What do you understand by the term “bond energy”

Bond energy is the energy required to break/ form one mole of chemical bond

 

  1. Explain the trend in bond Energy of the halogens above:

Decrease down the group from chlorine to Iodine

-Atomic radius increase down the group decreasing the energy required to break the covalent bonds between the larger atom with reduced effective nuclear @ charge an outer energy level that take part in bonding.

 

(c)Group VIII elements: Noble gases

 

Group VIII elements are called Noble gases. They are all non metals. Noble gases occupy about 1.0% of the atmosphere as colourless gaseous mixture. Argon is the most abundant with 0.9%.

They exists as monatomic molecules with very weak van-der-waals /intermolecular forces holding the molecules.

They include:

Element Symbol Atomic number Electron structure State at room temperature
Helium He 2 2: Colourless gas
Neon Ne 10 2:8 Colourless gas
Argon Ar 18 2:8:8 Colourless gas
Krypton Kr 36 2:8:18:8 Colourless gas
Xenon Xe 54 2:8:18:18:8 Colourless gas
Radon Rn 86 2:8:18:32:18:8 Radioctive

All noble gas atoms have a stable duplet(two electrons in the 1st energy level) or octet(eight electrons in other outer energy level)in the outer energy level. They therefore do not acquire/gain extra electron in the outer energy level or donate/lose. They therefore are therefore zerovalent .

The number of energy levels increases down the group from Helium   to Randon. The more the number of energy levels the bigger/larger the atomic size/radius. e.g.

The atomic size/radius of Argon is bigger/larger than that of Neon because Argon has more/3 energy levels than Neon (2 energy levels).

 

Atomic radius noble gases increase down the group as the number of energy levels increases.

The effective nuclear attraction on the outer electrons thus decrease down the group.

 

The noble gases are generally unreactive  because the  outer energy level has the stable octet/duplet. The stable octet/duplet in noble gas atoms lead to a comparatively very high 1st ionization energy. This is because losing /donating an electron from the stable atom require a lot of energy to lose/donate and make it unstable.

As atomic radius increase down the group and the 1st ionization energy decrease, very electronegative elements like Oxygen and Fluorine are able to react and bond with lower members of the noble gases.e.g

Xenon reacts with Fluorine to form a covalent compound XeF6.This is because the outer electrons/energy level if Xenon is far from the nucleus and thus experience less effective nuclear attraction.

 

Noble gases have low melting and boiling  points. This is because they exist as monatomic molecules joined by very weak intermolecular/van-der-waals forces that require very little energy to weaken and form liquid and break to form a gas.

The intermolecular/van-der-waals forces increase down the group as the atomic radius/size increase from Helium to Radon. The melting and boiling points thus increase also down the group.

Noble gases are insoluble in water and are poor conductors of electricity.

 

Element Formula of molecule Electrical conductivity Solubility

in water

Atomic radius(nM) 1st ionization energy Melting point(0C) Boiling

point(0C)

Helium He Poor Insoluble 0.128 2372 -270 -269
Neon Ne Poor Insoluble 0.160 2080 -249 -246
Argon Ar Poor Insoluble 0.192 1520 -189 -186
Krypton Kr Poor Insoluble 0.197 1350 -157 -152
Xenon Xe Poor Insoluble 0.217 1170 -112 -108
Radon Rn Poor Insoluble 0.221 1134 -104 -93

 

Uses of noble gases  

Argon is used in light bulbs to provide an inert environment to prevent oxidation of the bulb filament

Argon is used in arch welding as an insulator.

Neon is used in street  and advertisement light

Helium is mixed with Oxygen during deep sea diving and mountaineering.

Helium is used in weather balloon for meteorological research instead of Hydrogen because it is unreactive/inert.Hydrogen when impure can ignite with an explosion.

Helium is used in making thermometers for measuring very low temperatures.

 

  1. PERIODICITY OF ACROSS THE PERIOD.

(See Chemical bonding and Structure)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

     

 

UPGRADE

CHEMISTRY

                

FORM 2

                 

Periodicity of CHEMICAL FAMILIES

                

 

                

 

 

 

 

 

Comprehensive tutorial notes

 

 MUTHOMI S.G

www.kcselibrary.info

0720096206

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

   PERIODICITY OF CHEMICAL FAMILES

         (Patterns down the group)

 

The number of valence electrons and the number of occupied energy levels in an atom of an element determine the position of an element in the periodic table. i.e

The number of occupied energy levels determine the Period and the valence electrons determine the Group.

Elements in the same group have similar physical and chemical properties. The trends in physical and chemical properties of elements in the same group vary down the group. Elements in the same group thus constitute a chemical family.

 

  • Group I elements: Alkali metals

 

Group I elements are called Alkali metals except Hydrogen which is a non metal. The alkali metals include:

 

Element Symbol Atomic number Electron structure Oxidation state Valency
Lithium Li 3 2:1 Li+ 1
Sodium Na 11 2:8:1 Na+ 1
Potassium K 19 2:8:8:1 K+ 1
Rubidium Rb 37 2:8:18:8:1 Rb+ 1
Caesium Cs 55 2:8:18:18:8:1 Cs+ 1
Francium Fr 87 2:8:18:32:18:8:1 Fr+ 1

 

All alkali metals atom has one electron in the outer energy level. They therefore are monovalent. They donate /lose the outer electron to have oxidation state M+

The number of energy levels increases down the group from Lithium   to Francium. The more the number of energy levels the bigger/larger the atomic size. e.g.

The atomic size of Potassium is bigger/larger than that of sodium because Potassium has more/4 energy levels than sodium (3 energy levels).

 

Atomic and ionic radius

The distance between the centre of the nucleus of an atom and the outermost energy level occupied by electron/s is called atomic radius. Atomic radius is measured in nanometers(n).The higher /bigger the atomic radius the bigger /larger the atomic size.

 

The distance between the centre of the nucleus of an ion and the outermost energy level occupied by electron/s is called ionic radius. Ionic radius is also measured in nanometers(n).The higher /bigger the ionic radius the bigger /larger the size of the ion.

Atomic radius and ionic radius depend on the number of energy levels occupied by electrons. The more the number of energy levels the bigger/larger the atomic /ionic radius. e.g.

The atomic radius of Francium is bigger/larger than that of sodium because Francium has more/7 energy levels than sodium (3 energy levels).

Atomic radius and ionic radius of alkali metals increase down the group as the number of energy levels increases.

 

The atomic radius of alkali metals is bigger than the ionic radius. This is because alkali metals react by losing/donating the outer electron and hence lose the outer energy level.

 

Table showing the atomic and ionic radius of some alkali metals

 

Element Symbol Atomic number Atomic radius(nM) Ionic radius(nM)
Lithium Li 3 0.133 0.060
Sodium Na 11 0.157 0.095
Potassium K 19 0.203 0.133

 

The atomic radius of sodium is  0.157nM .The ionic radius of Na+ is 0.095nM. This is because sodium reacts by donating/losing the outer electrons and hence the outer energy level. The remaining electrons/energy levels experience more effective / greater nuclear attraction/pull towards the nucleus reducing the atomic radius.

 

Electropositivity

The ease of donating/losing electrons is called electropositivity. All alkali metals are electropositive. Electropositivity  increase as atomic radius increase. This is because the effective nuclear attraction on outer electrons decreases with increase in atomic radius. The outer electrons experience less nuclear attraction and can be lost/ donated easily/with ease. Francium is the most electropositive element in the periodic table because it has the highest/biggest atomic radius.

 

Ionization energy

The minimum amount of energy required to remove an electron from an atom of element in its gaseous state is called  1st ionization energy. The SI unit of ionization energy is kilojoules per mole/kJmole-1 .Ionization energy depend on atomic radius. The higher the atomic radius, the less effective the nuclear attraction on outer electrons/energy level and thus the lower the ionization energy. For alkali metals the 1st ionization energy decrease down the group as the atomic radius increase and the effective nuclear attraction on outer energy level electrons decrease.

e.g. The 1st ionization energy of sodium is 496 kJmole-1  while that of potassium is 419 kJmole-1 .This is because atomic radius increase and thus effective nuclear attraction on outer energy level electrons decrease down the group from sodium to Potassium. It requires therefore less energy to donate/lose outer electrons in Potassium than in sodium.

 

Physical properties

Soft/Easy to cut: Alkali metals are soft and easy to cut with a knife. The softness and ease of cutting increase down the group from Lithium to Francium. This is because an increase in atomic radius, decreases the strength of metallic bond and the packing of the metallic structure

Appearance: Alkali metals have a shiny grey metallic luster when freshly cut. The surface rapidly/quickly tarnishes on exposure to air. This is because the metal surface rapidly/quickly reacts with elements of air/oxygen.

Melting and boiling points: Alkali metals have a relatively low melting/boiling point than common metals like Iron. This is because alkali metals use only one delocalized electron to form a weak metallic bond/structure.

Electrical/thermal conductivity: Alkali metals are good thermal and electrical conductors. Metals conduct using the outer mobile delocalized electrons. The delocalized electrons move randomly within the metallic structure.

 

          Summary of some physical properties of the 1st three alkali metals

 

Alkali metal Appearance Ease of cutting Melting point

(oC)

Boiling point

(oC)

Conductivity 1st  ionization energy
Lithium Silvery white Not easy 180 1330 Good 520
Sodium Shiny grey Easy 98 890 Good 496

 

Potassium Shiny grey Very easy 64 774 Good 419

 

Chemical properties

(i)Reaction with air/oxygen

On exposure to air, alkali metals reacts with the elements in the air.

Example

On exposure to air, Sodium first reacts with Oxygen to form sodium oxide.

4Na(s)         +        O2(g)           ->       2Na2O(s)

The sodium oxide formed further reacts with water/moisture in the air to form sodium hydroxide solution.

            Na2O(s)      +       H2O(l)         ->      2NaOH(aq)

Sodium hydroxide solution reacts with carbon(IV)oxide in the air to form sodium carbonate.

2NaOH(aq)   +      CO2(g)        ->   Na2CO3(g)    +   H2O(l)

 

(ii)Burning in air/oxygen

Lithium burns in air with a crimson/deep red flame to form Lithium oxide

4Li (s)          +        O2(g)           ->       2Li2O(s)

Sodium burns in air with a yellow flame to form sodium oxide

4Na (s)        +        O2(g)           ->       2Na2O(s)

Sodium burns in oxygen with a yellow flame to form sodium peroxide

2Na (s)        +        O2(g)           ->       Na2O2 (s)

Potassium burns in air with a lilac/purple flame to form potassium oxide

4K (s)          +        O2(g)           ->       2K2O (s)

 

(iii) Reaction with water:

 

Experiment

Measure 500 cm3 of water into a beaker.

Put three drops of phenolphthalein indicator.

Put about 0.5g of Lithium metal into the beaker.

Determine the pH of final product

Repeat the experiment using about 0.1 g of Sodium and Potassium.

Caution: Keep a distance

 

Observations

 

 

 

 

 

 

Alkali metal Observations Comparative speed/rate of the reaction
Lithium -Metal floats in water

-rapid effervescence/fizzing/bubbling

-colourless gas produced (that extinguishes burning splint with explosion /“pop” sound)

-resulting solution turn phenolphthalein indicator pink

-pH of solution = 12/13/14

 

Moderately vigorous
Sodium -Metal floats in water

-very rapid effervescence /fizzing /bubbling

-colourless gas produced (that extinguishes burning splint with explosion /“pop” sound)

-resulting solution turn phenolphthalein indicator pink

-pH of solution = 12/13/14

Very vigorous
Potassium -Metal floats in water

-explosive effervescence /fizzing /bubbling

-colourless gas produced (that extinguishes burning splint with explosion /“pop” sound)

-resulting solution turn phenolphthalein indicator pink

-pH of solution = 12/13/14

 

Explosive/burst into flames

 

Explanation

Alkali metals are less dense than water. They therefore float in water.They react with water to form a strongly alkaline solution of their hydroxides and producing hydrogen gas. The rate of this reaction increase down the group. i.e. Potassium is more reactive than sodium .Sodium is more reactive than Lithium.

The reactivity increases as electropositivity increases of the alkali increases. This is because as the atomic radius increases , the ease of donating/losing outer electron  increase during chemical reactions.

 

Chemical equations

2Li(s)           +        2H2O(l)       ->       2LiOH(aq)   +        H2(g)

2Na(s)         +        2H2O(l)       ->       2NaOH(aq)  +        H2(g)

2K(s)           +        2H2O(l)       ->       2KOH(aq)   +        H2(g)

2Rb(s)         +        2H2O(l)       ->       2RbOH(aq)  +        H2(g)

2Cs(s)          +        2H2O(l)       ->       2CsOH(aq)  +        H2(g)

2Fr(s)          +        2H2O(l)       ->       2FrOH(aq)   +        H2(g)

Reactivity increase down the group

 

(iv) Reaction with chlorine:

 

Experiment

Cut about 0.5g of sodium into a deflagrating spoon with a lid cover. Introduce it on a Bunsen flame until it catches fire. Quickly and carefully lower it into a gas jar containing dry chlorine to cover the gas jar.

Repeat with about 0.5g of Lithium.

Caution: This experiment should be done in fume chamber because chlorine is poisonous /toxic.

 

Observation

Sodium metal continues to burn with a yellow flame forming white solid/fumes.

Lithium metal continues to burn with a crimson flame forming white solid / fumes.

Alkali metal react with chlorine gas to form the corresponding metal chlorides. The reactivity increase as electropositivity increase down the group from Lithium to Francium.The ease of donating/losing the outer electrons increase as the atomic radius increase and the outer electron is less attracted to the nucleus.

 

Chemical equations

2Li(s)           +        Cl2(g)           ->       2LiCl(s)

2Na(s)         +        Cl2(g)           ->       2NaCl(s)

2K(s)           +        Cl2(g)           ->       2KCl(s)

2Rb(s)         +        Cl2(g)           ->       2RbCl(s)

2Cs(s)          +        Cl2(g)           ->       2CsCl(s)

2Fr(s)          +        Cl2(g)           ->       2FrCl(s)                                                                                       Reactivity increase down the group

 

 

 

 

The table below shows some compounds of the 1st three alkali metals

 

  Lithium sodium Potassium
Hydroxide LiOH NaOH KOH
Oxide Li2O Na2O K2O
Sulphide Li2S Na2S K2S
Chloride LiCl NaCl KCl
Carbonate Li2CO3 Na2CO3 K2CO3
Nitrate(V) LiNO3 NaNO3 KNO3
Nitrate(III) NaNO2 KNO2
Sulphate(VI) Li2SO4 Na2SO4 K2SO4
Sulphate(IV) Na2SO3 K2SO3
Hydrogen carbonate NaHCO3 KHCO3
Hydrogen sulphate(VI) NaHSO4 KHSO4
Hydrogen sulphate(IV) NaHSO3 KHSO3
Phosphate Na3PO4 K3PO4
Manganate(VI) NaMnO4 KMnO4
Dichromate(VI) Na2Cr2O7 K2Cr2O7
Chromate(VI) Na2CrO4 K2CrO4

 

Some uses of alkali metals include:

(i)Sodium is used in making sodium cyanide for extracting gold from gold ore.

(ii)Sodium chloride is used in seasoning food.

(iii)Molten mixture of sodium and potassium is used as coolant in nuclear reactors.

(iv)Sodium is used in making sodium hydroxide used in making soapy and soapless detergents.

(v)Sodium is used as a reducing agent for the extraction of titanium from Titanium(IV)chloride.

(vi)Lithium is used in making special high strength glasses

(vii)Lithium compounds are used to make dry cells in mobile phones and computer laptops.

 

Group II elements: Alkaline earth metals

 

Group II elements are called Alkaline earth metals . The alkaline earth metals include:

 

 

 

 

 

Element Symbol Atomic number Electron structure Oxidation state Valency
Beryllium Be 4 2:2 Be2+ 2
Magnesium Mg 12 2:8:2 Mg2+ 2
Calcium Ca 20 2:8:8:2 Ca2+ 2
Strontium Sr 38 2:8:18:8:2 Sr2+ 2
Barium Ba 56 2:8:18:18:8:2 Ba2+ 2
Radium Ra 88 2:8:18:32:18:8:2 Ra2+ 2

 

All alkaline earth metal atoms have two electrons in the outer energy level. They therefore are divalent. They donate /lose the two outer electrons to have oxidation state M2+

The number of energy levels increases down the group from Beryllium   to Radium. The more the number of energy levels the bigger/larger the atomic size. e.g.

The atomic size/radius of Calcium is bigger/larger than that of Magnesium because Calcium has more/4 energy levels than Magnesium (3 energy levels).

 

Atomic radius and ionic radius of alkaline earth metals increase down the group as the number of energy levels increases.

 

The atomic radius of alkaline earth metals is bigger than the ionic radius. This is because they react by losing/donating the two outer electrons and hence lose the outer energy level.

 

Table showing the atomic and ionic radius of the 1st three alkaline earth metals

 

Element Symbol Atomic number Atomic radius(nM) Ionic radius(nM)
Beryllium Be 4 0.089 0.031
Magnesium Mg 12 0.136 0.065
Calcium Ca 20 0.174 0.099

The atomic radius of Magnesium is  0.136nM .The ionic radius of Mg2+ is 0.065nM. This is because Magnesium reacts by donating/losing the two outer electrons and hence the outer energy level. The remaining electrons/energy levels experience more effective / greater nuclear attraction/pull towards the nucleus reducing the atomic radius.

 

 

Electropositivity

All alkaline earth metals are also electropositive like alkali metals. The electropositivity increase with increase in atomic radius/size. Calcium is more electropositive than Magnesium. This is because the effective nuclear attraction on outer electrons decreases with increase in atomic radius. The two outer electrons in calcium experience less nuclear attraction and can be lost/ donated easily/with ease because of  the higher/bigger atomic radius.

 

Ionization energy

For alkaline earth metals the 1st ionization energy decrease down the group as the atomic radius increase and the effective nuclear attraction on outer energy level electrons decrease.

e.g. The 1st ionization energy of Magnesium  is 900 kJmole-1  while that of Calcium is 590 kJmole-1 .This is because atomic radius increase and thus effective nuclear attraction on outer energy level electrons decrease down the group from magnesium to calcium.

It requires therefore less energy to donate/lose outer electron in calcium than in magnesium.

 

The minimum amount of energy required to remove a second electron from an ion of an element in its gaseous state is called the 2nd ionization energy.

The 2nd ionization energy is always higher /bigger than  the 1st  ionization energy.

This because once an electron is donated /lost form an atom, the overall effective nuclear attraction on the remaining electrons/energy level increase. Removing a second electron from the ion require therefore more energy than the first electron.

The atomic radius of alkali metals is higher/bigger than that of alkaline earth metals.This is because across/along the period from left to right there is an increase in nuclear charge from additional number of protons and still additional number of electrons entering the same energy level. Increase in nuclear charge increases the effective nuclear attraction on the outer energy level which pulls it closer to the nucleus. e.g.

Atomic radius of Sodium (0.157nM) is higher than that of Magnesium (0.137nM). This is because Magnesium has more effective nuclear attraction on the outer energy level than Sodium hence pulls outer energy level more nearer to its nucleus.

Physical properties

 

Soft/Easy to cut: Alkaline earth metals are not soft and easy to cut with a knife like alkali metals. This is because of the decrease in atomic radius of corresponding alkaline earth metal, increases the strength of metallic bond and the packing of the metallic structure. Alkaline earth metals are

(i)ductile(able to form wire/thin long rods)

(ii)malleable(able to be hammered into sheet/long thin plates)

(iii)have high tensile strength(able to be coiled without breaking/ not brittle/withstand stress)

 

Appearance: Alkali earth metals have a shiny grey metallic luster when their surface is freshly polished /scrubbed. The surface slowly tarnishes on exposure to air. This is because the metal surface slowly undergoes oxidation to form an oxide. This oxide layer should be removed before using the alkaline earth metals.

 

Melting and boiling points: Alkaline earth metals have a relatively high melting/ boiling point than alkali metals. This is because alkali metals use only one delocalized electron to form a weaker metallic bond/structure. Alkaline earth metals use two delocalized electrons to form a stronger metallic bond /structure.

The melting and boiling points decrease down the group as the atomic radius/size increase reducing the strength of metallic bond and packing of the metallic structure. e.g.

 

Beryllium has a melting point of 1280oC. Magnesium has a melting point of 650oC.Beryllium has a smaller atomic radius/size than magnesium .The strength of metallic bond and packing of the metallic structure is thus stronger in beryllium.

 

Electrical/thermal conductivity: Alkaline earth metals are good thermal and electrical conductors. The two delocalized valence electrons move randomly within the metallic structure.

Electrical conductivity increase down the group as the atomic radius/size increase making the delocalized outer electrons less attracted to nucleus. Alkaline earth metals are better thermal and electrical conductors than alkali metals because they have more/two outer delocalized electrons.e.g.

Magnesium is a better conductor than sodium because it has more/two delocalized electrons than sodium. The more delocalized electrons the better the electrical conductor.

Calcium is a better conductor than magnesium.

Calcium has bigger/larger atomic radius than magnesium because the delocalized electrons are less attracted to the nucleus of calcium and thus more free /mobile and thus better the electrical conductor

Summary of some physical properties of the 1st three alkaline earth metals

 

Alkaline earth metal Appearance Ease of cutting Melting point

(oC)

Boiling point

(oC)

Conduct- ivity 1st  ionization energy 2nd ionization energy
Beryllium Shiny grey Not

easy

1280 3450 Good 900 1800
Magnesium Shiny grey Not Easy 650 1110 Good 736

 

1450
calcium Shiny grey Not

easy

850 1140 Good 590 970

 

Chemical properties

(i)Reaction with air/oxygen

On exposure to air, the surface of alkaline earth  metals is slowly oxidized to its oxide on prolonged exposure to air.

Example

On exposure to air, the surface of magnesium ribbon is oxidized to form a thin film of Magnesium oxide

.         2Mg(s)         +        O2(g)           ->       2MgO(s)

 

(ii)Burning in air/oxygen

Experiment

Hold a about 2cm length of Magnesium ribbon on a Bunsen flame. Stop heating when it catches fire/start burning.

Caution: Do not look directly at the flame

Put the products of burning into 100cm3 beaker. Add about 5cm3 of distilled water. Swirl. Test the mixture using litmus papers.
Repeat with Calcium

Observations

-Magnesium burns with a bright blindening flame

-White solid /ash produced

-Solid dissolves in water to form a colourless solution

-Blue litmus paper remain blue

-Red litmus paper turns blue

-colourless gas with pungent smell of urine

Explanation

Magnesium burns in air with  a bright blindening flame to form a mixture of Magnesium oxide and Magnesium nitride.

2Mg (s)        +        O2(g)           ->       2MgO(s)

3Mg (s)        +        N2 (g)           ->       Mg3N2 (s)

Magnesium oxide dissolves in water to form magnesium hydroxide.

MgO(s)        +        H2O (l)        ->       Mg(OH)2(aq)

Magnesium nitride dissolves in water to form magnesium hydroxide and produce ammonia gas.

Mg3N2 (s)    +        6H2O(l)       ->       3Mg(OH)2(aq) + 2NH3 (g)

 

Magnesium hydroxide and ammonia are weakly alkaline with pH 8/9/10/11 and turns red litmus paper blue.

 

Calcium burns in air with faint orange/red flame to form a mixture of both Calcium oxide and calcium nitride.

2Ca (s)         +        O2(g)           ->       2CaO(s)

3Ca (s)         +        N2 (g)           ->       Ca3N2 (s)

 

Calcium oxide dissolves in water to form calcium hydroxide.

CaO(s)         +        H2O(l)         ->       Ca(OH)2(aq)

Calcium nitride dissolves in water to form calcium hydroxide and produce ammonia gas.

Ca3N2 (s)     +        6H2O(l)       ->       3Ca(OH)2(aq) + 2NH3 (g)

Calcium hydroxide is also weakly alkaline solution with pH 8/9/10/11 and turns red litmus paper blue.

 

(iii)Reaction with water

 

Experiment

Measure 50 cm3 of distilled water into a beaker.

Scrub/polish with sand paper 1cm length of Magnesium ribbon

Place it in the water. Test the product-mixture with blue and red litmus papers.

Repeat with Calcium metal.

 

Observations

-Surface of magnesium covered by bubbles of colourless gas.

-Colourless solution formed.

-Effervescence/bubbles/fizzing takes place in Calcium.

-Red litmus paper turns blue.

-Blue litmus paper remains blue.

 

Explanations

Magnesium slowly reacts with cold water to form Magnesium hydroxide and bubbles of Hydrogen gas that stick on the surface of the ribbon.

 

Mg(s)  +  2H2O (l)     ->   Mg(OH)2(aq)   +    H2 (g)

Calcium moderately reacts with cold water to form Calcium hydroxide and produce a steady stream of Hydrogen gas.

 

Ca(s)  +  2H2O (l)      ->   Ca(OH)2(aq)   +    H2 (g)

 

(iv)Reaction with water vapour/steam

Experiment

Put some cotton wool soaked in water/wet sand in a long boiling tube.

Coil a well polished magnesium ribbon into the boiling tube.

Ensure the coil touches the side of the boiling tube. Heat the cotton wool/sand slightly then strongly heat the Magnesium ribbon .

Set up of apparatus

 

 

Observations

-Magnesium glows red hot then burns with a blindening flame.

-Magnesium continues to glow/burning even without more heating.

-White solid/residue.

-colourless gas collected over water.

Explanation

On heating wet sand, steam is generated which drives out the air that would otherwise react with /oxidize the ribbon.

Magnesium burns in steam/water vapour generating enough heat that ensures the reaction goes to completion even without further heating. White Magnesium oxide is formed and hydrogen gas is evolved.

To prevent suck back, the delivery tube should be removed from the water before heating is stopped at the end of the experiment.

Mg(s)  +  H2O (l)       ->   MgO(s)   +    H2 (g)

 

(v)Reaction with chlorine gas.

 

Experiment

Lower slowly  a burning magnesium ribbon/shavings into a gas jar containing Chlorine gas. Repeat with a hot piece of calcium metal.

Observation

-Magnesium continues to burn in chlorine with a bright blindening flame.

-Calcium continues to burn for a short time.

-White solid formed .

-Pale green colour of chlorine fades.

Explanation

Magnesium continues to burn in chlorine gas forming white magnesium oxide solid.

Mg(s)  +  Cl2 (g)        ->     MgCl2 (s)

Calcium burns slightly in chlorine gas to form white calcium oxide solid. Calcium oxide formed coat unreacted Calcium stopping further reaction

Ca(s)  +  Cl2 (g)         ->     CaCl2 (s)

 

(v)Reaction with dilute acids.

Experiment

Place about 4.0cm3 of 0.1M dilute sulphuric(VI)acid into a test tube. Add about 1.0cm length of magnesium ribbon into the test tube. Cover the mouth of the test tube using a thumb. Release the gas and test the gas using a burning splint.

Repeat with about 4.0cm3 of 0.1M dilute hydrochloric/nitric(V) acid.

Repeat with 0.1g of Calcium in a beaker with all the above acid

Caution: Keep distance when using calcium

 

Observation

-Effervescence/fizzing/bubbles with dilute sulphuric(VI) and nitric(V) acids

-Little Effervescence/fizzing/bubbles with calcium and dilute sulphuric(VI) acid.

-Colourless gas produced that extinguishes a burning splint with an explosion/ “pop” sound.

-No gas is produced with Nitric(V)acid.

-Colourless solution is formed.

 

Explanation

Dilute acids react with alkaline earth metals to form a salt and produce hydrogen gas.

Nitric(V)acid is a strong oxidizing agent. It quickly oxidizes the hydrogen produced to water.

Calcium is very reactive with dilute acids and thus a very small piece of very dilute acid should be used.

Chemical equations

Mg(s)  +  H2SO4 (aq)           ->   MgSO4(aq)   +    H2 (g)

Mg(s)  +  2HNO3 (aq)         ->   Mg(NO3)2(aq)   +    H2 (g)

Mg(s) +  2HCl (aq)             ->   MgCl2(aq)         +    H2 (g)

 

Ca(s)   +  H2SO4 (aq)           ->   CaSO4(s)           +    H2 (g)

(insoluble CaSO4(s) coat/cover Ca(s))

Ca(s)   +  2HNO3 (aq)         ->   Ca(NO3)2(aq)    +    H2 (g)

Ca(s)  +  2HCl (aq)             ->   CaCl2(aq)          +    H2 (g)

 

Ba(s)   +  H2SO4 (aq)           ->   BaSO4(s)           +    H2 (g)

(insoluble BaSO4(s) coat/cover Ba(s))

Ba(s)   +  2HNO3 (aq)         ->   Ba(NO3)2(aq)    +    H2 (g)

Ba(s)  +  2HCl (aq)             ->   BaCl2(aq)          +    H2 (g)

 

The table below shows some compounds of some alkaline earth metals

 

  Beryllium Magnesium Calcium Barium
Hydroxide Be(OH)2 Mg(OH)2 Ca(OH)2 Ba(OH)2
Oxide BeO MgO CaO BaO
Sulphide MgS CaS BaS
Chloride BeCl2 MgCl2 CaCl2 BaCl2
Carbonate BeCO3 MgCO3 CaCO3 BaCO3
Nitrate(V) Be(NO3)2 Mg(NO3)2 Ca(NO3)2 Ba(NO3)2
Sulphate(VI) BeSO4 MgSO4 CaSO4 BaSO4
Sulphate(IV) CaSO3 BaSO3
Hydrogen carbonate Mg(HCO3)2 Ca(HCO3)2
Hydrogen sulphate(VI) Mg(HSO4)2 Ca(HSO4)2

 

Some uses of alkaline earth metals include:

(i)Magnesium hydroxide is a non-toxic/poisonous mild base used as an anti acid medicine to relieve stomach acidity.

(ii)Making duralumin. Duralumin is an alloy of Magnesium and aluminium used for making aeroplane bodies because it is light.

(iii) Making plaster of Paris-Calcium sulphate(VI) is used in hospitals to set a fractures bone.

(iii)Making cement-Calcium carbonate is mixed with clay and sand then heated to form cement for construction/building.

(iv)Raise soil pH-Quicklime/calcium oxide is added to acidic soils to neutralize and raise the soil pH in agricultural farms.

(v)As nitrogenous fertilizer-Calcium nitrate(V) is used as an agricultural fertilizer because plants require calcium for proper growth.

(vi)In the blast furnace-Limestone is added to the blast furnace to produce more  reducing agent and remove slag in the blast furnace for extraction of Iron.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(c)Group VII elements: Halogens

 

Group VII elements are called Halogens. They are all non metals. They include:

 

Element Symbol Atomic number Electronicc configuration Charge of ion Valency State at Room Temperature
Fluorine

Chlorine

Bromine

Iodine

Astatine

F

Cl

Br

I

At

9

17

35

53

85

2:7

2:8:7

2:8:18:7

2:8:18:18:7

2:8:18:32:18:7

F

Cl

Br

I

At

1

1

1

1

1

Pale yellow gas

Pale green gas

Red liquid

Grey Solid

Radioactive

 

All halogen atoms have seven electrons in the outer energy level. They acquire/gain one electron in the outer energy level to be stable. They therefore are therefore monovalent .They exist in oxidation state X

The number of energy levels increases down the group from Fluorine   to Astatine. The more the number of energy levels the bigger/larger the atomic size. e.g.

The atomic size/radius of Chlorine is bigger/larger than that of Fluorine because Chlorine has more/3 energy levels than Fluorine (2 energy levels).

 

Atomic radius and ionic radius of Halogens increase down the group as the number of energy levels increases.

 

The atomic radius of Halogens is smaller than the ionic radius. This is because they react by gaining/acquiring extra one electron in the outer energy level. The effective nuclear attraction on the more/extra electrons decreases. The incoming extra electron is also repelled causing the outer energy level to expand to reduce the repulsion and accommodate more electrons.

 

Table showing the atomic and ionic radius of four Halogens

 

Element Symbol Atomic number Atomic radius(nM) Ionic radius(nM)
Fluorine F 9 0.064 0.136
Chlorine Cl 17 0.099 0.181
Bromine Br 35 0.114 0.195
Iodine I 53 0.133 0.216

 

The atomic radius of Chlorine is  0.099nM .The ionic radius of Cl is 0.181nM. This is because Chlorine atom/molecule reacts by gaining/acquiring extra one electrons. The more/extra electrons/energy level experience less effective nuclear attraction /pull towards the nucleus .The outer enegy level expand/increase to reduce the repulsion of the existing and incoming gained /acquired electrons.

Electronegativity

The ease of gaining/acquiring extra electrons is called electronegativity. All halogens are electronegative. Electronegativity decreases as atomic radius increase. This is because the effective nuclear attraction on outer electrons decreases with increase in atomic radius.

The outer electrons experience less nuclear attraction and thus ease of gaining/acquiring extra electrons decrease.

It is measured using Pauling’s scale.

Where Fluorine with Pauling scale 4.0 is the most electronegative element  and thus the highest tendency to acquire/gain extra electron.

 

Table showing the electronegativity of the halogens.

 

Halogen F Cl Br I At
Electronegativity (Pauling scale) 4.0 3.0 2.8 2.5 2.2

 

The electronegativity of the halogens decrease down the group from fluorine to Astatine. This is because atomic radius increases down the group and thus decrease electron – attracting power down the group from fluorine to astatine.

Fluorine is the most electronegative element in the periodic table because it has the small atomic radius.

 

Electron affinity

The minimum amount of energy required to gain/acquire an extra electron by  an atom of element in its gaseous state is called  1st electron affinity. The SI unit of electron affinity is kilojoules per mole/kJmole-1 . Electron affinity depend on atomic radius. The higher the atomic radius, the less effective the nuclear attraction on outer energy level electrons and thus the lower the electron affinity. For halogens the 1st electron affinity decrease down the group as the atomic radius increase and the effective nuclear attraction on outer energy level electrons decrease. Due to its small size/atomic radius Fluorine shows exceptionally low electron affinity. This is because a lot of energy is required to overcome the high repulsion of the existing and incoming electrons.

 

Table showing the election affinity of halogens for the process

X   +    e      ->       X

Halogen F Cl Br I
Electron affinity kJmole-1 -333 -364 -342 -295

 

 

 

The higher the electron affinity the more stable theion.i.e

Cl is a more stable ion than Brbecause it has a more negative / exothermic electron affinity than Br

Electron affinity  is different from:

(i) Ionization energy.

Ionization energy is the energy required to lose/donate an electron in an atom of an element in its gaseous state while electron affinity is the energy required to gain/acquire extra electron by an atom of an element in its gaseous state.

      (ii) Electronegativity.

-Electron affinity is the energy required to gain an electron in an atom of an element in gaseous state. It involves the process:

X(g)   +       e        ->       X(g)

Electronegativity is the ease/tendency of gaining/ acquiring electrons by an element during chemical reactions.

It does not involve use of energy but theoretical arbitrary Pauling’ scale of measurements.

 

Physical properties

 

State at room temperature

Fluorine and Chlorine are gases, Bromine is a liquid and Iodine is a solid. Astatine is radioactive .

All halogens exist as diatomic molecules bonded by strong covalent bond. Each molecule is joined to the other by weak intermolecular forces/ Van-der-waals forces.

Melting/Boiling point

The strength of intermolecular/Van-der-waals forces of attraction increase with increase in molecular size/atomic radius.

Iodine has therefore the largest atomic radius and thus strongest intermolecular forces to make it a solid.

Iodine sublimes when heated to form (caution: highly toxic/poisonous) purple vapour.

This is because Iodine molecules are held together by weak van-der-waals/intermolecular  forces which require little heat energy to break.

Electrical conductivity

All Halogens are  poor conductors of electricity because they have no free delocalized electrons.

Solubility in polar and non-polar solvents

All halogens are soluble in water(polar solvent).

When  a boiling tube containing either chlorine gas or bromine vapour is separately inverted in a beaker containing distilled water and tetrachloromethane (non-polar solvent), the level of solution in boiling tube rises in both water and tetrachloromethane.

This is because halogen are soluble in both polar and non-polar solvents. Solubility of halogens in water/polar solvents decrease down the group. Solubility of halogens in non-polar solvent increase down the group.

The level of water in chlorine is higher than in bromine and the level of tetrachloromethane in chlorine is lower than in bromine.

Caution: Tetrachloromethane , Bromine vapour and Chlorine gas are all highly toxic/poisonous.

 

 

 

 

Table showing the physical properties of Halogens

 

Halogen Formula of molecule Electrical conductivity Solubility

in water

Melting point(oC) Boiling point(oC)
Fluorine F2 Poor Insoluble/soluble in tetrachloromethane -238 -188
Chlorine Cl2 Poor Insoluble/soluble in tetrachloromethane -101 -35
Bromine Br2 Poor Insoluble/soluble in tetrachloromethane 7 59
Iodine I2 Poor Insoluble/soluble in tetrachloromethane 114 sublimes

 

Chemical properties

 

(i)Displacement

 

Experiment

Place separately in test tubes about 5cm3 of sodium chloride, Sodium bromide and Sodium iodide solutions.

Add 5 drops of chlorine water to each  test tube:

Repeat with 5 drops of bromine water instead of chlorine water

Observation

Using Chlorine water

-Yellow colour of chlorine water fades in all test tubes   except with sodium chloride.

-Coloured Solution formed.

Using Bromine water

Yellow colour of bromine water fades in  test tubes containing sodium iodide.

-Coloured Solution formed.

Explanation

The halogens displace each other from their solution. The more electronegative displace the less electronegative from their solution.

  Chlorine is more electronegative than bromine and iodine.

On adding chlorine water, bromine and Iodine are displaced from their solutions by chlorine.

Bromine is more electronegative than iodide but less 6than chlorine.

On adding Bromine water, iodine is displaced from its solution but not chlorine.

 Table showing the displacement of the halogens

(V) means there is displacement (x ) means there is no displacement

                                Halogen ion in

solution

Halogen

F Cl Br I
F2 X      
Cl2 X X    
Br2 X X X  
I2 X X X X

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chemical /ionic equations

With Fluorine

F2(g) +        2NaCl(aq)   ->       2NaF(aq)     +        Cl2(aq)

F2(g) +        2Cl(aq)       ->       2F(aq)         +        Cl2(aq)

 

F2(g) +        2NaBr(aq)   ->       2NaF(aq)     +        Br2(aq)

F2(g) +        2Br(aq)       ->       2F(aq)         +        Br2(aq)

 

F2(g) +        2NaI(aq)     ->       2NaF(aq)     +        I2(aq)

F2(g) +        2I(aq)          ->       2F(aq)         +        I2(aq)

 

With chlorine

Cl2(g)           +        2NaCl(aq)   ->       2NaCl(aq)    +        Br2(aq)

Cl2(g)           +        2Br(aq)       ->       2Cl(aq)       +        Br2(aq)

 

Cl2(g)           +        2NaI(aq)     ->       2NaCl(aq)    +        I2(aq)

Cl2(g)           +        2I(aq)          ->       2Cl(aq)       +        I2(aq)

 

With Bromine

Br2(g)          +        2NaI(aq)     ->       2NaBr(aq)   +        I2(aq)

Br2(g)          +        2I(aq)          ->       2Br(aq)       +        I2(aq)

 

 

 

 

 

 Uses of halogens

  • Florine – manufacture of P.T.F.E (Poly tetra fluoroethene) synthetic fiber.
  • Reduce tooth decay when added in small amounts/quantities in tooth paste.

NB –large small quantities of fluorine /fluoride ions in water cause browning of teeth/flourosis.

  • Hydrogen fluoride is used to engrave words /pictures in glass.

 

  • Bromine – Silver bromide is used to make light sensitive photographic paper/films.

 

  • Iodide – Iodine dissolved in alcohol is used as medicine to kill bacteria in skin cuts. It is called tincture of iodine.

 

The table below to show some compounds of halogens.

 

 

                      Element

Halogen

H Na Mg Al Si C P
F HF NaF MgF2 AlF3 SiF4 CF4 PF3
Cl HCl NaCl MgCl2 AlCl3 SiCl 4 CCl4 PCl3
Br HBr NaBr MgBr2 AlBr3 SiBr4 CBr4 PBr3
I Hl Nal Mgl2 All3 SiI4 C l 4 PBr3

 

 

  • Below is the table showing the bond energy of four halogens.

Bond                           Bond energy k J mole-1

Cl-Cl                                     242

Br-Br                                    193

I-I                                       151

 

  • What do you understand by the term “bond energy”

Bond energy is the energy required to break/ form one mole of chemical bond

 

  1. Explain the trend in bond Energy of the halogens above:

Decrease down the group from chlorine to Iodine

-Atomic radius increase down the group decreasing the energy required to break the covalent bonds between the larger atom with reduced effective nuclear @ charge an outer energy level that take part in bonding.

 

(c)Group VIII elements: Noble gases

 

Group VIII elements are called Noble gases. They are all non metals. Noble gases occupy about 1.0% of the atmosphere as colourless gaseous mixture. Argon is the most abundant with 0.9%.

They exists as monatomic molecules with very weak van-der-waals /intermolecular forces holding the molecules.

They include:

Element Symbol Atomic number Electron structure State at room temperature
Helium He 2 2: Colourless gas
Neon Ne 10 2:8 Colourless gas
Argon Ar 18 2:8:8 Colourless gas
Krypton Kr 36 2:8:18:8 Colourless gas
Xenon Xe 54 2:8:18:18:8 Colourless gas
Radon Rn 86 2:8:18:32:18:8 Radioctive

All noble gas atoms have a stable duplet(two electrons in the 1st energy level) or octet(eight electrons in other outer energy level)in the outer energy level. They therefore do not acquire/gain extra electron in the outer energy level or donate/lose. They therefore are therefore zerovalent .

The number of energy levels increases down the group from Helium   to Randon. The more the number of energy levels the bigger/larger the atomic size/radius. e.g.

The atomic size/radius of Argon is bigger/larger than that of Neon because Argon has more/3 energy levels than Neon (2 energy levels).

 

Atomic radius noble gases increase down the group as the number of energy levels increases.

The effective nuclear attraction on the outer electrons thus decrease down the group.

 

The noble gases are generally unreactive  because the  outer energy level has the stable octet/duplet. The stable octet/duplet in noble gas atoms lead to a comparatively very high 1st ionization energy. This is because losing /donating an electron from the stable atom require a lot of energy to lose/donate and make it unstable.

As atomic radius increase down the group and the 1st ionization energy decrease, very electronegative elements like Oxygen and Fluorine are able to react and bond with lower members of the noble gases.e.g

Xenon reacts with Fluorine to form a covalent compound XeF6.This is because the outer electrons/energy level if Xenon is far from the nucleus and thus experience less effective nuclear attraction.

 

Noble gases have low melting and boiling  points. This is because they exist as monatomic molecules joined by very weak intermolecular/van-der-waals forces that require very little energy to weaken and form liquid and break to form a gas.

The intermolecular/van-der-waals forces increase down the group as the atomic radius/size increase from Helium to Radon. The melting and boiling points thus increase also down the group.

Noble gases are insoluble in water and are poor conductors of electricity.

 

Element Formula of molecule Electrical conductivity Solubility

in water

Atomic radius(nM) 1st ionization energy Melting point(0C) Boiling

point(0C)

Helium He Poor Insoluble 0.128 2372 -270 -269
Neon Ne Poor Insoluble 0.160 2080 -249 -246
Argon Ar Poor Insoluble 0.192 1520 -189 -186
Krypton Kr Poor Insoluble 0.197 1350 -157 -152
Xenon Xe Poor Insoluble 0.217 1170 -112 -108
Radon Rn Poor Insoluble 0.221 1134 -104 -93

 

Uses of noble gases 

Argon is used in light bulbs to provide an inert environment to prevent oxidation of the bulb filament

Argon is used in arch welding as an insulator.

Neon is used in street  and advertisement light

Helium is mixed with Oxygen during deep sea diving and mountaineering.

Helium is used in weather balloon for meteorological research instead of Hydrogen because it is unreactive/inert. Hydrogen when impure can ignite with an explosion.

Helium is used in making thermometers for measuring very low temperatures.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

     

 

UPGRADE

CHEMISTRY

                 

FORM 2

                 

STRUCTURE & BONDING

                

 

                 

 

 

 

 

 

Comprehensive tutorial notes

 

MUTHOMI S.G

www.kcselibrary.info

0720096206

 

ssssss

 

 

 

 

 

CHEMICAL BONDING AND STRUCTURE

 

  1. CHEMICAL BONDING

A chemical bond is formed when atoms of the same or different elements share, gain, donate or delocalize their outer energy level electrons to combine during chemical reactions inorder to be stable.

Atoms have equal number of negatively charged electrons in the energy levels and positively charged protons in the nucleus.

Atoms are chemically stable if they have filled outer energy level. An energy level is full if it has duplet (2) or octet (8) state in outer energy level.

Noble gases have duplet /octet. All other atoms try to be like noble gases through chemical reactions and forming molecules.

Only electrons in the outer energy level take part in formation of a chemical bond. There are three main types of chemical bonds formed by atoms:

(i) covalent bond

(ii) ionic/electrovalent bond

(iii) metallic bond

 

(i)COVALENT BOND

A covalent bond is formed when atoms of the same or different element share some or all the outer energy level electrons to combine during chemical reactions inorder to attain duplet or octet.

A shared pair of electrons is attracted by the nucleus (protons) of the two atoms sharing.

Covalent bonds are mainly formed by non-metals to form molecules. A molecule is a group of atoms of the same or different elements held together by a covalent bond. The number of atoms making a molecule is called atomicity. Noble gases are monatomic because they are stable and thus do not bond with each other or other atoms. Most other gases are diatomic

The more the number of electrons shared, the stronger the covalent bond.

A pair of electrons that do not take part in the formation of a covalent bond is called a lone pair of electrons.

Mathematically, the number of electrons to be shared by an atom is equal to the number of electrons remaining for the atom to be stable/attain duplet/octet /have maximum electrons in outer energy level.

 

The following diagrams illustrate the formation of covalent bonds:

a)hydrogen molecule is made up of two hydrogen atoms in the outer energy level each requiring one electron to have a stable duplet.

To show the formation of covalent bonding in the molecule then the following data/information is required;

Symbol of atom/element taking part in bonding                H                           H

Number of protons/electrons                                             1                            1

Electron configuration/structure                                         1:                           1:

Number of electron in outer energy level                           1                            1

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared            1                            1

Number of electrons not shared(lone pairs)                       0                            0

Diagram method 1

 

 

                                                                                                          

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

  ●x

H      H

 

Note:

After bonding the following intramolecular forces exist:

(i)the attraction of the shared electrons by both nucleus /protons of the atoms

(ii) the repulsion of the nucleus of one atom on the other.

(iii)balance of the attraction and repulsion is maintained inside/intramolecular/within  the molecule as follows;

 

E1

 

 

P1                                                       P1

 

 

 

E1

 

(iv)Protons(P1) from nucleus of atom 1 repel protons (P2)  from nucleus of atom 2.

(v)Electron (E1) in the energy levels of atom 1 repel electron (E2) in the energy levels of atom 2.

(vi) Protons(P1) from nucleus of atom 1 attract electron (E2) in the energy levels of atom 2.

(vii) protons (P2)  from nucleus of atom 2 attract electron (E2) in the energy levels of atom 2.

 

  1. b) Fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine molecules are made up also of two atoms sharing the outer energy level electrons to have a stable octet.

To show the formation of covalent bonding in the molecule then the following data/information is required;

(i) fluorine

Symbol of atom/element taking part in bonding                F                            F

Number of protons/electrons                                             9                            9

Electron configuration/structure                                         2:7                         2:7

Number of electron in outer energy level                           7                            7

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared            1                            1

Number of outer electrons not shared( 3-lone pairs)          6                            6

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

(ii) chlorine

Symbol of atom/element taking part in bonding                Cl                           Cl

Number of protons/electrons                                             17                          17

Electron configuration/structure                                         2:8:7                      2:8:7

Number of electron in outer energy level                           7                            7

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared            1                            1

Number of outer electrons not shared( 3-lone pairs)          6                            6

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(iii) Bromine

Symbol of atom/element taking part in bonding                Br                          Br

Number of protons/electrons                                             35                          35

Electron configuration/structure                               2:8:18:7                     2:8:18:7

Number of electron in outer energy level                           7                            7

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared            1                            1

Number of outer electrons not shared( 3-lone pairs)          6                            6

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

(iv) Iodine

Symbol of atom/element taking part in bonding                I                             I

Number of protons/electrons                                             53                          53

Electron configuration/structure                               2:8:18:18:7         2:8:18:18:7

Number of electron in outer energy level                           7                            7

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared            1                            1

Number of outer electrons not shared( 3-lone pairs)          6                            6

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

  1. c) Oxygen molecule is made up of two atoms sharing each two outer energy level electrons to have a stable octet as shown below;

Symbol of atom/element taking part in bonding                O                           O

Number of protons/electrons                                             8                            8

Electron configuration/structure                                        2:6                          2:6

Number of electron in outer energy level                           6                            6

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared            2                            2

Number of outer electrons not shared( 2-lone pairs)          4                            4

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. d) Nitrogen and phosphorus molecule is made up of two atoms sharing each three outer energy level electrons to have a stable octet as shown below;

(i) Nitrogen

Symbol of atom/element taking part in bonding                N                           N

Number of protons/electrons                                             7                            7

Electron configuration/structure                                         2:5                         2:5

Number of electron in outer energy level                           5                            5

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared            3                            3

Number of outer electrons not shared ( 3-lone pairs)         2                            2

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

(ii) Phosphorus

Symbol of atom/element taking part in bonding                P                            P

Number of protons/electrons                                             15                          15

Electron configuration/structure                                         2:8:5                      2:8:5

Number of electron in outer energy level                           5                            5

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared            3                            3

Number of outer electrons not shared ( 3-lone pairs)         2                            2

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. e) Water molecule is made up of hydrogen and oxygen. Hydrogen requires to share one electron with oxygen to be stable/attain duplet. Oxygen requires to share two electrons to be stable/attain octet. Two hydrogen atoms share with one oxygen atom for both to be stable as shown below;

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding             O                           H

Number of protons/electrons                                             8                            1

Electron configuration/structure                                         2:6                          1

Number of electron in outer energy level                           6                            1

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared            2                            1

Number of electrons not shared( 2-Oxygen lone pairs)     4                            0

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

  1. f) Ammonia molecule is made up of Hydrogen and Nitrogen. Hydrogen requires to share one electron with Nitrogen to be stable/attain duplet. Nitrogen requires to share three electrons to be stable/attain octet. Three hydrogen atoms share with one nitrogen atom for both to be stable as shown below;

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding             N                           H

Number of protons/electrons                                              7                           1

Electron configuration/structure                                         2:5                          1:

Number of electron in outer energy level                           5                            1

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared            3                              1

Number of electrons not shared( 1-Nitrogen lone pairs)    2                              0

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

g)Carbon(IV) oxide molecule is made up of carbon and oxygen. Carbon requires to share four electrons with oxygen to be stable/attain octet. Oxygen requires to share two electrons to be stable/attain octet. Two oxygen atoms share with one carbon atom for both to be stable as shown below;

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding             O                           C

Number of protons/electrons                                             8                            6

Electron configuration/structure                               2:6                         2:4

Number of electron in outer energy level                           6                            4

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared            2                            4

2-lone pairs from each Oxygen atom)                               2                            0

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. h) Methane molecule is made up of hydrogen and carbon. Hydrogen requires sharing one electron with carbon to be stable/attain duplet. Carbon requires sharing four electrons to be stable/attain octet. Four hydrogen atoms share with one carbon atom for both to be stable as shown below;

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding             C                            H

Number of protons/electrons                                             6                            1

Electron configuration/structure                                         2:4                           1

Number of electron in outer energy level                           4                            1

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared            4                            1

Number of electrons not shared ( No lone pairs)                0                           0

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) Tetrachloromethane molecule is made up of chlorine and carbon. Chlorine requires sharing one electron with carbon to be stable/attain octet. Carbon requires sharing four electrons to be stable/attain octet. Four chlorine atoms share with one carbon atom for both to be stable as shown below;

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding             C                            Cl

Number of protons/electrons                                             6                            17

Electron configuration/structure                                         2:4                       2:8:7

Number of electron in outer energy level                           4                            7

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared            4                            1

3-lone pairs from each Chlorine atom(24 electrons)                    0                            6

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. j) Ethane molecule is made up of six hydrogen and two carbon atoms. Hydrogen requires to share one electron with carbon to be stable/attain duplet. Carbon requires to share four electrons to be stable/attain octet. Three hydrogen atoms share with one carbon atom while another three hydrogen atoms share with a different carbon atom. The two carbon atoms bond by sharing a pair of the remaining electrons as shown below;

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding             C                            H

Number of protons/electrons                                             6                            1

Electron configuration/structure                                         2:4                          1

Number of electron in outer energy level                           4                            1

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared            4                            1

Number of electrons not shared( No lone pairs)                 0                           0

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

  1. k) Ethene molecule is made up of four hydrogen and two carbon atoms. Hydrogen requires to share one electron with carbon to be stable/attain duplet. Carbon requires to share four electrons to be stable/attain octet. Two hydrogen atoms share with one carbon atom while another two hydrogen atoms share with a different carbon atom. The two carbon atoms bond by sharing two pairs of the remaining electrons as shown below;

 

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding             C                            H

Number of protons/electrons                                             6                            1

Electron configuration/structure                                         2:4                          1

Number of electron in outer energy level                           4                            1

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared            4                            1

Number of electrons not shared( No lone pairs)                 0                           0

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

  1. l) Ethyne molecule is made up of two hydrogen and two carbon atoms. Hydrogen requires to share one electron with carbon to be stable/attain duplet. Carbon requires to share four electrons to be stable/attain octet. One hydrogen atoms share with one carbon atom while another hydrogen atoms share with a different carbon atom. The two carbon atoms bond by sharing three pairs of the remaining electrons as shown below;

 

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding             C                            H

Number of protons/electrons                                             6                            1

Electron configuration/structure                                         2:4                          1

Number of electron in outer energy level                           4                            1

Number of electrons remaining to be stable/shared            4                            1

Number of electrons not shared( No lone pairs)                 0                           0

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. j) Ethanol molecule is made up of six hydrogen one Oxygen

atom two carbon atoms.

Five Hydrogen atoms share their  one electron each with carbon to be stable/attain duplet. One Hydrogen atoms share one electron with Oxygen for both  to attain duplet/octet

Each Carbon uses  four electrons  to share with “O”and “H”attain octet/duplet.

NB: Oxygen has two lone pairs

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

j)Ethanoic molecule is made up of four hydrogen two Oxygen atom two carbon atoms.

 Three Hydrogen atoms share their  one electron each with carbon to be stable/attain duplet. One Hydrogen atoms share one electron with Oxygen for both  to attain duplet/octet

 Each Carbon uses  four electrons  to share with “O”and “H”attain octet/duplet.

NB: Each Oxygen atom has two lone pairs

 

 

 

By convention (as a rule), a

(i) single covalent bond made up of two shared( a pair) electrons is represented by a dash(—)

(ii) double covalent bond made up of four shared( two pairs) electrons is represented by a double dash(==)

(iii) triple covalent bond made up of six shared( three pairs) electrons is represented by a triple dash(==)

The representation below show the molecules covered in (a) to (k) above:

 

  1. Hydrogen molecule(H2)                               H–H

 

  1. Fluorine molecule(F2)                    F–F

 

  1. Chlorine molecule(Cl2) Cl–Cl

 

  1. Bromine molecule(Br2) Br–Br

 

  1. Iodine molecule(I2) I–I

 

  1. Oxygen molecule(O2) O=O

 

  1. Nitrogen molecule(N2) N=N

 

  1. Phosphorus molecule(P2)                    P=P

 

  1. Water molecule (H2O) H–O–H

 

 

      j   Ammonia molecule(NH3)                               H–N–H

H

 

k)Carbon(IV) oxide molecule(CO2)                  O==C==O

 

H

l)Methane molecule(CH4)                                    H–C–H

H

 

Cl

m)Tetrachloromethane molecule(CCl4                 Cl–C–Cl

Cl

 

H   H

n)Ethane molecule(C2H6)                                    H–C—C–H

H     H

 

p)Ethene molecule(C2H4)                                      H-C==C-H

H    H

 

q)Ethyne molecule(C2H6)                                     H-C—C-H

 

 

 

 

 

Dative /coordinate bond

A dative/coordinate bond is a covalent bond formed when a lone pair of electrons is donated then shared to an electron-deficient species/ion/atom.

During dative/coordinate bonding, all the shared pair of electrons are donated by one of the combining/bonding species/ ion/atom.

Like covalent bonding, coordinate /dative bond is mainly formed by non-metals.

 

Illustration of coordinate /dative bond                                    

a)Ammonium ion(NH4+)

The ammonium ion is made up of ammonia (NH3) molecule and hydrogen (H+) ion. (H+) ion has no electrons. NH3 is made up of covalent bonding from Nitrogen and Hydrogen. One lone pair of electrons is present in Nitrogen atom after the bonding. This lone pair is donated and shared with an electron-deficient H+ ion

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

b)Phosphine ion (PH4+)

The Phosphine ion is made up of phosphine(NH3) molecule and hydrogen (H+) ion. (H+) ion has no electrons. PH3 is made up of covalent bonding from Phosphorus and Hydrogen. One lone pair of electrons is present in Phosphorus atom. After the bonding this lone pair is donated and shared with the electron-deficient H+ ion

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. c) Hydroxonium (H3O+) ion

The hydroxonium ion is made up of water (H2O) molecule and hydrogen (H+) ion. (H+) ion has no electrons. The H2O molecule is made up of covalent bonding from Oxygen and Hydrogen. One lone pair of electrons out of the two present in Oxygen atom after the bonding is donated and shared with the electron-deficient H+ ion

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. d) Carbon (II) oxide (CO)

Carbon (II) oxide is made up of carbon and Oxygen atoms sharing each two outer electron and not sharing each two electrons. Oxygen with an extra lone pair of electrons donates and share with the carbon atom for both to be stable.

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. e) Aluminium (III) chloride (AlCl3/Al2Cl6)

Aluminium (III) chloride is made up of aluminium and chlorine. One aluminium atom shares its outer electrons with three separate chlorine atoms. All chlorine atoms attain stable octet but aluminium does not. Another molecule of aluminium chloride shares its chlorine lone pair of electrons with the aluminium atom for both to be stable. This type of bond exists only in vapour phase after aluminium chloride sublimes.

Diagram method 1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Diagram method 2

 

 

 

 

 

A dative/coordinate bond is by convention represented by an arrow (→) heading from the donor of the shared pair of electrons.

Below is the representation of molecules in the above examples;

a)Ammonium ion.

H

H− N→H

H

b)Phosphine ion                                     H

H− P→H

H

 

c)Hydroxonium ion

H− O→H

H

 

d)Carbon(II) oxide                              O→C

 

 

  1. d) Aluminium(III)chloride Cl     Cl            Cl

 

Al        Al

 

Cl                    Cl           Cl

 

 

(ii)IONIC/ELECTROVALENT BOND

An ionic/electrovalent bond is extreme of a covalent bond.

During ionic/electrovalent bonding there is complete transfer of valence electrons to one electronegative atom from an electropositive atom.

All metals are electropositive and easily/readily donate/lose their valence electrons.

All non-metals are electronegative and easily/readily gain/acquire extra electrons.

Ionic/electrovalent bonding therefore mainly involves transfer of electrons from metal/metallic radical to non-metallic radical.

When an electropositive atom donates /loses the valence electrons, it forms a positively charged cation to attain stable octet/duplet.

When an electronegative atom gains /acquires extra valence electrons, it forms a negatively charged anion to attain stable octet/duplet.

The electrostatic attraction force between the stable positively charged cation and the stable negatively charged anion with opposite charges constitute the ionic bond.

Like in covalent/dative/coordinate bonding, only the outer energy level electrons take part in the formation of ionic/electrovalent bond

Like in covalent/dative/coordinate bonding, the more electrons taking part / involved  in the formation of ionic/electrovalent bond, the stronger the ionic /electrovalent bond.

 

 

Illustration of ionic /electrovalent bond

a)Sodium chloride(NaCl)

Sodium chloride(NaCl) is formed when a sodium atom donate its outer valence electrons to chlorine atom for both to attain stable octet:

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding             Na                          Cl

Number of protons/electrons                                             11                          17

Electron configuration/structure                                         2:8:1                       2:8:7

Number of electron in outer energy level                           11                          7

Number of electrons donated and gained to be stable        1                            1

New electron configuration/structure                                 2:8:                       2:8:

Symbol of cation/anion after bonding                               Na+                        Cl

 

Diagram

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

b)Magnesium chloride(MgCl2)

Magnesium chloride (MgCl2) is formed when a magnesium atom donate its two outer valence electrons to chlorine atoms. Two chlorine atoms are required to gain each one electron. All the ions (cations and anions) attain stable octet:

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding             Mg                         Cl

Number of protons/electrons                                             11                          17

Electron configuration/structure                                         2:8:2                       2:8:7

Number of electron in outer energy level                           2                            7

Number of electrons donated and gained to be stable        2                            1

New electron configuration/structure                                 2:8:                         2:8:

Symbol of cation/anion after bonding                                Mg2+                      Cl

Diagram

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

c)Lithium oxide(Li2O)

Lithium oxide(Li2O)is formed when a Lithium atom donate its  outer valence electrons to Oxygen atom. Two Lithium atoms are required to donate/lose each one electron and attain stable duplet. Oxygen atom acquires the two electrons and attain stable octet:

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding             Li                           O

Number of protons/electrons                                             3                            8

Electron configuration/structure                                         2:1                          2:6

Number of electron in outer energy level                           1                            6

Number of electrons donated and gained to be stable        1                            2

New electron configuration/structure                                 2:                            2:8:

Symbol of cation/anion after bonding                               Li+                         O2-

Diagram

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

d)Aluminium(III) oxide(Al2O3)

Aluminium(III) oxide(Al2O3)is formed when a Aluminium atom donate its three outer valence electrons to Oxygen atom. Two Aluminium atoms are required to donate/lose each three electron and attain stable octet. Three Oxygen atoms gain/ acquire the six electrons and attain stable octet:

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding             Al                          O

Number of protons/electrons                                             13                          8

Electron configuration/structure                                         2:8:3                       2:6

Number of electron in outer energy level                           3                            6

Number of electrons donated and gained to be stable        3                            2

New electron configuration/structure                                 2:8:                         2:8:

Symbol of cation/anion after bonding                               Al3+                        O2-

Diagram

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

e)Calcium oxide(CaO)

Calcium oxide(CaO)is formed when a Calcium atom donate its two outer valence electrons to Oxygen atom. Both attain stable octet:

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding             Ca                          O

Number of protons/electrons                                             20                          8

Electron configuration/structure                                         2:8:8:2                    2:6

Number of electron in outer energy level                           2                            6

Number of electrons donated and gained to be stable        2                            2

New electron configuration/structure                                 2:8:8:                     2:8:

Symbol of cation/anion after bonding                               Ca2+                       O2-

Diagram

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Some compounds can be formed from ionic/electrovalent, covalent and dative/coordinate bonding within their atoms/molecules:

 

a)Formation of ammonium chloride:

Ammonium chloride is formed from the reaction of ammonia gas and hydrogen chloride gas. Both ammonia and hydrogen chloride gas are formed from covalent bonding. During the reaction of ammonia and hydrogen chloride gas to form Ammonium chloride;

-ammonia forms a dative/coordinate bond with electron deficient H+ ion from Hydrogen chloride to form ammonium ion(NH4+)ion.

-the chloride ion Cl–  and ammonium ion(NH4+)ion bond through ionic /      electrovalent bond from the electrostatic attraction between the opposite/unlike charges.

Diagram

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. b) Dissolution/dissolving of hydrogen chloride:

Hydrogen chloride is formed when hydrogen and chlorine atoms form a covalent bond. Water is formed when hydrogen and Oxygen atoms also form a covalent bond. When hydrogen chloride gas is dissolved in water;

-water molecules  forms a dative/coordinate bond with electron deficient H+ ion from Hydrogen chloride to form hydroxonium ion(H3O+)ion.

-the chloride ion Cl–  and hydroxonium ion(H3O+)ion bond through ionic /      electrovalent bond from the electrostatic attraction between the opposite/unlike charges.

Diagram

 

 

 

 

 

.

 

c)Dissolution/dissolving of ammonia gas:

Ammmonia gas is formed when hydrogen and Nitrogen atoms form a covalent bond. Water is formed when hydrogen and Oxygen atoms also form a covalent bond. When Ammonia gas is dissolved in water;

-ammonia forms a dative/coordinate bond with electron deficient H+ ion from a water molecule to form ammonium ion(NH4+)ion.

-the hydroxide ion OH–  and ammonium ion(NH4+)ion bond through ionic /      electrovalent bond from the electrostatic attraction between the opposite/unlike charges.

 

Diagram

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(iii)METALLIC BOND

A metallic bond is formed when metallic atoms delocalize their outer electrons inorder to be stable.

Metals delocalize their outer electrons to form positively charged cation .

The electrostatic attraction force between the metallic cation and the negatively charged electrons constitute the metallic bond.

The more delocalized electrons the stonger the metallic bond.

Illustration of ionic /electrovalent bond

  1. a) Sodium (Na) is made of one valence electron. The electron is donated to form Na+ The electron is delocalized /free within many sodium ions.

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding   Na              Na             Na

Number of protons/electrons                                   11              11             11

Electron configuration/structure                             2:8:1         2:8:1          2:8:1

Number of electron in outer energy level                 1                  1              1

Number of electrons delocalized/free within            1                  1              1

New electron configuration/structure                       2:8:              2:8:           2:8:

Symbol of cation after metallic bonding                  Na+              Na+           Na+

Diagram

 

(three)Metallic cations attract

(three) free/delocalized electrons

 

 

 

 

  1. b) Aluminium (Al) is made of three valence electron. The three electrons are donated to form Al3+ The electrons are delocalized /free within many aluminium ions.

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding   Al              Al             Al

Number of protons/electrons                                   13              13             13

Electron configuration/structure                               2:8:3         2:8:3          2:8:3

Number of electron in outer energy level                 3                  3              3

Number of electrons delocalized/free within            3                  3              3

New electron configuration/structure                       2:8:              2:8:           2:8:

Symbol of cation  after metallic bonding                 Al3+              Al3+           Al3+

Diagram

 

(three)Metallic cations attract

                                                                       (nine) free/delocalized electrons

 

 

 

 

 

c)Calcium (Ca) is made of two valence electron.The two electrons are  donated to form Ca2+ ion.The electrons are delocalized /free within many Calcium  ions.

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding   Ca              Ca             Ca

Number of protons/electrons                                   20              20             20

Electron configuration/structure                               2:8:8:2      2:8:8:2   2:8:8:2

Number of electron in outer energy level               2                  2              2

Number of electrons delocalized/free within            2                  2              2

New electron configuration/structure                       2:8:8:           2:8:8:           2:8:8:

Symbol of cation  after metallic bonding                 Ca2+             Ca2+          Ca2+

Diagram

 

(three)Metallic cations attract

(six) free/delocalized electrons

 

 

  1. d) Magnesium (Mg) is made of two valence electron. The two electrons are donated to form Mg2+The electrons are delocalized /free within many Magnesium ions.

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding             Mg                     Mg

Number of protons/electrons                                             12                      12

Electron configuration/structure                                          2:8:2                            2:8:2

Number of electron in outer energy level                           2                         2

Number of electrons delocalized/free within                      2                         2

New electron configuration/structure                                 2:8:                     2:8:

Symbol of cation  after metallic bonding                           Mg2+                             Mg2+

Diagram

 

(two)Metallic cations attract

(four) free/delocalized electrons

 

 

 

e)Lithium (Li) is made of one valence electron.The  electron is donated to form Li+ ion.The electron is delocalized /free within many Lithium ions.ie;

Symbol of atoms/elements taking part in bonding   Li       Li       Li      Li

Number of protons/electrons                                  3        3        3        3

Electron configuration/structure                               2:1     2:1     2:1      2:1

Number of electron in outer energy level                1        1        1        1

Number of electrons delocalized/free within  1        1        1        1

New electron configuration/structure                       2:1:    2:1:   2:1:    2:1:

Symbol of cation  after metallic bonding                 Li+        Li+    Li+        Li+

Diagram

 

(four)Metallic cations attract

                                                                       (four) free/delocalized electrons

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

B.CHEMICAL  STRUCTURE

 

Chemical structure is the pattern/arrangement of atoms after they have bonded. There are two main types of chemical structures:

(i)simple molecular structure

     (ii) giant structures

 

(i)Simple molecular structure

Simple molecular structure is the pattern formed after atoms of non-metals have covalently bonded to form simple molecules.

Molecules are made of atoms joined together by weak intermolecular forces called Van-der-waals forces.The Van-der-waals forces hold the molecules together while the covalent bonds hold the atoms in the molecule.

 

                 Illustration of simple molecular structure

 

a)Hydrogen molecule(H2)

Hydrogen gas is made up of strong covalent bonds/intramolecular forces between each hydrogen atom making the molecule. Each molecule is joined to another by weak Van-der-waals forces/ intermolecular forces.

 

Illustration of simple molecular structure

 

a)Hydrogen molecule(H2)

Hydrogen gas is made up of strong covalent bonds/intramolecular forces between each hydrogen atom making the molecule. Each molecule is joined to another by weak Van-der-waals forces/ intermolecular forces

b)Oxygen molecule(O2)

Oxygen gas is made up of strong covalent bonds/intramolecular forces between each Oxygen atom making the molecule. Each molecule is joined to another by weak Van-der-waals forces/ intermolecular forces.

 

Strong intramolecular forces/covalent bond

 

O=O:::: O=O:::: O=O:::: O=O

: :    : :    : :   : :     : :    : :                      weak intermolecular

O=O:::: O=O:::: O=O:::: O=O              forces/van-der-waals forces

 

c)Iodine molecule(I2)

Iodine solid crystals are made up of strong covalent bonds/intramolecular forces between each iodine atom making the molecule.Each molecule is joined to another by weak Van-der-waals forces/ intermolecular forces.

Strong intramolecular forces/covalent bond

 

I— I:::: I — I:::: I — I:::: I — I

: :    : :    : :   : :     : :    : :    : :               weak intermolecular

I — I:::: I — I:::: I — I:::: I — I          forces/van-der-waals forces

 

d)Carbon(IV) oxide molecule(CO2)

Carbon(IV) oxide gas molecule is made up of strong covalent bonds/intramolecular forces between each Carbon and oxygen atoms making the molecule. Each molecule is joined to another by weak Van-der-waals forces/ intermolecular forces.

 

Strong intramolecular forces/covalent bond

 

O=C=O:::: O=C=O:::: O=C=O

: :               : :               : :                weak intermolecular

O=C=O:::: O=C=O:::: O=C=O             forces/van-der-waals forces

 

The following are the main characteristic properties of simple molecular structured compounds:

 

a)State

Most simple molecular substances are gases, liquid or liquids or solid that sublimes or has low boiling/melting points at room temperature (25oC) and pressure (atmospheric pressure).

Examples of simple molecular substances include:

-all gases eg Hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, carbon (IV) oxide,

          –Petroleum fractions eg Petrol, paraffin, diesel, wax,

-Solid non-metals eg Sulphur, Iodine

-Water

 

  1. b) Low melting/boiling points

Melting is the process of weakening the intermolecular/ van-der-waal forces/ of attraction between the molecules that holding the substance/compound.

Note;

(i)Melting and boiling does not involve weakening/breaking the strong intramolecular force/covalent bonds holding the atoms in the molecule.

 

(ii) Melting and boiling points increase with increase in atomic radius/size of the atoms making the molecule as the intermolecular  forces / van-der-waal forces of attraction between the molecules increase. e.g.

Iodine has a higher melting/boiling point than chlorine because it has a higher /bigger atomic radius/size than chlorine, making the molecule to have stronger intermolecular force/ van-der-waal forces of attraction between the molecules than chlorine. Iodine is hence a solid and chlorine is a gas.

 

(c)Insoluble in water/soluble in organic solvents

Polar substances dissolve in polar solvents. Water is a polar solvent .Molecular substances do not thus dissolve in water because they are non-polar. They dissolve in non-polar solvents like methylbenzene, benzene, tetrachloromethane or propanone.

 

d)Poor conductors of heat and electricity

Substances with free mobile ions or free mobile/delocalized electrons conduct electricity. Molecular substances are poor conductors of heat/electricity because their molecules have no free mobile ions/electrons. This makes them very good insulators.

 

Hydrogen bonds

 

A hydrogen bond is an intermolecular force of attraction in which a very electronegative atom attracts hydrogen atom of another molecule.

The most electronegative elements are Fluorine, Oxygen and Nitrogen .Molecular compounds made up of these elements usually have hydrogen bonds.

Hydrogen bonds are stronger than van-der-waals forces but weaker than covalent bonds. Molecular compounds with hydrogen bonds thus have higher melting/boiling points than those with van-der-waals forces.

 

Illustration of Hydrogen bonding

 

a)Water molecule

During formation of covalent bond, the oxygen atom attract/pull the shared electrons more to itself than Hydrogen creating partial negative charges(δ)in Oxygen and partial positive charges(δ+)in Hydrogen.

Two molecules attract each other at the partial charges through Hydrogen bonding.

 

 

 

 

The hydrogen bonding in water makes it;

(i)a liquid with higher boiling and melting point than simple molecular substances with higher molecular mass. e.g. Hydrogen sulphide as in the table below;

 

Influence of H-bond in water (H2O) in comparison to H2S

 

Substance Water/ H2O Hydrogen sulphide/ H2S
Relative molecular mass          18              34
Melting point(oC)           0             -85
Boiling point(oC)          100             -60

 

(ii)have higher volume in solid (ice) than liquid (water) and thus ice is less dense than water. Ice therefore floats  above liquid water.

b)Ethanol molecule

 

Like in water, the oxygen atom attracts/pulls the shared electrons in the covalent bond more to itself than Hydrogen.

This creates a partial negative charge (δ-) on oxygen and partial positive charge(δ+) on hydrogen.

Two ethanol molecules attract each other at the partial charges through Hydrogen bonding forming a dimmer.

A dimmer is a molecule formed when two molecules join together as below:

 

 

 

Hydrogen bonds              covalent bonds

 

 

R1                O δ-…………………….…H δ+                  O δ-

 

 

H δ+                                               R2

 

R1 and R2 are extensions of the molecule.

For ethanol it is made up of CH3CH2 – to make the structure:

 

Hydrogen bonds             covalent bonds

 

 

CH3CH2               O δ-………………………….…H δ+             O δ-

 

 

H δ+                                                CH2CH3

 

 

b)Ethanoic acid molecule

Like in water and ethanol above, the oxygen atom attracts/pulls the shared electrons in the covalent bond in ethanoic acid more to itself than Hydrogen.

This creates a partial negative charge (δ-)on oxygen and partial positive charge(δ+) on hydrogen.

Two ethanoic acid molecules attract each other at the partial charges through Hydrogen-bonding forming a dimer.

Hydrogen bonds            covalent bonds

 

R1         C              O δ-………………………….…H δ+            O δ-

 

O δ-              H δ+………………..….O δ-                  C            R2

 

 

 

 

R1 and 2 are extensions of the molecule.

For ethanoic acid the extension is made up of CH3 –  to make the structure;

 

Hydrogen bonds             covalent bonds

 

CH3                C               O δ-…………………………………….…H δ+            O δ-

 

 

O δ-              H δ+…………………..……..………O δ-                          C            CH3

 

 

Ethanoic acid like ethanol exists as a dimer.

Ethanoic acid has a higher melting/boiling point than ethanol .This is because ethanoic acid has two/more hydrogen bond than ethanol.

 

  1. d) Proteins and sugars in living things also have multiple/complex hydrogen bonds in their structures.

(ii) Giant structure

 

This is the pattern formed after substances /atoms /ions bond to form a long chain network.

Giant structures therefore extend in all directions to form a pattern that continues repeating itself.

There are three main giant structures.

  1. a) giant covalent/atomic structure                     b)giant ionic structure

c)giant metallic structure

  1. a) giant covalent/atomic structure

 

Giant covalent/atomic structure is the pattern formed after atoms have covalently bonded to form long chain pattern consisting of indefinite number of atoms covalently bonded together.

The strong covalent bonds hold all the atoms together to form a very well packed structure. Examples of substances with giant covalent/atomic structure include:

(i) carbon-diamond

(ii) carbon-graphite

(iii)silicon

(iv) silicon(IV) oxide/sand

Carbon-graphite and carbon-diamond are allotropes of carbon.

Allotropy is the existence of an element in more than one stable physical form at the same temperature and pressure.

Allotropes are atoms of the same element existing in more than one stable physical form at the same temperature and pressure.

Other elements that exhibit/show allotropy include;

-Sulphur as monoclinic sulphur and rhombic sulphur

-Phosphorus as white phosphorus and red phosphorus

 

The structure of carbon-diamond

Carbon has four valence electrons. The four valence electrons are used to form covalent bonds.

During the formation of diamond, one carbon atom covalently bond with four other carbon atoms.

C                                          C

x                                               x.

x  C   x    —–>      C  .x C x.   C    ——>        C         C         C

x                                               x.

C                                          C

After the bonding, the atoms rearrange to form a regular tetrahedral in which one carbon is in the centre while four are at the apex/corners.

 

 

C

 

 

 

C

 

 

C                                      C

 

 

C

 

This pattern repeats itself to form a long chain number of atoms covalently bonded together indefinitely. The pattern is therefore called giant tetrahedral structure. It extends in all directions where one atom of carbon is always a centre of four others at the apex/corner of a regular tetrahedral.

C

 

 

C

 

C                  C

C                          C

 

C

C

 

 

 

The giant tetrahedral structure of carbon-diamond is very well/closely packed and joined/bonded together by strong covalent bond.

This makes carbon-diamond to have the following properties:

 

  1. a) High melting/boiling point.

The giant tetrahedral structure is very well packed and joined together by strong covalent bonds.

This requires a lot of energy/heat to weaken for the element to melt and break for the element to boil.

 

 

  1. b) High density.

Carbon diamond is the hardest known natural substance.

This is because the giant tetrahedral structure is a very well packed pattern/structure and joined together by strong covalent bonds.

This makes Carbon diamond be used to make drill for drilling boreholes/oil wells.

The giant tetrahedral structure of carbon diamond is a very closely packed pattern /structure such that heat transfer by conduction is possible. This makes carbon diamond a good thermal conductor.

 

  1. c) Poor conductor of electricity.

Carbon-diamond has no free/delocalized electrons within its structure and thus do not conduct electricity.

 

  1. d) Insoluble in water.

Carbon-diamond is insoluble in water because it is non-polar and do not bond with water molecules.

 

  1. e) Is abrasive/Rough.

The edges of the closely well packed pattern/structure of Carbon-diamond make its surface rough/abrasive and thus able to smoothen /cut metals and glass.

 

  1. f) Have characteristic luster.

Carbon-diamond has a high optical dispersion and thus able to disperse light to different colours .This makes Carbon-diamond one of the most popular gemstone for making jewellery.

 

The structure of carbon-graphite

 

During the formation of graphite, one carbon atom covalently bond with three other carbon atoms leaving one free/delocalized electron.

 

C                                C

x                                               x.

x  C   x    —–>      C  .x C x    ——>     C       C x  free/delocalized electron

x                                               x.

C                                C

 

After the bonding, the atoms rearrange and join together to form a regular hexagon in which six carbon atoms are at the apex/corners.

The regular hexagon is joined to another in layers on the same surface by van-der-waals forces.

Each layer extends to form a plane in all directions.

The fourth valence electron that does not form covalent bonding is free/mobile /delocalized within the layers.

This structure/pattern is called giant hexagonal planar structure.

 

The giant hexagonal planar structure of carbon-graphite is closely packed and joined/bonded together by strong covalent bonds. This makes carbon-graphite to have the following properties:

 

  1. a) High melting/boiling point.

The giant hexagonal planar structure of carbon-graphite is well packed and joined together by strong covalent bonds.

This requires a lot of energy/heat to weaken for the element to melt and break for the element to boil.

 

  1. b) Good conductor of electricity.

Carbon-graphite has free/delocalized 4th valence electrons within its structure and thus conducts electricity.

 

  1. c) Insoluble in water.

Carbon-graphite is insoluble in water because it is non-polar and do not bond with water molecules.

  1. d) Soft.

Layers of giant hexagonal planar structure of carbon graphite are held together by van-der-waals forces.

The van-der-waals forces easily break when pressed and reform back on releasing/reducing pressure/force thus making graphite soft.

 

  1. e) Smooth and slippery.

When pressed at an angle the van-der-waals forces easily break and slide over each other making graphite soft and slippery.

It is thus used as a dry lubricant instead of oil.

 

f)Some uses of carbon-graphite.

  1. As a dry lubricant– carbon graphite is smooth and slippery and thus better lubricant than oil.Oil heat up when reducing friction.
  2. Making Lead-pencils- When pressed at an angle on paper the van-der-waals forces easily break and slide smoothly over contrasting background producing its characteristic black background.
  3. As moderator in nuclear reactors to reduce the rate of decay/disintegration of radioactive nuclides/atoms/isotopes.
  4. As electrode in dry/wet cells/battery- carbon graphite is inert and good conductor of electricity. Current is thus able to move from one electrode/terminal to the other in dry and wet cells/batteries. Carbon graphite is also very cheap.

 

 

  1. b) giant ionic structure

 

Giant ionic structure is the pattern formed after ions have bonded through ionic/electrovalent bonding to form a long chain consisting of indefinite number of ions.

The strong ionic/electrovalent bond holds all the cations and anions together to form a very well packed structure.

Substances with giant ionic structure are mainly crystals of salts e.g. sodium chloride, Magnesium chloride, Sodium iodide, Potassium chloride, copper (II) sulphate(VI).

 

The structure of sodium chloride

 

Sodium chloride is made up of sodium (Na+) and chloride (Cl)ions.

Sodium (Na+) ion is formed when a sodium atom donate /loose/donate an electron. Chloride (Cl) ion is formed when a chlorine atom gain /acquire an extra electron from sodium atom.

Many Na+ and Cl ions then rearrange such that one Na+ ion is surrounded by six Clions and one Clion is surrounded by six Na+ ions.

The pattern formed is a giant cubic structure where Cl ion is sand witched between Na+ ions and the same to Na+ ions.

This pattern forms a crystal.

A crystal is a solid form of a substance in which particles are arranged in a definite pattern regularly repeated in three dimensions.

 

The structure of sodium chloride

The giant cubic structure/crystal of sodium chloride is as below;

 

 

The giant cubic structure/crystal of sodium chloride is very well packed and joined by strong ionic/electrovalent bonds. This makes sodium chloride and many ionic compounds to have the following properties:

 

  1. a) Have high melting /boiling points.

The giant cubic lattice structure of sodium chloride is very closely packed into a crystal that requires a lot of energy/heat to weaken and melt/boil. This applies to all crystalline ionic compounds.

  1. b) Are good conductors of electricity in molten and aqueous state but poor conductor of electricity in solid.

Ionic compounds have fused ions in solid crystalline state.

On heating and dissolving in water, the crystal is broken into free mobile ions (Na+ and Cl ions).

The free mobile ions are responsible for conducting electricity in ionic compounds in molten and aqueous states.

 

c)Soluble in water

Ionic compounds are polar and dissolve in polar water molecules.

On dissolving, the crystal breaks to free the fused ions which are then surrounded by water molecules.

 

 

  1. b) giant metallic structure

 

This is the pattern formed after metallic atoms have bonded through metallic bond.

The pattern formed is one where the metallic cations rearrange to form a cubic structure.

The cubic structure is bound together by the free delocalized electrons that move freely within.

The more delocalized electrons, the stronger the metallic bond.

 

The structure of sodium and aluminium.

 

Sodium has one valence electrons.

Aluminium has three valence electrons.

After delocalizing the valence electrons ,the metal cations (Na+ and Al3+) rearrange to the apex /corners of a regular cube that extend in all directions.

The delocalized electrons remain free and mobile as shown below:

 

 

The giant cubic structure makes metals to have the following properties:

 

  1. a) Have high melting/boiling point

The giant cubic structure is very well packed and joined/bonded together by the free delocalized electrons.

The more delocalized electrons the higher the melting/boiling point.

The larger/bigger the metallic cation ,the weaker the packing of the cations and thus the lower the melting/boiling point. e.g.

 

(i) Sodium and potassium have both one valence delocalized electron.

Atomic radius of potassium is larger/bigger than that of sodium and hence less well packed in its metallic structure.

Sodium has therefore a higher melting/boiling point than potassium.

 

(ii) Sodium has one delocalized electron.

Aluminium has three delocalized electrons.

Atomic radius of sodium is larger/bigger than that of aluminium and hence less well packed in its metallic structure.

Aluminium has therefore a higher melting/boiling point than sodium because of the smaller well packed metallic (Al3+)ions and bonded/joined by more/three delocalized electrons.

 

The table below shows the comparative melting/boiling points of some metals:

Metal Electronic structure Atomic radius(nM) Melting point(oC) Boiling point(oC)
Sodium 2:8:1 0.155 98 890
Potassium 2:8:8:1 0.203 64 774
Magnesium 2:8:2 0.136 651 1110
Aluminium 2:8:3 0.125 1083 2382

 

  1. b) Good electrical and thermal conductor/electricity.

All metals are good conductors of heat and electricity including Mercury which is a liquid.

The mobile delocalized electrons are free within the giant metallic structure to move from one end to the other transmitting heat/electric current.

The more delocalized electrons the better the thermal/electrical conductivity.

High temperatures/heating lowers the thermal/electrical conductivity of metals because the delocalized electrons vibrate and move randomly hindering transfer of heat

 

From the table above:

Compare the electrical conductivity of;

(i)Magnesium and sodium

Magnesium is a better conductor than sodium.

Magnesium has more/two delocalized electrons than sodium. The more delocalized electrons the better the electrical conductor.

(ii)Potassium and sodium

Potassium is a better conductor than sodium.

Potassium has bigger/larger atomic radius than sodium. The delocalized electrons are less attracted to the nucleus of the atom and thus more free /mobile and thus better the electrical conductor.

 

  1. c) Insoluble in water

All metals are insoluble in water because they are non polar and thus do not bond with water.

Metals higher in the reactivity/electrochemical series like; Potassium, sodium, Lithium and Calcium reacts with cold water producing hydrogen gas and forming an alkaline solution of their hydroxides.ie

2K(s)        +        2H2O(l)       ->       2KOH(aq)   +        H2(g)

2Na(s)      +        2H2O(l)       ->       2NaOH(aq)  +        H2(g)

2Li(s)        +        2H2O(l)       ->       2LiOH(aq)   +        H2(g)

Ca(s)         +        2H2O(l)       ->       Ca(OH)2(aq)+        H2(g)

 

Heavy metal like Magnesium, Aluminium, Iron, Zinc and Lead react with steam/water vapour to produce hydrogen gas and form the corresponding oxide.

 

Mg(s)           +        H2O(g)        ->       MgO(s)        +        H2(g)

Fe(s)            +        H2O(g)        ->       FeO(s)         +        H2(g)

Zn(s)            +        H2O(g)        ->       ZnO(s)         +        H2(g)

Pb(s)            +        H2O(g)        ->       PbO(s)         +        H2(g)

2Al(s)                    +        3H2O(g)      ->       Al2O3(s)       +        3H2(g)

 

Metals lower in the reactivity/electrochemical series than hydrogen like; copper, Mercury, Gold Silver and Platinum do not react with water/vapour.

 

  1. d) Shiny metallic-lustre

All metals have a shiny grey metallic luster except copper which is brown.

When exposed to sunlight, the delocalized electrons gain energy, they vibrate on the metal surface scattering light to appear shiny.

With time, most metals corrode and are covered by a layer of the metal oxide.

The delocalized electrons are unable to gain and scatter light and the metal surface tarnishes/become dull.

 

  1. e) Ductile and malleable

All metals are malleable (can be made into thin sheet) and ductile (can be made into wire.

When beaten/hit/pressed lengthwise the metallic cations extend and is bound /bonded by the free/mobile electrons to form a sheet.

When beaten/hit/pressed lengthwise and bredthwise the metallic cations extend and is bound /bonded by the free/mobile electrons to form a wire/thin strip.

 

  1. f) Have high tensile strength

Metals are not brittle. The free delocalized electrons bind the metal together when it is bent /coiled at any angle.

The meta thus withstand stress/coiling

 

  1. g) Form alloys

An alloy is a uniform mixture of two or more metals.

Some metals have spaces between their metallic cations which can be occupied by another metal cation with smaller atomic radius.

Common alloys include:

Brass(Zinc and Copper alloy)

Bronze(Copper and Tin alloy)

German silver

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 Summary of Bonding and structure

 

  Simple molecular structure Giant covalent /atomic structure Giant ionic structure Giant metallic structure
(i)Examples

 

I2,S8,HCl,O2,CH4 Graphite,diamond

Si,SiO2

NaCl, KCl, CaO,CuSO4 Na,Fe,Cr,Hg,K
Constituent particles making structure molecules Atoms

(of non-metals)

Ions

(cation and anions)

Atoms

(of metals)

Type of substance Non-metal element/non-metal molecule/non-metal compound(electronegative elements) Group IV non-metals and some of their oxides Metal-non metal compounds(compounds of electropositive and electronegative compounds) Metallic compounds

Metallic elements (with low electonegativity and high electropositivity)

 

Bonding in solid state

-Strong covalent bonds hold atoms together within separate molecules (intramolecular forces)

-Weak van-der-waals forces hold separate molecules together (intermolecular forces)

Atoms are linked through the whole structure by very strong covalent bonds. Electrostatic attraction of cations and anions link the whole structure through strong ionic bond. EEElectrostatic

Electrostatic attraction of outer mobile electrons for positive nuclei binds atoms together though metallic bond

Properties

(i) Volatility

-Highly volatile with low melting/boiling point

-Low latent heat of fusion/vaporization

-Non volatile with very high melting/boiling points

-Low latent heat of fusion / vaporization

-Non volatile with very high melting/boiling points

-Low latent heat of fusion / vaporization

 

-Non volatile with very high melting/boiling points

-Low latent heat of fusion / vaporization

 

(ii) State at room temperature /pressure Usually gases,volatile liquids or solids that sublimes solids solids  

 

Solids except Mercury(liquid)

(iii) Hardness Soft and brittle(low tensile strength) Hard and brittle(low tensile strength) Hard and brittle(low tensile strength) Hard, malleable, ductile and have high  tensile strength
(iv) Thermal /electrical conductivity Poor thermal and electrical conductor when solid ,liquid or aqueous solutions but some dissolve and react to form electrolytes e.g.

Hydrogen chloride and ammonia gases.

Poor thermal and electrical conductor when solid ,liquid or aqueous solutions but

-Carbon-graphite is a good electrical conductor while

-Carbon-diamond is a good thermal conductor.

Poor thermal and electrical conductor when solid. Good thermal and electrical conductor in liquid/molten and aqueous states when the ions are not fused

 

Good thermal and electrical conductor in solid and liquid/molten  states  due to the free mobile /delocalized electrons

 

(v) Solubility Insoluble in polar solvents e.g. Water

Soluble in non-polar solvents e.g. tetrachloromethane, benzene, methylbenzene

Insoluble in all solvents Soluble in polar solvents e.g. Water

Insoluble in non-polar solvents e.g. tetrachloromethane, benzene, methylbenzene

Insoluble in polar/non-polar colvents.

-Some react with polar solvents

-Some metal dissolve in other metals to form alloys e.g. Brass is formed when Zinc dissolve in copper.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. PERIODICITY OF BONDING AND STRUCTURE

The periodic table does not classify elements as metals and non-metals. The table arranges

them in terms of atomic numbers.

However, based on structure and bonding of the elements in the periodic table;

(i)-the top right hand corner of about twenty elements are non-metals

(ii)-left of each non-metal is an element which shows characteristics of both metal and non-metal.

These elements are called semi-metals/metalloids. They include Boron, silicon, Germanium, Arsenic, and Terullium

(iii)-all other elements in the periodic table are metal.

(iv)-Hydrogen is a non-metal with metallic characteristic/property of donating/losing outer electron to form cation/H+ ion.

(v) –bromine is the only known natural liquid non-metal element at room temperature and pressure.

(vi) –mercury is only known natural liquid metal element at room temperature and pressure.

(vii) Carbon-graphite is a semi metals/metalloids. Carbon-diamond is a pure non-metal yet both are allotropes of carbon (same element)

 

  1. a) Sketch of the periodic table showing metals ,metalloid and non-metals

Metals                              Metalloids              Non-metals

 H   He
Li Be   B C N O F Ne
Na Mg   Al Si P S Cl Ar
K Ca  Transition metals Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
Rb Sr   In Sn Sb Te I Xe
Cs Ba   Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Fr Ra              

 

 

 

b)Periodicity in the physical properties of elements across period 2 and 3

 

Study table I and II below:

 

Table I(period 2)

Property

 

Li Be B C N O F Ne

 

Melting point(oC) 180 1280 2030 3700

(graphite)

3550

(diamond)

-210 -219 -220 -250
Boiling point(oC) 1330 2480 3930 Graphite sublimes

4830

(diamond)

-200 -180 -190 -245
Density at room temperature (gcm-3) 0.50 1.85 2.55 2.25

(graphite)

3.53

(diamond)

0.81 0.14 0.11 0.021
Type of element Metal Metal Metal Metalloid Non-metal Non-metal Non-metal Non-metal

 

Chemical structure Giant metallic Giant metallic Giant atomic/

covalent

Giant atomic/

covalent

Simple molecula

or molecule/ N2

 

Simple molecula

or molecules

/O2

Simple molecula

or molecule/F2

Simple molecula

or molecule/Ne

State at room temperature Solid Solid Solid Solid gas gas gas gas
Electron structure 2:1 2:2 2:3 2:4 2:5 2:6 2:7 2:8

 

 

Valency 1 2 3 4 3 2 1

 

 

Formular of ion Li+ Be2+ B3+ N3- O2- F

 

 

 

 

 

 

Table II (period 3)

Property Na Mg Al Si P(white) S(Rhombic) Cl Ar

 

Melting point(oC) 98 650 660 1410

 

44 114 -101 -189

 

Boiling point(oC) 890 1120 2450 2680 280 445 -34 -186
Density at room temperature (gcm-3) 0.97 1.74 2.70 2.33

(graphite)

3.53

(diamond)

1.82 2.07 0.157 0.011
Type of element Metal Metal Metal Metalloid Non-metal Non-metal Non-metal Non-metal

 

Chemical structure Giant metallic Giant metallic Giant

metallic

Giant atomic/

covalent

Simple molecula

or molecule/ P4

 

Simple molecula

or molecules

/S8

Simple molecula

or molecule/Cl2

Simple molecula

or molecule/Ar

State at room temperature Solid Solid Solid Solid Solid Solid gas gas
Electron structure 2:8:1 2:8:2 2:8:3 2:8:4 2:8:5 2:8:6 2:8:7 2:8:8

 

 

Valency 1 2 3 4 3 2 1

 

 

Formular of ion Na+ Mg2+ Al3+ P3- S2- Cl

 

 

 

From table I and II above:

 

  1. Explain the trend in atomic radius along /across a period in the periodic table

Observation

Atomic radius of elements in the same period decrease successively across/along a period from left to right.

Explanation

Across/along the period from left to right there is an increase in nuclear charge from additional number of protons and still additional number of electrons entering the same energy level.

Increase in nuclear charge increases the effective nuclear attraction on the outer energy level pulling it closer to the nucleus successively across the period .e.g.

 

(i)From the table 1and 2 above, atomic radius of Sodium (0.157nM) is higher than that of Magnesium(0.137nM). This is because Magnesium has more effective nuclear attraction on the outer energy level than Sodium hence pulls outer energy level more nearer to its nucleus than sodium.

 

(ii)The rate of decrease in the atomic radius become smaller as the atom become heavier e.g. Atomic radius of Magnesium from sodium falls by(0.157nM- 0.137nM) =0.02

Atomic radius of Chlorine from sulphur falls by(0.104nM- 0.099nM) =0.005

This is because gaining/adding one more proton to 11 already present cause greater proportional change in nuclear attraction power  to magnesium than  gaining/adding one more proton to 16 already present in sulphur to chlorine.

 

(iii)Period 3 elements have more energy levels than Period 2 elements. They have therefore bigger/larger atomic radius/size than corresponding period 2 elements in the same group.

 

2.Explain the trend in ionic radius along/across a period in the periodic table

Observation

Ionic radius of elements in the same period decrease successively across/along a period from left to right for the first three elements then increase drastically then slowly successively decrease.

 

Explanation

Across/along the period from left to right elements change form electron donors/losers (reducing agents) to electron acceptors (oxidizing agents).

(i)An atom form stable ion by either gaining/acquiring/ accepting extra electron or donating/losing outer electrons.

 

(ii)Metals form stable ions by donating/losing all the outer energy level electrons and thus also the outer energy level .i.e.

-Sodium ion has one less energy level than sodium atom. The ion is formed by sodium atom donating/losing (all) the outer energy level electron and thus also the outer energy level making the ion to have smaller ionic radius than atom.

 

(iii)Ionic radius therefore decrease across/along the period from Lithium to Boron in period 2 and from Sodium to Aluminium in period 3.This is because the number of electrons donated/lost causes increased effective nuclear attraction on remaining electrons /energy levels.

 

(iv)Non-metals form stable ion by gaining/acquiring/accepting extra electron in the outer energy level. The extra electron/s increases the repulsion among electrons and reduces the effective nuclear attraction on outer energy level. The outer energy level therefore expand/enlarge/increase in order to accommodate the extra repelled electrons .The more electrons gained/accepted/acquired the more repulsion and the more expansion to accommodate them and hence bigger/larger atomic radius. e.g.

          –Nitrogen ion has three electrons more than Nitrogen atom. The outer energy level expand/enlarge/increase to accommodate the extra repelled electrons. Nitrogen atom thus has smaller atomic radius than the ionic radius of nitrogen ion.

 

(v) Ionic radius decrease from group IV onwards from left to right. This because the number of electrons gained to form ion decrease across/along the period from left to right. e.g. Nitrogen ion has bigger/larger  ionic radius than Oxygen.

 

3.Explain the trend in melting and boiling point of elements in a period in the periodic table.

Observation

The melting and boiling point of elements rise up to the elements in Group IV(Carbon/Silicon) along/across the period then continuously falls.

Explanation

Melting/boiling points depend on the packing of the structure making the element and the strength of the bond holding the atoms/molecules together.

Across/along the period (2 and 3) the structure changes from giant metallic, giant atomic/covalent to simple molecular.

(i)For metals, the number of delocalized electrons increases across/along the period and hence stronger metallic bond/structure thus requiring a lot of heat/energy to weaken.

The strength of a metallic bond also depends on the atomic radius/size. The melting /boiling point decrease as the atomic radius/size of metals increase due to decreased packing of larger atoms. e.g.

-The melting /boiling point of Lithium is lower than that of Beryllium because Beryllium has two/more delocalized electrons and hence stronger metallic structure/bond.

– The melting /boiling point of Lithium is higher than that of Sodium because the atomic radius/size Lithium is smaller and hence better packed  and hence forms stronger metallic structure/bond.

 

(ii)Carbon-graphite/carbon-diamond in period 2 and Silicon in period 3 form very well packed giant atomic/covalent structures held together by strong covalent bonds. These elements have therefore very high melting/boiling points.

Both Carbon-graphite/ carbon-diamond have smaller atomic radius/size than Silicon in period 3 and thus higher melting/boiling points due to better/closer packing of smaller atoms in their well packed giant atomic/covalent structures.

 

(ii)Non-metals from group V along/across the period form simple molecules joined by weak intermolecular /van-der-waals force. The weak intermolecular /van-der-waals force require little energy/heat to weaken leading to low melting/boiling points. The strength of the intermolecular /van-der-waals forces decrease with decrease in atomic radius/ size lowering the melting/boiling points along/across the period (and raising the melting/boiling points down the group).e.g.

-The melting /boiling point of Nitrogen is higher than that of Oxygen. This is because the atomic radius/ size of Nitrogen is higher than that of Oxygen and hence stronger intermolecular /van-der-waals forces between Nitrogen molecules.

-The melting /boiling point of Chlorine is higher than that of Fluorine. This is because the atomic radius/ size of Chlorine is higher than that of Fluorine and hence stronger intermolecular /van-der-waals forces between Chlorine molecules.

 

(iii)Rhombic sulphur exists as a puckered ring of S8atoms which are well packed. Before melting the ring break and join to very long chains that entangle each other causing the unusually high melting/boiling point of Rhombic sulphur.

 

(iv)Both sulphur and phosphorus exists as allotropes.

Sulphur exists as Rhombic-sulphur and monoclinic-sulphur. Rhombic-sulphur is the stable form of sulphur at room temperature and pressure.

Phosphorus exists as white-phosphorus and red-phosphorus.

White-phosphorus is the stable form of Phosphorus at room temperature and pressure.

 

  1. State and explain the trend in density of elements in a period in the periodic table.

Observation: Density increase upto the elements in group IV then falls across/along the period successively

Explanation:

Density is the mass per unit volume occupied by matter/particles/atoms/molecules of element.

 

(i)For metals ,the stronger metallic bond and the more delocalized electrons ensure a very well packed giant metallic structure that occupy less volume and thus higher density.

The more the number of delocalized electrons along/across the period, the higher the density. e.g.

(i)Aluminium has a higher density than sodium. This is because aluminium has more /three delocalized electrons than /one sodium thus forms a very well packed giant metallic structure that occupy less volume per given mass/density.

 

(ii)Carbon-graphite ,carbon-diamond and silicon in group IV form a well packed giant atomic/covalent structure that is continuously joined by strong covalent bonds hence occupy less volume per given mass/density.

Carbon-graphite form a less well packed giant hexagonal planar structure joined by Van-der-waals forces. Its density (2.25gcm-3) is therefore less than that of Carbon-diamond(3.53gcm-3) and silicon(2.33gcm-3).Both diamond and silicon have giant tetrahedral structure that is better packed. Carbon-diamond has smaller atomic radius/size than silicon. Its density is thus higher because of better packing and subsequently higher density. Carbon-diamond is the hardest known natural substance by having the highest density.

 

(iii)For non-metals, the strength of the intermolecular /van-der-waals forces decreases with decrease in atomic radius/size along/across the period. This decreases the mass occupied by given volume of atoms in a molecule from group VI onwards. e.g.

Phosphorus has a higher atomic radius/size than chlorine and Argon and thus stronger intermolecular/van-der-waals forces that ensure a given mass of phosphorus occupy less volume than chlorine and neon.

 

5.State and explain the trend in thermal/electrical conductivity of elements in a period in the periodic table.

Observation:

Increase along/across the period from group I, II, and III then decrease in Group IV to drastically decrease in group V to VIII (O).

Explanation

(i)Metals have free delocalized electrons that are responsible for thermal/electrical conductivity.Thermal/electrical conductivity increase  with increase in number of delocalized electrons. The thermal conductivity decrease with increase in temperature/heating.    

e.g.

Aluminium with three delocalized electrons from each atom in its metallic structure has the highest electrical /thermal conductivity in period 3.

 

(ii)Carbon-graphite has also free 4th valency electrons that are delocalized within its layers of giant hexagonal planar structure. They are responsible for the electrical conductivity of graphite.

 

(iii)Silicon and carbon diamond do not conduct electricity but conducts heat. With each atom too close to each other in their very well packed giant tetrahedral structure, heat transfer /radiate between the atoms. The thermal conductivity increase with increase in temperature/heating.

                                                                   

(iv)All other non-metals are poor /non-conductor of heat and electricity. They are made of molecules with no free /mobile delocalized electrons in their structure.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Periodicity of the oxides of elements along/across period 3

 

The table below summarizes some properties of the oxides of elements in period 3 of the periodic table.

 

Formular of oxide/

Property

Na2O MgO Al2O3 SiO2 P2O5

P4O6

SO2

SO3

Cl2O7

Cl2O

Melting

 

point(oC)

1193 3075 2045 1728

 

563 -76 -60

 

Boiling

 

point(oC)

1278 3601 2980 2231 301 -10 -9
Bond type Ionic Ionic Ionic Covalent Covalent Covalent Covalent

 

Chemical structure Giant ionic structure Giant ionic structure Giant ionic structure Giant atomic/

covalent

Simple molecula

or molecule

 

Simple molecula

or molecules

Simple molecula

or molecule

State at room

temperature

Solid Solid Solid Solid Solid gas Gas

(Cl2O7 is a liquid)

Nature of

Oxide

Basic/

alkaline

Basic/

alkaline

Amphotellic oxide 2:8:4 2:8:5 2:8:6 2:8:7
Reaction with water

 

 

React to form NaOH /alkaline solution React to form MgOH)2 /weakly alkaline solution Don’t react with water. Don’t react with water. React to form H2PO4

/weakly acidic solution

-SO2 react to form H2SO3 . H2SO3 is quickly oxidized to H2SO4

-SO2 react to form H2SO4/ strongly

acidic

-Cl2O7 reacts to form HClO4

/weakly acidic solution

Reaction with dilute acids Reacts to form salt and water Reacts to form salt and water Reacts to form salt and water No reaction No reaction No reaction No reaction

 

  1. All the oxides of elements in period 3 except those of sulphur and chlorine are solids at room temperature and pressure.
  2. Across/along the period, bonding of the oxides changes from ionic in sodium oxide magnesium oxide and aluminium oxide (show both ionic and covalent properties) to covalent in the rest of the oxides.

 

  1. Across/along the period, the structure of the oxides changes from giant ionic structure in sodium oxide, magnesium oxide and aluminium oxide to giant atomic/covalent structure in silicon (IV) oxide. The rest of the oxides form simple molecules/molecular structure.

 

  1. Sodium oxide and magnesium oxide are basic /alkaline in nature. Aluminium oxide is amphotellic in nature (shows both acidic and basic characteristics). The rest of the oxides are acidic in nature.

 

  1. Ionic compounds/oxides have very high melting/boiling points because of the strong electrostatic attraction joining the giant ionic crystal lattice.

The melting/boiling points increase from sodium oxide to aluminium oxide as the number of electrons involved in bonding increase, increasing the strength of the ionic bond/structure.

 

  1. Silicon (IV) oxide is made of a well packed giant atomic/covalent structure joined by strong covalent bonds.

This results in a solid with very high melting/boiling point.

 

7.Phosphorus (V) oxide, sulphur(IV) oxide/ sulphur (VI) oxide and dichloride heptoxide exist as simple molecules/molecular structure joined by weak van-der-waals/intermolecular forces.

This results in them existing as low melting /boiling point solids/gases.

 

  1. Ionic oxide conducts electricity in molten and aqueous states but not in solid.

In solid state the ions are fused/fixed but on heating to molten state and when dissolved in water, the ions are free / mobile.

Sodium oxide, magnesium oxide and aluminium oxide are therefore good conductors in molten and aqueous states.

 

  1. Covalent bonded oxides do not conduct electricity in solid, molten or in aqueous states.

This is because they do not have free / mobile ion. Phosphorus (V) oxide, sulphur(IV) oxide/ sulphur (VI) oxide and dichloride heptoxide are thus non-conductors/insulators.

 

  1. Silicon (IV) oxide is a poor/weak conductor of heat in solid state. This is because it has very closely packed structure for heat to radiate conduct along its structure.

 

  1. Electopositivity decrease across the period while electronegativity increase across the period. The oxides thus become less ionic and more covalent along/across the period.

12.The steady change from giant ionic structure to giant atomic/ covalent structure then simple molecular structure lead to profound differences in the reaction of the oxides with water,acids and alkalis/bases:

 

(i) Reaction with water

  1. a) Ionic oxides react with water to form alkaline solutions e.g.;

I.Sodium oxide reacts/dissolves in water forming an alkaline solution of sodium hydroxide.

Chemical equation:        Na2O(s)   +   H2O (l)     ->    2NaOH(aq)

 

  1. Magnesium oxide slightly/ slowly reacts/dissolves in water forming an alkaline solution of magnesium hydroxide

Chemical equation:        MgO(s)   +   2H2O (l)     ->    Mg(OH) 2 (aq)

 

III. Aluminium oxide does reacts/dissolves in water.

  1. b) Non-metallic oxides are acidic. They react with water to form weakly acidic solutions:
  2. Phosphorus (V) oxide readily reacts/dissolves in water forming a weak acidic solution of phosphoric (V) acid.

Chemical equation:        P4O10 (s)   +   6H2O (l)     ->    4H3PO4 (aq)

Chemical equation:        P2O5 (s)   +   3H2O (l)     ->    2H3PO4 (aq)

 

  1. Sulphur (IV) oxide readily reacts/dissolves in water forming a weak acidic solution of sulphuric (IV) acid.

Chemical equation:        SO2 (g)   +   H2O (l)     ->    H2SO3 (aq)

Sulphur (VI) oxide quickly fumes in water to form concentrated  sulphuric (VI) acid which is a strong acid.

Chemical equation:        SO3 (g)   +   H2O (l)     ->    H2SO4 (aq)

 

III. Dichlorine oxide reacts with water to form weak acidic solution of chloric(I) acid/hypochlorous acid.

Chemical equation:        Cl2O (g)   +   H2O (l)     ->   2HClO (aq)

 

  1. Dichlorine heptoxide reacts with water to form weak acidic solution of chloric(VII) acid.

Chemical equation:        Cl2O7 (l)   +   H2O (l)     ->   2HClO4 (aq)

 

  1. c) Silicon (IV) oxide does not react with water.

It reacts with hot concentrated alkalis forming silicate (IV) salts. e.g.

Silicon (IV) oxide react with hot concentrated sodium hydroxide to form sodium silicate (IV) salt.

Chemical equation:        SiO2 (s)   +   2NaOH (aq)     ->    Na2SiO3 (aq) +   H2O (l)

 

(ii) Reaction with dilute acids

  1. a) Ionic oxides react with dilute acids to form salt and water only. This is a neutralization e.g.

Chemical equation:        Na2O(s)   +   H2SO4 (aq)     ->    Na2SO4 (aq)  + H2O(l)

Chemical equation:        MgO(s)   +   2HNO3(aq)     ->    Mg (NO3) 2 (aq) + H2O(l)

Chemical equation:        Al2O3 (s) +   6HCl(aq)        ->    2AlCl3 (aq)  +  3H2O(l)

 

Aluminium oxide is amphotellic and reacts with hot concentrated strong alkalis sodium/potassium hydroxides to form complex sodium aluminate(III) and potassium aluminate(III) salt.

Chemical equation:  Al2O3 (s)   +  2NaOH(aq) +  3H2O(l)    ->   2 NaAl(OH)4 (aq)

Chemical equation:  Al2O3 (s)   +  2KOH(aq) +  3H2O(l)    ->   2 KAl(OH)4 (aq)

 

  1. b) Acidic oxides do not react with dilute acids.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

c)Periodicity of the Chlorides of elements along/across period 3

 

The table below summarizes some properties of the chlorides of elements in period 3 of the periodic table.

Formular of chloride/

Property

NaCl MgCl2 AlCl3 SiCl4 PCl5

PCl3

SCl2

S2Cl2

Cl2
Melting

 

point(oC)

801 714 Sublimes at

180 oC

-70

 

PCl5

Sublimes at

-94 oC

-78 -101

 

Boiling

 

point(oC)

1465 1418 423(as Al2Cl6

vapour

57 74(as P2Cl6

Vapour

164 (as PCl5)

 

decomposes

at 59 oC

-34
Bond type Ionic Ionic Ionic/

Covalent/

dative

Covalent Covalent Covalent Covalent

 

Chemical structure Giant ionic structure Giant ionic structure Molecular/

dimerizes

Simple molecula

or molecule

Simple molecula

or molecule

 

Simple molecula

or molecules

Simple molecula

or molecule

State at room

temperature

Solid Solid Solid liquid Liquid

PCl5

is solid

liquid Gas
Nature of

Chloride

Neutral Neutral Strongly acidic Strongly acidic Strongly acidic Strongly acidic Strongly acidic
 

pH of solution

7.0 7.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
Reaction with water

 

 

Dissolve Dissolve -Hydrolysed

by water

-Acidic hydrogen chloride fumes produced

-Hydrolysed

by water

-Acidic hydrogen chloride fumes produced

Hydrolysed

by water

-Acidic hydrogen chloride fumes produced

Hydrolysed

by water

-Acidic hydrogen chloride fumes produced

Forms HCl and HClO
Electrical conductivity in molten/aqueous state good good poor nil nil nil nil

 

  1. Sodium Chloride, Magnesium chloride and aluminium chloride are solids at room temperature and pressure.

Silicon(IV) chloride, phosphorus(III)chloride and disulphur dichloride are liquids. Phosphorus(V)chloride is  a solid. Both chlorine and sulphur chloride are gases.

 

  1. Across/along the period bonding changes from ionic in Sodium Chloride and Magnesium chloride to covalent in the rest of the chlorides.

 

  1. Anhydrous aluminium chloride is also a molecular compound .Each aluminium atom is covalently bonded to three chlorine atoms.

In vapour/gaseous phase/state two molecules dimerizes to Al2O6 molecule through coordinate/dative bonding.

 

  1. Across/along the period the structure changes from giant ionic in Sodium Chloride and Magnesium chloride to simple molecules/molecular structure in the rest of the chlorides.

 

  1. Ionic chlorides have very high melting /boiling points because of the strong ionic bond/electrostatic attraction between the ions in their crystal lattice.The rest of the chlorides have low melting /boiling points because of the weak van-der-waal /intermolecular forces.

 

  1. Sodium Chloride and Magnesium chloride in molten and aqueous state have free/mobile ions and thus good electrical conductors. Aluminium chloride is a poor conductor. The rest of the chlorides do not conduct because they have no free/mobile ions.

 

  1. Ionic chloride form neutral solutions with pH =7. These chlorides ionize/dissociate completely into free cations and anions.i.e;

Sodium Chloride and Magnesium chloride have pH=7 because they are fully/completely ionized/dissociated into free ions.

Chemical equation          NaCl  (s)      ->       Na+(aq)        +        Cl(aq)              

Chemical equation          MgCl2  (s)    ->       Mg2+(aq)      +        2Cl(aq)

 

8 Across/along the period from aluminium chloride, hydrolysis of the chloride takes place when reacting/dissolved in water.

Hydrolysis is the reaction of a compound when dissolved in water.

 

a)Aluminium chloride is hydrolyzed by water to form aluminium hydroxide and fumes of hydrogen chloride gas. Hydrogen chloride gas dissolves in water to acidic hydrochloric acid. Hydrochloric acid is a strong acid with low pH and thus the mixture is strongly acidic.

Chemical equation          AlCl3  (s)   +  3H2O(l)->    Al(OH)3(s)    +          3HCl(g)

 

b)Silicon(IV) chloride is hydrolyzed by water to form silicon(IV)oxide and fumes of hydrogen chloride gas. Hydrogen chloride gas dissolves in water to acidic hydrochloric acid. Hydrochloric acid is a strong acid with low pH and thus the mixture is strongly acidic.

Chemical equation          SiCl4  (l)   +  2H2O(l)->    SiO2(s)    + 4HCl(g)

This reaction is highly exothermic producing /evolving a lot of heat that cause a rise in the temperature of the mixture.

 

  1. c) Both phosphoric (V) chloride and phosphoric (III) chloride are hydrolyzed by water to form phosphoric (V) acid and phosphoric (III) acid Fumes of hydrogen chloride gas are produced. Hydrogen chloride gas dissolves in water to acidic hydrochloric acid. Hydrochloric acid is a strong acid with low pH and thus the mixture is strongly acidic.

Chemical equation          PCl5  (s)   +  4H2O(l)->    H3PO4(aq)    +          5HCl(g)

Chemical equation          PCl3  (s)   +  3H2O(l)->    H3PO4(aq)    +          3HCl(g)

 

This reaction is also highly exothermic producing /evolving a lot of heat that cause a rise in the temperature of the mixture.

 

  1. d) Disulphur dichloride similarly hydrolyzes in water to form yellow deposits of sulphur and produce a mixture of sulphur (IV) oxide and hydrogen chloride Hydrogen chloride gas dissolves in water to acidic hydrochloric acid. Hydrochloric acid is a strong acid with low pH and thus the mixture is strongly acidic.

Chemical equation          2S2Cl2  (l)   +  2H2O(l)->  3S(s)  + SO2(g)  +          4HCl(g)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. COMPREHENSIVE REVISION QUESTIONS

 

1.The grid below represents periodic table.  Study it and answer the questions that follow.  The letters do not represent the actual symbols of the elements.

 

    A
B       G   H E C
  J I L        
D N           M  

(a) (I) Indicate on the grid the position of an element represented by letter N whose electronic configuration of a divalent cation is 2:8:8 . ( 1 mark )

 

(II) Name the bond formed between D and H react. Explain your answer.(2 marks )

Ionic/electrovalent

D is electropositive thus donates two electrons to electronegative H

(III) Write an equation for the reaction between B and water.      ( 1 mark )

Chemical equation                  2B  (s)   +  2H2O(l) ->    2BOH(aq)    +  H2 (g)

(IV) How do the atomic radii of I and L compare.  Explain.                                      ( 2 marks )

 

 

 

(V) In terms of structure and bonding explain why the oxide of G has lower melting point than oxide of L.                                           ( 2 marks )

 

 

(b) Study the information given below and answer the question that follow.

 

Formula of compound N NaCl MgCl 2 Al2Cl6 SiCl4 PCl3 SCl2
B.P(0C) 1470 1420 Sublimes 60 75 60
M.P(0C) 800 710 At 8000C -70 90 -80

( I)Why is the formula of aluminium chloride given as Al2Cl6 and not AlCl3 ?                                                                                                                         ( 1 mark )

 

(II) Give two chlorides that are liquid at room temperature.  Give a reason for the answer.                                                                                               (2 marks )

 

 

(III) Give a reason why Al2Cl6 has a lower melting point than MgCl2 although both Al and Mg are metals.                                                                                  (1 mark )

 

 

(IV) Which of the chlorides would remain in liquid state for the highest temperature range explain why ?                                                               (2 mark )

 

 

(Kakamega)

  1. a) Study the information given below and answer the questions that follow.

 

Element Atomic radius (nm) Ionic radius (nm) Formula of oxide Melting point of oxide (‘C)
P

Q

R

S

T

0.364

0.830

0.592

0.381

0.762

0.421

0.711

0.485

0.446

0.676

A2O

BO2

E2O3

G2O5

JO

-119

837

1466

242

1054

(i) Which elements are non-metals? Give a reason.                             (2mks)

 

(ii) Explain why the melting point of the oxide of R is higher than that of the oxide of S.                                                                                             (2mks)

 

(iii) Give two elements that would react vigorously with each other. Explain your answer.                                                                                           (2mks)

 

 

  1. b) Study the information in the table below and answer the questions that follow (The letters do not represent the actual symbols of the elements)

 

 

  Ionization Energy_kJ/Mole
Element Electronic configuration   1st ionization energy 2nd ionization energy
A  2.2 900  1800
B 2.8.2 736 1450
C 2.8.8.2 590 1150

(i) What chemical family do the elements A, B and C belong?                        (1mk)

 

(ii) What is meant by the term ionization energy?                                            (1mk)

 

iii) The 2nd  ionization energy is higher that the 1st ionization energy of each. Explain

(1mk)

(iv)When a piece of element C is placed in cold water, it sinks to the bottom and an effervescence of a colourless gas that burns explosively is produced. Use a simple diagram to illustrate how this gas can be collected during this experiment.                                                                                                                         (3mks)

 

  1. The grid below represents part of the periodic table. The letters do not represent the actual symbols.

 

    A
B     X G   Z E V
  J I L   T    
D N           M  

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Select the most reactive non-metal.     (1mk)

 

  1. b) Write the formula of the compound consisting of

I.D and Z only.                                                                                                 (2mk)

 

 

  1. X and Z

 

  1. c) Select an element that can form an ion of change +2                (1mk)

 

  1. d) Which element has the least ionization energy? Explain    (2mks)
  2. e) Suggest with reasons a likely pH value of an aqueous solution of the chlorine of:(3mks)

T.

 

B

 

X

 

  1. f) To which chemical family do the following elements belong? (2mk)

J

V

 

  1. g) An element K has relative atomic mass of 40.2.It has two isotopes of masses 39 and 42. Calculate the relative abundance of each isotope. (3mks)

4.The grid below shows part of the periodic table study it and answer the questions that follow. The letters do not represent the true symbols.

               
                 
                 
            A    
  B   C   D   E  
F G              
              H  
                 

 

\(a) Which element forms ions with charge of 2-. Explain                     (2mks)

 

(b) What is the nature of the oxide formed by C.                                  (1mk)

 

(c) How does the reactivity of H compare with that of E. Explain?        (2mks)

 

(d)Write down a balanced equation between B and Chlorine.               (1mk)

 

(e) Explain how the atomic radii of F and G compare.                          (1mk)

 

(f) If the oxides of F and D are separately dissolved in water, state and explain the effects of their aqueous solutions on litmus.                                               (3mks)

 

  1. (a) The grid below show part of the periodic table.(The letter do not represent the actual symbols).Use it to answer the questions that follow.

 

T   Q
        S   R K  
A J   Y   U   L  
W             M B
  C           N  
P                
                 

(i)Select the most reactive non-metal.                                                            (1mk)

 

(ii)Select an element that forms a divalent cation.                                          (1mk)

 

(iii)Element Z has atomic number 14.Show its position in the grid.               (1mk)

 

(iv)How do the atomic radii of U and J compare?                                         (2mks)

 

(v)How do electrical conductivity of A and Y compare?                                (2mks)

 

(vi)How does the boiling point of elements K, L and M vary? Explain        (2mks

(b) The table below gives information on four elements by letters K, L, M and N. Study it and answer the  questions that follow. The letters do not represent the actual symbols of the elements.

 

Element Electron arrangement Atomic radius Ionic radius
K 2:8:2 0.136 0.065
L 2:8:7 0.099 0.181
M 2:8:8:1 0.203 0.133
N 2:8:8:2 0.174 0.099

 

(a) Which two elements have similar properties? Explain.                (2mks)

 

(b) Which element is a non-metal? Explain.                                      (1mk)

(c) Which one of the elements is the strongest reducing agent.      (1mk)

  1. The grid given below represents part of the periodic table study it and answer the questions that follow. (The letters do not represent the actual symbols of the elements.)

 

    A
         B        
  C D     E    
  F              
                 

 

(i) What name is given to the group of elements to which C and F belong?        (1mk)

 

(ii) Which letter represents the element that is the least reactive?           (1mk)

(iii) What type of bond is formed when B and E react? Explain                  (2mks)

(iv)Write formula of the compound formed where elements D and oxygen gas react.   (1mk)

 

 

(v) On the grid indicate the a tick (√) the position of element G which is in the third period of the periodic table and forms G3- ions.                                                           (1mk)

 

(b) Study the information in the table below and answer the questions that follow. (The letter do not represents the actual symbols of the substance).

 

Substance Melting point oC Boiling point oC Solubility in water Density at room. Temp/g/cm3
H -117 78.5 Very soluble 0.8
J -78 -33 Very soluble 0.77x 1-3
K -23 77 Insoluble 1.6
L – 219 -183 Slightly

Soluable

1.33 x 10-3

 

I.(i) Which substance would dissolve in water and could be separated from the solution by fractional distillation.                                                                (1mk)

 

(ii) Which substances is a liquid at room temperature and when mixed with water two layers would be formed?                                                                                       (1mk)

 

  1. Which letter represents a substance that is a gas at room temperature and which can be collected ;

(i) Over water?                                                                                                (1mk)

 

(ii) By downward displacement of air? Density of air at room temperature = 1.29 x 10-3 g/C

 

(1mk)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

     

 

UPGRADE

CHEMISTRY

                

FORM 2

                 

Introduction to SALTS

 

 

 

      

 

                 Comprehensive tutorial notes

 

MUTHOMI S.G

www.kcselibrary.info

0720096206

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

INTRODUCTION TO SALTS

 

1.(a) A salt is an ionic compound formed when the cation from a base combine with the anion derived from an acid.

A salt is therefore formed when the hydrogen ions in an acid are replaced wholly/fully or partially/partly ,directly or indirectly by a metal or ammonium radical.

 

(b) The number of ionizable/replaceable hydrogen in an acid is called basicity of an acid.

Some acids are therefore:

(i)monobasic acids generally denoted HX e.g.

HCl, HNO3,HCOOH,CH3COOH.

 

(ii)dibasic acids ; generally denoted H2X e.g.

H2SO4, H2SO3, H2CO3,HOOCOOH.

 

(iii)tribasic acids ; generally denoted H3X e.g.

H3PO4.

 

(c) Some salts are normal salts while other are acid salts.

(i)A normal salt is formed when all the ionizable /replaceable hydrogen in an acid is replaced by a metal or metallic /ammonium radical.

 

(ii)An acid salt is formed when part/portion the ionizable /replaceable hydrogen in an acid is replaced by a metal or metallic /ammonium radical.

 

Table showing normal and acid salts derived from common acids

 

   Acid  name Chemical formula Basicity     Normal salt      Acid salt
Hydrochloric acid HCl Monobasic Chloride(Cl) None

 

Nitric(V)acid HNO3 Monobasic Nitrate(V)(NO3) None

 

Nitric(III)acid HNO2 Monobasic Nitrate(III)(NO2) None

 

Sulphuric(VI)acid H2SO4 Dibasic Sulphate(VI) (SO42-) Hydrogen sulphate(VI)

(HSO4)

 

Sulphuric(IV)acid H2SO3 Dibasic Sulphate(IV) (SO32-) Hydrogen sulphate(IV)

(HSO3)

 

Carbonic(IV)acid H2CO3 Dibasic Carbonate(IV)(CO32-) Hydrogen carbonate(IV)

(HCO3)

 

Phosphoric(V)

acid

H3PO4 Tribasic Phosphate(V)(PO43-) Dihydrogen phosphate(V)

(H2PO42-)

 

Hydrogen diphosphate(V)

(HP2O42-)

 

The table below show shows some examples of salts.

Base/alkali Cation Acid Anion Salt Chemical name of salts
NaOH Na+ HCl Cl NaCl Sodium(I)chloride
Mg(OH)2 Mg2+ H2SO4 SO42- MgSO4

Mg(HSO4)2

Magnesium sulphate(VI)

Magnesium hydrogen sulphate(VI)

Pb(OH)2 Pb2+ HNO3 NO3 Pb(NO3)2 Lead(II)nitrate(V)
Ba(OH)2 Ba2+ HNO3 NO3 Ba(NO3)2 Barium(II)nitrate(V)
Ca(OH)2 Ba2+ H2SO4 SO42- MgSO4 Calcium sulphate(VI)
NH4OH NH4+ H3PO4 PO43- (NH4 )3PO4

(NH4 )2HPO4

NH4 H2PO4

Ammonium phosphate(V)

Diammonium phosphate(V)

Ammonium diphosphate(V)

KOH K+ H3PO4 PO43- K3PO4 Potassium phosphate(V)
Al(OH)3 Al3+ H2SO4 SO42- Al2(SO4)2 Aluminium(III)sulphate(VI)
Fe(OH)2 Fe2+ H2SO4 SO42- FeSO4 Iron(II)sulphate(VI)
Fe(OH)3 Fe3+ H2SO4 SO42- Fe2(SO4)2 Iron(III)sulphate(VI)

 

(d) Some salts undergo hygroscopy, deliquescence and efflorescence.

(i) Hygroscopic salts /compounds are those that absorb water from the atmosphere but do not form a solution.

Some salts which are hygroscopic include anhydrous copper(II)sulphate(VI), anhydrous cobalt(II)chloride, potassium nitrate(V) common table salt.

 

(ii)Deliquescent salts /compounds are those that absorb water from the atmosphere and form a solution.

Some salts which are deliquescent include: Sodium nitrate(V),Calcium chloride, Sodium hydroxide, Iron(II)chloride, Magnesium chloride.

 

(iii)Efflorescent salts/compounds are those that lose their  water of crystallization to  the atmosphere.

Some salts which effloresces include: sodium carbonate decahydrate, Iron(II)sulphate(VI)heptahydrate, sodium sulphate (VI)decahydrate.

 

(e)Some salts contain water of crystallization.They are hydrated.Others do not contain water of crystallization. They are anhydrous.

 

Table showing some hydrated salts.

Name of hydrated salt Chemical formula
Copper(II)sulphate(VI)pentahydrate CuSO4.5H2O
Aluminium(III)sulphate(VI)hexahydrate Al2 (SO4) 3.6H2O
Zinc(II)sulphate(VI)heptahydrate ZnSO4.7H2O
Iron(II)sulphate(VI)heptahydrate FeSO4.7H2O
Calcium(II)sulphate(VI)heptahydrate CaSO4.7H2O
Magnesium(II)sulphate(VI)heptahydrate MgSO4.7H2O
Sodium sulphate(VI)decahydrate Na2SO4.10H2O
Sodium carbonate(IV)decahydrate Na2CO3.10H2O
Potassium carbonate(IV)decahydrate K2CO3.10H2O
Potassium sulphate(VI)decahydrate K2SO4.10H2O

 

(f)Some salts exist as a simple salt while some as complex salts. Below are some complex salts.

Table of some complex salts

 

Name of complex salt Chemical formula Colour of the complex salt
Tetraamminecopper(II)sulphate(VI) Cu(NH3) 4 SO4 H2O Royal/deep blue solution
Tetraamminezinc(II)nitrate(V) Zn(NH3) 4 (NO3 )2 Colourless solution
Tetraamminecopper(II) nitrate(V) Cu(NH3) 4 (NO3 )2 Royal/deep blue solution
Tetraamminezinc(II)sulphate(VI) Zn(NH3) 4 SO4 Colourless solution

 

(g)Some salts exist as two salts in one. They are called double salts.

 

Table of some double salts

Name of double salts Chemical formula
Trona(sodium sesquicarbonate) Na2CO3 NaHCO3.2H2O
Ammonium iron(II)sulphate(VI) FeSO4(NH4) 2SO4.2H2O
Ammonium aluminium(III)sulphate(VI) Al2(SO4) 3(NH4) 2SO4.H2O

 

(h)Some salts dissolve in water to form a solution. They are said to be soluble. Others do not dissolve in water. They form a suspension/precipitate in water.

 

Table of solubility of salts

 

          Soluble salts            Insoluble salts
All nitrate(V)salts  
All sulphate(VI)/SO42- salts          except    Barium(II) sulphate(VI)/BaSO4

Calcium(II) sulphate(VI)/CaSO4

Lead(II) sulphate(VI)/PbSO4

All sulphate(IV)/SO32- salts          except    Barium(II) sulphate(IV)/BaSO3

Calcium(II) sulphate(IV)/CaSO3

Lead(II) sulphate(IV)/PbSO3

All chlorides/Cl–                                         except   Silver chloride/AgCl

Lead(II)chloride/PbCl2(dissolves in hot water)

All phosphate(V)/PO43-  
All sodium,potassium and ammonium salts  
All hydrogen carbonates/HCO3  
All hydrogen sulphate(VI)/ HSO4  
Sodium carbonate/Na2CO3,

potassium carbonate/ K2CO3,

ammonium carbonate (NH4) 2CO3

except    All carbonates
All alkalis(KOH,NaOH, NH4OH) except     All bases

 

13 Salts can be prepared in a school laboratory by a method that uses its solubility in water.

  • Soluble salts may be prepared by using any of the following methods:

 

(i)Direct displacement/reaction of a metal with an acid.

By reacting a metal higher in the reactivity series than hydrogen with a dilute acid,a salt is formed and hydrogen gas is evolved.

Excess of the metal must be used to ensure all the acid has reacted.

When effervescence/bubbling /fizzing has stopped ,excess metal is filtered.

The filtrate is  heated to concentrate then allowed to crystallize.

Washing with distilled water then drying between filter papers produces a sample crystal of the salt. i.e.

M(s)    +   H2X      ->   MX(aq)   +    H2(g)

Examples

Mg(s)  +  H2SO4(aq)        ->  MgSO4 (aq)      + H2(g)

Zn(s)   +  H2SO4(aq)        ->  ZnSO4 (aq)       + H2(g)

Pb(s)   +  2HNO3(aq)      -> Pb(NO3) 2(aq)  + H2(g)

Ca(s)   +  2HNO3(aq)      -> Ca(NO3) 2(aq)  + H2(g)

Mg(s)  +  2HNO3(aq)      -> Mg(NO3) 2(aq)            + H2(g)

Mg(s)  +  2HCl(aq)          -> MgCl 2(aq)        + H2(g)

Zn(s)   +  2HCl(aq)          -> ZnCl 2(aq)         + H2(g)

 

(ii)Reaction of an insoluble base with an acid

By adding an insoluble base (oxide/hydroxide )to a dilute acid until no more dissolves, in the acid,a salt and water are formed. Excess of the base is filtered off. The filtrate is heated to concentrate ,allowed to crystallize then washed with distilled water before drying between filter papers e.g.

PbO(s)   +  2HNO3(aq)    -> Pb(NO3) 2(aq)  + H2O (l)

Pb(OH)2(s)   +  2HNO3(aq)       -> Pb(NO3) 2(aq)  + 2H2O (l)

CaO (s)   +  2HNO3(aq)   -> Ca(NO3) 2(aq)  + H2O (l)

MgO (s)  +  2HNO3(aq)  -> Mg(NO3) 2(aq)            + H2O (l)

MgO (s)  +  2HCl(aq)      -> MgCl 2(aq)        + H2O (l)

ZnO (s)   +  2HCl(aq)      -> ZnCl 2(aq)         + H2O (l)

Zn(OH)2(s)   +  2HNO3(aq)       -> Zn(NO3) 2(aq)  + 2H2O (l)

CuO (s)   +  2HCl(aq)      -> CuCl 2(aq)         + H2O (l)

CuO (s)   +  H2SO4(aq)    -> CuSO4(aq)        + H2O (l)

Ag2O(s)   +  2HNO3(aq)  -> 2AgNO3(aq)     + H2O (l)

Na2O(s)   +  2HNO3(aq)  -> 2NaNO3(aq)      + H2O (l)

 

(iii)reaction of insoluble /soluble carbonate /hydrogen carbonate with an acid.

By adding an excess of a soluble /insoluble carbonate or hydrogen carbonate to adilute acid, effervescence /fizzing/bubbling out of carbon(IV)oxide gas shows the reaction is taking place. When effervescence /fizzing/bubbling out of the gas is over, excess of the insoluble carbonate is filtered off. The filtrate is heated to concentrate ,allowed to crystallize then washed with distilled water before drying between filter paper papers e.g.

PbCO3 (s)     +  2HNO3(aq)       -> Pb(NO3) 2(aq)  + H2O (l)+ CO2(g)

ZnCO3 (s)     +  2HNO3(aq)       -> Zn(NO3) 2(aq)  + H2O (l)+ CO2(g)

CaCO3 (s)     +  2HNO3(aq)       -> Ca(NO3) 2(aq)  + H2O (l)+ CO2(g)

MgCO3 (s)    + H2SO4(aq)         -> MgSO4(aq)        + H2O (l)+ CO2(g)

Cu CO3 (s)    +  H2SO4(aq)        -> CuSO4(aq)        + H2O (l) + CO2(g)

Ag2CO3 (s)   +  2HNO3(aq)      -> 2AgNO3(aq)     + H2O (l) + CO2(g)

Na2CO3 (s)    +  2HNO3(aq)      -> 2NaNO3(aq)      + H2O (l) + CO2(g)

K2CO3 (s)     +  2HCl(aq)           -> 2KCl(aq)           + H2O (l) + CO2(g)

NaHCO3 (s)    +  HNO3(aq)       -> NaNO3(aq)        + H2O (l) + CO2(g)

KHCO3 (s)     +  HCl(aq)           -> KCl(aq)                       + H2O (l) + CO2(g)

 

(iv)neutralization/reaction of soluble base/alkali with dilute acid

 

By adding an acid to a burette into a known volume of an alkali with 2-3 drops of an indicator, the colour of the indicator changes when the acid has completely reacted with an alkali at the end point. The procedure is then repeated without the indicator .The solution mixture is then heated to concentrate , allowed to crystallize ,washed with distilled water before drying with filter papers. e.g.

 

NaOH (aq)       +  HNO3(aq)     -> NaNO3(aq)       + H2O (l)

KOH (aq)         +  HNO3(aq)     -> KNO3(aq)         + H2O (l)

KOH (aq)         +  HCl(aq)         -> KCl(aq)            + H2O (l)

2KOH (aq)       +  H2SO4(aq)    -> K2SO4(aq)        + 2H2O (l)

2 NH4OH (aq)  +  H2SO4(aq)    -> (NH4)2SO4(aq)  + 2H2O (l)

NH4OH (aq)     +  HNO3(aq)     -> NH4NO3(aq)      +  H2O (l)

 

(iv)direct synthesis/combination.

When a metal burn in a gas jar containing a non metal , the two directly combine to form a salt. e.g.

2Na(s)         +        Cl2(g)           ->       2NaCl(s)

2K(s)           +       Cl2(g)           ->       2KCl(s)

Mg(s)           +       Cl2(g)           ->       Mg Cl2 (s)

Ca(s)            +       Cl2(g)           ->       Ca Cl2 (s)

 

Some salts once formed undergo sublimation and hydrolysis. Care should be taken to avoid water/moisture into the reaction flask during their preparation.Such salts include aluminium(III)chloride(AlCl3) and iron (III)chloride(FeCl3)

 

  1. Heated aluminium foil reacts with chlorine to form aluminium(III)chloride that sublimes away from the source of heating then deposited as solid again

2Al(s)                    +       3Cl2(g)         ->       2AlCl3 (s/g)

 

Once formed  aluminium(III)chloride hydrolyses/reacts with water vapour / moisture present to form aluminium hydroxide solution and highly acidic fumes of hydrogen chloride gas.

AlCl3(s)+     3H2 O(g)     ->       Al(OH)3 (aq) + 3HCl(g)

 

  1. Heated iron filings reacts with chlorine to form iron(III)chloride that sublimes away from the source of heating then deposited as solid again

2Fe(s)                    +       3Cl2(g)         ->       2FeCl3 (s/g)

 

Once formed , aluminium(III)chloride hydrolyses/reacts with water vapour / moisture present to form aluminium hydroxide solution and highly acidic fumes of hydrogen chloride gas.

FeCl3(s)+     3H2 O(g)     ->       Fe(OH)3 (aq) + 3HCl(g)

 

(b)Insoluble salts can be prepared by reacting two suitable soluble salts to form one soluble and one insoluble. This is called double decomposition or precipitation. The mixture is filtered and the residue is washed with distilled water then dried.

CuSO4(aq)        +   Na2CO3 (aq)         ->       CuCO3 (s)  +  Na2 SO4(aq)

BaCl2(aq)        +   K2SO4 (aq)            ->       BaSO4 (s)   +  2KCl (aq)

Pb(NO3)2(aq)   +   K2SO4 (aq)            ->       PbSO4 (s)   +  2KNO3 (aq)

2AgNO3(aq)               +  MgCl2 (aq)             ->       2AgCl(s)     +  Mg(NO3)2 (aq)

Pb(NO3)2(aq)   +   (NH4) 2SO4 (aq)    ->       PbSO4 (s)   +  2NH4NO 3(aq)

BaCl2(aq)        +   K2SO3 (aq)           ->       BaSO3 (s)   +  2KCl (aq)

 

  1. Salts may lose their water of crystallization , decompose ,melt or sublime on heating on a Bunsen burner flame.

The following shows the behavior of some salts on heating gently /or strongly in a laboratory school burner:

 

(a)effect of heat on chlorides

All chlorides have very high melting and boiling points and therefore are not affected by laboratory heating except ammonium chloride. Ammonium chloride sublimes on gentle heating. It dissociate into the constituent ammonia and hydrogen chloride gases on strong heating.

 

NH4Cl(s)               NH4Cl(g)                         NH3(g) + HCl(g)

(sublimation)              (dissociation)

 

(b)effect of heat on nitrate(V)

(i) Potassium nitrate(V)/KNO3 and sodium nitrate(V)/NaNO3 decompose on heating to form Potassium nitrate(III)/KNO2 and sodium nitrate(III)/NaNO2  and producing Oxygen gas in each case.

2KNO3 (s)    -> 2KNO2(s) +   O2(g)

2NaNO3 (s)  -> 2NaNO2(s) +   O2(g)

 

(ii)Heavy metal nitrates(V) salts decompose on heating to form the oxide and a mixture of brown acidic nitrogen(IV)oxide and oxygen gases. e.g.

2Ca(NO3)2 (s)          ->    2CaO(s)    +   4NO2(g)   +    O2(g)

2Mg(NO3)2(s)         ->    2MgO(s)    +   4NO2(g)   +    O2(g)

2Zn(NO3)2(s)           ->    2ZnO(s)    +   4NO2(g)   +    O2(g)

2Pb(NO3)2(s)           ->    2PbO(s)    +   4NO2(g)   +    O2(g)

2Cu(NO3)2(s)          ->    2CuO(s)    +   4NO2(g)   +    O2(g)

2Fe(NO3)2(s)           ->    2FeO(s)    +   4NO2(g)   +    O2(g)

 

(iii)Silver(I)nitrate(V) and mercury(II) nitrate(V) are lowest in the reactivity series. They decompose on heating to form the metal(silver and mercury)and the Nitrogen(IV)oxide and oxygen gas. i.e.

2AgNO3(s)   ->    2Ag (s)    +   2NO2(g)   +    O2(g)

2Hg(NO3)2 (s)         ->    2Hg (s)    +   4NO2(g)   +    O2(g)

 

(iv)Ammonium nitrate(V) and Ammonium nitrate(III) decompose on heating to Nitrogen(I)oxide(relights/rekindles glowing splint) and nitrogen gas respectively.Water is also formed.i.e.

NH4NO3(s)      ->      N2O (g)     +     H2O(l)

NH4NO2(s)      ->      N2 (g)        +     H2O(l)

 

(c) effect of heat on nitrate(V)

 

Only Iron(II)sulphate(VI), Iron(III)sulphate(VI) and copper(II)sulphate(VI) decompose on heating. They form the oxide, and produce highly acidic fumes of acidic sulphur(IV)oxide gas.

 

2FeSO4 (s)                ->      Fe2O3(s)      +     SO3(g) +     SO2(g)

Fe2(SO4) 3(s)              ->      Fe2O3(s)     +     SO3(g)

CuSO4 (s)                 ->      CuO(s)       +     SO3(g)

 

(d) effect of heat on carbonates(IV) and hydrogen carbonate(IV).

(i)Sodium carbonate(IV)and potassium carbonate(IV)do not decompose on heating.

(ii)Heavy metal nitrate(IV)salts decompose on heating to form the oxide and produce carbon(IV)oxide gas. Carbon (IV)oxide gas forms a white precipitate when bubbled in lime water. The white precipitate dissolves if the gas is in excess. e.g. CuCO3 (s)                     ->      CuO(s)       +     CO2(g)

CaCO3 (s)                       ->      CaO(s)       +     CO2(g)

PbCO3 (s)                       ->      PbO(s)       +     CO2(g)

FeCO3 (s)                       ->      FeO(s)       +     CO2(g)

ZnCO3 (s)                       ->      ZnO(s)       +     CO2(g)

 

(iii)Sodium hydrogen carbonate(IV) and Potassium hydrogen carbonate(IV)decompose on heating to give the corresponding carbonate (IV) and form water and carbon(IV)oxide gas. i.e.

2NaHCO 3(s)              ->      Na2CO3(s)     +     CO2(g)   +  H2O(l)

2KHCO 3(s)                 ->      K2CO3(s)      +     CO2(g)   +  H2O(l)

(iii) Calcium hydrogen carbonate (IV) and Magnesium hydrogen carbonate(IV) decompose on heating to give the corresponding carbonate (IV) and form water and carbon(IV)oxide gas. i. e.

Ca(HCO3) 2(aq)              ->      CaCO3(s)      +     CO2(g)   +  H2O(l)

Mg(HCO3) 2(aq)             ->      MgCO3(s)     +     CO2(g)   +  H2O(l)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

     

 

UPGRADE

CHEMISTRY

                

FORM 2

                 

Introduction to ELECTROLYSIS

      

 

                

 

 

 

 

 

Comprehensive tutorial notes

 

 MUTHOMI S.G

www.kcselibrary.info

                                     0720096206

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

INTRODUCTION TO ELECTROLYSIS     (ELECTROLYTIC CELL)

 

1.Electrolysis is defined simply as the decomposition of a compound by an electric current/electricity.

A compound that is decomposed by an electric current is called an electrolyte. Some electrolytes are weak while others are strong.

 

2.Strong electrolytes are those that are fully ionized/dissociated into (many) ions.    Common strong electrolytes include:

(i)all mineral acids

(ii)all strong alkalis/sodium hydroxide/potassium hydroxide.

(iii)all soluble salts

 

3.Weak electrolytes are those that are partially/partly ionized/dissociated into (few) ions.

Common weak electrolytes include:

(i)all organic acids

(ii)all bases except sodium hydroxide/potassium hydroxide.

(iii)Water

 

  1. 4. A compound that is not decomposed by an electric current is called non-electrolyte.

Non-electrolytes are those compounds /substances that exist as molecules and thus cannot ionize/dissociate into(any) ions .

Common non-electrolytes include:

(i) most organic solvents (e.g. petrol/paraffin/benzene/methylbenzene/ethanol)

(ii)all hydrocarbons(alkanes /alkenes/alkynes)

(iii)Chemicals of life(e.g. proteins, carbohydrates, lipids, starch, sugar)

 

  1. 5. An electrolytes in solid state have fused /joined ions and therefore do not conduct electricity but the ions (cations and anions) are free and mobile in molten and aqueous (solution, dissolved in water) state.

 

6.During electrolysis, the free ions are attracted to the electrodes.

An electrode is a rod through which current enter and leave the electrolyte during electrolysis.

An electrode that does not influence/alter the products of electrolysis is called an inert electrode.

 Common inert electrodes include:

(i)Platinum

(ii)Carbon graphite

Platinum is not usually used in a school laboratory because it is very expensive. Carbon graphite is easily/readily and cheaply available (from used dry cells).

 

7.The positive electrode is called Anode.The anode is the electrode through which current enter the electrolyte/electrons leave the electrolyte

8.The negative electrode is called Cathode. The cathode is the electrode through which current leave the electrolyte / electrons enter the electrolyte

 

  1. 9. During the electrolysis, free anions are attracted to the anode where they lose /donate electrons to form neutral atoms/molecules. i.e.

 

M(l)  ->       M+(l)  +  e  (for cations from molten electrolytes)

M(s)  ->       M+(aq)  +  e  (for cations from electrolytes in aqueous state / solution / dissolved in water)

 

The neutral atoms /molecules form the products of electrolysis at the anode. This is called discharge at anode

 

  1. During electrolysis, free cations are attracted to the cathode where they gain /accept/acquire electrons to form neutral atoms/molecules.

X+ (aq)  +  2e -> X(s) (for cations from electrolytes in aqueous state / solution / dissolved in water)

2X+ (l)  +  2e -> X (l)  (for cations from molten electrolytes)

 

The neutral atoms /molecules form the products of electrolysis at the cathode. This is called discharge at cathode.

 

  1. The below set up shows an electrolytic cell.

 

 

 

 

  1. For a compound /salt containing only two ion/binary salt the products of electrolysis in an electrolytic cell can be determined as in the below examples:

 

 

a)To determine the products of electrolysis of molten Lead(II)chloride

 

(i)Decomposition of electrolyte into free ions;

PbCl2 (l)        ->     Pb 2+(l)  +    2Cl(l)

(Compound decomposed into free cation and anion in liquid state)

 

(ii)At the cathode/negative electrode(-);

Pb 2+(l)    +      2e     ->    Pb (l)

(Cation / Pb 2+ gains / accepts / acquires electrons to form free atom)

 

(iii)At the anode/positive electrode(+);

2Cl(l)      ->    Cl2 (g)  +    2e

(Anion / Cldonate/lose electrons to form free atom then a gas molecule)

 

(iv)Products of electrolysis therefore are;

I.At the cathode grey beads /solid lead metal.

II.At the anode pale green chlorine gas.

 

 

b)To determine the products of electrolysis of molten Zinc bromide

 

(i)Decomposition of electrolyte into free ions;

ZnBr2 (l)        ->    Zn 2+(l)  +    2Br(l)

(Compound decomposed into free cation and anion in liquid state)

 

(ii)At the cathode/negative electrode(-);

Zn 2+(l)    +      2e     ->    Zn(l)

(Cation / Zn2+ gains / accepts / acquires electrons to form free atom)

 

(iii)At the anode/positive electrode(+);

2Br(l)      ->    Br2 (g)  +    2e

(Anion / Brdonate/lose electrons to form free atom then a liquid molecule which change to gas on heating)

 

(iv)Products of electrolysis therefore are;

I.At the cathode grey beads /solid Zinc metal.

II.At the anode red bromine liquid / red/brown bromine gas.

 

c)To determine the products of electrolysis of molten sodium chloride

 

(i)Decomposition of electrolyte into free ions;

NaCl (l)        ->      Na +(l)  +    Cl(l)

(Compound decomposed into free cation and anion in liquid state)

 

(ii)At the cathode/negative electrode(-);

2Na+(l)    +      2e     ->    Na (l)

(Cation / Na+ gains / accepts / acquires electrons to form free atom)

 

(iii)At the anode/positive electrode(+);

2Cl(l)      ->    Cl2 (g)  +    2e

(Anion / Cldonate/lose electrons to form free atom then a gas molecule)

 

(iv)Products of electrolysis therefore are;

I.At the cathode grey beads /solid sodium metal.

II.At the anode pale green chlorine gas.

 

      d)To determine the products of electrolysis of molten Aluminium (III)oxide

 

(i)Decomposition of electrolyte into free ions;

Al2O3 (l)        ->     2Al 3+(l)  +    3O2-(l)

(Compound decomposed into free cation and anion in liquid state)

 

(ii)At the cathode/negative electrode(-);

4Al 3+ (l)    +      12e     ->    4Al (l)

(Cation / Al 3+ gains / accepts / acquires electrons to form free atom)

 

(iii)At the anode/positive electrode(+);

6O2-(l)      ->    3O2 (g)  +    12e

(Anion /6O2- donate/lose 12 electrons to form free atom then three gas molecule)

 

(iv)Products of electrolysis therefore are;

I.At the cathode grey beads /solid aluminium metal.

II.At the anode colourless  gas that relights/rekindles glowing splint.

 

13.In industries electrolysis has the following uses/applications:

 

(a)Extraction of reactive metals from their ores.

Potassium, sodium ,magnesium, and aluminium  are extracted from their ores using electrolytic methods.

 

(b)Purifying copper after exraction from copper pyrites ores.

Copper obtained from copper pyrites ores is not pure. After extraction, the copper is refined by electrolysing copper(II)sulphate(VI) solution using the impure copper as anode and a thin strip of pure copper as cathode. Electrode ionization take place there:

(i)At the cathode; Cu2+ (aq)      +   2e   ->  Cu(s) (Pure copper deposits on the strip

(ii)At the anode;  Cu(s) ->Cu2+ (aq)   +   2e   (impure copper erodes/dissolves)

 

(c)Electroplating

The label EPNS(Electro Plated Nickel Silver) on some steel/metallic utensils mean they are plated/coated with silver and/or Nickel to improve their appearance(add their aesthetic value)and prevent/slow corrosion(rusting of iron). Electroplating is the process of coating a metal with another metal using an electric current. During electroplating, the cathode is made of the metal to be coated/impure.

Example:

During the electroplating of a spoon with silver

(i)the spoon/impure is placed as the cathode(negative terminal of battery)

(ii)the pure silver is placed as the anode(positive terminal of battery)

(iii)the pure silver erodes/ionizes/dissociates to release electrons:

Ag(s) ->Ag+ (aq)   +   e   (impure silver erodes/dissolves)

(iv) silver (Ag+)ions from electrolyte gain electrons to form pure silver  deposits / coat /cover the spoon/impure

Ag+ (aq)      +   e   ->Ag(s)    (pure silver deposits /coat/cover on spoon)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

     

 

UPGRADE

CHEMISTRY

                

FORM 2

                 

Chemistry of CARBON

 

 

 

 

      

 

                 Comprehensive tutorial notes

 

 MUTHOMI S.G

www.kcselibrary.info

                                     0720096206

 

 

 

 

 

 

A: CARBON

Carbon is an element in Group IV(Group 4)of the Periodic table .It has atomic number 6 and electronic configuration 2:4 and thus has four valence electrons(tetravalent).It does not easily ionize but forms strong covalent bonds with other elements including itself.

 

(a)Occurrence

Carbon mainly naturally occurs as:

(i)allotropes of carbon i.e graphite, diamond and fullerenes.

(ii)amorphous carbon in coal, peat ,charcoal and coke.

(iii)carbon(IV)oxide gas accounting 0.03% by volume of normal air in the    atmosphere.

(b)Allotropes of Carbon

Carbon  naturally occur in two main crystalline allotropic forms, carbon-graphite and carbon-diamond

 

Carbon-diamond Carbon-graphite
Shiny crystalline solid Black/dull crystalline solid
Has a very high melting/boiling point because it has a very closely packed giant tetrahedral structure joined by strong covalent bonds Has a high melting/boiling point because it has a very closely packed giant hexagonal planar structure  joined by strong covalent bonds
Has very high density(Hardest known natural substance) Soft
Abrassive Slippery
Poor electrical conductor because it has no free delocalized electrons Good electrical conductor because it has free 4th valency delocalized electrons
Is used in making Jewels, drilling and cutting metals Used in making Lead-pencils,electrodes in batteries and as a lubricant
Has giant tetrahedral structure Has giant hexagonal planar structure

 

c)Properties of Carbon

(i)Physical properties of carbon

Carbon occur widely and naturally as a black solid

It is insoluble in water but soluble in carbon disulphide and organic solvents.

It is a poor electrical and thermal conductor.

(ii)Chemical properties of carbon

  1. Burning

Experiment

Introduce a small piece of charcoal on a Bunsen flame then lower it into a gas jar containing Oxygen gas. Put three drops of water. Swirl. Test the solution with blue and red litmus papers.

Observation

          -Carbon chars then burns with a blue flame

-Colourless and odourless gas produced

-Solution formed turn blue litmus paper faint red. Red litmus paper remains red.

Explanation

Carbon burns in air and faster in Oxygen with a blue non-sooty/non-smoky flame forming Carbon (IV) oxide gas. Carbon burns in limited supply of air with a blue non-sooty/non-smoky flame forming Carbon (IV) oxide gas. Carbon (IV) oxide gas dissolve in water to form weak acidic solution of Carbonic (IV)acid.

Chemical Equation

C(s)   +        O2(g)     ->   CO2(g)        (in excess air)

2C(s) +        O2(g)              ->    2CO(g)       (in limited air)

CO2(g)   +    H2O (l)  -> H2CO3 (aq)  (very weak acid)

 

  1. Reducing agent

Experiment

Mix thoroughly equal amounts of powdered charcoal and copper (II)oxide into a crucible. Heat strongly.

Observation

Colour change from black to brown

Explanation

Carbon is a reducing agent. For ages it has been used to reducing metal oxide ores to metal, itself oxidized to carbon(IV)oxide gas. Carbon reduces black copper(II)oxide to brown copper metal

 

Chemical Equation

2CuO(s)        +       C(s)   ->      2Cu(s)         +       CO2(g)

(black)                                       (brown)

 

2PbO(s)        +       C(s)   ->      2Pb(s)          +       CO2(g)

(brown when hot/                      (grey)

yellow when cool)

 

2ZnO(s)        +       C(s)   ->      2Zn(s)          +       CO2(g)

(yellow when hot/                      (grey)

white when cool)

 

Fe2O3(s)      +       3C(s)            ->      2Fe(s)          +       3CO2(g)

(brown when hot/cool                             (grey)

 

Fe3O4 (s)       +       4C(s)            ->      3Fe(s)          +       4CO2(g)

(brown when hot/cool                             (grey)

 

 

 

 

B: COMPOUNDS OF CARBON

 

The following are the main compounds of Carbon

(i)Carbon(IV)Oxide(CO2)

(ii)Carbon(II)Oxide(CO)

(iii)Carbonate(IV) (CO32-)and hydrogen carbonate(IV(HCO3)

(iv)Sodium carbonate(Na2CO3)

 

(i) Carbon(IV)Oxide (CO2)

 

(a)Occurrence

 

Carbon(IV)oxide is found:

-in the air /atmosphere as 0.03% by volume.

-a solid carbon(IV)oxide mineral in Esageri near Eldame Ravine and Kerita near Limuru in Kenya.

 

(b)School Laboratory preparation

 

In the school laboratory carbon(IV)oxide can be prepared in the school laboratory from the reaction of marble chips(CaCO3)or sodium hydrogen carbonate(NaHCO3) with dilute hydrochloric acid.

 

 

 

(c)Properties of carbon(IV)oxide gas(Questions)

 

1.Write the equation for the reaction for the school laboratory preparation of carbon (IV)oxide gas.

Any carbonate reacted with dilute hydrochloric acid should be able to generate carbon (IV)oxide gas.

Chemical equations

CaCO3(s)   +    2HCl(aq)     ->     CaCO3 (aq)    +   H2O(l)     +    CO2 (g)

ZnCO3(s)   +    2HCl(aq)     ->     ZnCO3 (aq)    +             H2O(l)     +    CO2 (g)

MgCO3(s) +    2HCl(aq)     ->     MgCO3 (aq)    +   H2O(l)     +    CO2 (g)

CuCO3(s)   +    2HCl(aq)     ->     CuCO3 (aq)    +   H2O(l)     +    CO2 (g)

NaHCO3(s) +    HCl(aq)     ->       Na2CO3 (aq)    +   H2O(l)     +    CO2 (g)

KHCO3(s)    +     HCl(aq)     ->       K2CO3 (aq)     +   H2O(l)     +   CO2 (g)

2.What method of gas collection is used in preparation of Carbon(IV)oxide gas. Explain.

Downward delivery /upward displacement of air/over mercury

Carbon(IV)oxide gas is about 1½  times denser than air.

3.What is the purpose of :

(a)water?

          To absorb the more volatile hydrogen chloride fumes produced during the vigorous reaction.

 

(b)sodium hydrogen carbonate?

To absorb the more volatile hydrogen chloride fumes produced during the vigorous reaction and by reacting with the acid to produce more carbon (IV)oxide gas .

 

Chemical equation

NaHCO3(s) +    HCl(aq)     ->       Na2CO3 (aq)    +   H2O(l)     +    CO2 (g)

 

(c)concentrated sulphuric(VI)acid?

To dry the gas/as a drying agent

 

4.Describe the smell of carbon(IV)oxide gas

          Colourless and odourless

 

  1. Effect on lime water.

Experiment

Bubbled carbon(IV)oxide gas into a test tube containing lime water for about three minutes

Observation

White precipitate is formed.

White precipitate dissolved when excess carbon(IV)oxide gas is bubbled .

Explanation

Carbon(IV)oxide gas reacts with lime water(Ca(OH)2) to form an insoluble white precipitate of calcium carbonate. Calcium carbonate reacts with more Carbon(IV) oxide gas to form soluble Calcium hydrogen carbonate.

Chemical equation

Ca(OH)2(aq)    +    CO2 (g)     ->     CaCO3 (s)    +    H2O(l)

CaCO3 (aq)    +    H2O(l)  +    CO2 (g) ->     Ca(HCO3) 2 (aq)

 

  1. Effects on burning Magnesium ribbon

Experiment

Lower a piece of burning magnesium ribbon into a gas jar containing carbon (IV)oxide gas.

Observation

The ribbon continues to burn with difficulty

White ash/solid is formed.

Black speck/solid/particles formed on the side of gas jar.

Explanation

Carbon(IV)oxide gas does not support combustion/burning.Magnesium burn to produce/release enough heat energy to decompose Carbon(IV) oxide gas to carbon and oxygen.Magnesium continues to burn in Oxygen forming white Magnesium Oxide solid/ash.Black speck/particle of carbon/charcoal residue forms on the sides of reaction flask. During the reaction Carbon(IV) oxide is reduced(Oxidizing agent)to carbon while Magnesium is Oxidized to Magnesium Oxide.

Chemical equation

2Mg(s)    +    CO2 (g)     ->     C (s)    +    2MgO(l)

 

  1. Dry and wet litmus papers were separately put in a gas jar containing dry carbon (IV)oxide gas. State and explain the observations made.

Observation

Blue dry litmus paper remain blue

Red dry litmus paper remain Red

Blue wet/damp/moist litmus paper turn red

Red wet/damp/moist litmus paper remain red

Explanation

Dry Carbon (IV) oxide gas is a molecular compound that does not dissociate/ionize to release H+ and thus has no effect on litmus papers.

Wet/damp/moist litmus papers contains water that dissolves/react with dry carbon (IV) oxide gas to form the weak solution of carbonic (IV) acid(H2CO3).

Carbonic (IV) acid dissociate/ionizes to a few /little free H+ and CO32-.

The few H+ (aq) ions are responsible for turning blue litmus paper to faint red showing the gas is very weakly acidic.

 

Chemical equation

H2CO3(aq)        ->     2H+ (aq)    +    CO32-(aq)

  1. Explain why Carbon (IV)oxide cannot be prepared from the reaction of:

(i) marble chips with dilute sulphuric(VI)acid.

Explanation

Reaction  forms insoluble calcium sulphate(VI)that cover/coat unreacted marble chips stopping further reaction

Chemical equation

CaCO3(s)     +    H2SO4 (aq)     ->     CaSO4 (s)    +             H2O(l)     +    CO2 (g)

PbCO3(s)     +    H2SO4 (aq)     ->     PbSO4 (s)    +             H2O(l)     +    CO2 (g)

BaCO3(s)     +    H2SO4 (aq)     ->     BaSO4 (s)    +             H2O(l)     +    CO2 (g)

(ii) Lead(II)carbonate with dilute Hydrochloric acid.

Reaction  forms insoluble Lead(II)Chloride that cover/coat unreacted Lead(II) carbonate stopping further reaction unless the reaction mixture is heated. Lead(II)Chloride is soluble in hot water.

Chemical equation

PbCO3(s)     +    2HCl (aq)     ->     PbCl2 (s)    +      H2O(l)     +    CO2 (g)

 

  1. Describe the test for the presence of Carbon (IV)oxide.

Using burning splint

Lower a burning splint into a gas jar suspected to contain Carbon (IV)oxide gas.The burning splint is extinguished.

Using Lime water.

Bubble the gas suspected to be Carbon (IV)oxide gas.A white precipitate that dissolve in excess bubbling is formed.

Chemical equation

Ca(OH)2(aq)    +    CO2 (g)     ->     CaCO3 (s)    +    H2O(l)

CaCO3 (aq)    +    H2O(l)  +    CO2 (g) ->     Ca(HCO3) 2 (aq)

 

10.State three main uses of Carbon (IV)oxide gas

(i)In the Solvay process for the manufacture of soda ash/sodium carbonate

(ii)In preservation of aerated drinks

(iii)As fire extinguisher because it does not support combustion and is denser than   air.

(iv)In manufacture of Baking powder.

 

 

 

 

 

(ii) Carbon(II)Oxide (CO)

(a)Occurrence

 

Carbon(II)oxide is found is found from incomplete combustion of fuels like petrol charcoal, liquefied Petroleum Gas/LPG.

 

(b)School Laboratory preparation

 

In the school laboratory carbon(II)oxide can be prepared from dehydration of methanoic acid/Formic acid(HCOOH) or Ethan-1,2-dioic acid/Oxalic acid(HOOCCOOH) using concentrated sulphuric(VI) acid. Heating is necessary.

METHOD 1:Preparation of Carbon (IV)Oxide from dehydration of Oxalic/ethan-1,2-dioic acid

 

 

 

 

METHOD 2:Preparation of Carbon (IV)Oxide from dehydration of Formic/Methanoic acid

 

 

 

 

(c)Properties of Carbon (II)Oxide(Questions)

1.Write the equation  for the reaction for the preparation of carbon(II)oxide using;

 

(i)Method 1;

Chemical equation

HOOCCOOH(s)   –Conc.H2SO4–>   CO(g)  +  CO2 (g)   +  H2O(l)

H2C2O4(s)   –Conc.H2SO4–>   CO(g)  +  CO2 (g)   +  H2O(l)

 

(ii)Method 2;

Chemical equation

HCOOH(s)   –Conc.H2SO4–>   CO(g)     +  H2O(l)

H2CO2(s)   –Conc.H2SO4–>   CO(g)      +  H2O(l)

 

2.What method of gas collection is used during the preparation of carbon (II) oxide.

Over water because the gas is insoluble in water.

Downward delivery because the gas is 1 ½ times denser than air .

 

3.What is the purpose  of :

(i) Potassium hydroxide/sodium hydroxide in Method 1

To absorb/ remove carbon (II) oxide produced during the reaction.

2KOH (aq)    +    CO2 (g)     ->     K2CO3 (s)    +    H2O(l)

 2NaOH (aq)    +    CO2 (g)     ->     Na2CO3 (s)    +    H2O(l)

 

(ii) Concentrated sulphuric(VI)acid in Method 1 and 2.

          Dehydrating agent –removes the element of water (Hydrogen and Oxygen in ratio 2:1) present in both methanoic and ethan-1,2-dioic acid.

 

  1. Describe the smell of carbon(II)oxide.

          Colourless and odourless.

  1. State and explain the observation made when carbon(IV)oxide is bubbled in lime water for a long time.

          No white precipitate is formed.

 

  1. Dry and wet/moist/damp litmus papers were separately put in a gas jar containing dry carbon(IV)oxide gas. State and explain the observations made.

 

Observation

-blue dry litmus paper remains blue

-red dry litmus paper remains red

– wet/moist/damp blue litmus paper remains blue

– wet/moist/damp red litmus paper remains red

Explanation

Carbon(II)oxide gas is a molecular compound that does not dissociate /ionize to release H+ ions and thus has no effect on litmus papers. Carbon(II)oxide gas is therefore a neutral gas.

  1. Carbon (II)oxide gas was ignited at the end of a generator as below.

 

 

Flame K

 

 

 

 

 

      Dry carbon(II)oxide

 

(i)State the observations made in flame K.

          Gas burns with a blue flame

(ii)Write the equation for the reaction taking place at flame K.

                    2CO(g)   +  O2 (g) -> 2CO2 (g)

 

  1. Carbon(II)oxide is a reducing agent. Explain

 

Experiment

Pass carbon(II)oxide through glass tube containing  copper (II)oxide. Ignite any excess poisonous carbon(II)oxide.

Observation

Colour change from black to brown. Excess carbon (II)oxide burn with a blue flame.

Explanation

Carbon is a reducing agent. It is used to reduce metal oxide ores to metal, itself oxidized to carbon(IV)oxide gas. Carbon(II)Oxide  reduces black copper(II)oxide to brown copper metal

Chemical Equation

CuO(s)          +       CO(g)           ->      Cu(s) +       CO2(g)

(black)                                              (brown)

 

PbO(s)          +       CO(g)           ->      Pb(s)  +       CO2(g)

(brown when hot/                                (grey)

yellow when cool)

 

ZnO(s)          +       CO(g)           ->      Zn(s)  +       CO2(g)

(yellow when hot/                                (grey)

white when cool)

 

Fe2O3(s)      +       3CO(s)          ->      2Fe(s)          +       3CO2(g)

(brown when hot/cool                             (grey)

 

Fe3O4 (s)       +       4CO(g)         ->      3Fe(s)          +       4CO2(g)

(brown when hot/cool                             (grey)

These reaction are used during the extraction of many metals from their ore.

 

  1. Carbon (II) oxide is a pollutant. Explain.

Carbon(II)oxide is highly poisonous/toxic.It preferentially combine with haemoglobin to form stable carboxyhaemoglobin in the blood instead of oxyhaemoglobin.This reduces the free haemoglobin in the blood causing nausea , coma then death.

 

10.The diagram below show a burning charcoal stove/burner/jiko. Use it to answer the questions that follow.

 

 

Explain the changes that take place in the burner

Explanation

Charcoal stove has air holes through which air enters. Air oxidizes carbon to carbon(IV)oxide gas at region I. This reaction is exothermic(-∆H) producing more heat.

Chemical equation

C(s)  + O2(g)         -> CO2(g)

Carbon(IV)oxide gas formed rises up to meet more charcoal which reduces it to Carbon(II)oxide gas.

Chemical equation

2CO2 (g)  + O2(g)  -> 2CO (g)

At the top of burner in region II, Carbon (II)oxide gas is further oxidized to Carbon(IV)oxide gas  if there is plenty of air but escape if the air is limited poisoning the living things around.

Chemical equation

2CO (g)  + O2(g)   -> 2CO2 (g)

(excess air)

11.Describe the test for the presence of carbon(II)oxide gas.

Experiment

Burn/Ignite the pure sample of the gas. Pass/Bubble the products into lime water/Calcium hydroxide .

Observation

Colourless gas burns with a blue flame. A white precipitate is formed that dissolve on further bubbling of the products.

Chemical equation

2CO (g)  + O2(g)   -> 2CO2 (g) (gas burns with blue flame)

Chemical equation

Ca(OH) 2 (aq)  + CO2 (g) -> CaCO3 (s) + H2O(l)

Chemical equation

CO2 (g)        +   CaCO3 (s)   +   H2O(l)  -> Ca(HCO3) 2 (aq)

 

  1. State the main uses of carbon (II)oxide gas.

(i) As a fuel /water gas

(ii)As a reducing agent in the blast furnace for extracting iron from iron ore(Magnetite/Haematite)

(iii)As a reducing agent in extraction of Zinc from Zinc ore/Zinc blende

(iv) As a reducing agent in extraction of Lead from Lead ore/Galena

(v) As a reducing agent in extraction of Copper from Copper iron sulphide/Copper pyrites.

 

 

(iii)Carbonate(IV) (CO32-)and hydrogen carbonate(IV(HCO3)

 

1.Carbonate (IV) (CO32-) are normal salts derived from carbonic(IV)acid (H2CO3) and hydrogen carbonate (IV) (HCO3) are acid salts derived from carbonic(IV)acid.

Carbonic(IV)acid(H2CO3) is formed when carbon(IV)oxide gas is bubbled in water. It is a dibasic acid with two ionizable hydrogens.

H2CO3(aq) ->2H+(aq) + CO32-(aq)

H2CO3(aq) -> H+(aq) + HCO3(aq)

2.Carbonate (IV) (CO32-) are insoluble in water except Na2CO3 , K2CO3 and (NH4)2CO3

3.Hydrogen carbonate (IV) (HCO3) are soluble in water. Only five hydrogen carbonates exist. Na HCO3 , KHCO3 ,NH4HCO3   Ca(HCO3)2 and Mg(HCO3)2

Ca(HCO3)2 and Mg(HCO3)2 exist only in aqueous solutions.

3.The following experiments show the effect of heat on Carbonate (IV) (CO32-) and Hydrogen carbonate (IV) (HCO3) salts:

Experiment

In a clean dry test tube place separately about 1.0 of the following:

Zinc(II)carbonate(IV), sodium hydrogen carbonate(IV), sodium carbonate(IV), Potassium carbonate(IV) ammonium carbonate(IV), potassium hydrogen carbonate(IV), Lead(II)carbonate(IV), Iron(II)carbonate(IV), and copper(II)carbonate(IV). Heat each portion gently the strongly. Test any gases produced with lime water.

Observation

(i)Colorless droplets form on the cooler parts of test tube in case of sodium carbonate(IV) and Potassium carbonate(IV).

(ii)White residue/solid left in case of sodium hydrogen carbonate(IV), sodium carbonate(IV), Potassium carbonate(IV) and potassium hydrogen carbonate(IV).

(iii)Colour changes from blue/green to black in case of copper(II)carbonate(IV).

(iv) Colour changes from green to brown/yellow in case of Iron (II)carbonate(IV).

(v) Colour changes from white when cool to yellow when hot in case of Zinc (II) carbonate(IV).

(vi) Colour changes from yellow when cool to brown when hot in case of Lead (II) carbonate(IV).

(vii)Colourless gas produced that forms a white precipitate with lime water in all cases.

Explanation

  1. Sodium carbonate(IV) and Potassium carbonate(IV) exist as hydrated salts with 10 molecules of water of crystallization that condenses and collects on cooler parts of test tube as a colourless liquid.

Chemical equation

Na2CO3 .10H2O(s)     ->     Na2CO3 (s)     +    10H2O(l)

K2CO3 .10H2O(s)       ->     K2CO3 (s)       +    10H2O(l)

  1. Carbonate (IV) (CO32-) and Hydrogen carbonate (IV) (HCO3) salts decompose on heating except Sodium carbonate(IV) and Potassium carbonate(IV).

(a) Sodium hydrogen carbonate(IV) and Potassium hydrogen carbonate(IV) decompose on heating to form sodium carbonate(IV) and Potassium carbonate(IV).Water and carbon(IV)oxide gas are also produced.

Chemical equation

2NaHCO3 (s)     ->     Na2CO3 (s)     +    H2O(l) + CO2 (g)

(white)                         (white)

2KHCO3 (s)     ->     K2CO3 (s)     +    H2O(l) + CO2 (g)

(white)                         (white)

(b) Calcium hydrogen carbonate(IV) and Magnesium hydrogen carbonate(IV) decompose on heating to form insoluble Calcium carbonate(IV) and Magnesium carbonate(IV).Water and carbon(IV)oxide gas are also produced.

Chemical equation

Ca(HCO3)2 (aq)          ->          CaCO3 (s)     +    H2O(l) + CO2 (g)

(Colourless solution)                  (white)

Mg(HCO3)2 (aq)          ->          MgCO3 (s)     +    H2O(l) + CO2 (g)

(Colourless solution)                  (white)

(c) Ammonium hydrogen carbonate(IV) decompose on heating to form ammonium carbonate(IV) .Water and carbon(IV)oxide gas are also produced.

Chemical equation

2NH4HCO3 (s)     ->     (NH4)2CO3 (s)     +    H2O(l) + CO2 (g)

(white)                         (white)

(d)All other carbonates decompose on heating to form the metal oxide and produce carbon(IV)oxide gas e.g.

Chemical equation

MgCO3 (s)          ->          MgO (s)       +       CO2 (g)

(white solid)                   (white solid)

Chemical equation

BaCO3 (s)          ->          BaO (s)       +       CO2 (g)

(white solid)             (white solid)

Chemical equation

CaCO3 (s)          ->          CaO (s)       +       CO2 (g)

(white solid)             (white solid)

Chemical equation

CuCO3 (s)          ->          CuO (s)       +       CO2 (g)

(blue/green solid)          (black solid)

Chemical equation

ZnCO3 (s)          ->          ZnO (s)       +       CO2 (g)

(white solid)             (white solid when cool/

Yellow solid when hot)

Chemical equation

PbCO3 (s)          ->          PbO (s)       +       CO2 (g)

(white solid)             (yellow solid when cool/

brown solid when hot)

4.The following experiments show the presence of  Carbonate (IV) (CO32-) and Hydrogen carbonate (IV) (HCO3) ions in sample of a salt:

 

(a)Using Lead(II) nitrate(V)

  1. Using a portion of salt solution in a test tube .add four drops of Lead(II)nitrate(V)solution.Preserve.

 

Observation inference
White precipitate/ppt CO32- ,SO32- ,SO42- ,Cl

  1. To the preserved solution ,add six drops of dilutte nitric(V)acid. Preserve.

 

Observation inference
White precipitate/ppt persists

 

White precipitate/ppt dissolves

SO42- ,Cl

 

CO32- ,SO32-

  1. To the preserved sample( that forms a precipitate ),heat to boil.
Observation inference
White precipitate/ppt persists

 

White precipitate/ppt dissolves

SO42-

 

Cl

 

  1. To the preserved sample( that do not form a precipitate ),add three drops of acidified potassium manganate(VII)/lime water
Observation inference
Effervescence/bubbles/fizzing colourless gas produced

Acidified KMnO4 decolorized/no white precipitate on lime water

 

Effervescence/bubbles/fizzing colourless gas produced

Acidified KMnO4 not decolorized/ white precipitate on lime water

 

SO32-

 

 

 

 

CO32-

 

 

Experiments/Observations:

(b)Using Barium(II)nitrate(V)/ Barium(II)chloride

 

  1. To about 5cm3 of a salt solution in a test tube add four drops of Barium(II) nitrate (V) / Barium(II)chloride. Preserve.

 

Observation Inference
White precipitate/ppt SO42- , SO32- , CO32- ions

 

  1. To the preserved sample in (I) above, add six drops of 2M nitric(V) acid . Preserve.

 

Observation 1

Observation Inference
White precipitate/ppt persists SO42- , ions

 

Observation 2

Observation Inference
White precipitate/ppt dissolves SO32- , CO32- , ions

 

III.To the preserved sample observation 2 in (II) above, add 4 drops of acidified potassium manganate(VII) /dichromate(VI).

 

Observation 1

Observation Inference
(i)acidified potassium manganate(VII)decolorized

(ii)Orange colour of acidified potassium

dichromate(VI) turns to green

SO32- ions

 

 

Observation 2

Observation Inference
(i)acidified potassium manganate(VII) not decolorized

(ii)Orange colour of acidified potassium

dichromate(VI) does not turns to green

 

CO32- ions

 

 

 

 

 

Explanations

 

Using Lead(II)nitrate(V)

(i)Lead(II)nitrate(V) solution reacts with chlorides(Cl), Sulphate (VI) salts (SO42- ), Sulphate (IV)salts (SO32-) and carbonates(CO32-) to form the insoluble white precipitate of Lead(II)chloride, Lead(II)sulphate(VI), Lead(II) sulphate (IV) and Lead(II)carbonate(IV).

 

Chemical/ionic equation:

Pb2+(aq)       +        Cl (aq)       ->       PbCl2(s)

Pb2+(aq)       +        SO42+ (aq)   ->       PbSO4 (s)

Pb2+(aq)       +        SO32+ (aq)   ->       PbSO3 (s)

Pb2+(aq)       +        CO32+ (aq)  ->       PbCO3 (s)

 

(ii)When the insoluble precipitates are acidified with nitric(V) acid,

– Lead(II)chloride and Lead(II)sulphate(VI) do not react with the acid and thus their white precipitates remain/ persists.

– Lead(II) sulphate (IV) and Lead(II)carbonate(IV) reacts with the acid to form soluble Lead(II) nitrate (V) and produce/effervesces/fizzes/bubbles out sulphur(IV)oxide and carbon(IV)oxide gases respectively.

. Chemical/ionic equation:

PbSO3 (s)   +   2H+(aq)       ->    H2 O (l)    +   Pb2+(aq)    +        SO2 (g)

PbCO3 (s)   +   2H+(aq)      ->    H2 O (l)    +   Pb2+(aq)    +        CO2 (g)

 

(iii)When Lead(II)chloride and Lead(II)sulphate(VI) are heated/warmed;

– Lead(II)chloride dissolves in hot water/on boiling(recrystallizes on cooling)

– Lead(II)sulphate(VI) do not dissolve in hot water thus its white precipitate persists/remains on heating/boiling.

(iv)When sulphur(IV)oxide and carbon(IV)oxide gases are produced;

sulphur(IV)oxide will decolorize acidified potassium manganate(VII)  and / or Orange colour of acidified potassium dichromate(VI) will turns to green. Carbon(IV)oxide will not.

Chemical equation:

5SO32-(aq)  +   2MnO4 (aq) +6H+(aq)   -> 5SO42-(aq) +  2Mn2+(aq) +  3H2O(l)

(purple)                                                     (colourless)

3SO32-(aq)  +   Cr2O72-(aq) +8H+(aq)   -> 3SO42-(aq) +  2Cr3+(aq) +  4H2O(l)

(Orange)                                                 (green)

Carbon(IV)oxide forms an insoluble white precipitate of calcium carbonate if three drops of lime water are added into the reaction test tube when effervescence is taking place. Sulphur(IV)oxide will not.

Chemical equation:

Ca(OH)2(aq)    +   CO2 (g)    ->  CaCO3(s)  +  H2O(l)

These tests should be done immediately after acidifying to ensure the gases produced react with the oxidizing agents/lime water.

 

 

 

Using Barium(II)nitrate(V)/ Barium(II)Chloride

(i)Barium(II)nitrate(V) and/ or Barium(II)chloride solution reacts with Sulphate (VI) salts (SO42- ), Sulphate (IV)salts (SO32-) and carbonates(CO32-) to form the insoluble white precipitate of Barium(II)sulphate(VI), Barium(II) sulphate (IV) and Barium(II)carbonate(IV).

 

Chemical/ionic equation:

Ba2+(aq)       +        SO42+ (aq)   ->       BaSO4 (s)

Ba2+(aq)       +        SO32+ (aq)   ->       BaSO3 (s)

Ba2+(aq)       +        CO32+ (aq)  ->       BaCO3 (s)

 

(ii)When the insoluble precipitates are acidified with nitric(V) acid,

– Barium (II)sulphate(VI) do not react with the acid and thus its white precipitates remain/ persists.

– Barium(II) sulphate (IV) and Barium(II)carbonate(IV) reacts with the acid to form soluble Barium(II) nitrate (V) and produce /effervesces /fizzes/ bubbles out sulphur(IV)oxide and carbon(IV)oxide gases respectively.

. Chemical/ionic equation:

BaSO3 (s)   +   2H+(aq)       ->    H2 O (l)    +   Ba2+(aq)    +        SO2 (g)

 

BaCO3 (s)   +   2H+(aq)      ->    H2 O (l)    +   Ba2+(aq)    +        CO2 (g)

 

(iii) When sulphur(IV)oxide and carbon(IV)oxide gases are produced;

sulphur(IV)oxide will decolorize acidified potassium manganate(VII)  and / or Orange colour of acidified potassium dichromate(VI) will turns to green. Carbon(IV)oxide will not.

 

Chemical equation:

5SO32-(aq)  +   2MnO4 (aq) +6H+(aq)   -> 5SO42-(aq) +  2Mn2+(aq) +  3H2O(l)

(purple)                                                     (colourless)

 

3SO32-(aq)  +   Cr2O72-(aq) +8H+(aq)   -> 3SO42-(aq) +  2Cr3+(aq) +  4H2O(l)

(Orange)                                                 (green)

 

Carbon(IV)oxide forms an insoluble white precipitate of calcium carbonate if three drops of lime water are added into the reaction test tube when effervescence is taking place. Sulphur(IV)oxide will not.

 

Chemical equation:

Ca(OH)2(aq)    +   CO2 (g)    ->  CaCO3(s)  +  H2O(l)

These tests should be done immediately after acidifying to ensure the gases produced react with the oxidizing agents/lime water.

 

(iii) Sodium carbonate(IV) (Na2CO3)

 

(a)Extraction of sodium carbonate from soda ash

 

Sodium carbonate naturally occurs in Lake Magadi in Kenya as Trona.trona is the double salt ; sodium sesquicarbonate. NaHCO3 .Na2CO3 .H2O.It is formed from the volcanic activity that takes place in Lake Naivasha, Nakuru ,Bogoria and Elementeita .All these lakes drain into Lake Magadi through underground rivers. Lake Magadi has no outlet.

Solubility of Trona decrease with increase in temperature.High temperature during the day causes trona to naturally crystallize .It is mechanically scooped/dredged/dug and put in a furnace.

Inside the furnace, trona decompose into soda ash/sodium carbonate.

Chemical equation

2NaHCO3 .Na2CO3 .H2O (s)     ->     3Na2CO3 (s)     +    5H2O(l) + CO2 (g)

(trona)                                               (soda  ash)

Soda ash is then bagged and sold as Magadi soda.It is mainly used:

(i)in making glass to lower the melting point of raw materials (sand/SiO2  from 1650oC and CaO from 2500oC  to around 1500oC)

(ii)in softening hard water

(iii)in the manufacture of soapless detergents.

(iv)Swimming pool “pH increaser”

Sodium chloride is also found dissolved in the lake. Solubility of sodium chloride decrease with decreases in temperature/ sodium chloride has lower solubility at lower temperatures. When temperatures decrease at night it crystallize out .The crystals are then mechanically dug/dredged /scooped  then packed for sale as animal/cattle feeds and seasoning food.

 

Summary flow diagram showing the extraction of Soda ash  from Trona

 

Sodium chloride and Trona dissolved in the sea
Natural fractional crystallization
Crystals of Trona (Day time)
Crystals of sodium chloride(At night)
Dredging /scooping/ digging
Crushing
Furnace (Heating)
                 Carbon(IV) oxide
Soda ash
Bagging

NaCl(s)

Bagging Na2CO3 (s)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

b)The Solvay process for industrial manufacture of sodium carbonate(IV)

(i)Raw materials.

Brine /Concentrated Sodium chloride from salty seas/lakes.

Ammonia gas from Haber.

Limestone /Calcium carbonate from chalk /limestone rich rocks.

Water from rivers/lakes.

 

(ii)Chemical processes

Ammonia gas is passed up to meet a downward flow of sodium chloride solution / brine to form ammoniated brine/ammoniacal brine mixture in the ammoniated brine chamber

The ammoniated brine mixture is then pumped up, atop the carbonator/ solvay tower.

In  the carbonator/ solvay tower, ammoniated brine/ammoniacal brine mixture slowly trickle down to meet an upward flow of carbon(IV)oxide gas.

The carbonator is shelved /packed with quartz/broken glass to

(i) reduce the rate of flow of ammoniated brine/ammoniacal brine mixture.

(ii)increase surface area of the liquid mixture to ensure a lot of ammoniated brine/ammoniacal brine mixture react with carbon(IV)oxide gas.

Insoluble sodium hydrogen carbonate and soluble ammonium chloride are formed from the reaction.

Chemical equation

CO2(g) + H2O(l) + NaCl (aq) + NH3(g) -> NaHCO3(s) + NH4Cl(aq)

 

The products are then filtered. Insoluble sodium hydrogen carbonate forms the residue while soluble ammonium chloride forms the filtrate.

 

Sodium hydrogen carbonate itself can be used:

(i)  as baking powder and preservation of some soft drinks.

(ii) as a buffer agent and antacid in animal feeds to improve fibre digestion.

(iii) making dry chemical fire extinguishers.

 

In the Solvay process Sodium hydrogen carbonate is then heated to form Sodium carbonate/soda ash, water and carbon (IV) oxide gas.

Chemical equation

2NaHCO3 (s)    ->  Na2CO3(s)  +  CO2(g)  +  H2O(l)

 

Sodium carbonate is stored ready for use in:

(i) during making glass/lowering the melting point of mixture of sand/SiO2     from 1650oC and CaO from 2500oC  to around 1500oC

(ii) in softening hard water

(iii) in the manufacture of soapless detergents.

(iv) swimming pool “pH increaser”.

Water and carbon(IV)oxide gas are recycled back to the ammoniated brine/ammoniacal brine chamber.

More carbon(IV)oxide is produced in the kiln/furnace. Limestone is heated to decompose into Calcium oxide and carbon(IV)oxide.

Chemical equation

CaCO3 (s)    ->   CaO(s)   +    CO2(g)

 

Carbon(IV)oxide is recycled to the carbonator/solvay tower. Carbon (IV)oxide is added water in the slaker to form Calcium hydroxide. This process is called slaking.

Chemical equation

CaO(s)   +    H2O (l)    ->    Ca(OH)2 (aq)

Calcium hydroxide is mixed with ammonium chloride from the carbonator/solvay tower in the ammonia regeneration chamber to form Calcium chloride , water and more ammonia gas.

Chemical equation

Ca(OH)2 (aq) +2NH4Cl (aq)    ->  CaCl2(s)  +  2NH3(g)  +  H2O(l)

 

NH3(g)  and H2O(l) are recycled.

Calcium chloride may be used:

(i)as drying agent in the school laboratory during gas preparation (except ammonia gas)

(ii)to lower the melting point of solid sodium chloride / rock salt salts during the Downs process for industrial extraction of sodium metal.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Detailed Summary flow diagram of Solvay Process

 

 

 

 

 

 

Practice

 

  1. The diagram below shows part of the Solvay process used in manufacturing sodium carbonate. Use it to answer the questions that follow.
Carbon (IV)oxide

 

 

Ammonia
Process II
Sodium carbonate
Saturated sodium chloride solution
Sodium hydrogen  carbonate
Ammonium chloride
Process I

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             

 

(a)Explain how Sodium Chloride required for this process is obtained from the sea.

Sea water is pumped /scooped into shallow pods. Evaporation of most of the water takes place leaving a very concentrated solution.

(b)(i) Name process:

  1. Filtration
  2. Decomposition

(ii) Write the equation for the reaction in process:

Process I

Chemical equation

CO2(g) + H2O(l) + NaCl (aq) + NH3(g) -> NaHCO3(s) + NH4Cl(aq)

 

Process II

Chemical equation

2NaHCO3 (s)    ->  Na2CO3(s)  +  CO2(g)  +  H2O(l)

 

(c)(i) Name two substances recycled in the solvay process

                    Ammonia gas , Carbon(IV)Oxide and Water.

 

(ii)Which is the by-product of this process?

                    Calcium(II)Chloride /CaCl2

 

(iii)State two uses that the by-product can be used for:

  1. As a drying agent in the school laboratory preparation of gases.
  2. In the Downs cell/process for extraction of Sodium to lower the melting point of rock salt.

 

 (iv)Write the chemical equation for the formation of the by-products in the Solvay process.

Chemical equation

Ca(OH)2 (aq) +2NH4Cl (aq)    ->  CaCl2(s)  +  2NH3(g)  +  H2O(l)

 

(d)In an experiment to determine the % purity of Sodium carbonate produced in the Solvay process ,2.15g of the sample reacted with exactly 40.0cm3 of 0.5M Sulphuric(VI)acid.

 

(i)Calculate the number of moles of sodium carbonate that reacted.

 

Chemical equation

Na2CO3 (aq) +H2SO4 (aq)    ->  Na2SO4 (aq)+  CO2(g)  +  H2O(l)

 

Mole ratio Na2CO3 :H2SO4  => 1:1

 

Moles H2SO4    =   Molarity  x  Volume   =>  0.5  x  40.0   = 0.02 Moles

1000                           1000

Moles of Na2CO3  = 0.02 Moles

 

(ii)Determine the % of sodium carbonate in the sample.

Molar mass of Na2CO3  = 106g

                    Mass of Na2CO3  = moles x Molar mass => 0.02   x   106    =  2.12 g

%  of Na2CO3           =            ( 2.12 g x 100)    =  98.6047%

2.15

(e) State two uses of soda ash.

(i) during making glass/lowering the melting point of mixture of sand/SiO2     from 1650oC and CaO from 2500oC  to around 1500oC

(ii) in softening hard water

(iii) in the manufacture of soapless detergents.

(iv) swimming pool “pH increaser”.

 

(f)The diagram below shows a simple ammonia soda tower used in manufacturing sodium carbonate .Use it to answer the questions that follow:

Substance A
Sodium hydrogen carbonate
Metal plates
Excess Carbon(IV)oxide
Raw materials
 

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           

(i)Name the raw materials needed in the above process

          -Ammonia

-Water

-Carbon(IV)oxide

-Limestone

-Brine/ Concentrated sodium chloride

 

(ii)Identify substance A

          Ammonium chloride /NH4Cl

(iii) Write the equation for the reaction taking place in:

I.Tower.

Chemical equation

CO2(g) + NaCl (aq) + H2O(l) + NH3(g) -> NaHCO3(s) + NH4Cl(aq)

 

  1. Production of excess carbon (IV)oxide.

Chemical equation

CaCO3 (s)    ->   CaO(s)   +    CO2(g)

 

III. The regeneration of ammonia

Chemical equation

Ca(OH)2 (aq) +2NH4Cl (aq)    ->  CaCl2(s)  +  2NH3(g)  +  H2O(l)

 

(iv)Give a reason for having the circular metal plates in the tower.

          -To slow the downward flow of brine.

-To increase the rate of dissolving of ammonia.

-To increase the surface area for dissolution

 

(v)Name the gases recycled in the process illustrated above.

          Ammonia gas , Carbon(IV)Oxide and Water.

 

  1. Describe how you would differentiate between carbon (IV)oxide and carbon(II)oxide using chemical method.

 

Method I

-Bubble both gases in lime water/Ca(OH)2

          -white precipitate is formed if the gas is carbon (IV) oxide

No white precipitate is formed if the gas is carbon (II) oxide

 Method II

          -ignite both gases

Carbon (IV) oxide does not burn/ignite

– Carbon (II) oxide burn with a blue non-sooty flame.

Method III

-Lower a burning splint into a gas containing each gas separately.

-burning splint is extinguished if the gas is carbon (IV) oxide

-burning splint is not extinguished if the gas is carbon (II) oxide.

3.Using Magnesium sulphate(VI)solution ,describe how you  can differentiate between a solution of sodium carbonate from a solution of sodium hydrogen carbonate

-Add Magnesium sulphate(VI) solution to separate portions of a solution of sodium carbonate and sodium hydrogen carbonate in separate test tubes

-White precipitate is formed in test tube containing sodium carbonate

-No white precipitate is formed in test tube containing sodium hydrogen carbonate.

Chemical equation 

Na2CO3 (aq) +MgSO4 (aq)    ->  Na2SO4 (aq)         +  MgCO3(s)

(white ppt)

Ionic equation 

CO32- (aq)    +        Mg2+ (aq)      ->              MgCO3(s)

(white ppt)

Chemical equation 

2NaHCO3 (aq) +MgSO4 (aq)    ->  Na2SO4 (aq)      +  Mg(HCO3)2 (aq)

(colourless solution)

 

  1. The diagram below shows a common charcoal burner .Assume the burning take place in a room with sufficient supply of air.

 

 

(a)Explain what happens around:

          (i)Layer A

Sufficient/excess air /oxygen enter through the air holes into the burner .It reacts with/oxidizes Carbon to carbon(IV)oxide

Chemical equation

          C(s)             +        O2(g)           ->       CO2 (g)

 

(ii)Layer B

Hot carbon(IV)oxide rises up and is reduced by more carbon/charcoal to carbon (II)oxide.

Chemical equation

          C(s)             +        CO2(g)         ->       2CO (g)

(ii)Layer C

 Hot carbon(II)oxide rises up and burns with a blue flame to be oxidized by the excess air to form carbon(IV)oxide.

2CO (g)       +        O2(g)                     ->       2CO2(g)

 

(b)State and explain what would happen if the burner is put in an enclosed room.

The hot poisonous /toxic carbon(II)oxide rising up will not be oxidized to Carbon(IV)oxide.

 

(c)Using a chemical test , describe how you would differentiate two unlabelled black solids suspected to be charcoal and copper(II)oxide.

 

Method I

-Burn/Ignite the two substances separately.

-Charcoal burns with a blue flame

– Copper(II)oxide does not burn

 

Method II

-Add dilute sulphuric(VI)acid/Nitric(V)acid/Hydrochloric acid separately.

-Charcoal does not dissolve.

– Copper(II)oxide dissolves to form a colourless solution.

  1. Excess Carbon(II)oxide was passed over heated copper(II)oxide as in the set up shown below for five minutes.

 

(a)State and explain the observations made in the combustion tube.

Observation

Colour change from black to brown

Explanation

Carbon (II)oxide reduces  black copper(II)oxide to brown copper metal itself oxidized to Carbon(IV)oxide.

Chemical equation

CO(g)                   + CuO (s)    ->         Cu(s)         +        CO2(g)

(black)                (brown)

 

(b) (i)Name the gas producing flame A

                    Carbon(II)oxide

 

(ii)Why should the gas be burnt?

                    It is toxic/poisonous

(iii)Write the chemical equation for the production of flame A

          2CO(g)                 +   O2(g)      ->       2CO2(g)

(c)State and explain what happens when carbon(IV)oxide is prepared using Barium carbonate and dilute sulphuric(VI)acid.

 

Reaction starts then stops after sometime producing small/little quantity of carbon(IV)oxide gas.

Barium carbonate react with dilute sulphuric(VI)acid to form insoluble Barium sulphate(VI) that cover/coat unreacted  Barium carbonate stopping further reaction to produce more Carbon(IV)oxide.

 

(d) Using dot () and cross(x) to represent electrons show the bonding in a molecule of :

          (i) Carbon(II)oxide

(ii) Carbon(IV)Oxide.

 

(e) Carbon (IV)oxide is an environmental pollutant of global concern. Explain.

          -It is a green house gas thus causes global warming.

-It dissolves in water to form acidic carbonic acid which causes “acid rain”

 

(f)Explain using chemical equation why lime water is used to test for the presence of Carbon (IV) oxide instead of sodium hydroxide.

 

Using lime water/calcium hydroxide:

– a visible white precipitate of calcium carbonate is formed that dissolves on  bubbling excess Carbon (IV) oxide gas

Chemical equation

Ca(OH)2(aq)    +    CO2 (g)     ->     CaCO3 (s)    +    H2O(l)

(white precipitate)

CaCO3 (aq)    +    H2O(l)  +    CO2 (g) ->     Ca(HCO3) 2 (aq)

Using sodium hydroxide:

No precipitate of sodium carbonate is formed Both sodium carbonate and sodium hydrogen carbonate are soluble salts/dissolves.

Chemical equation

2NaOH (aq)    +    CO2 (g)     ->     Na2CO3 (s)    +    H2O(l)

(No white precipitate)

Na2CO3 (s)    +    H2O(l)  +    CO2 (g)     ->     2NaHCO3 (s)

 

(g)Ethan-1,2-dioic acid and methanoic acid may be used to prepare small amount of carbon(II)oxide in a school laboratory.

(i) Explain the modification in the set up when using one over the other.

Before carbon(II)oxide is collected:

-when using methanoic acid, no concentrated sodium/potassium hydroxide is needed to absorb Carbon(IV)oxide.

-when using ethan-1,2-dioic acid, concentrated sodium/potassium hydroxide is needed to absorb Carbon(IV)oxide.

 

(ii)Write the equation for the reaction for the formation of carbon(II)oxide from:

I.Methanoic acid.

Chemical equation         HCOOH(aq)   ->  CO(g) + H2O(l)

 

  1. Ethan-1,2-dioic acid

Chemical equation         HOOCCOOH(aq) -> CO2(g)+CO(g)+H2O(l)

(h)Both carbon(II)oxide and carbon(IV)oxide affect the environment. Explain why carbon(II)oxide is more toxic/poisonous.

-Both gases are colourless,denser than water and odourless.

-Carbon(II)oxide is preferentially absorbed by human/mammalian haemoglobin when inhaled forming stable carboxyhaemoglobin instead of oxyhaemoglobin.This reduces the free haemoglobin in the blood leading to suffocation and quick death.Carbon(IV)oxide is a green house gas that increases global warming.

-Carbon(II)oxide is readily oxidized to carbon(IV)oxide

 

6.Study the flow chart below and use it to answer the questions that follow.

 

 

(a)Name:

          (i)the white precipitate A

                    Calcium carbonate

(ii) solution B

                    Calcium hydrogen carbonate

(iii) gas C

                    Carbon(IV)oxide

(iv) white residue B

                    Calcium oxide

          (v) solution D

                    Calcium hydroxide/lime water

 

(b)Write a balanced chemical equation for the reaction for the formation of:

          (i) the white precipitate A from solution D

Chemical equation

Ca(OH)2(aq)    +    CO2 (g)     ->     CaCO3 (s)    +    H2O(l)

 

(ii) the white precipitate A from solution B

Chemical equation

Ca(HCO3)2(aq)    ->     CO2 (g)     +    CaCO3 (s)    +    H2O(l)

 

(iii) solution B  from the white precipitate A

Chemical equation

CO2 (g)     +    CaCO3 (s)    +    H2O(l)   -> Ca(HCO3)2(aq)

 

(iv) white residue B from the white precipitate A

Chemical equation

CaCO3(s)    ->     CO2 (g)     +    CaO (s)

 

(iv) reaction of white residue B with water

Chemical equation

CaO (s)    +    H2O(l)   -> Ca(OH)2(aq)